Ait hah ray ar oe oe EEG fans Mey b) 4 ithe ‘ aye e rT hare) SON Wins CCA SL PPP OPAL NELLIE EY EID IY IS PIRI fen ‘ beet OR ore et me Fhoaaiye * Vay fy ey eats tae f ist : 7 . ty : * har: M ‘ . ne : a A ve Pe . oe , - ay , o# ’ 4 : ‘ : Oa . = a ’ » Poca ee : . ek - ’ * ae # fi tes vat ae Lahaihe . 5 : , sat , - is ac % Sis Pg 1 ‘ 2 * : q 4 ; 7 . : . : . . . toe a - . . 7 - : . . . Hi SRE WETS VN ayrte ore OEE useum of cae M Np (on Ss Y © i Lup. 1869 THE LIBRARY ae a is 4, rkty, Whine cr 7 Py : ‘Pulihieoal . 7 i) a P | , Mi | n4 [Ay T ’ t * 4 i a) i i Lon d ‘rt b Lon AVE nhs 9 Vu) Vi THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL EDITED BY MARY CYNTHIA DICKERSON VOLUME XV, I9I15 \ NEW YORK CITY Published from October to June, by THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY 1915 An illustrated magazine devoted to the advancement of Natural His- tory, the recording of scientific research, exploration and discovery, and the development of museum exhibition and museum influence in education. Contributors are men eminent in these fields, including the scientific staff, explorers and members of the American Museum FREE TO MEMBERS OF THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY PRINTED BY THE COSMOS PRESS CAMBRIDGE, MASS. 1915 CONTENTS OF VOLUME XV JANUARY TMP ALATIOLOMG aM all SACL. ofc sites ys occ a csca is Sle else ai sh is ys, aothste Wt etalobavelene ayes «ee sys ArtTHUR A. ALLEN Appreciation of Theodore Nicholas Gill............ 20... 0. cece eee eee eee FrepERIc A. Lucas ihe Makine of a Hur-Seal Census. ..52i32:¢5522502...2. 5226-008 GrEORGE ARCHIBALD CLARK HGR CO LITIOS HOS. Of G.CINTMOlLOR Yao caw. ove. ole ote le eke ie setae. eel send vote oes a evens ue tehedents c caiee L. P. Gratacap Mam MramMatizer CONSCEVatlOM sn ie cols ches aie s siuteta ol ekecc mine ee side coe ee oer WINTHROP PacKARD He O@row INCIAnESUn DANCE... Se le ok ciel Meise wie) chek eraund sie es winter ae Rosert H. Lowir Educational Motion Pictures in Natural History..................... Raymonp L. Ditmars FEBRUARY PATINA SO MO CT GHA ETA Zl ve Phe cds te ete cee ates: s+ cuore Santee e Seeseh ewes wrens reene THEODORE ROOSEVELT The Roosevelt-Rondon Scientific Expedition...................0.00eeeeee seus L. E. MiLuer Roosevelt’s Through the Brazilian Wilderness— A Review.........5....-020e cece J. A. ALLEN Guardinesthe Health of Armies) tia. ace. Woe coe epee tee se Gust eins oe C.-E. A. WINSLOW Home: Songs of the Lewa, Indians)... 5.26 is ee es ce es ee ee ea ee ee HERBERT J. SPINDEN Memories of Professor Albert S. Bickmore....:.............0 2 ee eaeecneveee L. P. GRavTAcaP Marcu TAO VEU EC TH AT steeds eee ne chia ee RMR Ole LEIS CREE reac deer eNOS Arc errar ican aC R ons. “ace i Seton ART est uma, Sart Reece INITIO UC ATI CLT ATI ATL COS pep e colies ic, Stn tite eietraglet scies ateriet cen wcstteyeuetnie: ettar cas) steestamhr ounce ahs Rosert H. Lowi1e Indian Dancesiin the SOUtHWEeSU: . o% duh cece cee oe ks hae ee oes eee ele HERBERT J. SPINDEN Thex@onversavion: Of JOH. IWIN ss acs 2 2s el qrayn's = ewe ee ee eae scale: a MELVILLE B. ANDERSON NVALHOS CeLANSSOM-in' (HE WATCUIC! 2, ec ceche cut cranes Gohe es Gosre cect eens Glee aye aye Burt M. McConne.u The Geographical Results of the Roosevelt-Rondon Expedition.............. W. L. G. JorrRG Daniel Giraud’ lot —-A- Biographical Sketch: =. 7.0424 2... asc tah. = 6 w= «+ waveneiaseususyorele. a teensueteveuens APRIL Portraits of Joon Burroughs: Naturalistiand Author... 2 cn os 6 3 cee oe ect isieten cit eesse cate alee e ears Euntineerher Atri cane UttalOt ety en qyencrs icles aes toe sient een aly ac alae aayial seen Caru E. AKELEY The ‘‘Toad Group” in the American Museum................... Mary Cynruita DIcKERSON Aquarelles of our Common Woodlands............-..... 0.2 cee e ee eeee WarrREN H. MILLER Birdepavhssand: Drinking BOOS, - 3-4-1. cise ct ite freee yee use wie tease © Ernest Haroutp BayNneEs Motionsbicture, Records/of Indians: . 4 . = Hersert Lane 379 Reproductions in Duotone of African Photographs..................2..00ceeeeeeenes opposite 388 Ancient O@ities: ol. iNew --MGxiCO: | 2c./052 acl ee eee ne ee tee Wore (2 stone N. C. NeEtson 389 Explorations in the Southwest by the American Museum....................-. CuarkK WIsSLER 395 AnimatsyorvBlown Glass, 2 crac cicne.s ce cis aie eR Neo etn clio ean ele fete a Herman O. MUELLER 399 The American Museum's Reptile Groups in Relation to High School Biology..Grorce W. Hunter 405 Hunting Deerin the Adirondacks: «3 < s2tse ie eee es so so cis ois bes 2 Roy CHapMAN ANDREWS 409 News from the ‘Crocker Land: Expedition 149 eceee ts = 2 3 2d oo ale we ese e ee a ane ote 3 oe 415 Beginnings of American wNiatural Historye. see eerie ee es ete ikea Cuar.Les R. Eastman 417 AValuable: New. bird Books, AvReviGWe- meres aoe bls co wie a seem ele T. GILBERT PEARSON 423 Fragments).of ‘Spider 7Wore sieges eines crepe er erence tac 5 Sorter as eet on cite A eee Frank E. Lutz 424 Corythosaurus, the New Duck-billed Dinosaur........ W. D. Mattruew and Barnum Brown 427 ILLUSTRATIONS African, Natives, insert opp. 292, covers (Oct.), (Dec.), 381-388, Insert opp. 388; Scenes, insert opp. 292 Akeley, Mrs. Carl E., 337 Andes, 368, 369, 370, 371 Armies, Diet of, 66, 67, 69, 70, 71 Arms and Armor, 356, 359, 360, 362 Bad lands, Cretaceous, 275, 276, 277, 278 Baynes, Ernest Harold, 422 Bird, baths, 176, 178, 181, 182, traits, 220, 223, 224, insert opp. 224, cover (May); Congo birds, 282-291 Buffalo, African, 152, 159, 160, 161 Burroughs, John, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150 Brazil, Animals of, 38-47, 65, back and front covers (Feb.) Brazil, Central, Map, 129 183, 184; Por- Caves, of Early Man, 236-247, back cover (May) Chapin, J. P., 204 Comet, a 1910, 215 Congo, birds, 282—291; Forest, 280, 283, 284; Grass country, 285; Natives of, 381-388, insert opp. 388, front cover (Dec.) Conservation, Dramatizing, 21 Deming, E. W., 91 Deer, Hunting, 409-414; Whitetailed, of Adiron- dacks, back cover (Dec.) Doubt, River of, 35, 36, 37, 63 Duck, Labrador, 136 Elephant Hunting on Mount Kenya, 322, 323, 325, 326, 327, 330, 333, 334, 335, 336, 338 Elliot, D. G., opp. 133, 134, 135 Fishes, Deep Sea, 248, 252, 253 Fuertes, Louis Agassiz, 205 Fur-seals, 12, 13, 15, 16, back and front covers (Jan.) Gemmology, Curiosities of, 18, opp. 20 Gill, Theodore Nicholas, 9 Glass, Blown, Animals of, 399-403 Goldwork, Ancient, 306, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 429 Great Auk, back cover (Mar.) Groups, Museum, 266-270, 342-347, 405, 408, 430 Hornaday, W. T., 202 iv Hygiene, Military, 66-71 Indian, dance costumes, 94; Crow, Sun-Dance, 23, 24; Dances, 95, 101, insert opp. 102; 103-115; cover (Mar.) Indians, Apache, 185, 186, 187; Hopi, 341, 345, 346; Nhambiquara, 62; Parecis, 56, 57, 59, 61; Pueblo, opp. 78; Taos, 78, insert opp. 718; Tewa, 73, 76, 77 Katydid, 26 Lang, Herbert, 203, 378 Macedonia, 293, 295, 296, 297 Mawson, Antarctic expedition, insert opp. 338, cover (Dec.) Mawson, Sir Douglas, 93 Muir, John, 116, 121 Natural History, 417-420 New Mexico, Ancient Cities of, 389-398 Early Illustrations, 348-355; Paraguay River, Along the, 48, 51, 52, 58 Planets, 211, 212, 213, 214, 216, 217, 218 Peary, R. E.. 92 Penguins, 206, 225, 227, 228, 229, 230, 231, 233, 235; 301-305; Penguin group, 430 Portuguese Man-of-war, 199 Putnam, F. W., 314 Red Deer River, Alberta, 279 Rhinoceros, African, 157, 318. Rondon, Colonel, 34, 43 Roosevelt, Theodore, 34. 35, 36, 38, 41, 43, 45, 46, 49, cover (Jan.) Santa Isabel, Paramo of, 2, 4, 5, 6,7 Stuart, R. L., 137 Taos, Mountains, 72, insert opp. 78 Taylor, W. S., 90 Telescope, Lowell Observatory, 208, 210 Toad group, back and front cover (April), 162, 164, 165, 166, insert opp. 166; 168-174, 405 Tsimshian, carved wood, 364 Tyrannosaurus 270, 273, 274, 276, back cover (Oct.) Wandorobo, Family of, 156; Guide, 158 Weismann, August, 188 INDEX OF VOLUME XV Names of contributors are set Accessions: Anatomy and Physiology, 32 Archeology, 263, 264 Geology, 85, 86, 88 Herpetology, 32, 264, 317 Mammalogy, 87, 144, 200. 320 Mineralogy, 32 Ornithology, 87, 144, 200 Public Health, 32, 144, 376 Vertebrate Paleontology, 32, 86, 373 AKeELEY, Cart E., Elephant Hunting on Mount Kenya, 322-328; Hunting the African Buf- falo, 151-161 Akeley, Carl E., 261, 276, 431 ALLEN, ArtHuR A., The Paramo of Santa Isabel, 3-8 ALLEN, J. A., Roosevelt’s Through the Brazilian Wilderness,— A Review, 64—65 American Association for Advancement of Science, 85, 86, 319 American Ethnological Society, 263 ANDERSON, MeEtyiLite B., The Conversation of John Muir, 116-121 Andes, Exploring the, 367-371 AnpDREws, Roy C., Hunting Deer in the Adiron- dacks, 404-414 Andrews, Roy C., 320, 375 Anthony, H. E., 83, 144, 200, 259 Antilles, Lesser, Volcanoes of, 254—255 Appointments, 144, 259, 319, 373 Aquarelles, Common Woodland, 167—175 Armies, Guarding Health of, 66-71 Armor, Arms and, 356-362; Riggs Collection of, 84 Astronomy, the Photograph in, 210-219 Audubon Societies, National Association of, 320 Audubon, John James, 31; Eliza M., 31 Baker, George F., 142 Ball, D. S., 259 BayYNEs, Ernest Haro tp, Bird Baths and Drink- ing Pools, 176-184 Baynes, E. H., 431 Bears, 258 Bell, J C., 31 Berkey, Charles P., 30, 197 Bickmore, Albert S., 29, 79-82 Bird Baths and Drinking Pools, 176—184 Bliss, William H., 143 Bourn, W. B., 319 Brazil, Central, Animals of, 34-47 Britton, N. L., 30 Brown, Barnum, Corythosaurus, the New Duck- billed Dinosaur, 427-428; Tyrannosaurus, the Largest Flesh-eating Animal that ever Lived, 271-279 Brown, Barnum, 86, 374 Bryant, W. L., 86 Buffalo, African, Hunting the, 151-161 Burroughs, John, 142, 196 Byerley, Frank M., 34, 144 Cary, William de la Montagne, 320 in small capitals Caves, European, and Early Man, 236-247 CuapPIin, J. P., Birds of the Congo, 280-292 Chapin, J. P., 148, 196, 431 CHAPMAN, FranK M., Louis Agassiz Fuertes — Painter of Bird Portraits, 220-224 Choate, J. A., 29, 142 Churchill, Mrs. William, 320 Clark, B. Preston, 428. CuLaRK, GEORGE ARCHIBALD, The Making of a Fur-seal Census, 12—17 Climate, Evolution of, 258 Collections: Colombian, 200; Congo, 143, 197; Mexican, 32; Panama, 259; Peruvian, 32, 142, Pampean, 432. Coles, Russell J., 31, 262 Congo, Birds of, 200—292; 379-388 Conkuin, E. G., Morgan’s Heredity A Review, 194 Conservation, to Dramatize, 21—22 Contents, Table of, 1, 33, 89, 145, 201, 265, 321, Se Corythosaurus, 427-428 Crampton, Henry E., 432 Crawford, M. D. C., 142 Crocker Land Expedition, 415-416 Curtis, Edward S., 84 Cuyler, Thomas De Witt, 142 Explorer's View of, and Sex, Dances, American Indian, 94—102; Indian, in the Southwest, 103-115; Somaikoli, 256—258 Dean, Basurorp, Evolution of Arms and Armor, 356-362 Dean, Bashford, 319 De Angulo, Jaime, 319 Deer, Hunting, 409-414 Dellenbaugh, F. S., Somaikoli Dance at Sichu- movi, 256—258 Deming, E. W., 84, 142, 261 Devilfish, 31 Dickerson, Mary Cyntuia, The Toad Group in the American Museum, 162—166 Dickerson, M. C., 374, 406 Dirmars, Raymonp L., Educational Pictures in Natural History, 26-28 Dodge, Cleveland H., 29, 142, 319 Dodo, 373 Douglas, James, 142 Douglas, R., 264 Motion Eastman, C. R., Beginnings of American Natural History, 348-355, 417-421 Education, Public, 83, 142, 143, 144, 196, 198, 261 Elephant, Hunting, 322-328 Elliot, Daniel Giraud, 142; Sketch of, 133-141 Emmons, GrorGE T., Tsimshian Stories in Carved Wood, 363-366 Eno, Amos F., 429 Exhibitions, 31, 32, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 197, 319, 320 Expeditions: Australasian-Antarctic, motion pic- tures, 373; Collins-Day South American, 29, 319; Colorado, 258; Crocker Land. 195— 433 Bibliographical 434 196; 415-416; Isthmus of Darien, 259; Roosevelt South American, 48-63; 128, 132, 260; Stefansson, 317, 339-341; Townsend ‘‘Albatross,’’ 376; Congo, 143, 196, 281, 379, 431 Farrand, Livingston, 261 Fisher, G. C., 375 Fishes, Deep Sea, 248-253 Ford, Henry, 142, 196 Fuertes, Louis A., 221—224 Fur-seal Census, Making of, 12—17 Garner, Richard L., 376 Gemmology, Curiosities of, 8-20 Gifts: 85, 86, 142, 143, 196, 259, 262, 264, 317, 320, 374, 428, 429 Gill, Theodore Nicholas, Appreciation of, 9-11 Glass, Blowing, 399-404 . Gopparp, Puiiny E., Motion Picture Records of Indians, 185-187 Goddard, Pliny E., 86, 261 Goeldi Museum, Para, 144, 260 Gold Art, Ancient, 306-313, 429 Goldfarb, A. J., 374 Granger, Walter, 86 Gratacap, L. P., The Curiosities of Gemmology, 18-20; Memories of Prof. Albert S. Bick- more, 79-82 Gratacap, L. P., 29, 375 Greety, A. W., The Stefansson Expedition of 1913-1915 Gregory, William K., 86 Ground-Sloth, 256 Groups, Museum, 87,143, 162—166, 200, 264, 320, 405-407, 431 Halter, Clarence R., 264 Harper, Francis, 144 Heredity and Sex, Morgan, Review of, 194 High School Biology, 405—407 Hill, Prentice B., 259, 432 Holder, C. F.. 374 Hornaday, William T., 260 Horticultural Society of New York, 374 Hovey, EpmuNnp Oris, Volcanoes of the Lesser Antilles, 254-255 Hovey, E. O., 83 Howe, Marshall A., 30 Hrdli¢ka, A., 198 Hubbard, Thomas H., 264 Hunter, G. W., Reptile and Amphibian Groups in relation to High School Biology, 405-407 Hussaxkor L., Fishes of the Deep Sea, 249-253 Hussakof, L., 86 Ichikawa, F. S., 31 Indians, 31, 84, 85, 88, 142, 143; American, Dances of, 94-102; Crow Sun dance, 23-25; Dances in Southwest, 103-115; Hopi, 342— 347; Motion picture records of, 185-187; Tewa, Home Songs of, 72-78 Iselin, Adrian, 142 Ivins, Mrs. William M., 320 Jennings, Herbert S., 431 Jewett, W. Kennon, 319 Job, Herbert K., 320 Jorre, W. L. G., Geographical Results of the Roosevelt-Rondon Expedition, 128-132 INDEX OF VOLUME XV Joline, Mrs. A. H., 375 JORDAN, Davin Starr, The Trail of War in Mace- donia, 293-300 Juilliard, A. D., 85, 317 Kligler, I. J., 86 Kroeber, A. L., 26, 41, 320 Kunz, George F., 86, 375, 432 Lane, Hersert, An Explorer’s View of the Congo, 379-388 Lang, Herbert, 259 Lange, Algot, 432 Lanier, Charles, 142 Laysan Island Group, 320 Lectures: 29, 31, 32, 83, 85, 142, 148, 144, 197, 375, 431 Leng, Charles W., 264 Lituiz, Frank R., Appreciation of August Weis- mann, Zodlogist, 189-193 Loans, 375 Longley, George C., 374 Lowett, Percivat, Oxygen and Water on Mars, 207-209 Lowir, Rosert A., American Indian Dances, 94— 101; The Crow Indian Sun Dance, 23-25 Lowie, R. H., 86, 262, 319, 376 Lucas, Freperic A., Appreciation of Theodore Nicholas Gill, 9-11 Lueas, Frederic A., 319 Luschan, Felix von, 29 Lutz, Franx E., Fragments of Spider Lore, 424— 426 Lutz, Frank E., 30, 32, 86, 259, 264, 375 Lydekker, Richard, 263 Macedonia, Trail of War in, 293-300 Mars, Oxygen and Water on, 206-209 Mather, Stephen Tyng, 319 Marruew, W. D., Corythosaurus, the New Duck- - billed Dinosaur, 427-428; Ground-Sloth from a Cave in Patagonia, 256 Matthew, W. D., 86, 258, 319 Mawson, Sir Douglas, 30, 83 Mayer, A. G., 259 MecConne.tu, Burt M., With Stefansson in the Arctic, 122-127 McCormick, Howard, 31, 200, 264 McGregor, J. Howard, 198 Mead, Charles W., 261 Members, 29, 83, 142, 198, 259, 372, 428 Men of the Old Stone Age, H. F. Osborn, 30, 429 Mendelian Heredity, Exhibit, 260 Merriam, John C., 320 Mexico, Antiquities of, Lord Kingsboro, 376 Miuter, L. E., Exploring a Spur of the Andes, 367-371; The Roosevelt-Rondon Expedition, 48-63 Miller, Leo E., 200 MiILuerR, WARREN H., Aquarelles of our Common Woodlands, 167-175 Mills, Ogden, 376 Miner, Roy W., 30, 87, 259 Morgan, J. P., 142 Moriori, Skull, 374 Morris, E. H., 258 Mosquito, Models of, 200 Motion-pictures, Educational, 26-28 Move .ter, H. O., Animals of Blown Glass, 399- 404 INDEX OF VOLUME XV Mueller, H. O., 259, 376 Muir, John, Conversation of, 116-121 Murie, James R., 264, 320 MoureHy Rosert Cusuman, The Penguins of South Georgia, 225-235; 301-305 Museum Notes, 29-32; 83-88; 142-144; 196— 200; 258-264; 317-320, 372-376, 428-432 Mutchler, A. J., 259, 375 National Academy of Sciences, 372, 431 Natural History, Beginnings of American, 348— 355; 417-421 Netson, N. C., Ancient Cities of New Mexico, 389-394; European Caves and Early Man, 236-247 Nelson, N. C., 30, 86, 258, 261, 320 New Mexico, Ancient Cities of, 389-398; Field work in, 30 New York Academy of Sciences, 30, 83, 144, 198, 200, 258, 261, 263, 374, 375, 432 New York Aquarium, 258 New York Botanical Garden, 317 Nichols, J. T., 30 Norton, Frederick G., 258 Operti, Albert, 143 Osborn, Henry Fairfield, 29, 30, 86, 142, 198, 319, 429 Osburn, Raymond C., 259, 263, 376, 428 Osgood, Wilfred H., 144 PacKaRpD, WinTHROP, To Dramatize Conserva- tion, 21-22 Pacoval, Island, 432 Pampean, collection, Cope, 432 Panama-Pacific Exposition, 83, 262, 264, 319 Pan-American, Congress, 372 Pearson, T. Gitpert, A Valuable New Bird Book, 423 Peary, Robert E., 143, 198 Penguins, South Georgia, 225-235; 301-305 Penguin group, 431 Percy, Lord William, 200 Peruvian, Collections, 32, 142; Metal industries, 262 Porto Rico Survey, 200, 259, 264, 375, 432 Portuguese Man-of-war, 198 Pottery, prehistoric, 432 Publications, Museum, 32, 142, 262, 264 Putnam, Frederic Ward, 314-317 Radin, Paul, 261 435 Reeds, Chester A., 86, 259, 432 Rivers, W. H. R., 262 Roosfvevtt, THroporre, Animals of Central Brazil, 34-47 Roosevelt, Theodore, 29 Santa Isabel, Paramo of, 3-8 Seton, Ernest Thompson, 32 SHERWOOD, GrorGE H., Note on the Crocker Land Expedition Ship, 195-196 Skinner, A., 85, 86, 88, 202 Skinner, M. P., 432 SurpHeR, E. C., The Photograph in Astronomy, 211-219 Snethlage, Emilie, 144, 260 Southwestern Anthropological Society, 261 Spider Lore, 424—426 SprinpEN, Herspert J., Ancient Gold Art in the New World, 307-313; Home Songs of the Tewa Indians, 72-78; Indian Dances in the Southwest, 103-115 Spinden, Herbert J., 86 Stead, David G., 144 Stefansson, Vilhjalmur, 85, 317; with, 122-127 Storage System, 261 In the Arctic Taxidermy, new process in, 431 Taylor, Will S., 143, 261 Toad Group, 162-166, 405-407 Torre, Carlos de la, 86 Trustees, 30, 142 Tsimshian, Stories, 363-366 Vassar, Anniversary, 374 Watson, F. A., 263 Weismann, August. Appreciation of, 188-193 Whale, Sei, 376 Wild Bird Guests, Baynes, — Review of, 423 Wild Life, Protection fund, 260 Wille, N., 30 Winstow, C.-E. A., Guarding the Health of Armies, 66-71 Winslow, C.-E. A., 86, 263, 374 Wisster, Criark, Explorations in the Southwest by the American Museum, 395-398: Fred- eric Ward Putnam, 1839-1915, 314-317; In the Home of the Hopi Indian, 342-347 Wissler, Clark, 86, 320, 432 Young, Mahroni, 31, 200 TAGVS! VLINVS ‘AA TIVA OWV'Vd THe American Museum JourNAL VoLuME XV JANUARY, 1915 NuMBER 1 THE PARAMO OF SANTA ISABEL By Arthur A. Allen Photographs by the Author and by L. E. Miller of a few years upon my experi- ence in the Andes of Colombia, the days spent on the paramos recur most vividly to my mind. The debili- tating weeks in the steaming coastal forests with their parasites and fevers, the long hours in the dugout canoes beneath the blazing vertical sun, the dust of the valley trails, and the lomas with their clouds of locusts pass from me. I forget the interminable silence of the Cloud Forest, its soaking moss and epi- phytes, but as often as memory recurs, comes to me the austere splendor of those stretches of rock and sky, of ridge piled upon ridge, backed by a line of snow and gray cloud and bathed in an atmosphere cool and clean. It was a land of peculiar fascination tome. I recall how we toiled across the paramo of the Valle de Pappas and though at this time so lashed by wind and rain that the trail was visible hardly fifty paces ahead, it still had lost none of its charm. Peaceful as it is during its few months of summer, the Andean paramo is a land of sleet and storm during the rest of the year; indeed | OOKING through the perspective Note.— Dr. Arthur A. Allen, a member of the biological staff of Cornell University, was con- nected with the Museum’s expedition in Colombia, from August, 1911 to May, 1912. During this period, in codperation with Mr. Leo E. Miller, he made important collections in the vicinity of the Quindio Trail, and in the little-known region between Popayan and the Valle de Pappas, and San Agustin; also in the Cauca and Atrato val- leys. In the latter region he contracted a severe type of malarial fever which necessitated his re- turn to the United States. many of the trails even at the equator are closed, and man and beast that attempt to cross are frozen to death. The paramo of Santa Isabel lies about two days’ journey from Salento, the largest town on the Quindio trail which crosses the central Andes, and on clear days, especially toward dusk, can be seen at several points rising above the forest-capped ridges to an _ altitude between sixteen and seventeen thousand feet. Beyond it and a little to the east lies the paramo of Ruis, and most magni- ficent of all, Nevada del Tolima, with its crown of crystal snow gleaming in the rays of the setting sun. Many travelers pass over the trail without ever a glimpse of the snows to the north, seeing only the banks of clouds that obscure even the tops of the moss-forest and hide all but the near distance. The sight of the snows is so unusual even to the natives that with the first lifting of the clouds groups of travelers assemble at the open spots along the trail and discuss the coming of winter. So it was in the little town of Salento where we happened to be stopping. They manifested great concern over our proposed trip and told us that we must hasten if we would camp on the paramo before the storms set in, when life there would be impossible. So one morning in early September we slung our packs and started for the paramo of Santa Isabel. From Salento the trail to the paramo leads first down into the Boquia 3 Santa Isabel from the Quindio Trail— Cloud Forest in the foreground has more tropical luxuri- ance than the lowland jungles, the trees being burdened with giant vines and they in turn laden with moss and fern and orchid. timber line at about 12,500 feet Valley and then follows the river’s meandering course through groves of splendid palms nearly to its source, when it turns abruptly and begins a steep ascent of the mountain side. The palm trees, in scattered groves, continue to nearly nine thousand feet, where the trail begins to zigzag through some _half- cleared country, where the trees have been felled and burned over, and where in be- tween the charred stumps, a few handfuls of wheat have been planted and now wave a golden brown against the black. And next the Cloud Forest! It is seldom that the traveler’s anticipation of any much heralded natural wonder is realized when he is brought face to face with it. Usually he feels a tinge of dis- appointment and follows it by a close scrutiny of the object before him in search of the grandeur depicted, but not so with the Cloud Forest. It surpasses one’s dreams of tropical luxuriance. It is here rather than in the lowland jungles that nature outdoes herself and crowds every available inch with moss and fern and orchid. 4 Here every twig is a garden Cloud Forest extends up the mountain side from 9000 feet to and the moss-laden branches so gigantic that they throw more shade than the leaves of the trees themselves. Giant vines hang to the ground from the hori- zontal branches of the larger trees and in turn are so heavily laden with moss and epiphytes that they form an almost solid wall and present the appearance of a hollow tree trunk fifteen or twenty feet One should pass through this forest during the rainy season to form a true conception of its richness, in diameter. although even during the dryest months the variety and abundance of plant life covering every trunk and branch seem beyond belief. Quite as impressive as is its luxuriance, is its great silence. One walks for hours along its rank trails, sometimes sinking knee-deep in the wet forest mold, and hears no sound. A slight tsip or a buzz of wings in the tree top may tell of the presence of a honey creeper or humming bird, or the weird call of a tinamou or an ant thrush from the dark recesses may startle one, only to leave him the more impressed by the great breathless silence. THE PARAMO OF The trail through this forest was new and while perhaps not quite as steep as the old Indian trail, was very difficult in places. Many and led our horses, where the soft mold of the trail seemed insecure and where times we dismounted even a slight floundering of the animals might have pitched us down the moun- tain side. Even with such care one of the mules floundered and before we SANTA ISABEL 5 change occurs. The trees become dwarfed, their leaves small and thick, heavily chitinized or covered with thick down, and remind one of the vegetation about. our northern bogs with their Andromeda and Labrador tea. Here too the ground in places is covered with a dense mat of sphagnum, dotted with dwarfed blueberries and cranberries and similar plants which remind one of home. Looking back at timber line— We had left the tropics of Cloud Forest and come into a tem- perate region, almost on the equator but more than 12,500 feet above the sea. shows clouds rolling in at the left could get to his assistance was rolling and over down the mountain. Fortunately it was still in the forest and one of his packs became wedged in the roots of a tree, holding him until we could get to his release. This great forest occasionally inter- over rupted by clearings, continues for many hours’ travel up the mountain from 9000 to about 12,500 feet, where a sudden The photograph A cool breeze greets the traveler, sky appears in place of the great dome of green, and suddenly he steps out upon the open paramo. He has been travel- ing through the densest of forests, seeing but a few hundred paces along the trail and only a few rods into the vegetation on either side; he has grown near-sighted, and even the smallest contours of the landscape have been concealed by the 6 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL dense forest cover. Suddenly there is thrown before his vision a whole world of mountains. As far as he can see in all directions save behind him, ridge piles upon ridge in never-ending series, until they fuse in one mighty crest which pierces the clouds with its snow-capped crown. This is the paramo of Santa Isabel. At this point we dismounted and led our horses along the narrow ridge, for they were not used to the mountains. We looked in vain for the jagged peaks that are so characteristic of our northern On the paramo of Santa Isabel—The ground is undermined with numerous small rivulets and the strange mullein-like frailejons grow everywhere even up to the edge of the snow, sometimes reaching a height of ten feet in sheltered places THE PARAMO OF SANTA ISABEL 7 frost-made mountains. Here even the vertical cliffs did not seem entirely with- out vegetation and as far as we could see with binoculars the brown sedges and the gray frailejons covered the rocks even up to the very edge of the snow. Beneath our feet the soil was springy and as we afterwards found, undermined with in- numerable small rivulets making their way to the stream below, which we could hear even at this distance as it dashed over the boulders and occasionally gleamed in the sun- light. All about us the strange mullein- like frazlejons, as the natives call them, (Espeletia — grandi- flora Humb. and Bonpl.), stood up on their pedestals, ten or even fifteen feet .1n height in sheltered spots; down among _ the sedges were many lesser plants similar to our North Ameri- can species: gen- tians, composites, a hoary lupine, a but- tercup, a yellow sor- rel, almost identical with those of the United States. Birds also, several of which proved to be new to science, were numerous, but all were of dull colors and reminded one in their habits of the open country birds of northern United States. A goldfinch hovered about the unicolor). frailejons, a gray flycatcher ran along the ground or mounted into the air much like our northern horned larks, an oven- bird flew up ahead of us resembling a meadowlark, a marsh wren scolded from the rank sedges, and almost from under our horses’ hoofs, one of the large Andean snipes sprang into the air with a charac- teristic bleat and went zigzaging away. On a small lake which we now had come to, barren except for a few alge, rode In the shadow of a frailejon — The nest is made entirely from the down of the frailejon leaves and belongs to a slate-colored finch (Pahrygilus On the paramo the leaves of all plants are either small and horny or heavily covered with down 8 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL an Andean teal, surprisingly lke our northern gadwall. And so the story goes on. Here almost on the equator but 13,000 feet above the level of the sea, we had left the strangeness of the tropics and come upon a land that was strikingly like our own. We decided to pitch camp at timber line where there would be wood for cook- ing and so made our way back down the valley to the edge of the trees where we had some difficulty in finding a dry level spot for the tent. Here we studied and collected for about a week, working up the ridges to 15,000 feet but finding greater abundance of bird life along the dashing stream that flowed cown the valley in which we were camped. There was not however, a great variety of birds and but few species were really common. Mammals too, were scarce, a few tracks of deer and tapir along the edge of the forest and numerous runways of the rabbits in the rank sedges, being almost the only visible signs. Even the smaller rats and mice were scarce, and few came to our traps. Each night the temperature dropped to freezing, each noon the temperature rose to about 75 degrees Fahrenheit, and each afternoon great white clouds rolled up from the forests below and obscured the landscape. One dared not venture far from camp after three o’clock, for the great mass of anastomosing ridges would easily confuse even the traveler with a compass. In fact one day when return- ing from ap exploring trip to the snow line, the clouds rolled up while we were still four or five miles from camp. Ridge after ridge disappeared from sight until soon we could see only the rocks close about us. There was no trail to follow and we were soon unable to recognize any of the features of the landscape that were still visible. For two hours we stumbled along trying to keep track of the number of ridges as we passed them and trying to recall the number passed during the morning, until finally we gave up hope of return that night. Looking about for a spot somewhat sheltered from the raw winds which had already begun to sweep down from the snows above us, a ray of light very far to the left attracted our at- tention and we looked just in time to see the rift in the clouds close again. We knew it must have been reflected from the small lake at the head of the valley in which we were camped and realized that we had been traveling at least an hour in exactly the wrong direction. It was not reluctantly therefore, that we abandoned the thought of beds of frailejons and made straight for our little lake. In terrible thirst and fatigue and after many collapses from the great altitude, we were able at last to perceive its dim silver outline, and we knew we were little more than a mile from camp. This was our first warning to leave the paramo. In a few weeks these ridges would be covered with snow and swept by gales. The clouds and fog would not part for days and life would be unendur- able — although even then one would feel the more deeply the grandeur of the elements, and with the mountain tops shut from view, would still know their awe-inspiring presence. With this warning then, we prepared to leave the paramo. AN APPRECIATION OF THEODORE NICHOLAS GILL By Frederic A. Lucas HERE died in Washington on September 25, 1914, the man who may well be termed the Nestor of American zodlogists, not per- haps so much from the fact that he chanced to be a year or so older than his from his extraordinary compeers, as grasp of vari- ous branches of zodlogi- eal science. Theodore Nicholas Gill vas born in New York, March 21, 1837. He passed part of his early life in Brook- lyn, and we infer from his “Reminis- cences of the Apprentice’s nib r ar yo)” that this an- eestor of the Brooklyn In- stitute of Arts and Sciences had much to do with turn- ing his atten- tion from law toward natu- He first became familiar with the Institute that was to be, in 1854, when he was seventeen, and as long as he remained in Brooklyn, made use of its library and collections and was a regular attendant at the meetings of the Lyceum of Natural History, being for a part of the time its secretary. ral history. The fact that shells were the objects most readily obtained and preserved by amateurs, and the accessibility of the fine ichthyological library of Mr. J. Carson Breevoort, seem to have been the factors that directed his attention to conchology and ichthyology, although, as noted far- ther on, other factors came into play The influence of later. Baird and of the Smithso- nian Institu- tion led him to Washing- ton in 1868, where for a time he was librarian — of the Smithso- nian Institu- Eom fasnd, later, assist- ant librarian of the Library of Congress. For one who achieved such impor- tant results he did com- paratively little original work, from a natural indolence of body which led him to take life easily, to shun the dissecting table, to relegate the labor of preparation to others and to utilize their work, even if he might not accept their conclusions, for he possessed to an unusual extent the ability to make use of the work of others, not by claiming it 9 10 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL as his own, but by embodying it as one of many items in some important gen- eralization. If one may so put it, he took the bricks of information turned out by many workers and combined them into an edifice of knowledge. As might perhaps be expected from one of his temperament, he was a “closet”’ rather than a “field” naturalist, al- though in his earlier days he visited the West Indies in the interests of Mr. D. Jackson Steward, whose shells! form part of the collections of the American Museum of Natural History. For many years his favorite morning haunt was the library of the United States National Museum, and later, the periodical room in the Smithsonian, where he read the standard scientific journals as soon as they were received, and noted the most recent discoveries in those lines in which he was especially interested. This extensive reading, coupled with a wonderfully retentive memory, made him an extraordinary source of information. He was a verita- ble storehouse of zoGlogical facts, which were freely placed at the disposal of anyone who really wished them. As a matter of detail, he probably had at his tongue’s end more scientific names of animals than any other living man — more probably than anyone will ever know again. This wide knowledge ren- dered easy such work as the technical parts of the zodlogical portion of the Century and Standard dictionaries. In the first-named work he was associated with Dr. Coues, and more than once sorely tried the patience of his colleague by his procrastinating habits,” for while Coues was a fluent talker and ready writer, he was also a hard and syste- 1 Gill’s second published paper was on Cyprea notata, now considered a synonym of C. macula, from a specimen in the collection of D. W. Fergu- son, which is now in the collection of Columbia University. matic worker, as his many books and various papers bear witness. It is rather interesting to note that these two men, Coues and Gill, should have been so closely associated, for Coues probably did more than any other one man to popularize the study of birds and mam- mals, and Gill, though largely indirectly, did much to systematize and stabilize the technical side. As an example of Gill’s ultra-technical style may be cited his definition of Giraffide: A family of ruminant artiodactyl mam- mals, having the placenta polycotyledonary, the stomach quadripartite with developed psalterium, the cervical vertebree much elongated, the dorso-lumbars declivous back- wards and horns present only as frontal apophyses covered with integument. Coues read this and turning to Gill said, “That is n’t English, its Choctaw.” “No,” said Gill, “it is an exact defini- tion of the family.” For many years, more than twenty to the writer’s knowledge, Gill occupied a room on the west side of the big north tower of the Smithsonian, and for a long time Coues had an office on the opposite side, the two opening into a still larger intercommunicating room. Dr. Gill’s room like the girl’s workbasket, had a “place for everything and everything in it,’’— desk, chairs, shelves, floor — especially floor — were covered, aside from dust, with a miscellaneous collec- tion of books, pamphlets, old letters, skulls, skeletons and odds and ends of wearing apparel. During the summer this deposit, like a lava stream, flowed 2The recent article in Science is in error in calling Dr. Gill the author of the zodlogical text of the Century Dictionary: Dr. Coues was the editor and wrote the major part of the definitions and chose the larger number of the illustrations; Dr. Gill was the scientific adviser, so to speak, and Coues relied largely upon him for accurate and technical information. Gill wrote a large share of the technical definitions, particularly those of the families and genera of mammals and fishes. — The Author. AN APPRECIATION OF THEODORE NICHOLAS GILL 11 slowly eastward until by fall all three rooms were filled and Dr. Gill was work- ing at Coues’s desk. Here and in the Museum library Dr. Gill’s papers were mainly prepared, for even in his later days he rarely made use of a stenog- rapher. Gill’s astonishing knowledge of names and his exactness in matters of nomenclature made him extremely help- ful in the bestowal of names upon new species, and it was customary for one about to christen some newly discovered beast, bird or fish to ask him if the proposed name had been previously used, a procedure that saved much time and many synonyms. He excelled in tracing the history of some much de- scribed species through the mazes of literature in which it had wandered, and delighted to show that what Aristotle is supposed to have called some animal was really quite a different creature. He was the first president of the Biological Society of Washington and hence a life member of the council; he was also an almost constant attendant at its meetings. As the present special- ization of societies had not even begun, the members of this society represented many branches of science and the papers presented covered a remarkably wide range of subjects, varying from technical to popular, and from Protozoa to Pri- mates. It mattered not what paper was presented, it came to be expected that if Dr. Gill did not lead the discussion, he would participate in it, and when at the close of some paper the hearers turned expectantly toward Dr. Gill, they were rarely disappointed. He was a severe, one might almost say merciless critic, not from any particular personal animus, but because he expected an exact state- ment of fact. While the majority of Gill’s papers were systematic, yet on occasion he could write most entertainingly, and not only did he have a vast fund of informa- tion on which to draw, but the reader had the satisfaction of feeling that he could rely upon what he was being told. His contributions to zodgeography were numerous also and the subject was dealt with in at least two of his presidential addresses. Among the more important deductions that he made were the recognition of the claim of the Elasmobranchs to a position of the “highest” rank and of the purely artificial nature of the groups Carinatie and Ratite in birds. He accurately defined and established on a sound structural basis seven orders of fishes, to say nothing of genera, and was prac- tically the first to suggest that the curious little fishes termed Leptocephalus were larval forms of eels. As an example of the estimation in which the work of Dr. Gill was held by fellow scientists, one cannot do better than to quote an extract from David Starr Jordan’s Guide to the Study of Fishes read by Dr. Smith at the Testi- monial Dinner to Dr. Gill: Theodore Nicholas Gill is the keenest interpreter of taxonomic facts yet known in the history of ichthyology. He is the author of a vast number of papers, the first bearing date of 1858, touching almost every group and almost every phase of relation among fishes. His numerous suggestions as to classification have been usually accepted in time by other authors, and no one has had a clearer perception than he of the necessity of orderly methods in nomenclature. And Dr. Jordan further wrote: In my scientific work I have owed more to the critical ability of Dr. Gill and his clear insight in matters of classification and ge- neric relations than to any other man whatso- ever. In all the long history of science there has been no one who has had this unique quality of being able to see through unim- portant things to the real heart in biological classification as has Dr. Gill. surjunos dnd 10j Apror pur syjvos 1~npe Jo poavayo AdOYyoOI YOvoeq B SMOYS oAOGR Ydeis0}0Yd oY, ONILNNOO YOsS AGVAY AYANOOY PURIST Ineq 9S ‘IIH Uosurpoyny, “pogunod odtem sdnd ¢7¢‘QT yor WOdJ Vole ATOYOOI Posse B UMOYS SI MOJOq Ydeasojoyd oy uy AY¥4AXOOY 1WW4S-yHN4A THE MAKING OF A FUR-SEAL CENSUS By George Archibald Clark {Of Leland Stanford University] HE really important practical problem in connection with the fur-seal herd of the Pribilof Islands has always been that of enumera- tion. How many animals are there? Is the herd increasing or diminishing? What is the rate either way? What number of young males can safely be taken each year? What breeding — re- serve should be set aside? These ques- tions can be answered _ ef- fectively only by a more or less exact cen- sus of the herd. In making a fur-seal census you cannot, as in the case of human com- munities, go to the head of the household. The harem master is not an approacha- ble being and will not discuss family affairs with you. You go within his circle, if at all, at your peril. You can stand on the neighbor- ing cliffs and looking down upon his household observe many things of in- terest; but this will not tell you whether all his wives are at home or how many children he has. The children hide in the crevices of the rocks and most of the mothers are away at sea feeding. It is easy to count the harem masters. Each one is big and aggressive and is always at home. As you come into his range of vision he rises up to greet you like a bristling question mark. The fur-seal families can therefore be easily Itis possible to count the individual fe- males on many Sega ibe ned breeding areas, and this fact has been uti- lized at times counted. even to, gain an approximate enumeration, an average being thus obtained which could be applied to breeding areas where counts of individuals harem were impossi- ble. The fur-seal census how- ever, does not rest finally with the adult animals; it rests in the young of the season, or the fur-seal pups. Although destined to spend most of its life in the water and to brave all kinds of weather, the fur-seal pup in the beginning is timid of the water and keeps away from it dur- ing the first month or six weeks of its life. 13 Bull fur seal, Gorbatch Rookery, St. Paul Island 14 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL There is a time therefore in each breed- ing season when all of the pups are absolutely within reach; and as there is a mother for each pup, a count of the pups is in effect an enumeration of the mothers — the breeding females — the all-important element in the herd. By the first of August each season, practically all of the fur-seal pups are born. About this time also the majority of the harem masters, who have fasted since their arrival in May, have with- drawn from the rookeries to feed at sea. The mother seal, while she will defend her pup of a few hours old with her life, pays no attention to it when it is a week or more old, betaking herself promptly to the sea when disturbed and leaving the pup to shift for itself. A very little urging therefore suffices to clear the rookeries of the older animals, leaving the young to be dealt with by themselves. The period is a limited one because when the fur-seal pups begin to take to the water the transition from a land animal to a water animal is very sudden and after the pups gain command of themselves in the water they take to it instantly when disturbed. There is however, a period of about ten days in early August when the pups can be con- trolled and counted. The fur-seal rookeries occupy about eight miles of shore front, generally in a narrow band twenty to fifty feet in width. At certain points there are massed areas. Each form of breeding ground has its own problems in the counting. The narrow beaches have holes and crevices among the rocks where the little animals hide. On the massed areas they can be more readily controlled, but there is danger of crowding and smothering. The difficulties in neither case are seri- ous and call merely for care and experi- ence in dealing with them. On the narrow beach portions, the process of counting is carried out by two persons, one passing along the sea- ward side of the rookery, the other on the landward side. Coming together they cut off a small group of twenty-five to one hundred pups and force them to run back along the beach twenty to fifty yards. These pups represent vary- ing ages and degrees of strength since they are born at different dates between the twelfth of June and the first of August and they therefore naturally line out in order of capacity to travel and this line can be readily counted. The process is like that of the counting of sheep as they pass through a narrow gate. Group by group the pups of a given rookery are counted. Between the pas- sage of the separate pods, or groups, the openings in the rocks are searched for hidden animals. Careful search is also made for the dead, a necessary part of the enumeration. The services of na- tive helpers who, preliminary to the work of counting have driven off the adult animals, are utilized at all times to keep the pods of counted animals from mingling with those not counted. Where massed groups occur they are rounded up and held loosely on some flat surface, a native guard being posted about, except at one point from which the animals are allowed to run off. These departing pups again travel readily in lines which can be counted by two’s and three’s and four’s. If tendency to stampede develops, a guard is thrown across the front and a new opening at some other point is estab- lished. By the above process, repeated and varied as conditions demanded, in a period of four hours, approximately eleven thousand fur-seal pups were handled and counted from the massed breeding ground under Hutchinson Hill on St. Paul Island in July, 1918. One of the accompanying photographs illus- A general rookery view from the cliffs, showing contrast between males and females by which harems can be counted. The young seals hide in the crevices of rocks and a large number of the mothers may be away at sea feeding, but it is easy to count the harem masters who are big and aggressive and are always at home. An approximate average of the females in a harem must often be applied to packed breeding areas where the bulls alone are conspicuous and individual enumeration impossible The process of counting fur-seal pups in the massed area on Hutchinson Hill, July, 1913. Note in the background of the photograph the long line of pups which are being counted as they file past. Fur-seal pups are easily counted only during a period of some ten days in early August. This is after they are a week or so old and the mothers no longer defend their young but depart leaving them to shift for themselves, and before they have learned to take care of themselves — in which later condi- tion of course they take to the water as soon as approached ; 15 9T ONILNNOOD NI GAIGNVH SONI SdAd AO GOd G3SSVW V €16T ‘AINE ‘AIOYOOY Ulpedez oy} Jo spros my WAYVH SIH DSNIGYVYNS THE MAKING OF A FUR-SEAL CENSUS wi trates the operation of counting and the following is a record of the pods as run off: 152, 108, 146, 54, 128, 152, 116, 40, 152, 68, 200, 78, 96, 150, 234, 192, 44, 52, 56, 122, 144, 23, 83, 110, 66, 150, 232, 98, 10, 102, 120, 53, 119, 106, 118, 14, 56, 62, 58, 88, 91, 68, 21, 61, 42, 110, 67, 72, 68, 88, 90, 66, 48, 20, 61, 58, 88, 50, 80, 168, 14, 68, 37, 68, 116, 82, 68, 33, 128, 41, 44, 15, 25, 54, 134, 243, 54, 90, 42; 116, 75, 120, 100, 57, 36, 17, 116, 44, 36, 50, 79, 88, 68, 115, 69, 118, 153, 122, 56, 33, 55, 48, 70, 124; 174, 63, 180, 146, 14, 73, 146, 84, 173, 235, 129, 52, 25, 26, 63, 102. .Total, 10,576. It was by this process of counting, applied day by day to the rookeries in 1912, that the first full count of fur-seal pups was made, the number being 81,984. A repetition of the process in 1913 gave a total of 92,269. The differ- ence, approximately twelve and one- half per cent, marks the rate of increase in the herd between the two seascns, the first seasons for thirty-five years in which the fur-seal herd was free from the drain of pelagic sealing [suspended by treaty of July 7, 1911], with its destruc- tion of mother seals and their young. These three elements—the adult males, the adult females, and the young of the season — constitute the important features of the fur-seal census. They were thus fixed by actual count. There remain certain other animals in the herd which cannot be counted. These are the two and_ one-year-old females and the young males of four years and under. They come and go irregularly, some of them spending very little time on land. The annual rate of increase in the herd, established by the counts of 1912 and 1913, enables us to estimate very closely the number of young three-year-old females on which it depends. The sexes are subject to hike vicissitudes and from the approxi- mately equal birthrate of the sexes a like number of three-year-old males The two- year animals can be closely judged from these, and the yearlings, from births of the preceding year, diminished by the losses which experience shows the ani- mals to suffer in the first migration. Putting these various estimates to- gether and uniting them the counted animals we have the following may be assumed to survive. with total for the fur-seal herd in the season of 1913: Breeding males 1,403 Reserve males 2,364 Breeding females Po tor ar ee HO 209 Young of the season 92,269 Three-year-old males 10,000 Two-year-olds . 30,000 Yearlings 40,000 Total . 268,305 This census affords to the government as accurate a knowledge of the status of its fur-seal herd as, for example, the average cattleman has of the animals on his range. The herd will now grow steadily in the future and in due time as many animals may be expected in the herd as it formerly showed, between two and three millions. With this growth, count- ing of all the pups cannot long be con- tinued. The task will become too great. It can however, be continued on certain limited areas and the balance of the herd judged by these. Certain valuable averages have been obtained — for the individual rookeries, for each of the islands, and for the herd as a whole. It will always be possible to get a rea- sonably accurate count of the breeding families. To this the known averages of harem sizes in 1912 and 1913 can be applied with a result sufficiently exact for all practical purposes. MOSS AGATE MOCHA STONES, HINDOOSTAN Specimens from the Morgan Collection of Precious Stones in the American Museum. Illustration from The Curious Lore of Precious Stones, by George Frederick Kunz, Ph.D., D.Sc. Copyrighted 1913, by J. B. Lippincott Company, Publishers, Philadelphia 18 THE CURIOSITIES OF GEMMOLOGY A REVIEW OF A RECENT BOOK BY GEORGE FREDERIC KUNZ ON SUPERSTI- TIONS AND MEANINGS ATTACHED TO PRECIOUS STONES L. P. Gratacap These metaphysics of magicians, And necromantic books are heavenly. Lines, circles, scenes, letters, and characters: O what a world of profit and delight Of power, honour, and omnipotence, Is promised to the studious artizan. Tragical History of Doctor Faustus. HE pages of a recent book! by Dr. in George Frederick Kunz, hono- rary curator of gems at the American Museum, will be turned over by the fascinated reader with, we ima- gine, the most interesting commixture of feelings, an interfusion of wonder, amuse- ment and_half-credulous assent, of admiration and curiosity. He will feel admiration at the art and discernment, the resources and adequacy of the author, and curiosity as to the origin or real derivation of such strange pre- dispositions, hallucinations and_ ultra- romantic traditions and fancies, regard- ing these “mute insensate things.” Certainly the traditions and fancies are not unfamiliar. In any desultory read- ing they have been encountered by every- one — not forgetting indeed the Wilkie Collins story of boyhood, The Moon Stone, but here through almost four hundred pages of anecdote, quotation, description and allusion, reénforced by beautiful figures and plates, the effect is bewildering. Why these attributes of miraculous power? Why the association of precious stones with religious beliefs, why the mystic influences credited to birthstones, the extra-terrestrial stations assigned to gems in the zodiac, and their 1THE Curious Lore or Precious STONEs. By George Frederick Kunz. Philadelphia and London: J. B. Lippincott Company, 1913. ascription to the planets — with the more contemporaneous touch of occultism when we read of the prophetic powers of crystal balls, their magical landscapes and portents? Such questions are surely not answered in Dr. Kunz’s work, and indeed a sowp¢on of dissatisfaction arises when we think that we discover in the learned writer, a poetic acquiescence in these ascriptions, as perhaps becomes the antiquarian, the virtuoso, the con- noisseur, and above all the philosophic historian. But if reasons are not fully discussed, albeit many passages assume some seri- ousness in that respect, the display of facts, the careful analysis of reports, and the evidence of large research, the clearness and charm of narration, with the remarkable elegance of illustration, are all there. The frontispiece of the book is a su- perbly colored plate of cut and polished gem-stones, many from the Morgan- Tiffany collection in the Museum. This is followed by three other fine examples of color reproduction: Cardinal Farley’s ring, gems from the Morgan-Tiffany collection, and the dazzling cross, at- tached as pendant to the crown of the Gothic King Reccesvinthus. The remaining illustrations evince the quali- ties of the unusual, the rococo, the quaint, the delicate and the antique, as befits a book of a semiliterary and scientific scope; the touch of the virtuoso is plain and the guidance of expert taste as well. The chapters’ as they succeed — each other are as follows: Superstitions 19 20 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL and their Sources; Talismans and Amu- lets; Talismanic Use of Special Stones; Engraved and Carved Gems; Ominous and Luminous Stones [with an excep- tionally valuable plate giving the auto- photographs of luminous diamonds]; Crystal Balls and Crystal Gazing; Reli- gious Uses of Precious Stones; The High-Priest’s Breastplate; Birth-Stones; Planetary and Astral Influences; On Therapeutic Uses of Stones. The book has an overwhelming wealth of detail and assembled references, avail- able literature and the most diverse elements of evidence having been care- fully sifted. We are not sure, but we believe that one field has not been har- vested, and that is the Church Fathers, interesting and possibly prolific of quota- tion, since the patristic writers were in- quisitive in many ways. Apart from the purely archaic strangeness of the fancies the book records — regarding the quali- ties of gems and precious stones, interest emphatically attaches to the accounts of erystal-gazing. It might be regretted that Dr. Kunz has not greater length the work of Miss Good- rich-Freer and of Miss Gregor (Andrew reviewed at Lang’s friend), and extracted more liber- ally from Crystal-Gazing by Northcote W. Thomas, as also from Andrew Lang’s Making of Religion, which has many cases, appreciatively recorded, of “sery- ing” (short for descrying). Tothose of us a little ‘ dematerialized, as Oliver Lodge for instance, an agreeah!e mysteriousness is felt in Mr. Lang’s words, “If then the crystal gazer is right in a considerable percentage of cases, to my unmathematical mind it does look as if some unknown human faculty and fact in nature may be surmised.” Dr. Kunz does mention “hypnagogic illusions,” the illusive appearances in- troducing sleep, and he does contribute more space than perhaps he deemed the subject could claim in his work, to a few guesses as to the nature of the queer phenomena so frequently adduced in this ” connection. The Curious Lore of Precious Stones is a most entertaining book, and to the re- flective reader will afford a singular reti- nue of impressions as to the vast credu- lity and the imaginative exuberance of the human mind, so that perchance as he lays it down, he will exclaim with the “Duke” in Twelfth-Night: so full of shapes is fancy That it alone is high fantastical. Rubellite, from the Shan Mountains, China. Used as idol’s eye in India Star of India—Proba- bly the largest star sapphire in the world Engraved Emerald— East Indian Carving, 17th Century Copyrighted 1913, bv J, B. Lippincott Co. GEMS FROM THE MORGAN COLLECTION IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY Spt at TO DRAMATIZE CONSERVATION STAGE AND MUSEUM TO JOIN HANDS IN A NEW OPPORTUNITY By Winthrop Packard The JourRNAL publishes the present sketch by Mr. Packard concerning museum work as viewed by poet and dramatist, for its suggestiveness. In respect to it relative to the American Museum, we would say that this institution holds the belief that an educational institution of the organization ofa museum should employ all the codperation possible and use all the methods feasible at any given period in the history of civilization, in order to make its service reach the minds and imaginations of the people who come to learn from it. The American Museum in New York is at present broadening its relations with the public schools of the city and employs moving pictures in much of its educational work. That it should at some time in the future use some form of the drama as one of its methods of education, does not seem an impossible step.— Epiror. HE poet’s vision has done much for together for the world’s welfare and now the world, and the dramatist vis- the poet comes forward with a new vision. ualizing the poet’s thought, has ‘The stage is to visualize conservation and done much. Often the two have worked make its needs felt by the public. : “Drama and conser- vation,’ says Percy Mackaye to whom we owe the new idea, “is a new coupling of the words, but the present age is restive of tradition and for the first time in history the naturalist and the artist of the theatre have come to- gether to consider how they can serve the public The nature student never goes to the drama except For the child the museum must put more beauty and dramatic truth into its exhibits of animals. Arvia, the poet’s little daughter who, wandering in the woods and listening to the hermit thrush, sees and hears as in a dream the story of the play, Sanctuary. Through her vision we see the dancing of the dryad in the realm of fantasy, hear the pleading voice of the bird spirit — and come to feel the cruelty that it is to take the life of a wild bird for its plumage : 21 22 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL as a diversion. There he expects to for- get his study of bird and beast and revel in a world of fantasy which has nothing in common with science. In the same way the worker of the theatre goes to nature merely for rest and relaxation. What does wild nature mean to him excepting a pageant of unnamable birds and ani- mals in whose presence he may forget the cares of his work? But that is the old-fashioned point of view for both. A new school arises and we are discover- ing that scientists and artists are one soul, seeking truth by two methods — the one objective, the other subjective. Science has fought its fight with super- stition and tradition and has won. Art is only beginning its fight with supersti- tion. Dramatic art is not yet delivered from its life scramble with quacks and commercialism. Yet in the hearts of the people, is the origin both of drama and of conservation and there the two will ultimately work together.” “The plea for conservation,” says the naturalist Ernest Harold Baynes, “must reach the hearts of the people before it can achieve success. They must visualize the beauty and romance of wild life as well as its economic value. Then they will be willing to conserve it.” Out of these beliefs of naturalist and poet came the bird masque Sanctuary, by Percy Mackaye, under the tutelage, one suspects, of Mr. Baynes. The play isa dream of Mackaye’s little daughter, to whom through the voice of the hermit comes the great need of preserving our wild birds. “The text-books,” says Augustus Thomas, “tell us that drama is a story told in action, but I believe that a better definition is an idea visu- alized.” In Sanctuary we have the idea that bird life must be conserved, visu- alized and made very real. It is believed that the play gave im- petus to the fight for the clause in the new tariff bill, forbidding the importa- tion of feathers. Thus already has the drama been a powerful agency in for- warding the movement for the preserva- tion of wild birds — but the opportunity has merely a beginning in this. It is easy to see that the needs of forestry, of the protection of our water supply, and in fact of all branches of conserva- tion may be put upon the stage with equal beauty and grace. “Let us dramatize our museums,” says Mackaye. “The natural history museum is established for a great social object, the conservation of wild nature knowledge in the hearts of people. Equipped by science only, it cannot fully obtain the interest of the people for whom it was founded. It must go farther and reach their imaginations. As it stands now indeed, it is a public boon; the people spend their spare time on Sunday at the museum, gazing eagerly at the exhibits although they only in part understand them and do not, in any case, fully appreciate their meaning. They spend their spare time for the rest of the week at the “movies.” To them the museum is never ecstatic and vivid, but the moving pictures are. AXE, it ought to be possible so to interpret the exhibits at a museum as to make them live for the general public as do the moving pictures. The naturalists and taxidermists have felt this need in creating the exhibits and have done their best to meet it. It is possible completely to fulfill this need. The drama can do it..... Pageantry pos- sésses the people. It must become a civic drama in name and in technique and will develop the masque to fit the public needs.” The masque Sanctuary has thus marked the beginning of an epoch in the service which the stage of the future is to render humanity. It offers a new field to player and playwright — a new pleasure and a new incentive to the playgoer. THE CROW INDIAN SUN DANCE By Robert H. Lowie HILE I was investigating vari- ous phases of the old Crow culture in 1910, I heard a good deal about the sacred dolls formerly used in the Sun Dance, but without any expectation of ever seeing one “in the flesh”? since the last ceremony of this type had been celebrated thirty-five years previously. After a while I learned however, that not only a doll, but what my informants regarded as the most sacred of all dolls, was still in the possession of an elderly widow, named “Pretty-enemy,’ whose husband had been the real owner. Pretty-enemy, being a woman, was not even permitted to unwrap her precious possession, which was occasionally taken out by old men visitors, who would address it in prayer and restore it to its envelope. The sense of unremunerative ownership evi- dently weighed on the woman’s mind, and when she heard that I had bought numerous articles of ethnographical in- terest she approached me through my interpreter with an offer to sell the doll. The price first demanded was so extra- vagant that I felt obliged to decline with regret, but after a lapse of negotiations Pretty-enemy again approached me with a more reasonable offer. Then the purchase was consummated after I had pledged strict secrecy so far as the Reservation people were concerned, for the woman was very much afraid of social ostracism as soon as her action should become known. Looking at the doll with a layman’s eye, one would hardly be disposed to set much store by it. It is a stuffed effigy of the human form, about six inches long, with crudely marked eyes and mouth, and a number of half-faded rectangular crosses front and back, to symbolize the One of the most highly venerated of the medicine bundles of the Crow Indians. a rawhide envelope in which was kept the sacred doll together with various smaller sacred objects used in the ceremony of the Sun Dance. It consists of 23 of the tribe took part. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL morningstar; the head is topped with a profusion of plumes. The rawhide en- velope in which the doll was kept also contained a number of subsidiary articles, including skunkskin regalia worn by the pledger of the Sun Dance, rawhide effigies, beaded bags and bunches of feathers —none of them of ostensibly great intrinsic value. Why then was this medicine bundle so highly regarded by the natives? In order to understand this, we must understand the character of the Crow Sun Dance. By the several Plains tribes the Sun Dance was celebrated for a variety of reasons. Among the Western Algonkin, for example, it was performed mainly in order to ward off disease or other danger from the pledger and his family. But among the Crow the motive was quite different from that of their neighbors: a Crow promised to undergo the expense and hardship of the ceremony only when some near relative of his had been slain by the enemy and for the sole purpose of wreaking vengeance on the guilty tribe. Any military operation whatsoever was supposed to be the result of a super- natural revelation that ensured success, and accordingly such a revelation was sought in the Sun Dance, but in this case the end could be secured only through the hypnotic action of a particular type of object, the sacred doll. By fixedly gazing at the doll during the dance, a man could make himself go “out of his head,” that is, go into a trance. When in this condition he would see an enemy lying bleeding on the ground, and this vision was taken as a promise by the supernatural powers that his quest for revenge would be crowned with success. Hence the mourner who undertook a Sun Dance was obliged to seek out some man This sacred doll (about six inches long) was thought to give a vision at the close of an elaborate ceremony called the ‘‘Sun Dance,’’ which lasted several days and in which all members. The last Crow Sun Dance was celebrated some thirty-five years ago THE CROW INDIAN SUN DANCE 25 owning one of the dolls and induce him to supply the needed effigy, and act as master of ceremonies, vested with dictatorial powers. The doll bought of Pretty-enemy had been successful, above all others of its kind, in effecting visions that led to victorious reprisals against the enemy, hence the high veneration in which it was held by the tribe. It would seem from the above that the entire Sun Dance pivoted about the doll and the vision it procured. In a certain sense this is true, for no sooner had the vision been experienced and announced than the ceremony came to an abrupt stop, and preparations were made to bring about the fulfillment of the promise embodied in the revelation. Neverthe- less this would be a very one-sided point of view. For the Crow Sun Dance, like the corresponding ceremony of all other Plains tribes, was a very elaborate per- formance, lasting several days, in which practically all the members of the tribe played a part. To the pledger and the doll-owner, to be sure, the essential thing was the vision to be obtained through the doll, but to the other tribesmen, whether actors or spectators, the per- formance meant something quite differ- ent. As in all great assemblies of the Crow tribe, there was abundant oppor- tunity for the recital of one’s heroic exploits; accordingly, to the great warriors the Sun Dance was a chance for self-aggrandizement before a large audience. Again, certain offices in the construction of the lodge devolved only on men and women of a perfectly pure mode of life, hence for these the cere- mony meant a public recognition of virtue. Then there were others who voluntarily underwent self-torture, not to enhance the vision of the pledger, but in order to secure one for their own benefit. As for the common herd, what appealed to them most was probably the dramatic aspect of the spectacle and the licensed frivolity that was customary throughout the duration of the ceremony. The great interest of the Crow Sun Dance lies precisely in this: that it brings out so clearly the great difference be- tween theory and reality, which coin- cides in this case with that between the esoteric and the exoteric aspects of the ceremony. Theoretically, any part of the performance not directly contribut- ing to the production of the vision would seem superfluous. But in reality, to the great majority of the people, the “superfluous” portions of the perfor- mance are probably the main object of interest, filling the want of a free show. Moreover, these exoteric parts are the very ones that are most widely diffused over the Plains area and are thus pre- sumably of great antiquity. To say therefore, that the entire Sun Dance of the Crow is nothing but the quest of a vision to ensure vengeance, would be wide of the truth. It seems so only to the logic-chopping white observer, or to the native himself when he begins to theorize about the complex things he does. But apart from the pledger, the Indian performers or witnesses pass through various psychological states during the ceremony, which are very remote from the notion embodied in the theory of the performance. This ten- dency to rationalize his actions, to inter- pret things to himself and mislead himself and the guileless ethnologist as to his real motives, is a very marked characteristic of primitive man that has invited and continues to engage the attention of ethnologists. ‘ THE COMMON ROUND-WINGED KATYDID Some recent ingenious and painstaking work in motion pictures has brought to our eyes the mysterious activities of insects in a way we should never have thought possible The katydid ‘‘sings’’ by rubbing together the overlapping glassy parts of the wings just back of the head 26 EDUCATIONAL MOTION PICTURES IN NATURAL HISTORY By Raymond L. Ditmars HE growth of the educational motion picture rather parallels that of its dra- matic ally. There was a time when a moving picture of a railroad train was con- sidered a novelty and from that time the product for the theatres has grown steadily in elaboration until superb dramatic produc- tions of five and six thousand foot lengths are in use in every civilized part of the world. When I first considered the practicability of showing the habits of mammals, reptiles, amphibians and insects by means of motion pictures, I was confronted with the immediate decision that an especially constructed labo- ratory would be necessary and this would probably involve much originally designed apparatus. The latter point proved to be of prime importance. It was fully a year after the construction of the studio that con- tinual experimental work demonstrated the best available apparatus. Experimentation had been difficult and so costly that I was called to a halt for five months in preparing “nyopular”’ educational films for theatrical use in order to cover expenses to purchase the necessary apparatus. The studio was finally lighted with a com- bination battery of mercury vapor lamps and arc lights. It was necessarily arranged to do all the photographing by electric light owing to daytime duties at the Zodlogical Park. Switchboards, light housings and supports, all stagework, backgrounds and general acces- sories were built at the studio. A projecting room was arranged for the immediate testing of all films, an automobile provided with ap- paratus for collecting and a number of tanks and cages provided for specimens. Actual work in preparing a systematic series of nat- ural history films was begun in August of 1913. With the reopening of the free lec- tures of the Board of Education of New York City in the fall of 1913, the first of these films was used for educational purposes. The work of photographing mammals, rep- tiles and insects demands much varied in- genuity. Some of the mammals large enough to be dangerous took many liberties in the studio and at times did considerable damage. In order to avoid any trace of cagework in the pictures, the subjects had the free run of the place and were enticed upon the stages with food or by rock shelters built for them. The promptings of a hungry stomach were found to be the most effective in the stage manage- ment of this theatre of nature and many of the pictures were made at the period of feeding time. The prowling of a hungry ocelot or tiger cat is a good illustration of animal man- agement. For several days this creature’s food had been concealed in different locations of the stage— sometimes hidden among the rocks or concealed in the branch of a tree. The picture was taken as the cat started to search for the food, crouching, scenting and alertly peering about, in characteristic actions of the wilds. With the scenes of poisonous snakes strik- ing, where there was the necessity of taking the photographs very close to the reptiles, the camera was run by an electric motor. This relieved the human operator of the grave danger of standing within a few feet of an infuriated fer-de-lance or cobra. In pho- tographing the ring-necked cobra or Spugh- schlange of South Africa, the camera was peppered with drops of poison, as this snake voluntarily sprays its venom a distance of six to eight feet, its object being to blind the enemy. The snake was induced to face the camera by projecting a spot of light on a white semaphore directly under the lens. The development of the eggs of frogs and toads was obtained with a camera set before a Bohemian glass jar and from the same posi- tion recording a few feet of film each day. One of these cameras did such duty for a period of two months, thus placing this in- strument hors-de-combat for all other labora- tory work. The life history of several spiders was obtained in like fashion. The story of a large species of Lycosa, or wolf spider, was recorded throughout upon the same “‘field’’— a gravelly hollow six inches square. After each photograph the enclosure was covered with a bell-glass and wet sponge to provide the proper moisture — for many spiders are particularly delicate as captives. The care of this spider was more laborious than that of a large animal. Soft-bodied grubs were hunted for her and she received drinking water by permitting miniature drops 27 28 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL to run to the end of a broom straw. These precautions were necessary in preserving the absolute cleanliness of her tiny yard, which on the projecting screen would be magnified thousands of areas. The spinning of her egg cocoon was successfully accomplished and we awaited with much anxiety the time when the young spiders would emerge and crawl upon the parent’s back — hundreds of them, pre- senting an indescribable spectacle. At last this chapter of the family history was recorded and there was a wait of eight days for the infants to swarm from the mother’s back and shift for themselves. This process may be spectacularly inaugurated by a sudden vibra- tion of the ground, causing the parent to jump — then a riot of the spiderlings swarms over the ground. An additional camera was trained into the field, for once the dispersal takes place all is over and the little spiders are gone. The critical time, when the youngsters appeared uneasy, arrived on a humid evening, when a heavy electrical storm was brewing. The rectifiers for the mercury vapor lamps were already giving some trouble as the cameras were adjusted. With the cameras running, we dropped a steel ball upon the metal stand containing the spider arena to cause it to vibrate, and the spider family departed to all points of the compass. This was an event we had anxiously awaited and luck appeared to be with the photographer. As the electrician prepared to throw out the main switch and extinguish the illuminating batteries, lght- ning followed the feed wires into the studio and gave us a week’s work repairing burned- out parts. But the history of the spider family was completed minus a few feet of film showing the exit of the more laggard members. So many insects are tiny, almost micro- scopic creatures and such a large propor- tion of them perform their characteristic capers in inaccessible places that the value of greatly enlarged motion picture portrayals opens previously impossible opportunities for study and observation in the schoolroom. By these methods students are enabled to see habits that the greater number of them would never in any other way observe. Not one child in a million has seen the katydid sing, the praying mantis rear in frightful pose, grasp and devour a fly, a gaudy grass- hopper carefully brush pollen dust from its face. It is not so difficult to obtain motion pic- tures of insects eating because these creatures are always hungry and persist in satisfying their appetites even under greatly disturbed conditions, but to obtain scenes of nervous spiders caring for their young and to show insects singing — that is a different matter. To photograph the katydid smging was a difficult task. This insect smgs by scrap- ing the wings together and only at might. A light of any kind will stop it. Yet to photo- eraph a singing specimen at night meant that a stream of powerful electric hght must be turned upon the songster. The deed was done in a grove of young oaks close to the studio. Several dozen katydids were placed in the trees and the camera — on a high tripod — focused on the vegetation of a tree in the center of the grove. The instrument, with special long focus lens was to record the movement of a single insect that watched all proceedings, but remained silent owing to our close arrangements with the machines. The camera was then belted to a small motor so that no operator would stand by the instru- ment to disturb the insect. A searchlight, such as is used in the navy was then trained on the single tree in which reposed the actor, its powerful rays making photography possible. With the remainder of the grove in darkness the decoy katydids sang vigorously. In the intense beam of violet light the principal in this educational drama was seen turning slowly. Was it irritated by the light, and would it crawl from the lines of focus? This would mean much labor in moving the heavy apparatus in what seemed a fruitless and costly experiment. But its uneasiness was caused by the saucy taunts of the decoys. Its wings were elevated slightly. It could not resist answering some of those rasping calls. The man behind the searchlight could be seen glistening with perspiration as he ‘‘fed”’ the carbons of the great are light. The writer’s fingers were upon the switch of the camera motor. Then the insect’s wings began to move rhythmically and another chant was added to the chorus of “katydid, katydid n’t,’”’ and so it continued until the picture was taken. And this picture has been seen by thousands of school children who never knew how insects ‘‘sing.”’ MUSEUM NOTES Since the last issue of the JouRNAL the following persons have become members of the Museum: Life Members, Masor Basti Hicks Dutcr- ER, U. S. A., and Mr. Wiii1amM: RuTGER BRITTON; Annual Members, Mrs. W. P. HarprEn- BERGH, Mrs. CuarLtes HirscHHorNn, Mrs. W.W. Hoppin, Jr., Mrs. ALBERT L. JUDSON, Mrs. 8. R. Kaurman, Mrs. Jacop LANGE- LoTH, Mrs. Jown R. Livermore, Mrs. Morris Lors, Mrs. Toeresa Mayer, Mrs. GerorceE L. Orts, Mrs. EUGENE H. Pappocr, Mrs. JEROME RecensspuRG, Miss Marie Louise Batpwin, Miss Mary PIncHor Eno, Miss Emma G. SEBRING, Miss Mary SHOONMAKER, Hon. Henry Roserts, Dr. Cuarues E. Friecx, Dr. T. MiItrcHELu PruppEN, and Messrs. H. H. BENepIcT, ALFRED PoLK BerGcH, ALFRED BLEYER, A. I. Esserc, B. HamBurcer, Martin F. Jack- son, Ropert U. JoHNSON, GEORGE KENNAN, WarRrREN KINNEY, Henry M. LEsTER, Epmunp J. Levine, CHartes N. Map, GeEORGE W. MERRIHEW, ALLAN PINKERTON, Myron T. ScuppErR. A NEw expedition, to cross South America by way of La Paz and Cochabamba, the Mamore, Madeira and Amazon rivers, and to be known as the ‘Collins-Day South American [Eixpedition,’”’ has been organized to sail December 26 for several months’ work in exploration and zodlogical collecting. Mr. George K. Cherrie will accompany the expedition as the naturalist representing the American Museum of New York and Mr. Robert H. Becker will represent the Field Museum of Chicago. The birds and the mammals collected by the expedition will be presented to the American and Field mu- seums respectively for permanent ownership of types and for scientific study and publica- tion, preliminary to a later equal division of all specimens except types between the two institutions. CoLonEL THEODORE RoosEVELT on the evening of December 10 presented before the members of the Museum some of the zoological results of his recent expedition to South America. He was introduced by Professor Henry Fairfield Osborn and was accompanied on the platform by Mr. George Kx. Cherrie, one of the Museum’s representa- tives with him on the expedition. A full report of the expedition will be given in the February JOURNAL. Dr. Frtrx von LuscHan, professor of anthropology at the University of Berlin and director of the Royal Ethnographical Mu- seum, visited the Museum several times during the month of December. Professor von Luschan, who delivered the Huxley lectures some years ago, had been one of the guests of honor at the Australian meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of Science. He is primarily a specialist in physical anthropology, but has done notable work in ethnography, being especially in- terested in the Oceanic and African fields, and has also conducted archeological re- searches in Asia Minor. He found many specimens of great interest in the South Sea hall and pronounced the Jesup collection of tattooed Maori skulls to be unique. On December 17 Professor von Luschan lectured at the American Museum under the auspices of the American Ethnological Society; his subject was “Culture and Degeneration.”’ He dwelt particularly upon inherited physical disabilities and the alarming decrease in the birth rate among the wealthier classes in the cities of Europe. A Memortrat Meetine in honor of the late Professor Albert S. Bickmore will be held at some time during the latter half of January. Mr. Joseph H. Choate, and Mr. Cleveland H. Dodge, who were intimately associated with Professor Bickmore, will give brief addresses in which they will recount the steps that led to the founding of the museum and the story of the early days of the institu- tion. Mr. L. P. Gratacap, curator of miner- alogy of the Museum faculty, will present personal reminiscences of Professor Bickmore. Tue following note from Science for Decem- ber 18 is of interest to JOURNAL readers: At the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia on Tuesday evening, November 24, Dr. Henry Fairfield Osborn was pre- sented with a Hayden medal. In present- ing the medal Dr. Samuel G. Dixon called attention to the fact that Mrs. Emma W. Hayden, widow of the well-known scien- 29 30 tific man, Ferdinand Venderveer Hayden, had established a deed of trust arranging for a sum of money and a bronze medal to be given annually to the author of the best publication, exploration, discovery or re- search in geology or paleontology, or a similar subject. Professor James Hall, of Albany, received the award in the first instance and the other nine succeeding him were Edward D. Cope, 1891; Edward Suess, 1892; Thomas H. Huxley, 1893; Gabriel August Daubree, 1894; Carl H. von Littel, 1895; Giovanni Capellini, 1896; Alexander Petrovitz Kar- pinski, 1897; Otto Torell, 1898; Giles Joseph Gustav Dewalzue, 1899. In 1900 the deed of trust was modified so as to award a gold medal every three years. The first to receive the new medal was Sir Archibald Geikie; the second was Dr. Charles D. Walcott in 1908 and the third John Casper Branner in 1911. Tue Annual Meeting of the Board of Trustees of the American Museum of Nat- ural History will occur on the evening of February first, when the members of the Board will be guests of President Osborn at dinner at his residence, 850 Madison Avenue. Tue December meeting of the Section of Biology of the New York Academy of Sciences was devoted to a “Symposium on Porto Rico”’ in which the progress of the Academy’s natural history survey of that island was described. Professor Charles P. Berkey outlined his geological reconnaisance of the island, in which he and Dr. Fenner had traveled more than two thousand miles. They had studied the rocks at so many points that they were enabled to construct a preliminary geological map which revealed the general geological history of the island. Professor N. L. Britton outlined the pro- gress of the botanical investigation of the island. The material collected by the Academy workers has been distributed to a number of specialists and from their labors, knowledge of the flora is rapidly being ex- tended. Dr. Marshal A. Howe by means of the stereopticon illustrated a series of marine algee which he collected recently. Espe- cially interesting were the reef-building coralline alge. Dr. N. Wille summarized the present knowledge of the fresh-water alge, in which much further collecting is THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL necessary. Mr. Roy W. Miner described his collecting of marine invertebrates. Mr. Frank E. Lutz in summarizing the present knowledge of the insects and spiders touched upon several interesting problems of distribu- tion in which Porto Rico offers an attractive field for further work. Mr. J. T. Nichols described the fish fauna of the island. THE manuscript for a book, “Men of the Old Stone Age,’ which covers the long Paleolithic history of Europe, was com- pleted by Professor Henry Fairfield Osborn during the month of November and it will appear from the Scribner press in February. The writing of this work was suggested by the author’s tour through the caverns of Italy, France and Spain, described in the December, 1912, number of the JOURNAL. The work differs from the volumes recently published by Professor Sollas, Lord Avebury and Professor James Geikie in presenting a fuller description of the various primitive races of men and in giving a connected story of the geology, geography, climate, and de- velopment of the flint industry and art. An attempt has been made to give a very clear and semipopular treatment of our present knowledge of the long prehistory of Europe, closing with the advent of the men of the New Stone Age, which is believed to have occurred between 7000 and 9000 years ago. Mr. N. C. Newson has returned from several months’ archeological field work in New Mexico. His work this year was a continuation of that of previous years on the ancient villages of the Tanos, south of Santa Fé. He made partial excavations of three large ruins, digging out altogether about four hundred and fifty ruins from which he brought back approximately seven hundred specimens for the Museum. A large number of skele- tons were also secured, some from the ruins and some from refuse heaps belonging to the different villages. In his excavations Mr. Nelson discovered a_ stratified deposit in which four distinct types of pottery were found. Since the pueblos clustered all about the region belong to one or more of these pottery-making stages, the chronological position of most of the ruins can now be determined on the basis of this discovery. Str Dovuctas Mawson will lecture on “Racing with Death in Antarctic Blizzards,” under the auspices of the American Geo- MUSEUM NOTES graphical Society and the American Museum of Natural History at Aeolian Hall, January 17, 1915. The lecture will cover Dr. Maw- son’s experiences in the Antarctic from 1911 to 1914 and will be illustrated with still and motion pictures which are pronounced by Sir Ernest Shackleton, Mr. A. Radclyffe Dugmore and others who have seen them, to be the most marvelous pictures ever presented on polar subjects. Professor Henry Fairfield Osborn will preside and Dr. Mawson will be introduced by Mr. John Greenough, chair- man of the Council of the American Geo- graphical Society. Dr. Mawson has recently been knighted by George V in recognition of his scientific research in the Antarctic. He was well equipped for valuable work, having been lecturer in chemistry at Sydney Uni- versity and in geology at Adelaide University even before he obtained his doctorate in science in 1909. Later he was on the staff of Sir Ernest Shackleton’s expedition as physicist and mineralogist and was one of the party which reached the summit of Mount Erebus and also the South Magnetic Pole. In 1911 he organized the Australasian Ant- arctic expedition and led it into the great unknown region south of Australia. It is of the story of the accomplishment and the pri- vations and tragedies of this expedition that Dr. Mawson will speak in New York. Tue anthropological course of lectures for 1915 is to be devoted to the Aboriginal Art of North American Indians. The subject has been chosen in recognition of the increas- ing demands of students of art and design upon the ethnological collections in the Mu- seum. The opening and closing lectures are to be given by Dr. Clark Wissler; the first will deal with “Technique and Distribution of Textile Designs,’ and the concluding lecture with ‘‘ Design Names and Symbolism.” Dr. Herbert J. Spinden, who has devoted much time to the study of the art of the Southwest and Central America, will discuss in the second and third lectures of the series, “Form and Ornament in Ceramic Art” and “History and the Higher Arts.’ These lectures will be given in the West Assembly hall of the Museum on Thursday evenings in January at 8:15 o’clock. Tue Indian figures for the Hopi group under construction by Mr. Howard Mc- Cormick in an alcove off the hall of the Southwest Indians, have been modeled by 3l Mr. Mahonri Young and are at present in process of casting in the Museum’s prepara- tion shop. It is understood that Mr. Young has in charge also the pediments for the Utah State Capitol at Salt Lake City and that he has a group of bronzes ready for exhibition at the San Francisco Exposition. TuroucH the kindness of Miss M. Eliza Audubon the Museum has recently come into possession of a painting by John James Audubon. This painting has been in the Museum on deposit for some time and its gift makes a very important addition to the Museum’s collection of Auduboniana. It is one of the largest of Audubon’s pictures and is especially pleasing in composition and color. THERE has recently been placed on exhi- bition in the Plains Indian hall a small model of a Hidatsa earth-lodge constructed by Mr. S. Ichikawa after drawings made by Mr. F. N. Wilson and plates from the early publica- tion, Travels in the Interior of North America by Maximilian, Prince of Wied, who visited the Hidatsa and Mandan in 1832-1834. It was in a village of houses of this type that Lewis and Clark spent their first winter (1804). THe Museum has long been desirous of obtaining a specimen of the devilfish (Manta birostris), the largest of all rays. This species, owing to its great size, the difficulty of caring for specimens in the field and the danger attending its capture, is very poorly represented in museums. In fact no full- grown specimen, so far as known, is on exhi- bition anywhere. Last summer the Museum sent an expedition to the west coast of Florida for the purpose of capturing a devilfish. The expedition succeeded in getting two speci- mens. For the capture of these we are indebted to Mr. Russell J. Coles of Danville, Virginia, an amateur ichthyologist who has had considerable experience in the capture of large sharks. Mr. Coles was in charge of the capturing of the specimens and did most of the work of harpooning them. The expedition made its headquarters at Captive Island, about twenty-five miles south of Punta Gorda. The two devilfish caught were splendid specimens, the larger one eleven feet wide and the smaller one seven feet ten inches. ‘Excellent casts of both specimens were made in the field by Mr. J. C. Bell, of the Museum’s department 32 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL of preparation. The scientific work of the expedition was in the hands of Dr. L. Hussa- kof, who obtained, in addition to the studies necessary for the correct mounting and color- ing of the specimens for exhibition, valuable data on the structure and natural history of this little-known ray. Two new leaflets by Dr. F. E. Lutz, assistant curator of invertebrate zodlogy, have recently been issued in the Museum’s educational series. The first deals with the thirty-four species of butterflies most common in the vicinity of New York City, each spe- cies being illustrated by a life-size figure. The second gives directions for collecting and preserving insects in the field. Tue Peruvian and Mexican collections of the Metropolitan Museum of Art have been deposited with the American Museum for an indefinite time and may be used either for study or exhibition purposes. THREE new exhibits of the department of anatomy and physiology in the synoptic hall on the third floor include a series of mounted limb-bones, showing the adaptation of mammalian limbs to their various modes of living, and two series of wax models illustrat- ing respectively the evolution of the verte- brate chondrocranium and the brain. Mr. Ernest THomMpson SEToN on the evening of November 27 gave a special lecture in the auditorium of the Museum on “Voices of the Night,’ in which he told the story of some of the wild animals of North America and gave imitations of their calls. A NEw edition of the General Guide to the exhibition halls of the museum has just been issued comprising 125 pages and 65 illustra- tions. Experience has shown that the changes in the Museum’s collections are so extensive that a guide must be issued at least once a year in order to keep pace with them. Important exhibits in the department of vertebrate paleontology have recently been opened to the public. The first of these is a skeleton of Scelidotherium, which is a part of the Cope Pampean collection secured through the generosity of the late Morris K. Jesup, former president of the Museum. This animal belongs to the sloth family and is interesting anatomically in its approach to the anteaters. Two nearly perfect skulls of horned dinosaurs have been added to the reptile collection. These are a part of the collection made by the Museum expedition to the Red Deer River, Alberta, in 1913. The skeleton of the giant carnivorous dino- saur, Tyrannosaurus, is being mounted in the Pleistocene hall, and the new duck-billed dinosaur, Corythosaurus, in the dinosaur hall. AppITiIons to the mineral collection com- prise an exchange with Professor W. Vernad- sky of the Imperial Academy of Sciences and a series of purchases made from the interest of the Bruce endowment. The former were interesting from locality, and among them powellite from the Urals merits mention. Noticeable among the purchases are native bismuth and the association of bismuth and molybdenite from North Queens- land, Australia; a remarkable native copper coated with solid malachite like a paint, from Michigan; small delicate crystalliza- tions of gold from Verespatak, Hungary; deep blue halite from Stassfurt, Germany; quartz (nodular) with inclusions of acicular bismuth from New South Wales; a handsome large crystallization of dioptase from South Africa; and the new mineral wilkeite from Riverside County, California. Some supe- rior specimens of species already represented were purchased, among which particular reference may be made to catapleiite, eryo- lithionite, eudialyte, narsarsukite, schizolite, steenstrupine and willemite from Greenland. Tue department of public health is at present engaged in the preparation of a special exhibit of military hygiene and sanita- tion, dealing with the health of armies, the hygiene of the individual soldier and the general problems of camp sanitation. A number of new exhibits illustrative of insect-borne diseases were added to the de- partment’s display during 1914, the most im- portant single exhibit being a model of the flea (carrier of bubonic plague) 1,728,000 times nat- ural size, prepared by Mr. Ignaz Matausch. The history of the bubonic plague in the past is shown by reproductions of a number of early paintings and by a series of maps illustrating the geographic spread of disease during its historic epidemics. A series of photographs of four American army surgeons who have discovered a mosquito transmis- sion of yellow fever, has been hung near the entrance of the hall. The American Museum of Natural History Seventy-seventh Street and Central Park West, New York City Open free to the public on every day in the year. The American Museum of Natural History was established in 1869 to promote the Natural Sciences and to diffuse a general knowledge of them among the people. It is dependent upon private subscriptions and the fees from members for procuring needed additions to the collections and for carrying on explorations in America and other parts of the world. The membership fees are, AMA VLeMbers= sais sa sataeters ween e $ 10 Patrons actaires ce ats pes ate ale eels $1,000 Sustaining Members (annually)........ 25 Associate Benefactors..............-. 10,000 Maite IV REIT EL Saya oie nex ce sycsreret nla site sys 100 Associatem HW oundérsiic so. sae os «ae oes 25,000 EILOM SR ite ae coon ct ekeueneians Race ets aI ves 500 Benefactors: ess seek cigs Cet tes 590,000 Guides for Study of Exhibits are provided on request to members and teachers by the department of public education. Teachers wishing to bring classes should write or telephone the department for an appointment, specifying the collection to be studied. Lectures to classes may also be arranged for. In all cases the best results are obtained with small groups of children. The Museum Library contains more than 60,000 volumes with a good working collection of publications issued by scientific institutions and societies in this country and abroad. The library is open to the public for reference daily — Sundays and holidays excepted — from 9 A.M. to5 P.M. The Technical Publications of the Museum comprise the Memoirs, Bulletin and Anthropological Papers, the Memoirs and Bulletin edited by J. A. Allen, the Anthropological Papers by Clark Wissler. These publications cover the field and laboratory researches of the institution. The Popular Publications of the Museum comprise the JourNat, edited by Mary Cynthia Dickerson, the Handbooks, Leaflets and General Guide. The following list gives some of the popular publications; complete lists, of both bchoscet) and popular publications, may be obtained from the Librarian. POPULAR PUBLICATIONS HANDBOOKS Nortu AMERICAN INDIANS OF THE PLatns. By Clark Wissler, Ph.D. Paper, 25 cents; cloth, 50 cents. INDIANS OF THE SOUTHWEST. By Pliny Earle Goddard, Ph.D. Paper, 25 cents; cloth, 50 cents. ANIMALS OF THE Past. By Frederic A. Lucas, Sc.D. Paper, 35 cents. ILLUSTRATED GUIDE LEAFLETS GENERAL GUIDE TO THE COLLECTIONS. issued December, 1914. Price, 25 cents. Tue CoLLection oF MrinerAts. By Louis P. Grata- cap, A.M. Price, 5 cents. Nortu AMERICAN RUMINANTS. Price, 10 cents. THe AncrieNT Basket MAKERS OF SOUTHEASTERN Uran. By George H. Pepper. Price, 10 cents. Primitive Arr. Price, 15 cents. Tue Birps oF THE Vicinity oF New York City. By Frank M. Chapman, Se.D. Price, 15 cents. Peruvian Mummies. By Charles W. Mead. Price, 10 cents. Tse METEORITES IN THE FOYER OF THE AMERICAN Museum or Naturau History. By Edmund Otis Hovey, Ph.D. Price, 10 cents. Tue Hasirat Groups or Norta AMERICAN Brrps. By Frank M. Chapman, Sc.D. Price, 15 cents. New edition By J. A. Allen, Ph.D. Tue InNpIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND AND VICINITY. By Alanson Skinner. Jn preparation. THe Strokes PAINTINGS REPRESENTING GREENLAND Eskimo. Price, 5 cents. Brier History oF ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION. 10 cents. TREES AND Forestry. By Mary Cynthia Dickerson, B.S. A new edition in course of preparation. Tue Protection oF River AND HaARBoR WATERS FROM Mounicrpan_ Wastes. By Charles-Edward Amory Winslow, M.S. Price, 10 cents. Priant Forms 1n Wax. By E. C. B. Fassett. 10 cents. Tue Evo.uTion oF THE Horse. Ph.D. Price, 20 cents. Price, Price, By W. D. Matthew, REPRINTS Tue Grounp StotH Group. By W. Ph.D. Price, 5 cents. MeruHops AND RESULTS IN HERPETOLOGY. Cynthia Dickerson, B.S. Price, 5 cents. Tue WuHarr Pite Group. By Roy W. Miner, A.B. Price, 5 cents. THe Sea Worm Group. Price, 10 cents. THe ANCESTRY OF THE EDENTATES. thew, Ph.D. Price, 5 cents. + D. Matthew, By Mary By Roy W. Miner, A.B. By W. D. Mat A ‘‘pod”’ of fur-seal pups at an age when they can care for themselves POI epee tee Patient i ee ee + aN y THEODORE. ROOSEVE Ly 3 = ae The American Museum of Natural History BOARD OF TRUSTEES President HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBORN First Vice-President CLEVELAND H. DopGE Treasurer CHARLES LANIER Second Vice-President J. P. Morcan Secretary ADRIAN ISELIN, JR. Joun Purroy Mircuet, Mayor or THE City or New YORK Wituiam A. PRENDERGAST, COMPTROLLER OF THE City oF NEw YORK Capot WARD, PRESIDENT OF THE DEPARTMENT OF PARKS GrorGcE F. BAKER FREDERICK F. BREWSTER JosEpH H. CHOATE R. Furiton Cuttine Tuomas DeWirr CuyLER JAMES DoUGLAS Henry C. Frick Mapison GRANT Anson W. Harp ArcHER M. HUNTINGTON ArTHUR CURTISS JAMES Wa.tTerR B. JAMES Seta Low OGpEN MILLs Percy R. PyYNE JoHNn B. TREVOR Feitix M. WarsurG GEORGE W. WICKERSHAM A. D. JUILLIARD ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS Director Freperic A. Lucas Assistant Treasurer Tue UNITED States Trust COMPANY Assistant Secretary GeorceE H. SHERWOOD or New YorK SCIENTIFIC STAFF Freperic A. Lucas, Se.D., Director Geology and Invertebrate Paleontology Epmunp Oris Hovey, Ph.D., Curator Cuester A. Reeps, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Mineralogy L. P. Gratracap, A.M., Curator Gerorce F. Kunz, Ph.D., Honorary Curator Gems Woods and Forestry Mary Cyntruia Dickerson, B.S., Curator Invertebrate Zodlogy Henry E. Crampton, Ph.D., Curator Roy W. Miner, A.B., Asst. Curator Frank E. Lurz, Ph.D., Asst. Curator L. P. Graracap, A.M., Curator Mollusca A. J. Murcuter, Assistant Frank E. Watson, B.S., Assistant W. M. WueeE ter, Ph.D., Hon. Curator Social Insects A. L. TREADWELL, Ph.D., Hon. Curator Annulata CHARLES W. Lena, B.S., Hon. Curator Coleoptera Ichthyology and Herpetology BasHrorp Dean, Ph.D., Curator Emeritus Louis Hussaxor, Ph.D., Curator Ichthyology Joun T. Nicuotus, A.B., Asst. Curator Recent Fishes Mary Cynraia Dickerson, B.S., Assoc. Curator Herpetology Mammalogy and Ornithology J. A. ALLEN, Ph.D., Curator Frank M. Cuapman, Se.D., Curator Ornithology Roy C. Anprews, A.M., Asst. Curator Mam- malogy W. DeW. Miter, Asst. Curator Ornithology Vertebrate Paleontology Henry FairFIELD OssBorn, LL.D., D.Se., Curator Emeritus W. D. Martruew, Ph.D., Curator WaLtTerR GRANGER, Assoc. Curator [Mammals] Barnum Brown, A.B., Assoc. Curator [Reptiles] Witiiam K. Grecory, Ph.D., Assoc. in Palzon- tology Anthropology Cuiark WissteR, Ph.D., Curator Purny E. Gopparp, Ph.D., Curator Ethnology Rosert H. Lowie, Ph.D., Assoc. Curator HERBERT J. SpINDEN, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Nets C. Neuson, M.L., Asst. Curator CuHarites W. Meap, Asst. Curator ALANSON SKINNER, Asst. Curator Haran I. Smite, Hon. Curator Archeology Anatomy and Physiology RaupH W. Tower, Ph.D., Curator Public Health CHARLES-EpwarRp A. Winstow, M.S., Curator IsraEL J. Kuicuer, B.S., Assistant Public Education Grorce H. SHerwoop, A.M., Curator G. Crype FisHer, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Ann E. Tuomas, Ph.B., Assistant Books and Publications RaupeHo W. Tower, Ph.D., Curator Ipa RicHarpson Hoop, A.B., Asst. Librarian THe American Museum JOurRNAL VOLUME XV FEBRUARY, 1915 NUMBER 2 CONTENTS Cover, Colonel Roosevelt in South America Photograph by Mr. L. E. Miller Pim sute Gent ral MPAA 6 5%... 2.4.04 Bee aa xk Deon ee THEODORE ROOSEVELT 35 Together with mention of the geographical work of the Roosevelt-Rondon Scientific papegiuen in exploring the ‘‘River of Doubt”’ Illustrations from photographs by Kermit Roosevelt, George K. Cherrie and other mem- bers of the expedition The Roosevelt-Rondon Scientific Expedition.................. L. E. Minter 49 A story of the journey through South America’s traveled highways and unexplored jungles, with mention of many strange birds and beasts and descriptions of the country and the people. Illustrations from photographs by the Author Roosevelt’s Through the Brazilian Wilderness — A Review...... . J. A. ALLEN 64 warms the Health of Armies... 2. ....%2 £00066... e 2 C.-E. A. WINSLow_ 67 A discussion of the methods by which the armies in the field to-day are protected from dis- ease — A comparison of the daily rations of the armies of various nations With illustrations from models in the military hygiene exhibit at the American Museum Home songs of the. Tewa Indians......:..../.....%.. HERBERT J. SPINDEN 73 With an eight-page insert in sepia of photographs as follows: FHM NTC LAY CP iy nr leyc eo coe aera oie cis elo ROE -Kart Moon The Sacred Lake of the Taos Mountains.................. H. J. SprnpEN ETOP PT geEs ADV ee aN rors oa Seca eee chin Bite ne ay cela a FRrEepERIC MoNsEN The Pueblo on the Valley Road......... eR Oo eens S H. J. SPrInpDEN Hopi; Girl Grinding, Corn: 22. 5...24.. Eh gi Ree KITT of es eet Ne Kari Moon Atthe Bridge — Sani IManPUCDIOs 25. fal ts aoe kes we ... Kart Moon The Courtship — San Juan Pueblo....... Bh Bee eas on ie CRS ....- KARL Moon rae WO UTAU DAT cin ek ohh eho cia ee eee Tags SR ee .H. J. SPINDEN Memories of Professor Albert S. Bickmore ................ L. P. Gratacap 79 Pee a cet a BE eNIG Re is ae ate i 3 ee Rt. Rs a ay SS Me es oe oat 83 Mary Cyntruia Dickerson, Editor Published monthly from October to May by the American Museum of Natural History, at the Cosmos Press, Cambridge, Mass. Terms: one dollar and a half per year, twenty cents per copy. Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-Office at Boston, Mass., Act of Congress, July 16, 1894. Subscriptions should be addressed to the AmericAN Museum JourNAt, 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City. The Journal is sent free to all members of the Museum. $e Ssaudapit A UdIpLedig oy? YOnowy,T, SAJOAOSOOY ‘16 °d woay pojyont —,,‘Sa1ngvodd PIM JO Solojsty, Of1T OY YIIM Sulpeop osoy) o1e popootl JsoU MOU SyOod oY, ‘“UOIQ0}0I1d oTQeUOSvod OATODOAI PyNOYS speurumeur oy? pux !Mvy_ Aq poqoojoI1d oq P[NOYS oJl] Palg ssoyuIvVy pu [NJJOpUOM OY} JO YSOTA ‘popoou JSOUL MOT ST 4RVYM SI ploy oY} UL WOMVAIOSGO OATYSNeYXA ‘OUT @ ATWO 9nq ‘SuMdo][OO ouIOS Op 09 OAR PTNOM oFT*** * YOUR ev Yons uo syQUOW XIS puods osvQURApPT JSOTIAN OY YIM poo Ysijwanyeu yv,, ‘ssop jo youd [jews ev ‘youny Surppoy ssvq oyppes YIM 1009s pousoy-Suoy, Vv uO AO UMO IG B ‘sIvodS SUOT YIM SAOTIVIA IeNsSel OM) ‘UOPUOY [OUOTOH ‘JIUUJOy pu JJoAoSOOY JOUOTOD INNH YvNOVr V WOYs HONVY AHL OL MOVE SUOY § LaUgriag sayipy) fo fisajinog) Ladin yy fq 0204 q THe AMERICAN Musgeum Journal VoLUME XV Roosevelt’s canoe disappearing down Rio Téodoro, the River of Doubt. FEBRUARY, 1915 NUMBER 2 Photo by Miller Courtesy of Charles Scribner’s Sons ‘‘Ahead of us the brown water street stretched in curves between endless walls of dense tropical forest.’’ ANIMALS OF CENTRAL BRAZIL! TOGETHER WITH MENTION OF THE GEOGRAPHICAL WORK OF THE ROOSEVELT-RONDON SOUTH AMERICAN EXPEDITION IN EXPLORING THE “RIVER OF DOUBT” By Theodore Roosevelt HEN I contemplated going on this trip the first thing I did was to get in touch with Dr. Frank M. Chapman of the American I wanted to get from him information as to what we could do down Museum. there and whether it would be worth while for the Museum to send a couple of naturalists with me. On any trip of this kind — on any kind of a trip I have ever taken —the worth of the trip 1 A lecture delivered before the members of the American Museum of Natural History, Decem- ber 10, 1914. depends not upon one man but upon the work done by several men in coépera- tion. This journey to South America would have been not worth the taking, had it not been for the two naturalists? 2 As the reader pursues his fascinated way through Colonel Roosevelt's latest book, which recounts experiences on this South American expedition, he becomes impressed —if he is a naturalist, with the positive stand on certain definite points regarding natural history taken by the Author. For instance Colonel Roosevelt puts emphasis on the need for the protracted work in the field of the trained observer as contrasted with the big-game hunter or mere zodlogical col- lector. Weconcur so fully in the point made and in fact consider the matter of a complete scientific 35 360 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL from the American Museum who were with me, and for the Brazilian officers skilled in cartographical joined the expedition. work who I thought of making the trip a zodlogi- cal one only, when I started from New headwaters of a river running north through the center of Brazil. To go down that river and put it on the map would be interesting, but he wanted to tell me that one cannot guarantee what may happen on unknown rivers — there In the canoe ready for the trip down the Unknown River. Brazil York, but when I reached Rio Janeiro the Minister of Foreign Affairs, Mr. Lauro Miiller, whom I had known before, told me that he thought there was a chance of our doing a piece of geographical work of importance. In the course of the work of the telegraph commission Rondon, a_ Brazilian engineer, there had been discovered the under Colonel record of such pressing importance before condi- tions be intruded upon in South America and races pushed to the wall by civilization, that various quotations from Colonel Roosevelt on this point have been inserted in the captions of the article and attention is hereby called to them (pages 34, 43 and 45).— Tue Epiror. Photo by Miller At camp Rio Téodoro, Matto Grosso, might be some surprises before we got through. Of course we jumped at the chance, and at once arranged to meet Colonel Rordon and his assistants at the head of the Paraguay, to go down from there with them. We touched at Bahia and Rio Janeiro and then came down by railway across southern Brazil and Uruguay to Buenos Aires and went through the Argentine over to Chili. We traveled south through Chili and then crossed the Andes. That sounds a very elaborate thing to do, but as a matter of fact LE 1anod JO YSAIY SHL NI MOYYVN 3Y3SM SGIidVY AHL JYSHM SUOY 8 LaUqrulog sazipyQ fo fsajzunoy qadasooy pusay fq oJ0Y4q 38 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL it was pure pleasure. It was a wonder- The hard work on the unknown river ful trip. The pass through which we came during the first six weeks. In crossed was like the Yosemite, with snow- those forty-two days we made only an capped volcanic moun- tains all about. After- ward we went across Patagonia by automobile and then started up the Paraguay. Our work did not begin until we were inside the Tropic of Cap- ricorn. We took mules at Tapirapoan and went up through the high central plateau of Brazil — nota fertile country but I have no question but that great industrial commu- nities will grow up there. Photo by Miller ‘‘T shall never forget the spectacle in certain places on the Un- known River where great azure blue butterflies flew about up and down through the sunshine of the glade or over the river’’ or settled in gleaming masses on the bank Photo by Kermit Roosevelt Courtesy of Charles Scribner's Son We were little troubled by mosquitoes in the level marshy region of western Brazil. For the man who goes through the unexplored jungle however, the real dangers lie in a menace of insects — mos- quitoes, gnats, ticks and fire ants — and the fevers that insects cause, instead of in cayman, anaconda or fer-de-lance, or even in the jaguar as might be supposed ROOSEVELT-RONDON SCIENTIFIC EXPEDITION 39 average of about a mile and a half a day and toward the end we were not eating any more than was necessary and that The parrots were pretty good when they were not tough but I can assure Mr. Horna- day that he could leave me alone in the monkey cage at the New York Zodlogical was largely monkey and parrot. Gardens with perfect safety. Both of the naturalists who were with me and I myself were interested pri- marily in mammalogy and ornithology. We were not entomologists and studied only those insects that forced themselves There were two or three types that were welcome. The butterflies were really wonderful. I shall never forget the spectacle in certain upon our attention. places on the Unknown River where great azure blue but- terflies would fly about up and down through the glade or over the river. Some of the noises made by insects were ex- traordinary. One insect similar to a katydid made a noise that ended with a sound like a steamboat whis- tle. We found the mosquitoes badin only two or three places. On the Paraguay marsh- es there were practically no mosquitoes. In that great marsh country where I should suppose mosquitoes would swarm, there were Man-eating fish, piranha. tively to Africa and India, of large man-eating carnivores by the extraordi- nary ferocity or bloodthirstiness of certain small creatures of which the kins- folk elsewhere are harmless. kill swimmers, and bats the size of the ordinary ‘ flittermice’ of the northern hemisphere drain the life-blood of big beasts and of man himself.’’ Our trouble was chiefly These little flies were at We had to wear gauntlets and helmets and we had scarcely any. with gnats. times a serious nuisance. to tie the bottom of our trouser legs. When we stopped on one occasion to build canoes, two or three of our cam- aradas were so crippled with the bites of the gnats that they could hardly walk. The wasps and stinging bees were also very obnoxious and at times fairly dan- gerous. ‘There were ants we called for- aging ants that moved in dense columns and killed every living thing that could not get out of the way. If an animal is picketed in the line of march of these foraging ants, they are likely to kill it in short time. There is also a peculiar ant called the Photo by Harper Courtesy of Charles Scribner's Sons “ South America makes up for its lack, rela- It is only here that fish no bigger than trout 40 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL leaf ant which doesn’t eat a man but devours his possessions instead. I met with a tragedy one night myself. We had come down the Unknown River and had lost two or three canoes and had to portage whatever we had over the Photo by Miller The caymans, or jacarés, of the Paraguay region are not ordinarily dangerous to man, al- though they sometimes become man-eaters mountain. We had to throw away everything that was not absolutely necessary. I reduced my own baggage to one change of clothing. We got into camp late and Cherrie and I had our two cots close together and did not get the fly up until after dark. My helmet had an inside lining of green and I had worn a red handkerchief around my neck. At night I put my spectacles and the handkerchief in the hat. The next morning I looked out of bed pre- paring to get my spectacles. red and green line. I saw a It was moving. There was a procession of these leaf- bearing ants with sections of my hand- kerchief and hat. I had had one spare pair of socks and one spare set of under- clothing and I needed them both. By morning I had part of one sock and the leg and waistband of the underwear and that was all. It is amusing to look back at but it was not amusing at the time. The most interesting fish that we became acquainted with was called the “cannibal fish,” the “man-eating fish.” It is about the size of our shad with a heavily undershot jaw and very sharp teeth. So far as I know, it is the only fish in the world that attacks singly or in shoals animals much larger than itself. Cannibal fishes swarm in most of the rivers of the region we passed through, in most places not very dangerous, in others having the custom of attacking man or animals, so that it is dangerous for anyone to go into the water. Blood maddens them. If a duck is shot, they will pull it to pieces in a very few min- utes. This side of Corumba a boy who had been in swimming was attacked in mid- stream by these fishes and before relief could get to him, he had not only been killed but half eaten. "Two members of our party suffered from them. Colonel Rondon after carefully examining a Photo by Maza Courtesy of Charles Scribner's Sons A non-poisonous snake, the mussurama, swallowing the deadly fer-de-lance after having killed it. The danger from poisonous snakes in South America is very slight, ‘“much less than the danger of being run down by an automobile at home.”’ certain spot in the river went into the water and one of these fishes bit off his little toe. Unknown River, Mr. Cherrie went into the water thinking he could take his On another occasion on the bath right near shore and one of the fish bit a piece out of his leg. One of the most extraordinary things we saw was this. On one occasion one of us shot a crocodile. It rushed back into the water. The fish attacked it at once and they drove that crocodile out of the water back to the men on the bank. It was less afraid of the men than of the fish. We were interested one day in a certain big catfisu, like any other big catfish except that it had a monkey inside of it. I had never heard that a catfish could catch monkeys but it proved to be a fact. at the The catfish lives of the water. The monkeys come down on the ends of branches to drink and it seems to be no bottom uncommon thing for the fish to come to the surface and attack the monkey as it stoops to drink. Our Brazilian friends told us that in the Amazon there is a gigantic catfish nine feet long. The natives are more afraid of it than of the crocodile because the crocodile can be seen but the too late. ‘atfish is never seen until In the villages, poles are stacked in the water so that women can get their jars filled with water, these stockades of poles keeping out the giant crocodile and catfish. I had never seen in any book any allusions to the fact 41 42 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL that there is a man-eating fish of this type in the Amazon. One day when we were going down the Unknown River Mr. Cherrie and I in the same canoe, we saw a flying fish. Of course everyone knows about the flying fish on the ocean but I had no idea there were flying fish on the South American streams. I very much wish that some ichthy- ologist would go down to South America and come back with not only a collection of the fishes but also full notes on their life histories. We did not see very many snakes, I suppose only about twenty ven- The most venomous are those akin to our rattle- omous ones. somewhat snakes but with no rattles. One of the most common is the known jararaca, in Marti- nique as the fer-de- One of the biggest is called the lance. to develop enemies to the snakes them- selves. Such an enemy is this mus- surama which must be like our king snake — but larger. The king snake is a particularly pleasant snake; it is friendly toward mankind, not poisonous and can be handled freely. The scien- tists at the laboratory brought cut a big good-natured mussurama which I held between my arm and coat.» Then they brought out a fairly large fer- de-lance about nine inches shorter than the mussurama and warning me to keep away, put it on the table. Then they told me to put my snake where it could get at the fer-de-lance. I put down my snake on the table and it glided up toward the coiled fer-de- lance. My snake was perfectly free from excitement and I did not sup- pose it meant to do anything, that it was bushmaster and at- tains a length of about ten feet. These snakes are Courtesy of Charles Scribner's Sons Boy with parakeet and young coati. Para- keets are attractive but noisy little birds flying to and fro in the tops of palms. Coatis in jungle trees look like reddish lanky raccoons and fight savagely with both teeth and claws not hungry. It put its “nose” against the body of the fer-de-lance and moved toward the very poisonous and very dangerous. The mussurama is another South American snake, and it lives on poisonous snakes. It habitually kills and eats these dangerous reptiles, its most common prey being the jararaca. I saw the feat performed at a laboratory where poisonous snakes are being studied to secure antidotes to the poisons and head. The fer-de- lance’s temper was aroused and it coiled and struck. The return blow was so quick that I could not see just what happened. The mussurama had the fer-de-lance by the lower jaw, the mouth wide open. The latter struck once again. After that it made no further effort to defend itself in any way. The poisonous snake is a °F SSOULIPLLM UDIDeDL ay? YOnowy J, S4fOAesooy ‘9TT ‘d Woa poyony — 1 MAIOM 0} YOIyM Ul pley [Nj1opuoM & eolIowmYy qINOg UI Way) 0} Uedo SARY ‘S[RUIMTVT SIq JO SoTOASTY-ajIT oy JO QUapNyS 914 ‘qsT/eInjeu TeuNRy ‘s1oopyno oy} pue ad44 siq) Jo JajuNy oes SIq ou, °~° “910Joq I9A9 UY} UOlzIsod queqysoduy s10ur ev YUSsSeId 4v saTdnv20 ‘{S]TRInjeu Play PoOos wv ‘1aAuesqo poos @ Sl OYM JoJUNY oWVs-sIq oq} ‘puey 1oy{0 949 UG ‘ad4j eB SB ivoddesip 0} Surpuey st soqoyng OUlRS-SIG aIOU OY, “IdUETOS IOJ onyeA [eIIdVd JO YIOM Op Ustt esoy, ‘adA} seaiyg pue snopog ‘*Sury[ryos oY} JO a18 OYAt ‘usiusz10ds Jo ‘siaguNY swWies-sIq Jo uOTaI0doad SUIMOIS B SI olay} SABPVMON,, ‘solivooed pur paedooy oqryM ‘satdeq qIIM odurp oj10g 4 uopuoy [exUO[OHD pure IJaAdsoOY [auOTOH NOILIGAdX43 AHL 4O SAZIYd AWOS “an AQ 0704 7 Nine-banded armadillos in sandy pasture country. Phote by Miller They may cur] up for protection but also may bound off at a run as swift as a rabbit’s — as surprising to the observer as to see a turtle gallop away highly specialized creature and _ practi- cally helpless when once its peculiarly specialized traits are effectively nullified by an opponent. The mussurama killed the snake and devoured it by the simple process of crawling outside it. Many snakes will not eat if people interfere with them, but the mussurama had no prejudices in this respect. We wanted to take a photograph of it while eating, so I took both snakes up and had them photographed against a white cloth while the feast went on uninterruptedly. Birds and mammals chiefly, however. interested me I am only an amateur ornithologist but I saw a great deal there that would be of interest to any of us who care for birds. For instance there are two hundred and thirteen families of birds very plentiful there, either wholly unknown to us, or at least very few of them known. The most conspicuous birds I saw were members of the family of tyrant fly- catchers, like our kingbird, great crested flycatcher and wood pewee. All are birds that perch and swoop for insects. One species, the bientevido, is a big bird like our kingbird, but fiercer and more powerful than any northern kingbird. One day I saw him catching fish and little tadpoles and also J found that he would sometimes catch small mice. Another kind of tyrant, the red-backed 44 tyrant, is a black bird with reddish on the middle of the back. We saw this species first out on the bare Patagonian plains. It runs fast over the ground exactly like our pippit or longspur. Curved-bill wood-hewers, birds the size and somewhat the coloration of veeries, but with long, slender sickle- bills were common about the gardens and houses. Most of the birds build large nests. The oven-birds build big, domed nests of Telegraph poles offer splendid opportunities for building nests. Some- times for miles every telegraph pole would have an oven-bird’s nest upon it. These birds come around the houses. They look a little bit like wood thrushes and are very interesting in that they have all kinds of individual ways. The ex- ceedingly beautiful honey creepers are like little clusters of jet. mud. They get so familiar that they come into the house and hop on the edge of the sugar bowl. The people living on many of the ranches in Brazil make us rather ashamed for our own people. ‘The ranchmen pro- tect the birds and it is possible to see great jabiru storks nesting not fifty yards from the houses, and not shy. Most of the birds in Brazil are not musical although some of them have very pretty whistles. The oven-bird has an attractive call. The bell-bird of the gray hue (contrasted with the white bell- bird) has a ringing whistle which sounds from the topmost branches of the trees. The mammals were a great contrast to what I had seen in Africa. Africa is the country for great game. ‘There is nothing like that in South America. The animals in South America are of interest to the naturalist more than to the person who is traveling through the country and takes the ordinary layman’s Only two of the animals One of point of view. found there are formidable. these is the jaguar, the king of South American game, ranking on an equality with the noblest beasts of the chase of North America, second only to the huge and fierce creatures which stand at the head of the big game of Africa and Asia. The great spotted creatures are very beautiful. Like all cats they are easily killed with a pack of hounds, but they are very difficult to come upon other- wise. They will charge men and some- times become man-eaters. Another big mammal of the Brazilian The white-lipped peccaries herd together in the dense jungles in packs of thirty or forest is the white-lipped peccary. forty or sometimes as many as two or three hundred. They are formidable creatures. The young ones may be no larger than a setter dog but they have tusks. They surge and charge together and I think that they may legitimately be called dangerous. tremendous Photo by Miller Colonel Roosevelt in his hunting clothes ready for the day’s start. “T kept continually wishing that they [the naturalists of the expedition] had more time in which to study the absorbingly interesting life-histories of the beautiful and wonderful beasts and birds we were all the time seeing. Every first-rate museum must still employ competent collectors; but I think that a museum could now confer most lasting benefit, and could do work of most permanent good, by sending out into the immense wilderness, where wild nature is at her best, trained observers with the gift of recording what they have observed. Such menshould be collectors ...., but they should.... primarily be able themselves to see, and to set vividly before the eyes of others, the full life-histories of the creatures that dwell in the waste spaces of the world.’’ — Quoted from p. 161, Roosevelt’s Through the Brazilian Wilderness 45 Photo by Kermit Roosevelt Courtesy of Charles Scribner's Sons Colonel Roosevelt’s first South American jaguar, brought down from a tree at seventy yards dis- tance. muscular build of the lion. pounce on and devour large anacondas On one oceasion Cherrie was hunting pec- caries and the peccaries treed him. He was up there four hours. He found those four hours a little monotonous, I judge. I never had any adventure with them myself. ing grunts. They make queer moan- We spent a couple of days in getting the specimens that we brought We had four dogs with us. The ranchmen had loaned them to us al- though I doubt whether they really wished to let us have them, for the big peccary is a murderous foe of dogs. One of them frankly refused to let his dogs come, explaining that the fierce wild swine were “very badly brought up”’ and that respectable dogs and men ought not to go near them. We might just as well not have taken any dogs, however. Two of them as soon as they smelled the peccaries went home. The 46 back. The jaguar is heavier and more powerful than the African leopard, having the stout frame and It feeds on capybara and cayman, on peccary and deer, and will even third one made for a thicket about a hundred yards away and stayed there until he was sure which would come out ahead. The fourth advanced only when there was a man ahead of him. The dangerous little peccaries made fierce moaning grunts on their way through the jungle and rattled their tusks like castanets whenever we came up. Armadillos were unexpectedly inter- esting because they ran so fast. Once on a jaguar hunt we came upon two of the big nine-banded armadillos, which are called the “big armadillos.’’ The dogs raced at them. One of the arma- dillos got into the thick brush. The other ran for a hundred yards with the dogs close upon it, wheeled and came back like a bullet right through the pack. Its wedged-shaped snout and armored body made the dogs totally unable to THE ROOSEVELT-RONDON SCIENTIFIC EXPEDITION 47 seize or stop it. It came back right toward us and got into the thick brush and so escaped. Other species of arma- dillo do not run at all. The anteaters, most extraordinary creatures of this latter-day world, are found only in South America. The anteater is about the size of a small black bear and has a long narrow tooth- less snout, a long bushy tail and very powerful claws on its fore feet. It walks on the sides of its fore feet with the claws curved in under the foot. These powerful claws make it a formida- ble enemy for the dogs. very slowly. But it goes Anteaters were continu- ally out in the big open marshes where we got the two specimens that we sent to the Museum. They were always on muddy ground, and in the papyrus swamp we found them in several inches of water. I do not see how they con- tinue to exist In a country with jaguars and pumas. They are too slow to run away and they are very conspicuous and make no effort to conceal themselves. The great value of our trip will be shown only when full studies have been made of the twenty-five hundred and more specimens of birds and mammals brought back. We will be able to give for the first time an outline of the mam- malogy and ornithology of central Brazil. Probably the most important feature of the trip was going down the Unknown River, because, of course, at this stage of geographical history it is a rare thing to be able to put on the map a new river, a river never explored, a river the length of the Rhine of which not a line is to be found on any map. It was a journey well worth taking, a rough trip of course, but I shall always be more grateful than I can say to Professor Osborn and Dr. Chapman of the American Museum for having sent Mr. Cherrie and Mr. Miller with me, thus enabling me to take part in a zo6- geographical reconnaissance of a part of the Brazilian wilderness. \RAN BMS RAMAN a ie Photo by Miller > < 2 Oo )... Sd... ook Roca u uw a eee oa eke Rosert H. Lowrie 95 With a four-page insert in sepia of photographs as follows: Dancing asa Cure TOM GHeEnSiGks.. i, a. sree cone eves ainsi avehev elie nia Wiz S. Taytor From mural painting in American Museum Scene from Buffalo Dance, San Ildefonso, 1893....... ....-H. W. DEMING Buffalo Dance of Mandan Indians, 1832 After painting by Bodmer Dancing to Restore an Eclipsed Moon.................... E. S. Curtis indian Wances. in. fhe Southwest. ...2. eccn. eee ae HERBERT J. SPINDEN 103 This article and the preceding are illustrated by various remarkable photographs not hereto- fore published, including several taken by E. W. Deming in South Dakota twenty-six years ago — when Sitting Bull was alive ‘The: Conversation of John: Mimi. 2.25.0 25. 5 os oe MELVILLE B. ANDERSON 117 ‘Whitt sstetamssoi ii the Arctic. . 26.6. 26d cite « oes Burt M. McConnetu 123 Illustrated with map showing extent of unexplored land in North Polar regions and various points of activity of the Canadian Arctic Expedition The Geographical Results of the Roosevelt-Rondon Expedition W. L. G. Jorre 129 With sketch map of the south-central part of the Amazon drainage system showing the newly discovered Rio Theodoro Daniel\Giraud Eliot — A- Biographical Sketch.............6.0..26e ene e ness 133 Dr. Elliot’s personal collection of birds in 1869 formed the nucleus of the Museum’s later riches and his purchases and gifts laid the foundation of the great department of mammals and birds ICES LETTIR NCES ey 928 ee ohare ce Bn oe eee rte ee ee 141 Mary Cyntuia Dickerson, Editor Published monthly from October to May by the American Museum of Natural History, at the Cosmos Press, Cambridge, Mass. Terms: one dollar and a half per year, twenty cents per copy. Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-Office at Boston, Mass., Act of Congress, July 16, 1894. Subscriptions should be addressed to the AMERIcAN MuseuM JourNAL, 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City. The Journal is sent free to all members of the Museum. Photo by DeWard, New York MR. WILL S. TAYLOR, MURAL ARTIST Mr. Taylor is at present engaged on the great mural canvases in the North Pacific hall of the American Museum. These decorations are painted to show the industries and ceremonies of the Indians of the North Pacific Coast. [See reproduction in sepia of a photograph of one of Mr. Taylor’s recent canvases opposite page 104} 90 Photo by DeWard, New York MR. E. W DEMING, THE MAN WHO HAS FOR MANY YEARS PAINTED THE AMERICAN INDIAN WITH GENIUS AND POWER Mr. Deming has recently been engaged to provide mural decorations for one of the Indian halls of the American Museum Photo by Harris and Ewing, Washington REAR-ADMIRAL ROBERT E. PEARY On February 20, a lecture on ‘“‘Children of the Ice and Snow’”’ was delivered by Rear-Admiral Peary before the children of the members of the American Museum. This was the opening lecture of the Museum’s fifth series of ‘‘Science Stories”’ for children Photo by Thomson, London SIR DOUGLAS MAWSON Sir Douglas Mawson has returned from the Australasian Antarctic expedition, 1911-14, with a story of much accomplished for science, despite hardship and disaster His pictures, both still and moving, are some of the most remarkable ever taken in polar regions. He lectured recently in New York under the auspices of the American Geographical Society and the American Museum of Natural History $6 4SvoO JSOMYIION OY WLOAJ SYSBUI JO WOTJDeT[O aSiv] & SUMO Tnesny oy, “UOl-vos pue 7vo8 ‘avoq oy} ‘ssoay pue SUBARI Se S[TeUTTUR YoNsS JO SUOIZeJUSSeIdar SULMOYS ‘steoURp [BIUOUIeIID SHONIeA JO dnous W VIGWN100 HSILIYE NI SHSONVG NVIGNI AO SAWNLSOO THe American Museum Journac VoLUME XV MARCH, 1915 NUMBER 3 AMERICAN INDIAN DANCES THE INDIAN DANCE OFTEN A PRAYER BY THE TRIBE TO THE GODS OF THE HARVEST, OF WAR OR THE CHASE — USUALLY IN CONTRAST WITH PLEASURE-— SEEKING, SENSUAL DANCING AS KNOWN AMONG CIVILIZED RACES By Robert H. Lowie HE word “dance,” as applied by a the Indians has a meaning very different from that which it car- ries In our own language. When we hear of dancing, we think, first of all, of music and steps. These features are of course not lacking in aboriginal dancing, but they are completely overshadowed by other aspects of culture with which they are associated. To put it briefly, our dancing appears in the same context with restaurants, hotels, débutantes, attempts at a social rapprochement of the sexes. In Indian society, dancing is largely con- nected with war and agriculture and the chase, with processions, magical per- formances and religious observances, in short, with the serious affairs of life. Indian dances as far as the steps are concerned are often of remarkable sim- plicity. A widespread “squaw dance” found among the Shoshone, Crow and other northwestern tribes, consists sim- ply in the circle of dancers shuffling the feet alternately to the left, each man two women, with his right arm around his in the circle standing between partner’s shoulder or waist, or in some cases with arms encircling a partner on each side. With short intermissions and an occasional introduction of the war dance for variety’s sake, a squaw dance of this type is sometimes kept up all night, to the supreme gratification of the performers. The Tobacco Dance of the Crow In- dians, is, if possible, of even simpler character. The participants stand up several in a row, holding sacred objects in their hands, and alternately bend each knee and raise or lower each band with- out at all moving from their position. The highly popular Grass Dance of the Plains Indians is of a more strenuous character. Only men take part, and they move about briskly, sometimes in 95 96 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL pairs, sometimes separately, vigorously stamping the ground with their feet, and frequently mimicking martial exploits. The orchestral equipment of the Indians is not very comprehensive. The flute (or flageolet) is restricted to use in courting. For dancing, the drum and the rattle are by far the most important instruments, although other types were used over a relatively large area; this applies, for example, to notched sticks rasped with other sticks and bird-bone whistles, usually worn suspended from the neck. The drum varies consider- ably in form. On the Northwest Coast the natives merely beat a plank or box. The Plains Indians commonly use a skin stretched over a hoop, held by strings crossing underneath, but a large double- headed drum suspended from four sticks also occurs. Rattles are likewise of widely varying kind, such as gourds con- taining small pebbles and ring-shaped or globular rawhide bags — for which in the dance of to-day baking powder cans make favorite substitutes. Sometimes a certain instrument is considered dis- tinctive of a particular dance or of a society performing the dance, and vari- ous forms of costume are also considered badges. the Indian dance a place of significance Thus dress comes to occupy in to which there is no correspondence in the dancesof civilized races. Sometimes, to be sure, the apparel merely is designed to give an appearance of picturesqueness, while in other instances lack of clothing is sometimes compensated for by face and body paint or by a profusion of regalia held in the hand. In a Northern Blackfoot Grass Dance which I witnessed in 1907, some performers were naked save for moccasins and a breechcloth, but many carried ornamental objects such as mirrors, swords, and feathered and hooked staffs. When dances are the property of special organizations, as is often the case, there is naturally a tend- ency to differentiate between these by some visible token of dress or regalia. Thus the members of one Arapaho danc- ing society are marked off from the rest by wearing a headdress of buffalo skin; in another society every one wears feath- ers at the back of the head; a third is characterized by the carrying of clubs. Similarly where a single organization has several officers there is again a natural attempt to distinguish them through some external means. Thus a leader in the dance may carry an otter-wrapped pole, while the privates of the rank and file have none. The Crow Grass Dance might be chosen as an example of the social type of Indian dance, the Pawnee Iruska and the Mandan Buffalo Women’s dances as representatives of shamanistic or reli- gious performances, while the Mandan Okipa illustrates well the great tribal festival type of dance. The Crow Grass Dance, or as the natives call it the “Hot Dance,” is re- garded as the joint property of four clubs, to some one of which nearly every man of the tribe belongs. In a sense these are mutual benefit organizations, for whenever a member is confronted with a difficulty his comrades are ex- pected to help him in every way. In each of the districts of the Crow Reserva- tion, these four societies share with one another a substantial dance house. When the time for dancing comes, a committee of men proceeds from lodge to lodge, planting a stick in front of each. This means that each household is to contribute to a feast to be held by the clubs after their dance. A crier rides through camp heralding the perform- ance and calling on all members to present themselves at the dance house. On one occasion I have known four marshals to be appointed to punish the AMERICAN INDIAN DANCES o7 laggards; those who had disobeyed the summons either had to pay a fine or sub- mit to the indignity of being thrown into the creek. In the meantime, the people assemble until the dance house is charged Then the musi- to its utmost capacity. cians, seated in the around a drum, strike up center big a tune, later re- inforeced by the voices of some of the women, and the mem- bers of some one of the four so- cieties rise to the turns perform vigorous and _ bendings characteristic of the dance. They give vent to pen- etrating cries in rapid sion, they bran- dish weapons at an = imaginary foe, succes- and thus proceed around the lodge until the ceasing of music makes them come toa sudden stop. While the ; so kai ie : we! = — ~ % dancers’ rest ou ae 5 a, Rape from their ex- ertions, some Crow eager to enhance his social prestige may decide to give away a horse. He comes riding in through the door (he has to bend low not to bump his head), the horse may balk or shy at the unexpected spectacle indoors and the noisy crowd, but the Two figures from a performance of the Grass Dance twenty-six years ago when Sitting Bull was still alive rider proceeds to go around the dance circle four times, whereupon a herald announces whom the donor desires to honor with the gift. It may be a Sioux visitor or some poor old man or woman from the clan of the donor’s father. In the latter the receiver of "ase the horse leads it away singing as he leaves the dance house, a song in praise of his benefactor. Meanwhile the music recom- mences and the members of a of the four clubs begin second to dance in ac- companiment. Any members who are loth to rise and perform this part are whipped “into dancing by an officer armed with a quirt for this purpose. All sorts of minor incidents may enliven the scene. On one occasion when I ales ae * was a spectator ae = while the Hot Photo by E. W. Dance was be- Deming ing performed, a group of boys came dashing through camp, painted with mud and disguised in clowns’ cos- tumes. They dismounted in front of the dance house, entered and to the extreme amusement of the onlookers, took part in the dance. At another Photo by E. W. Grass Dance by Sioux Indians, just previous to the death of Sitting Bull, at Running Antelope’s camp on Grand River, South Dakota. Some of the participants in the dance are Sitting Bull, Rain- in-the-Face, Chief Gaul, Chief Grass, Running Antelope, Red Tomahawk and Charging Thunder Hot Dance which I witnessed, a man took off his clothing and gave it away to a guest. In former days this dance was made an occasion for men in a spirit of bravado to cast off their wives, often merely to show their strength of mind. The famous warriors of the tribe utilize the intermissions between dances to re- cite their great deeds, each exploit being greeted by a drumbeat, and each recital entailing on the narrator the obligation to give away some property. tain time visitors are At a cer- rarned to be off, for the door of the house is to be shut. 98 Then the feast takes place — originally of dog meat. Thus ends the Grass or Hot Dance, a mixture of all sorts of merriment, self-advertisement, feasting and dancing. A very different phase of dancing is presented by the Pawnee Iruska. The members of the society practicing this dance were supposed to be masters of fire, and their attitude toward it was to be like a Pawnee’s attitude in facing the enemy. Spectators were invited to their gatherings, their songs were chanted and After the members began to dance. Deming the third set of songs had been sung, the attendants built a big fire and hung a kettle of water and dog meat (or buffalo) The leader advanced to the over it. kettle when it was full of boiling soup, plunged his arm into it and took out a piece of meat. All the other members followed suit and unscathed pulled out meat, for they had secured medicine power that enabled them to overcome the force of the fire. An evidently re- lated ceremony occurs among other tribes. In the Hot Dance of the Man- dan and Hidatsa, the performers not only executed the trick practiced by the Pawnee, but also danced with bare feet on glowing embers until they had stamped out the fire. This was likewise a usage of the Crazy Dancers of the Arapaho, who indulged in other queer antics, such as doing everything in re- verse fashion and expressing the opposite of their intended meaning, thus lending to an otherwise solemn performance an aspect of buffoonery. While the activities just described seem to have had no object beyond the exhibition of the performer’s super- natural power, the dance of the Mandan Buffalo women’s society was intimately connected with tribal welfare. When- ever the supply of buffalo had failed and the village was threatened with famine, the members of this organization were 99 Photo by Alden Deming Scene from a social dance largely participated in by women. Photograph taken among the Black- foot Indians, Montana, summer of 1914. The main properties necessary for the dance are the tall feather hats. The women in turn dance wearing these hats once around the camp ground until all have worn them in the dance. Usually a circle of wagons is formed when the dance takes place out of doors. A feast is always given in connection with the dance. The Museum collections are rich in dance costumes of the Blackfoot Indians Photo by P. E. Goddard Assiniboine Indians in a social dance near Battleford, Saskatchewan, 1912. The structure in which the dance takes place resembles that used for the Sun Dance, now discouraged if not forbidden by the Canadian government 100 TOT WINoesNyA 94} JO WoTssessod oy} Ul Suyured jeurst10 oy WOTJ st oUOAJTVY STL, ‘soouvuIOJAOd OVUIRIpP PUL SOoOULP SNOTIVA YIIM O4N910OF OF UOISsTUIqnS AIe{UNIOA PUL sEoYIIOeS SNOTSI[eI poulquIod pure ‘ASoOYJAU ULIPUT UI Pops0d01 sv oSnTop oy) JO ooUMpIsqns oY} poyerOMTEUIUMIOD YY ~«‘Soqta} Joyo Suowe sourq ung oY} 09 Surpuodseai09 [eASoy [enuUL ,sAVP [RADAOS JVoIs V SVM VdIYO UepUeyAL OTL, ANOWS3Y30 NVIGNI NVONVW WOYS ANS0S Uuywwy fiq Burund 9 WoL A- Or Pe yore ile 102 called upon to execute their dance in order to attract the herds. According to an early observer, they never failed for they simply never ceased dancing till buffalo had been sighted. Prince Maxi- milian of Wied-Neuwied gives a good first-hand account of a performance witnessed by him in the early thirties of the last century. There were two men acting as musicians, with rattles and drums, one of them holding a gun. The leader woman wrapped in the skin of an albino buffalo cow. Inher right arm she held a bundle of twigs, tipped with plumes, with an was an_ elderly eagle wing and a drinking-vessel secured to the grip. There were seventeen women, all told, who took part. ‘Two of them wore skunk-skin head bands, the rest wore headdresses of white buffalo skin, decorated in front with owl or raven feathers. All the vermilion paint on the left cheek and eye, with two blue spots on the opposite They formed a circle, the musi- the women dancers had temple. cians began to sing and danced, taking up the tune at the same time. They waddled like ducks from side to side, raising each foot alternately higher than the other but never shifting their position. The Mandan Okipa represents again a wholly different type of dance. It was the great several days’ annual festi- val that corresponded to the Sun Dance of neighboring peoples. Ostensibly it was a commemoration of the subsidence of the deluge recorded in native mythol- ogy, and some of the important charac- ters of the myth were impersonated by performers. On the other hand, there was a great deal besides. A marked dramatic feature was supplied by numer- ous mummers representing animals and closely mimicking their peculiarities. Prominent among these were buffalo masqueraders who imitated the wallow- THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL ing of the animals represented and whose actions were expected to entice the game to the village. tarily Many tribesmen volun- torture: their breasts were pierced, skewers inserted, and they were then made to swing sus- submitted to pended from a pole as in the more fami- liar Sun Dance. Altogether the Okipa was evidently a composite ceremony. Religious sacrifices and prayers were mingled with dramatic performances, magical rites and activities of a purely social order; and there can be no doubt that to the average Mandan who had no special office in the performance, it served the purpose of a free spectacular show “‘on the grandest scale within tribal comprehension.” The wide scope of activities embraced by the dances of our native American population makes perhaps the main point of interest over and above all special features. For what must strike every observer of primitive cultures most for- cibly is that things which we consider quite distinct, men of a ruder civiliza- tion join. Thus the stars are to us a subject for purely scientific study, but even our ancestors invested them with all sorts of mystical properties, and the North American Indian personifies them and identifies them with the heroes of his folk-tales. mental designs and often do not give Thus too, we have orna- themanysymbolic interpretation. Prim- itive man is indeed less given to symbol- ism than perhaps has been supposed; nevertheless his tendency to invest a geometrical pattern with meaning re- mains greater than our own. So danc- ing, which to us is merely a form of amusement and exercise, becomes in important social function, an opportunity for sleight-of-hand performances, for reli- gious ritualism, and may become charged with an atmosphere of supreme holiness. primitive communities an From copyright painting by Will S. Taylor DANCING TO CURE THE SICK Ceremony of Tlingit Indians, North Pacific Coast. The dance of the shaman or medi- cine man is accompanied by chanting and the beating of drums. Scene, the interior of a house illuminated by firelight WHAVad V SI Vd OTVAANE AHL PeTMNIAT-poT AA JO VdUTIG SUPITIWIIXP], JO U01}09ITp 9Y} JOpuN SuryioM ‘19WIpog sap1eyO ‘S1}1v ssIMG we Aq PE-ZERT UL 9pEUl d.19A\ Sorlou asad UYIPUT Jo ssurjured [nJrapuoa AoA ces VLOMVdG HLYON SNVIGNI NVGONVW A‘ (IMPOT AI[{D BUILDATUY M0] ISVOO DIMIOVd HLYON ‘SNVIGNI TLOINVMY ‘NOOW GHSdII0d NV HYOLSHY OL ONIONVG SUAND “S pavapy tq ydvasojoyd 74 311A goo moLy oe Fi tial a al a Bs I De Ne OOo AR PNT RET pata ads ee A INDIAN DANCES OF THE SOUTHWEST By Herbert J. Spinden HE dances of the Pueblo Indians are never en- tirely free from a religious idea. numerous Some are so deeply religious that they are jealously guarded from all profane eyes and are held at night in under- ground lodges. The War Captain’s men keep watch at every road so that no out- sider can glimpse the masked dancers imper- sonating gods. Even in the underground lodges the faces of the uniniti- ated children are covered — while the dance is in progress so that they may hear but not This ness 1s most de- veloped in the see. secretive- villages along the Rio Grande, in New Mexico, where the native religion has en- countered — the opposition of the Catholic Church for nearly four two years ago Other dances are held in the plaza of the village, and here visitors are usually tolerated while on the annual feast day of each pueblo they are wel- comed to a more or less innocuous enter- tainment. The characteristic hundred years. dances of the Pueblo Indians are strikingly different from those wild gyrations that we asso- and warlike There are, to be sure, ciate with the nomadic Plains Indians. a number of such dances — Enemy Dances they are called — that have been taken bodily from this or that wild tribe and are known by the tribe’s name, such as the Cheyenne Danee, the Pawnee Dance, the Navajo Dance. These foreign dances are mostly con- cerned with war and are not re- garded as having any important religious charac- ter: — Yet its significant that title to use them was obtained by purchase or trade before the dances were in- cluded in the village — reper- tory. Ofcourse the foreign songs had to be learned by rote and a Photo by E. W. Deming From a performance of the Buffalo Dance twenty- special set of costumes made in keeping with the place of origin. In one of the introduced dances that a woman’s dance is popular at Taos and therefore not gymnastic — there is first, in the center, a chorus of men. Some of these sit around a large drum 103 Photo by N. Kendall On the feast day of Santo Domingo (forty miles north of Albuquerque) on August 4 of each year a memorable dance is celebrated. Besides the ordinary dancers in two divisions are the Chiffoneti or clowns who play pranks and dance with abandon a a MP cl ee Photo by N. Kendall As far as the steps, songs, regalia and general idea of Pueblo Indian dances are concerned, there has been little change during the three hundred and fifty years since the Spaniards came 104 SOT UONZIIATO JO SoOUBP OY} SeZoJOVIVYO SB YONS sdvVAquIa UL JOAOU PUR SoXxaS YUdJayIP JO S199DUtp UW2dM4 aq JoejU09 Apo 4soyYsT]s oy} Ajoaed Sy o1OYT, ‘oyRdionaed suerpur poerpuny [e1oAes *sdodo9 W109 9Y} JO SsoddNs 9} OANSUT 09 OUUTY JoUTUMS OY) UT peouep SI pue soured WIGEL OYF JO JuBIIvA B ST O[Gong OFurUMOd OJUYY 4R sue UWIOD UdeIDH OY, “vopt SNO[S{[o1 ol} WOIF Sd1J JOAOU oR SURIPUT O[qeng oy} JO soouep AueUE ou AJONVG NYOO N3aYD FHL 11»puay “N fq o,0Ng * SES RARE Te JOU OP OTN B sv 4nq SUIS AvUT OS[e sooURp OIL, “Whap os1e] B JO YVoq oY} OF SSUTS TOM SHAOYO o[} SI soouVp OTGeENnd AUeUI JO oMjRVEy VW SNYOHO GNV SYAONVG Nypuey “N fq 0704 Fe SY > a INDIAN DANCES OF THE SOUTHWEST which they beat in unison, while others kneel and mark time by scraping notched sticks that rest on a log for ¢ board. sounding Around them in a circle, or half- circle, are dancing girls. These are not in their everyday Pueblo attire of woven blanket dress with colored belt and whitened deerskin boots but in. the fringed deerskin dress of their Plains- 107 larger circle of men in blankets, each resting his right arm across the shoulder of the man in front and all moving in a direction opposite to that taken by the girl dancers. These men represent Pueblo Indian visitors at the camp of the Plains Indians. The girl dancers and the inner chorus of men are the hosts who provide the entertainment. We see The costumes of the Tablet Dance at San Ildefonso are simple but pleasing. aprons embroidered with designs representing clouds and rain. Sprigs of aspen are stuck in the arm bands. skin. and are barefooted bred sisters, with moccasins and leggings. Searcely lifting their feet from the ground, as they keep time to the song and the throbbing rhythm of the drum and the notched stick instruments, the girls move slowly round the circle using their two hands in a graceful warding-off motion. Outside the circle of girls is a Photo by H. J. Spinden The men wear dance From the back of the belt hangs a fox The women wear the old-fashioned Pueblo dress in this the dramatic instinct which in many Pueblo ceremonies is developed to a high degree. The famous Snake Dance of the Hopi is a partial dramatization of an important myth. While the steps in many Indian dances are simple in the extreme, there is a delicate pulsing rhythm that affects the 108 whole body and makes the dance almost impossible of imitation for one of an- other race. Dances in which both men and women appear are perhaps more common among Pueblo Indians than elsewhere in North America. There is rarely the slightest body contact be- tween dancers of different sexes and never an embrace such as characterizes Pueblo if we omit the religious orders of clowns whose antics are often none too delicate. Both men and women seem to be imbued with our own dances of pleasure. dances are conducted decorously a sense of religious solemnity and seldom smile but there is no doubt that the sway of the dance is no less a source of sensu- ous delight to them than it is to our- selves. Pueblo dances proper coneerned with rain, fruitful harvests, and abundant supplies of game. Much of the prescribed regalia represents clouds, falling water and are mostly blossoming THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL plants. The symbolism is worked out in feather headdresses, embroidered aprons, painted wands, etc., and is magi- eal or character. Wild animals are supposed to be pleased by dances in which they are mimicked and to allow themselves to be killed in re- turn. coercive in All the persons chosen for impor- tant dances have to undergo four days of preparation and purification during which they are isolated from their towns- folk. The religious heads of the vil- lage, called “caciques,” are masters of ceremonies and the War Captain and his men are watchers, warders and providers. The public dances in the plaza are more or less processional but the ad- vance is very slow and the trail of foot- prints in the dust shows how the dancers have inched their way. There are definite spots for stationary dancing and here countermarching is used to make new quadrille-like formations. A good example of this sort of dance Photo by E. W. Deming The Tablet Dance twenty-two years ago at Santo Domingo INDIAN DANCES OF THE SOUTHWEST is the so-called Tablita Dance which takes its name from a painted tablet re- presenting clouds that is worn on the heads of the women. It is a spring and summer dance connected with maize and is designed to bring rain for the growing crops. The costume is espe- cially devised for this occasion and every 109 two divisions according to the social grouping of the clans, there are Chiffo- neti or Delight-takers in two orders and a number of individuals painted to represent special mythological beings. The Chiffoneti are clowns whose naked bodies are painted with broad stripes of black and white and whose hair is detail of dress and ornament has a special import. Of course, variations are to be noted from one pueblo to another. On the great feast day of Santo Domingo in August this dance is celebrated and several hundred persons take part in it. Besides the men and women dancers, who are divided into Photo by E. W. Deming The Tablet Dance takes place in the spring and is a prayer for rain smeared with mud and tied with corn husk. The ostensible purpose of these clowns is to make merry and do what mischief they can but in reality they are the only persons who can conduct the gods of rain and fruitfulness into the vil- lage and they thus occupy an important esoteric place in Pueblo religious life. Clowns in the Santo Domingo Tablet Dance. Photo by E. W. Deming It is their duty to rush through the village and with little whips drive all the workers or dancers to fulfill their respective parts in the ceremony The Buffalo Dance, the Deer Dance and the Eagle Dance are examples of mimic animal dances. Headdress and body coverings are made when possible from the skins of the animals in question or color is used where skins cannot be worn. The characteristic cries and pos- tures of the animals are often cleverly the Buffalo Dance a animals, including deer, antelope and elk, are represented in addition to the Buffalo Men ard the imitated. In number of Photo by E. W. Deming Chanters in the Tablet Dance, Santo Domingo 110 Buffalo Maid. Ex- cept in case of the last-mentioned __ per- son, all the dancers wear animal head- dresses. They are brought into the vil- lage at daybreak by herders dressed in buf- falo robesand carrying bows and arrows. A chorus meets them and escorts them, between a double file of ordi- nary men and women dancers, to the danc- ing places. The dance lasts about twenty minutes and is re- peated several times during the day. At sunset the dancers re- tire into the hills and resume their ordinary clothing. Inthe Deer Dance the same mim- icry is seen and when the last dance is over, the deer run away into the hills at top speed. The girls try to catch one of the little deer and sometimes suc- ceed. At the secret dances held at night in the underground — lodges the dancers wear masks and imperson- ate the mythological beings. Most of these have definite and well- known characteristics and are at once rec- ognized. Although dances of this sort in the Rio Grande region The Eagle Dance is exhausting physically to the dancers, but interest- ing to the spectators for its dramatic quality. The eagle men are guided from the underground lodge to the dancing place by a line of sprinkled corn. They imitate very cleverly the characteristic postures of a bird 1il ott TUOYSNS Sty) JO TOILATUAT We oTGISsod OHV UMCIP Sf IPeY OY} TOYA YSnory) YS BV YIM sdvo [NYG “sey JO YOvor ve ATWO SuyArvo] poy oy} oALYS OYA OqIzy OIPeMOU ve ‘ooUME OY JUOSoAdoI suvIpuy o[qond ey} oouep sty? UT “(SURIPUT SUTVTA OF YPM OSMOoJojUT ysour oY} SuARy pue gy Bug JO YINOS solrur AJYSIo O[qond wv) soe, ye oouRq ooUMeY OY} SFUOSOIdOI STL, “OUR 8,oq 119 UoATS oy} AQ UMOUY PUB Sod!) PITA JO soouRp oY} WoAy ATTPOG UOXe} SooURP PoonNpoOVUT UTeII09 OAVY SULIPUT O[Qong ou, SNVIGNI O184Nd JHL SNOWV SJONVG JSNMvVd Uo ‘d “L &Q 704d INDIAN DANCES OF THE SOUTHWEST cannot be seen by outsiders and must be studied from information and native drawings, still similar ones are danced in the open in the Hopi villages of Arizona. The dramatic instinct comes out strongly in some of these secret dances. This is particularly true of the ceremonies preceding the arrival of the masked dancers who represent mythological beings. These mythological be- ings are supposed to live in the under world and to come up through lakes and springs when they visit the upper world. The Chiffoneti or clowns are the inter- mediaries between mor- tals and these gods. The caciques deter- mine when a _ masked dance is to,be held, and they select the dancers. The latter are locked up for four days and puri- fied by fasting and ablu- tion. At the appointed time all the villagers go to the underground lodge and seat themselves in readiness for the per- formance. Soon two clowns appear at the hatchway in the roof and come down the lad- der. They make merry with the — spectators. Then one says to the other, “My brother, from what lake shall we get our masked dancers to-night?” “Oh, I don’t know. Let’s try Dawn Cafion Lake. Maybe Indians, 1893. 113 some Cloud People are stopping there.” Then one clown takes some ashes from the fireplace and blows it out in front of him. “Look brother,” he says, “do you see any Cloud People?” They -Photo by BE. W. One of the side dancers in the Buffalo Dance, San Ildefonso Pueblo Deming A buffalo horn on one side and three eagle feathers on the other decorate the head. magical devices supposed to aid in the hunting of buffalo The crosses painted on the body are ae Forward movement of side line of dancers in Buffalo Dance, San Ildefonso. Photo by E. W. Deming, 1893 To the rhythmic beat of drums the dancers advance slowly, swaying alternately to right and left and shaking their rattles toward the ground on the one side and then on the other Photo by E. W. Deming, 1893 114 In the center be- tween the side lines of the buffalo dance are the Indian dancers rep- resenting animals and imitating their move- ments, three buffalo (two bulls and one fe- male), two black-tailed deer and two antelopes. The Indians represent- ing buffalo wear the complete buffalo head as a headdress. Speci- mens of these head- dresses as well as those worn in the Deer Dance are on exhibition in the American Museum INDIAN_DANCES OF THE SOUTHWEST peer across the ash cloud and one says, “Yes, here they come now. They are walking on the cloud. Now they stop at Cottonwood Leaf Lake.” Then the other clown blows ashes and the ques- Thus the Cloud People are drawn nearer and nearer until they enter the village. tions are repeated. The clowns become more and more excited and finally cry: “Here they are now!” and the masked dancers stamp on the roof and throw game, fruit, and cakes down the hatchway. When the masked dancers enter, the children are covered but the older people drink in the divine presence with the palm of their hands as one scoops up and drinks water. These masked dancers may not talk al- though they make peculiar sounds. Their wishes are told in pantomime. The songs used in these ultra-sacred ceremonies have words and sometimes a 115 sentiment that is beautiful. More com- monplace dances may be accompanied by songs without real words and only a Here is a song from the Turtle Dance — one jumble of meaningless syllables. of the winter dances of sacred type. It refers to the coming of spring. Povi ts’e anyu Povi ts& nyu anyu Khu" p’i nyu anyu Khu* tsa nyu anyu Gi na™ ak’o Gi na™ ak’o Nde wa pa he ra™* Na we ndi powa Yellow Flower Girl! Blue Flower Girl! Mottled Corn Girl! Blue Corn Girl! Thus on the plain, Thus on the plain, Everything they revive And hither return! Photo by H. J. Spinden The circuit of the Antelope Priests in the great Snake Dance ceremony at Walpi (in the Hopi country, Arizona). dramatization of an ancient Indian myth. This dance is a collaboration of the Antelope and Snake societies and is a partial Many of the Southwest dances are carried out with great solemnity, often at night in underground lodges, the masked dancers impersonating gods. [The March, 1913, JourNat reproduced a long series of photographs of the Snake Dance by the artist, Mr. Howard McCormick] JOHN MUIR, AMERICAN NATURALIST, EXPLORER, AUTHOR, 1838-1914 BESIDE ONE OF THE TREES HE LOVED The mountains and flower-covered foothills of the Sierras, the glaciers of Yosemite, giant sequoias — these were the comrades of his high spirit. He lived among them for many years — often in loneliness for human comradeship, studied them with devotion, with the close observation of a scientific mind, and wrote and talked of them with { charm and power. He persistently championed their preservation for the people and to his efforts we owe to-day our sequoia groves, the Yosemite Valley and Yellowstone Park [Photograph presented by John Muir to Professor Henry Fairfield Osborn in 1911] 116 THE CONVERSATION OF JOHN MUIR By Melville B. Anderson Professor of English Literature, Leland Stanford University OHN MUIR is beyond care for what we do, yet I am a little dis- turbed by the feeling that, if he knew what I am doing now, he would not spare me a shaft of his irony; per- haps, with allusion to Burns, his prince of poets, he would enquire what he had done that I should be discharging my musket over his grave! Certainly I have no claim to be heard upon hin, just as I had no claim to his friendship, with which, nevertheless, I was graced for nearly a quarter of a century. Yet I like to think of “the way that love began.” When John Muir, then a shy youth, best known at the University of Wiscon- sin as a mechanical genius, left his Alma Mater to start upon his great quest, he carried a letter from Professor Butler to Miss Catharine Merrill of Indianapolis, a lady whose memory is ever blessed among the elder generation there. At Indianapolis he stopped for awhile to earn some money by working in a machine-shop, where, however, he met with an accident which deprived him of sight in the right eye and threatened him with total blindness. During this trying time Miss Merrill, who was a_ busy teacher, showed herself a friend in need. In a memorial notice of her, he says: “She came to my darkened room an angel of light, with hope and cheer and sympathy purely divine.” It was from the lips of this lady that I first heard of Muir, and through my friendship with her and her family that it became natural and necessary, when coming to Cali- fornia, that I should know him. Thus one of the most perfect of women is beautifully linked in my memory with Now that they are both gone, it is pleasant to think that what I had in him I owed to one of the noblest of men. her grace. Muir had set out for South America, and the next stage of his trip was a tramp from Indianapolis to the Gulf. There he suffered another setback in the shape of an attack of some malignant fever. Recovering from this, he changed not his mind but his goal; the tropics, he decided, were not for him — he would go to California. He has often told me of his landing in San Francisco one April morning in I know not what year in the Strolling up Market Street and peering timidly into the faces of the sixties. people hurrying to the business of the day, he at length singled out a carpenter carrying a box of tools on his shoulder, as one who might safely be accosted. The momentous question was one to which, for the rest of us, the speaker’s future life was to be a large answer: “ How can I get out of town?” — The reply of the carpenter was: “Well, sir, you just go back the way you came and take the Oakland Ferry.’”’ — Oakland was then but a straggling village, and the way out was not the problem that it now would be for a stranger on foot. Instantly Muir turned his back upon all that San Francisco might have to show, and found himself an hour later at home and happy in the bills above Oakland. Following the line of the hills and mountains, he sauntered day after day, botanizing as he went, as far as Pacheco Pass, whence he had a Pisgah view of his Land of Promise, the distant Sierra. Descending 117 118 into the San Joaquin Valley, he found it everywhere glowing with beautiful flow- ers. Men with their cattle had not yet broken into this garden of Nature to such a degree as to devastate it, and to push out of existence scores of plant- genera. He would le down in his track at night and look up at a luminous and friendly sky through a canopy of Mari- posa lilies. Making his way across the great plain and up along the Merced River, he found himself after a few days on the brink of Yosemite. What fol- lowed is told in My First Summer in the Sierra. Equally interesting would have been his account of his first winter there. Someone employed him to build a sawmill and to cut lumber, so that within a few months he had earned, as he once told me, enough money to last him for the next fifteen years. Then began the series of patient hardy explorations of which his books and arti- cles are but a fragmentary record. More than once, during the last year of his life (which no one thought of as the last!), I urged him to continue the autobiog- raphy which he seemed to have dropped just at the outset of his real career. His answer was that the writing would re- quire another lifetime. Possibly he may have felt that whatever he wrote was in the best sense autobiographical; it is indeed peculiarly true of his writings that they bear the stamp of his character. Then, too, he detested the drudgery of composition. Whenever I went to see him, he was doggedly at work upon some literary task; the Scot in him kept him forever at it, although not forbidding him the luxury of an occasional lament. I am sure his writings have cost him more groans by far than all the hard- ships incident to his explorations. than a fortnight before the unforeseen end, going up as usual through the lonely house without the ceremony of knock- Less THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL ing, I found him sitting before the fire at work upon his typewritten manuscript. Showing me the new bookshelves he had had made since my previous visit, he said, upon my congratulating him on the orderly state of his library, which for years had been lying in dusty heaps and tiers along the floor: “I am going to begin buying books now.” — “ What,” I could not help saying, “do you expect to do much reading?” — “O yes”; and then with a sigh, “If I only had not so much writing to do!’”? — He always appeared eager to put everything aside for the sake of a long talk. After the marriage of his daugh- ters he lived alone in the old mansion, which stands on a mounded knoll rising from amid the narrow alluvial valley of Alhambra. He took his meals at the neighboring house where his elder daugh- ter with her husband and growing fam- ily lives, and was otherwise cared for by a faithful old Chinaman who had been in This old gardener was a man of deeds, not his employ for some thirty years. words. Orders were received in silence, and did the master wish to assure him- self that an order was understood, the reply would be: “Too muchee talk!” — In thirty years the taciturn fellow had pot learned thirty words of English. For all his inward resources, and not- withstanding the pleasure he took in the family of his daughter, perhaps Muir had moments of loneliness. Whenever I wrote asking permission to visit him for a day, he would telepbone or tele- graph that I should come soon and stay as long as possible. Searcely would the guests be seated, when Muir would begin, as if thinking aloud, pouring forth a stream of remi- niscence, description, exposition, all re- lieved with quiet humor, seasoned with pungent satire, starred and rainbowed with poetic fancy. What would one not THE CONVERSATION OF JOHN MUIR give for a phonographic record of those wonderful talks! One recalls them as one recalls the impressions of travel, or the pictures in a gallery, or sweet music which one is impotent to reproduce. Taking a text from what was uppermost in his mind, or from a chance question, or from a leaf or pebble or petrifaction, he would begin very quietly and with- out the slightest hesitation, and would soon lead the spellbound listener into the inward parts of the subject. Sadly con- sidering how little I can recall, I respect more than ever the talent of a Boswell. Whatever one attempts to reproduce seems to fade like those pebbles which Emerson brought home from the brook. I venture to offer here two imperfect snatches of his talk, which I owe to a friend who accompanied me to visit Muir last August, and who jotted down a few notes. Muir rarely referred to current events, but some reference to the invasion of Belgium brought out the following deliverance: It all reminds me of an experience of mine soon after leaving the University of Wiscon- sin. I wanted to go to Florida to see the plants down there; so I set out-afoot toward the fall of the year. I traveled along the western foothills of the Appalachian Moun- tains where the people were none too hospita- ble. It was just after the War and they were distrustful of Northerners. When refused shelter I would creep into the thickest brush I could find under the large trees. Often it would rain, and again it would not be safe to light a fire, so that I got pretty chilly by morning. Then, when the sun was up, I’d crawl into an open, sheltered spot and try to get another nap. But I didn’t generally sleep long. The people there all keep hogs and let them run on the mountainsides to feed on the acorns. In order to keep the herd together, they throw out a few ears of corn in the morning about the cabin, at the same time calling the hogs. I’d hear a shout away down the valley somewhere, then a crackling of the brush all round, and those razorbacks would come charging down the hillside right through my little camp and right over me, if 119 I didn’t look out — snorting and squealing, blind and mad to get at that corn. And that’s the way with us in these days of our modern civilization and automobiles and a’ that, rushing pellmell after something and never getting anywhere. We imagine if we make a big disturbance we’re ‘‘ progressing’”’! — Progressing down hill hke the Gadarene swine! — Much later on in the same conversa- tion, he chanced to be speaking with humorous indignation, but not unkindly, of certain differences he had had with an Eastern naturalist, and wound up about as follows: ....But I got the better of him once. A number of us, botanists and foresters and others, were examining the mountain region of Tennessee and North Carolina and on down the ridge. The autumn frosts were just be- ginning, and the mountains and higher hill- tops were gorgeous. My friend and the rest were making a little fun of me for my enthusi- asm. We climbed slope after slope through the trees till we came out on the bare top of Grandfather Mountain. There it all lay in the sun below us, ridge beyond ridge, each with its typical tree-covering and color, all blended with the darker shades of the pines and the green of the deep valleys.— I could n’t hold in, and began to jump about and sing and glory in it all. Then I hap- pened to look round and catch sight of standing there as cool as a rock, with a half amused look on his face at me, but never saying a word. “Why don’t you let yourself out at a sight like that?” I said. “‘T don’t wear my heart upon my sleeve,” he retorted. “Who cares where you wear your little heart, man?” I eried. ‘‘There you stand in the face of all Heaven come down on earth, like a critic of the universe, as if to say, Come, Nature, bring on the best you have: iim from BOSTON! — Sallies like these were not infrequent, but the main current of his talk was deeper and graver. One hobby, upon which he would discourse for hours with poetic eloquence, interspersed with phi- lippics against those chamber geologists 120 who “never saw a glacier in the life,” was the glacial origin of the Yosemite and kindred gorges. On one occasion, when my companion was a colleague in- terested in mechanical subjects, the con- versation turned all upon inventions, and Muir brought out the remnants of the celebrated machine for facilitating early rising, described in his autobio- graphical volume. I remember that we had that day propelled our bicycles the ninety odd miles from Stanford Univer- sity to the Alhambra Valley, and the exhausted flesh quenching the spirit, I was obliged to interrupt our host early in the wee sma’ hours. I have no doubt he would have talked all night and would in the morning have been as fresh as Socrates after the Symposium. Last August, I chanced early in the conversa- tion to ask him why the prairies of the Middle West were treeless, since it is proved that trees flourish there. To answer that question he took an hour or more, talking freely with great wealth of detail and illustration, but without diffuseness. He liked also to give long accounts of his great journey round the world, when he visited the Himalaya, Australia, Africa, Chili, all apparently with the guiding purpose of studying certain kinds of trees. Perhaps the secret of his pleasure in narrating episodes of his life is to be found in the illusion of living over again, feeling the thrill of past emotion, sensing As he revisited in the light of vivid memory beautiful the flow of spent springs of joy. landscapes and memorable places, he carried along with him the sympathetic listener, who received much of the delight and profit of travel with- out expense, without fatigue, and with- out that sense of wasted time which the traveler suffers in the dreary intervals of waiting and transit. What was told was so interesting in subject and manner that THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL one did not think until afterward of the wonderful qualities of the teller — his alertness and flexibility of thought, his photographic memory, his wit and poetic imagination, his selfless regard for what- ever seemed true to him — his scorn, too, for the man who, having knowledge of the truth, stoops for a mean end to flatter the public with the falsehood for which poor human beings chiefly crave. De- spite his fullness of talk and the unusual remoteness of his interests from those which, unhappily, chiefly claim our solici- tude, I never found him either tedious or garrulous. Simple and almost childlike as he seemed, the hearer felt, upon reflec- tion, that in this simplicity was the most cunning refinement of art. I used to fancy that he used conversation as a means of shaping his material and trying out his effects for composition. One was struck with the masterly way in which he handled long and complicated sentences, whose members would fall into line with the precision of a well-trained military company after the confusion of a sudden change of face. Finally, his vocabulary was choice and arresting; to slang he never needed to descend to produce a telling effect; his talk had none of the cheap devices by which we Americans are especially prone to seem witty at no expense to ourselves. He was indeed saturated with the homely proverbial wisdom of Scotland and with the wit and satire of Burns, and loved to lighten his discourse with them; but he never stooped to any hackneyed or vulgar phrase. In the high Sierra there are trails which lead along the axis of the range, sweep- ing in great curves far back toward the river-heads in order to avoid the deeper gorges, in places climbing nearly level with the snow-line up where the hardy pines crouch on _ all-fours —nay, all- twenties, all-hundreds — as if to provide THE CONVERSATION OF JOHN MUIR shelter for storm-bound man or beast; again plunging far down through the 121 talk of John Muir, dwelling much upon the heights, anon descending to pleasant shadowy forest to embowered stream- beds where the traveler pauses in the sheen and fragrance of the azalea, and where the water ouzel dances to the fluting and tinkling of the rivulet. Like such a trail in varying charm was the homely places, giving glimpses at times of Nature’s jealously guarded arcana, freely turning aside on the spur of every casual fancy, and when apparently most vagrant, bringing you at last safely into camp at the goal for which you started. Courtesy of Houghton Mifflin Company 4 ....1 wandered away [after four years’ study at the University of Wisconsin] on a glorious botani- cal and geological excursion, which has lasted nearly fifty years....always happy and free, poor and rich, without thought of diploma or of making a name, urged on and on through endless inspiring, Godful beauty.”’ Fame pushed its way however to John Muir. His books will live for many a generation to read with delight and with reverence for the man.— And he will be greatly missed in practical work. At the time of his death he was president of the Society for the Preservation of National Parks and vice-president of the California Associated Societies for the Conservation of Wild Life, and always his judgment and personal influence came as authority. [Photograph from The Story of My Boyhood and Youth] SPOOR Oe SNS RIOOes \ ' ‘ a Map to show the extent of unexplored territory in the north polar region, and the various points of activity of the Canadian Arctic expedition commanded by Vilhjalmur Stefansson. The unexplored region is supposed to contain somewhere within it, as proved by a study of the tides, a body of land of continental proportions or an archipelago of islands, such as seen to the eastward +3. ‘‘Karluk”’ frozen solidly in the ice pack broke from what had been considered permanent winter quarters and drifted westward, September 23, 1913, leaving Stefansson and hunting party stranded on shore ‘ +4. ‘‘Karluk”’ crushed in the ice pack in which it had been carried four months, and sank, January 10, 1914. Twelve survivors rescued from Wrangel Island, September 7, 1914 + Martin Point. Stefansson and two companions, March 22, 1914, started north over the sea ice for a thirty-day exploration journey into the unknown region, having heard nothing from the ‘‘ Karluk”’ to that time and having arranged for various activities of the southern party of the expedition in winter quarters at Collinson Point. Nothing has been heard from this exploration party to date, one year later in 1915 : 44. One of the small vessels of the expedition probably at this point in winter quarters, 1914-15. Proceeded under charge of Wilkins in the summer of 1914 to form base of supplies for Stefansson should he be able to reach Banks Land instead of returning to the north coast of Canada or Alaska +2. Winter quarters 1914-15 of the southern land party under R. M. Anderson, having proceeded to this position with two small vessels of the expedition in the summer of 1914 for scientific study of the Eskimo there, of the copper deposits, etc. 122 WITH STEFANSSON IN THE ARCTIC A BRIEF HISTORY OF STEFANSSON’S MOVEMENTS FROM SEPTEMBER 20, 1913, WHEN HE LEFT THE “KARLUK” ON A HUNTING TRIP INLAND, UNTIL APRIL 7, 1914, WHEN HE WAS LAST SEEN ON DRIFTING ICE, OVER 180 FATHOMS OF SEA AT THE EDGE OF THE CONTINENTAL SHELF IN THE ARCTIC OCEAN By Burt M. McConnell Of the Canadian Arctic Expedition, 1913-1914 HEN early in September, 1913, the drifting ice-field in which the “ Karluk”’ was frozen be- came stationary about eighteen miles off the mouth of the Colville River in 149° W. longitude and remained in that position for ten days, Stefansson and Captain Bartlett concluded that the ship was in safe winter quarters. Our four Eskimo, although excellent marks- men, had been unable to hunt seals suc- cessfully because the animals were not at that season covered with a layer of blubber sufficient to keep them afloat after being killed, and as fresh meat is the only known preventive of scurvy in the Arctic, Stefansson decided to take ashore a party, consisting of Jenness, Wilkins and myself, to hunt caribou forty miles inland on the Colville River. The “ Karluk,” as is probably known to most readers of the JOURNAL, was carried to the westward by a gale a few days after our departure, and four months later, on January 10, 1914, was crushed by the ice at a point about eighty miles northeast of Wrangel Is- land which is in 180° W. longitude and 71° N. latitude. She sank the next day, leaving her company of twenty-five marooned on the ice. Under the leader- ship of Captain Bartlett, sixteen mem- bers of the expedition succeeded in reaching Wrangel Island on March 12. Here they maintained themselves in two camps until September 7, 1914. On this date they were rescued by Olaf Swenson in the power schooner “King and Winge,” word of their plight having been brought to the outside world by Captain Bartlett. Eight of the original company, including two of the world’s foremost scientists, James Murray, oceanographer, and Henri Beuchat, an- thropologist, became separated from the main party and have never been heard from since. George 5S. Malloch, geolo- gist, Bjarne Mamen, his assistant and George Breddy, a fireman, perished on Wrangel before aid could reach them. The story of the rescue of the survivors from Wrangel Island was told in the February number of Harper’s Magazine, and in the April issue of the same maga- zine, will be told the story of Stefansson’s various activities after reaching shore and of the trip over the ice from which he and his two companions have not returned.— Anyone who knows Stefans- son, who is familiar with his singular psychology, his resourcefulness and _ his determination, would understand that he would let nothing, not even separa- tion from the “ Karluk” and the larger part of his scientific staff, interfere with the accomplishment of one of the main objects of the Canadian Arctic Expedi- tion — which was the exploration of as much as possible of the unknown area north of Alaska and western Canada. There could be no surprise therefore at his plan to go northward with dog teams over the ice in search of the group of islands or the hypothetical continent which students of tidal phenomena have argued exists in that area, although the 123 124 original plan had been to make the search from Banks Land or Prince Patrick Land with the well-equipped “ Karluk”’ as base. Our hunting party from the “ Karluk,” on September 20, 1913, found the ice between the ship and the shore one continuous jumble of chaotic ridges. Often they were thirty-five feet high. We were two days in covering the dis- tance to a small sandspit five miles from Beechey Point on the mainland. Find- ing the ice over the warmer river water of the Colville delta dangerously thin, Stefinsson decided that during the necessary waiting he would send me with one Eskimo back to the ship for two more men and another dog team — so sure was he of obtaining more than the amount of game the additional team could haul. On the night of September 22, he wrote a letter to Captain Bartlett and gave me explicit instructions cover- ing every possible contingency that could arise on the journey back to the ship. These instructions were not needed after midnight a This in- however, for just furious northeast gale arose. creased and continued unabated for three days at the end of which time the sea ice was broken off within a mile of shore. the herself, she must be drifting before the It was very evident that unless “Karluk” had been able to free wind westward in the ice field which had so long been her berth. About one week after reaching “Amouliktok” as the sandspit is called, we ventured over the ice of the delta, gaining the shore September 28. On October 3 we started westward on the sled journey to Point Barrow. Reaching there we found that what the Eskimo thought was the “ Karluk” had drifted past a week before, and that no one had come ashore from her. Stefans- son decided to proceed to Collinson Point THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL three hundred sled-miles east of Point Barrow. We had learned that here Dr. R. M. Anderson and the southern party, which had sailed from Nome at the same time as the “ Karluk,” in the auxiliary vessels “Alaska”? and “Mary Sachs,” were in safe winter quarters. Our journey to Collinson Point was without noteworthy incident. We had rapidly become accustomed to sled travel and soon Stefdnsson’s extraor- dinary ability as an ice traveler ceased to excite our comment. His accurate knowledge of local conditions often saved us from making unnecessary marches. Driftwood is plentifully distributed every few miles from Point Barrow to Herschel Island, with the exception of a stretch of forty miles across Harrison Bay and another stretch of twenty miles across Smith Bay. Stefaénsson knew just where to look for this and could tell us approxi- mately how long it would take us to travel from our camp of that morning to another suitable site. Before leaving Point Barrow, he had sent out to various Eskimo villages along the coast south from Point Barrow to Kotzbue, letters of instructions for Cap- tain Bartlett in case he should reach the coast at any point, and on the way to Collinson Point, we left several of the letters with Eskimo at different places for the information of anyone who might come ashore from the ship. On the last day of our journey, we gained from Stefaénsson a demonstration of his ability in sled travel. He had taught Wilkins and me how to pitch camp in a blizzard and how to find our way without the aid of a compass by referring to the snow-drifts made by prevailing winds. On this occasion in a southwest blizzard, with wind blowin; at the rate of forty-five miles an hour and in a blinding snowstorm, Stefansson. led us without a trail or a landmark WITH STEFANSSON IN THE ARCTIC of any sort for twenty miles, and at the end of the journey was only one hun- dred yards out of the way. On several occasions that day, the last few hours of which we traveled in darkness, we entirely lost sight of him, although at no time did he ever go more than twenty feet ahead of the dogs. Arriving at Collinson Point too late to catch the outgoing mail, Stefansson, with one companion, started for Fort Mac- pherson to send out despatches, reports and letters. He also made arrange- ments there for boats and men to help the geographers of the southern party in the work of locating a navigable channel from Fort Macpherson to the mouth of the Mackenzie; he purchased the gasoline schooner “ North Star” and her complete outfit of tools, arms, ammunition and provisions to take the place of the “Karluk”; engaged ex- perienced men, Storker Storkersen, who had been with Leffingwell and Mikkel- sen in 1906-07, and Ole Anderson and Aarnout Castel, men of many years of Arctic experience, for his contemplated trip northward over the ice, and re- turned to Martin Point late in February. In the meantime, Stefansson had sent me to Point Barrow to bring back Jenness, whom he had left at Cape Halkett to study the Eskimo there, and to get the mail. I was unable to return before March 22, the day on which the ice party started. By having a rest of only three hours and starting out at night from Martin Point, I was able to overtake the party out on the sea ice, and I asked Stefansson to allow me to accompany him as a member of the supporting party. This party consisted of Captain Bernard of the “Mary Sachs,” Wilkins, photographer, Johan- sen, marine biologist, and Ole Anderson. We were to accompany Stefdnsson, Storkersen and Castel due north for ten 125 days, carrying extra rations and dog food. On the second day out however, Captain Bernard fell from a high pres- sure ridge and had to be taken back to shore, where the wound on his head was sewed up and arrangements were made with Crawford, one of the engineers, to take his place. On our second attempt, we came to open water the second day. The ice field on the opposite side was moving so rapidly that it was considered impracti- cable to ferry across with our improvised sled-rafts, so Stefansson availed himself of this temporary delay to send Wilkins and Castel back to headquarters with some excess baggage, and for the use of the southern party a few seals we had killed. They started at noon. By four o'clock that afternoon, snow had begun to fall heavily and the light southwest wind had increased to about twenty- five miles an hour. Three hours later we were in the grasp of a hurricane that blew at the rate of eighty-three miles an hour. This razed one of our tents and detached from the grounded shore ice the floe on which we were camped. The next day Stefansson and Storkersen ascertained by observations that we had drifted about forty miles to the eastward and thirty miles out to sea. This misfortune, which kept Wilkins and Castel on shore, of course reduced our party to only six men, nineteen dogs and three sleds. We encountered fre- quent obstacles in the form of huge pres- sure ridges, over which trails had to be cut with picks, and open water on sev- eral occasions prevented us from making rapid progress. We continued neverthe- less steadily northward. Two of our sleds were of the light Point Barrow type, and soon became splint- ered by the rough ice. (All our best sleds were aboard the “ Karluk.’’) The 126 third sled was of the heavy Nome freight- ing style and capable of withstanding the hardest usage. The dogs had been gathered from points between Fort Macpherson and Nome, and were in very good condition. Our tents were light in weight and both water and wind proof. It usually took us an hour to pitch camp, get dinner over and feed the dogs, after which we would immediately roll into our sleeping bags. Each man, be- fore coming into the tent, was expected to brush every particle of snow from his clothing. This invariable rule of Stef- Ansson’s prevented our sleeping gear from getting damp and insured the com- fort of every man who obeyed it. Wil- kins and I had been chosen to do the cooking, but when he had been left ashore, both Anderson and Stefansson took turns with me. It was our custom to have breakfast at six thirty in the morning and, as soon as the meal was finished, everyone except the cook would begin breaking camp, loading the sleds, harnessing the dogs and preparing for the start. Stefansson would then take the lead, carrying a small ice-pick with which to test the ice and knock off sharp corners in our path, and we would continue in single file until either open water or a pressure ridge would bring us to a halt. The ice on which we traveled was always in motion, so that on some days our actual progress would be slight, even though we had traveled many miles. This was rather discouraging, but no one ever thought of turning back. Our drift proved to be to the southeast. Storkersen took observations daily and Johansen took soundings at every oppor- tunity. On April 3, Storkersen’s ob- servation was as follows: 140° 50’ 22” W. longitude, 70° 13’ 11” N. latitude; while his observation on the last day at THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL “Camp Separation’’, April 7, gave our position as 140° 30’ 7” W. longitude, 70° 20’ 4’ N. latitude (about sixty-five nautical miles from shore). We had actually lost ground in those four days! Johansen’s soundings, which had been heretofore from 17 to 30 fathoms, went abruptly from 34 fathoms to 70, 149 and 180, which proved that we were on the edge of the Continental Shelf. Here Stefansson decided to send Craw- ford, Johansen and myself back to shore with two dog teams and the two worn- out sleds. He took with him Storkersen and Anderson, two of the hardiest and most experienced men in that country, the six best dogs, the best sled and a load of over nine hundred pounds. This included two rifles and four hun- dred rounds of ammunition. He told us at parting that he would continue northward for fifteen days before turning back. He also left orders for one of the ships to be taken to Banks Land, in case the winds and current might carry the ice on which he was traveling near enough to the island to warrant him making a dash for it. Since then the party has not been seen, although the “Polar Bear” and “ Belvedere” searched the west and southwest coasts of Banks Land in summer. Our journey back to shore was rather uneventful. There were a few tense moments, when on one occasion, three polar bears came up to our tent. At another time the ice on which we were camped broke up into small pieces, leaving our tent within eight feet of the edge on one side and about twelve on the other. Three days after we separated from Stefansson we were halted tempo- rarily by coming to a lead so wide that the ice field on the opposite side could not be seen. A southwest blizzard how- ever, closed the lead and we crossed while the pressure ridge was forming. WITH STEFANSSON IN THE ARCTIC The wind at that time attained a velocity of about seventy miles an hour, although it did not affect the grounded shore ice on which we then were camped. Two days later our progress was made difficult by the enormous pres- sure ridges we encountered. One of these was from twenty to forty-five feet in height, half a mile wide, and extended east and west as far as the eye could reach. While on the trip out we had on one occasion progressed eighteen miles in ten hours. Now on one day we trav- eled only five hundred yards in ten hours. But we finally reached shore late in the afternoon of April 16, on Canadian soil, about eighty miles east of our starting point. Whaling captains report the spring of 1914 one of the earliest they have ever known. Open water appeared in the vicinity of Cape Bathurst in March and there is every reason to believe that the same weather conditions prevailed on the west coast of Banks Land. There- fore if Stefaénsson tried to reach the island he was undoubtedly prevented by open water. It is possible that he has reached the unknown land he sought and is unable to return because of lack of sufficient food for the journey. But experienced Arctic men agree that the unusually early and rapid westerly drift of the ice must have seriously impeded his progress north and that he is most likely adrift on the ice-pack somewhere in the great open sea between Banks Land and Wrangel Island. Wherever he may be, I firmly believe he is alive and that he could be found by a search expedition. He and his two companions: should have returned to the north coast of the continent in May or June, 1914. When they did not do so—even in July or August, and after two whaling captains had searched the west coast of Banks 127 Land for traces of the party without success, I came out to civilization with the intention of organizing a relief ex- pedition to search for them —and, after I heard that the “ Karluk”’ had sunk, to look also for the eight men who became separated from Captain Bartlett’s main party on the retreat over the ice to Wrangel Island. The plans call for a small power schooner and two to four hydro-aéro- planes with experienced aviators. We would have the machines assembled at Nome and tested before taking them to Wrangel Island. Beginning there and using the ship as a base, we would under- take to search a strip of ice and water one hundred and seventy-five miles long by twenty miles wide daily by having one machine (or better two, one for the relief of the other, if needed) fly at a height of a thousand feet carrying ob- servers equipped with powerful glasses. The machine would proceed one hundred and seventy-five miles in a northwesterly direction, turn at right angles and fly for twenty miles, then turn again and fly back to the ship parallel to its outgoing course. The ship in the meantime would have proceeded twenty miles to the east to meet the incoming machine thus giv- ing the change aviators and the mecha- nician an opportunity to prepare the second machine for the next day’s flight. Experienced aviators, such as make up the board of governors of the Aéro Club of America, and explorers, including Peary, have approved the plans, and all agree that the work ought to be done. By such a plan a strip of the Arctic Ocean one hundred and _ seventy-five miles wide extending from Wrangel Island, Siberia, to Herschel Island, Can- ada, could be searched in' the summer season of 1915 if ordinary weather con- ditions prevailed. N (LL) | D i Mm | ! ll rapids —-——— route of the 1 Roosevelt-Rondon expedition i it ill i i CENTRAL BRAZIL AND THE NEW RIO THEODORO Sketch map of the south-central part of the Amazon drainage system, based on the surveys of the Brazilian Telegraphic Commission, showing the course of the Rio Theodoro and the route of the Roose- velt-Rondon expedition. Scale, 175 miles to theinch. The inset shows the location of the main map Reproduced by permission, in revised form, from the Bulletin of the American Geographical Society for July, 1914 128 THE GEOGRAPHICAL RESULTS OF THE ROOSEVELT- RONDON EXPEDITION By W. L. G. Joerg American Geographical Society to the excellent one of Africa published in the London Geographi- cal Journal in 1911 — showing the state of our knowledge, a year ago, of the . topography of South America, we would find right in the heart of the continent a blank space as large and as long as Nevada. Across the whole length of this unknown territory lay the route of the Roosevelt-Rondon expedition. Its borders were long well known, although in some cases accurate surveys had not been made until recent years. To the northwest lies the Madeira River, one of the most important highways of the Amazon basin, the authoritative survey of which was carried out in 1878 by an American naval officer, Commander T. O. Selfridge; to the north lies a group of three rivers, the Canuma, Abacaxis and Maué-asst, whose lower courses, which drain into a backwater connecting the Madeira and the Amazon, have been known since Chandless’ survey in 1868; to the east flows the Tapajoz, one of the main affluents of the Amazon, long known and in 1895-6 more accurately explored by the French traveler Coudreau; and, finally, to the southwest the unknown area is bounded by the Gy-Parand, which was properly mapped only in 1907 on one of Colonel Rondon’s previous expeditions. These expeditions were undertaken on behalf of the Brazilian government to construct a telegraph line to the rubber settle- ments on the Madeira and resulted in the exploration of the whole little-known highland region extending from the | we could consult a map — similar upper Paraguay to the upper Madeira, together with the drainage systems of both slopes. It was on the occasion of the second of these expeditions, in 1909, that Colonel Rondon came across the headwaters of a river flowing northward. To follow it to its mouth was the object of the 1914 expedition. It might have veered to the left and turned out to be nothing but a source-stream of the Gy- Parana; or it might have bent eastward and developed into a tributary of the Juruena, one of the sources of the Tapa- joz. It did neither. It flowed almost due north and thereby crossed the unknown area from end toend. Therein lies the importance of the discovery. The new river thus turns out to be the longest known tributary of the Madeira; its length is about 900 miles and it extends over seven degrees of latitude. Its position permits various conjectures as to the hydrography of the region. To the west, between it and the Gy- Parana, the interval seems too small to allow a river system of any consider- able size to develop; this area is proba- bly drained in opposite directions by their tributaries. A remark in Colonel Roosevelt’s book! would seem to cor- roborate this assumption. He tells of hearing of one of the rubber-gatherers who lost his way while working on the Gy-Parana and, after wandering about for twenty-eight days, finally came out on the Maderainha River, which is a 1 THROUGH THE BRAZILIAN WILDERNESS. By Theodore Roosevelt. Charles Scribner’s Sons, New York, 1914. 129 130 small stream joining the new river from the left in about 83° S. latitude. On the other hand, to the east of the new river, between it and the Tapajoz, it is quite possible that larger rivers exist. Indeed, Colonel Roosevelt’s nar- rative makes this very likely. In lati- tude 7° 34’ the new river was joined from the right by a stream of equal size. That this stream extended up at least as far as 8° 48’ had been established shortly before by the Amazonas Bound- ary Commission, which ascended to this latitude. It did not even seem unlikely that it might be the lower course of a river, named the Anands, whose head- waters the expedition had crossed before reaching the new river; in which case it would practically have the same length. This problem, we are told, may be solved soon, as one of Colonel Rondon’s subordinates was to attempt the descent of the Anands this year. The existence of another large river in this area is made plausible by a further reference in Colonel Roosevelt’s book. The year previous, he was told, five Indian rubber-gatherers were work- ing on the Canumaé in about 9° S. lati- tude, thus establishing that it extends at least as far south as this. Chandless’ survey did not go above 5° 17’, but the size of the river at this point —in contrast with the Abacaxis to the east, which, in 6° 12’, was a very small stream with the boughs of the trees on its banks joining overhead — made it probable that it rose far to the south. This supposition is expressed on various Brazilian maps, where the Canuma is made to drain the whole region between the Madeira and the Tapajoz and thus, indeed, to usurp the area which, it has developed, is tributary to the new river. The previous references to the activi- ties of the rubber-gatherers in this re- gion may have called up in the reader’s THE-AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL mind the question how the expedition can be portrayed as having traversed unknown territory. It is true that the “unknown” river had been ascended for two-thirds of its length by these men on their search for rubber; the expedi- tion came across the first of them in 10° 24’. Indeed, they had a name for it, calling it the Castanha above the con- fluence with the river joining it in 7° 34’, and the lower Aripuanan below this point; the right affluent entering here they termed the upper Aripuanan, con- sidering it the main stream. On the upper Aripuanan they had ascended to above 9°. But, to use Colonel Roose- velt’s words, “the governmental and scientific authorities, native and foreign, remained in complete ignorance”; no map conveyed an inkling of these facts except the location of the confluence of the Aripuanan with the Madeira. The reason is obvious. Pioneers, although often the first in a new region, generally do not bring back information which can be utilized geographically. In our own West many a miner has been the first white man to go up a mountain, valley or to cross a snowy pass; but the world at large knew nothing of the region until the surveyor had been there. Whenever a region is newly explored, the geographer’s first wish is to see an authentic map of it. In the present case he is doomed to some disappointment. Two of the three maps in Colonel Roosevelt’s book represent the new river in some detail. One is a sketch map on the scale of 105 miles to an inch showing the river by itself. While based on the astronomical positions given in the text, a certain stiffness of line and the lack of relation to the surrounding regions betoken an ungeographical hand. The other is a general map of Brazil on the scale of 240 miles to the inch prepared by the Brazilian Telegraphic Commission THE ROOSEVELT-RONDON EXPEDITION and forwarded by Lieutenant Lyra, who had charge of the survey of the river. This is far more satisfactory. On it the drainage of the whole region between the upper Paraguay and the Madeira is represented according to the surveys of Colonel Rondon’s expedition of 1909; on it, above all, is the first authentic representation of the new river. Here it has the verisimilitude of nature, but it is unfortunately on too small a scale to show much more than a general outline. What the geographer would like is a map such as that published on the scale of sixteen miles to the inch, of an expedi- tion through similar country from the Xingti to the Tapajoz, by the German zoologist, Miss Snethlage, whom Colonel Roosevelt met in Belem. But this is almost an ideal case; and it would seem proper to expect the desired information rather from the Brazilian party of the expedition, whose aim was _ primarily geographical, than from the American party, whose aim was primarily zodlogi- cal. Doubtless a satisfactory map will be, or has been, published in Colonel Rondon’s official report, but if it is as inaccessible as are the surveys of his previous expeditions, the present mate- rial will long have to satisfy our wants.! In discussing Colonel Rondon’s previ- ous explorations, Colonel Roosevelt says that they “received no recognition by the geographical societies of Europe or the United States.” This is indeed true — although they did not escape the vigilance of the leading German geo- graphical periodical. Inaccessibility of the official reports, even to the special- 1 The authentic map of the river has just come to hand, since the above was written. It accom- panies the London Geographical Journal for February, 1915. It is on the relatively large scale of 64 miles to the inch and is reduced from a manuscript map supplied by Colonel Roosevelt, which is based on the surveys made by Lieuten- ants J. S. Lyra and Pyrineos de Sousa under the direction of Colonel Rondon.— W. L.°G. J. 131 ist, is the main reason. One of the great merits of Colonel Roosevelt’s book lies in the fact that he has made us familiar with the highly important work of the Brazilian Telegraphic Commission. The only original map showing the results of these explorations, which diligent search has revealed, appeared in a Rio de Janeiro newspaper, although it seems very prob- able that the ultimate source goes back to some official report. This delinea- tion, which was reproduced in the Ger- man periodical referred to, is incorporated on the accompanying map for the region between the upper Paraguay and the upper Madeira. To this have been added the new river as represented on the map of the Brazilian Telegraphic Commission accompanying Colonel Roosevelt’s book and the various features earlier referred to, in an endeavor to present as correct a picture of the region as possible. Ref- erence to any standard map or atlas will show how greatly it differs. The difficulties which further beset the conscientious interpreter of this important journey are well illustrated by the question of name. As soon as it developed on the expedition that the new river was a major stream and not simply one of the headwaters of the Gy-Paranaé or the Juruena, it was formally christened “Rio Roosevelt” by Colonel Rondon on orders received from the Brazilian government before his departure. Subsequently — because of the difficulty of pronunciation for Brazilians, it is understood — Colonel Roosevelt’s Christian name was sub- stituted. On two of the maps accom- panying his book this name is given as “Rio Téodoro.” This is the Spanish form; in Portuguese the name would be Theodoro. Although it is rather pre- sumptuous to question the accuracy of the name used by an explorer to desig- nate the object of his discovery, the 132 latter form is used on the accompanying map, as it seems the more plausible and the Portuguese names throughout the book are not always correctly rendered. Besides those relating to the discovery of the new river Colonel Roosevelt’s book permits various other deductions of geographical interest. The last rapids were encountered in about latitude 7° 30’ S., just below the mouth of the upper Aripuanan. ‘This point is worthy of note, as the last rapids on the south- ern tributaries of the Amazon indicate the boundary between two of the major physiographic provinces of South Amer- ica, the Brazilian Highlands and the Amazon Lowlands. This boundary similar to the “fall line” between our own Atlantic coastal plain and_ the Appalachian piedmont region — lies in- creasingly farther upstream as _ one proceeds from east to west. Thus, on the Xingti it lies in 3° S.; on the Tocan- tins, in 4°; on the Tapajoz, in 43°; on the Maué-assti, in 5°; on the Canuma, probably in 6°; and on the Madeira, in 82° S. Its location in 73° S. on the Rio Theodoro, between the Canumé and the Madeira, therefore indicates that the even outline of this natural boundary is not here interrupted. The last rapids are also of importance in marking the upper limit of steam navigation —a barrier which, in the case of the Ma- deira, has been overcome by the con- struction of a railroad (see map), opened in 1912, which connects with navi- THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL gable waters on the Mamoré River above. The contrast between two other natural provinces was very noticeable to the members of the expedition. On the upland plateau of Matto Grosso, which separates the south- and south- west-flowing drainage of the upper Paraguay and the Guaporé from the north- and northeast-flowing drainage of the Madeira and Amazon tributaries, the prevailing type of vegetation is open grassland. To the north lies the jungle of the equatorial forest. The route of the expedition led from the one into the other north of Vilhena in about 123° S. The former is strikingly pictured in the illustration facing page 174, the latter in the illustrations facing pages 248 and 262 of Colonel Roosevelt’s book. Many other references throughout the book are of geographic interest, such as those on the economic possibilities of the Matto Grosso plateau, on the Parecis and Nhambiquara Indians, and, in the appendices, the pertinent classification of travelers in South America and the comment on the paleogeography of the continent. But above and beyond all this is the record of human achievement. Hardships and dangers there were, even the stern realities of murder and death; but what are these to spirits kindred to that gallant band in the frozen South, over whose grave is so fittingly inscribed, in the words of the grand old rover of the days when the world was young, the eternal longing of the race? } rs PRO ore oss set hy e Neg DA oh te cs eee ye a i eo 7 eior . mr = DANIEL GIRAUD ELLIOT Mammalogist and Ornithologist Dr. Elliot’s personal collection of birds (1869) was the first material of any kind that the American Museum owned, and his purchases and gifts laid the foundation for the great department of mammalogy and ornithology DANIEL GIRAUD ELLIOT A BRIEF BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH ON THE OCCASION OF HIS EIGHTIETH BIRTHDAY TO EMPHASIZE HIS LONG DEVOTION TO SCIENTIFIC WORK AND HIS SERVICES TO THE MUSEUM HE month of March, 1915, brings the eightieth anniversary of the birth of Daniel Giraud Elliot, the man who with the late Professor Albert S. Bickmore shares the honor of being one of the two scientific founders of the American Museum of Natural History. The original collection of birds belonging to Dr. Elliot was the nucleus of the Museum’s later riches and his purchases and gifts laid the foundation of the great department of mammals and birds. Also from the standpoint of knowledge in natural history, he was authority in New York City at the time of the foundation of the Museum, the best-equipped, practi- cally the only man able to give advice in scientific matters relating to the institution. Thus to the trustees of the Museum, men of business who wished to promote science and build up a great educational and scientific institu- tion, Dr. Elliot was an efficient guide. Professor Bickmore conceived the idea of the Museum; he gave his effort to create interest in the plans and to raise funds to carry them out, but he came to Dr. Elliot for advice involving scien- tific knowledge. In the winter of 1868-69 when Pro- fessor Bickmore had just returned from the Malay Archipelago and the charter for the Museum had lately been given to the body of New York merchants, he especially depended upon Dr. Elhot for advice. He hoped also to obtain Elhot’s collection of birds to start the exhibits of the new Museum. The collection consisted of some one thousand speci- mens, a large number for that early time, covering most of the described species of North America. It had been accumulated during a period of ten to fifteen years, in fact ever since Elliot’s early boyhood. This collection at the moment was of considerable concern to Elliot because he was planning to go abroad for an indefinite period of study. No storage building at that time was fireproof and there was also the danger from moths. ‘Therefore when Professor Bickmore suggested that he dispose of the collection to the new Museum, he accepted the plan. This particular col- lection was the first material of any kind the Museum obtained. It was turned over to J. G. Bell, then the leading tax1- dermist in New York, and as fast as mounted the birds were put on exhibition in the Arsenal in Central Park, where the Museum had its temporary quarters. Among the specimens in this collec- tion were five of the Labrador duck.! 1The following facts were gained from Dr. Elliot regarding the disappearance of the Labra- dor duck at the time he was a boy: The cause of the extinction of the Labrador duck is a mystery. The bird was a strong flier and a sea duck, having no special enemies that anyone knew of, and in the earliest part of the last century was a very common bird. Imperceptibly its numbers began to grow less, a fact that at first excited very little comment. When Elliot as a boy in continually adding to his bird collec- tion visited the New York markets, especially Washington and Fulton, he would find many Labrador ducks hanging up for sale, sometimes as many as would make a barrel of them. After a few years, he found however, that the full- plumaged males did not appear, that the birds the markets received were mostly females and young males. Then it began to dawn upon those interested that the bird was gradually becoming extinct, and it seemed from that time on to fade rapidly out of existence. ‘The last bird that Dr. Elliot received, a splendidly full-plumaged male which is in the Museum now, was killed on Long Island. 133 154 This bird is now wholly extinct with only forty specimens known in all the collections of the world. The American Museum is highly fortunate therefore. Dr. Elliot’s five specimens are exhibited in group form, one of the most valuable of the bird groups in the Museum. At the last sale of this bird one specimen brought five thousand dollars. At the time of the foundation of the American Muse- um, New York City was practi- eally destitute of any scientific in- stitutions except the Lyceum of Natural History. This was holding its small meetings presided over by Major Delafield, in a room loaned through the cour- tesy of the Col- lege of Physicians and Surgeons at 1The second an- nual dinner of the Linnean Society of New York was held March 24,1914. Dr. Daniel Giraud Elliot of the American Mu- seum of Natural His- tory, veteran orni- thologist and mam- malogist, was the principal guest, and there was a notable gath- ering of scientists from all over the East to do him honor. Many of those present either recounted what they owed him personally or testi- fied to his creative ability when ornithology as a science was still in its infancy in this country. Among those who spoke were Professor Henry Fairfield Osborn, president of the American Mu- seum of Natural History, and Dr. F. A. Lucas, director; Dr. Witmer Stone of the Philadelphia Academy of Sciences; Drs. T. S. Palmer and A. J. Fisher of the Biological Survey at Washington; Messrs. Ernest Thompson Seton and Ernest Ingersoll, the well-known writers on animal life. Other prominent scientists present were Dr. Frank M. Chapman, Mr. W. DeW. Miller, Dr. John H. Sage, Dr.;Louis B. Bishop, Dr. William T. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL Fourth Avenue and Fourteenth Street, then the northern boundary of the city. There were few natural history asso- ciates therefore with whom Elliot could compare notes. The conditions of the time were vividly stated by Dr. Elliot in his address before the Linnean Society of New York! in March, 1914: I do not suppose my boyhood was different from that of any other lad interested in natural history. I began to make a collection of birds —why I began I have no idea, prob- ably could not help it—and when it verged toward com- pletion I did not know what to do with it, for there was no one of my age anywhere to be found who sympa- thized with me in my pursuit; I was practically alone. My cousin, Jacob Giraud, author of the Birds of Long Island, had just en- tered upon the close of his career, and wrote no more. Audubon had en- tered upon the last years of his life; DeKay had but re- cently died in Al- Daniel Giraud Elliot at thirty years of age Hornaday, director of the New York Zodlogical Park, and Dr. C. H. Townsend, director of the New York Aquarium. At the close of the speech- making the Society presented Dr. Elliot with the Linnzan medal of honor, as a testimony of its appreciation of his preéminent position in orni- thology and mammalogy. In reply Dr. Elliot spoke of the science of ornithology as it existed sixty years ago at the beginning of his career; touched upon experiences in the past with many members of the Museum staff who were present that evening, and closed with a few words of advice and encouragement to the younger gener- ation, given with that kindliness of spirit which has endeared him to the hearts of those who at- tempt to follow in his footsteps.— Secretary, LINN AN Society oF New York. DANIEL GIRAUD ELLIOT — BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH bany; and in all the cities and within the boundaries of our great state, there was but one working ornithologist, George Newbold Lawrence, a man greatly older than my- self, whose sons were my friends and com- panions, but who had not inherited their father’s scientific tastes. Lawrence’s collec- tions seemed larger and more wonderful to my youthful eyes than any I have since seen in all the museums of the world. The condition in New York was pretty much repeated in other parts of the country. In Massachusetts there were no ornitholo- gists. Neither Allen nor Brewster had ap- peared and their predecessor, Brewer, had hardly been heard from. In Wash- ington the work was represented by Baird, who had just come to the Smithsonian In- stitution. There was no other natu- ralist in Washing- ton. Gillasa boy had begun his work on _ fishes, but the young naturalists, Coues and Ridgway had not yet been heard from Philadelphia was much better off however. Its ornithology was represented by George Cassin, one of the most erudite and com- petent ornitholo- gists this country has ever produced and the only one at that time famil- iar with exotic forms.! The city had its Academy and li- brary donated mainly by Dr. Thomas B. Wil- son. Also Leidy was at the height of his career. I 135 used to work a good deal in the old building on the corner of Broad and Sansom streets, my companion often Cope, then starting on his career, his alcoholic snakes and lizards contesting table space with my birds. In all the length and breadth of the land there was not a periodical devoted to the ways of birds, and it was hard sledging for any young ornithologist. The vast majority of 1A few years later through the publication of his Monographs, Elliot was brought into rather intimate relationship with Cassin, owing to the fact that the latter was the head of the firm of Bowen and Company (who served sO many years). Audubon for Dr. Elliot in 1897, when curator of zodlogy at Field Museum, Chicago sie]jop pursnoy) oay jo oo1ud & 4YUsnoO1q pos UST -loods 4se] of, “PpytomM oy jo suinesnur ot} [[e@ Ul suOUT -loods UMOUY AQIOJ ATWO O1B e104) pue sivoA AQ JOUIJXO usoq sey soloeds 94, ‘“698T ul WWnesNy, 9Y} JO uOoTssessod oy) OFUL OUTRO YOM OTL ‘Iq JO UOMjooT[00 [RUrst10 94} Woda SUsUTIO0dS JO SUI}SIS -u0d Wnosnfy UROLIOWIYy ot) ut dnois & WOdIJ Sprig MOY Mona YOCVHEVT LONILXa4 9€T the books which are our daily companions now and which we keep always within the reach of our hand, had not even been conceived, much less printed. With the exception of that of Lawrence, there was no private collection of birds of any mo- ment in the whole country —of which the Mississippi was the western bound- ary. It was but the glimmering of the dawn of that glorious day that was to pro- duce the famous com- pany of some of the greatest naturalists the world has ever seen, most of whom had already crossed the river. In the summer of 1869 Dr. Elhot went abroad _ pri- marily for study but also with a commission from the trustees through Robert L. Stuart, president of the Museum (who had succeeded John David Wolfe, the first president), to purchase for the Museum any material that he thought advisable. wied had lately died and the family de- material in Europe. Prince Maximilian of Neu- sired to dispose of his collections which he had made on his different journeys through South America and the western part of the United States. Dr. Elliot therefore visited Neuwied soon after arriving in Europe, taking a letter of introduction from the Princess Waldeck to the Prince of Wied.t He found the collections valuable because in a state Robert L. Stuart — The trustees of the Museum, through Robert L. Stuart, president, gave large commissions to Dr. Elliot for purchases of It was in this way that the Museum gained such valuable possessions as the Verreaux and Maximilian collections 1The following . interesting reminiscence is quoted from conversation with Dr. Elliot: ‘‘ I was very cordially received by the Prince, whom I found to be a young man of perhaps twenty-six or twenty-seven, unmarried, living at the time in the Palace in the wood a few miles from the town, with his mother, the Dowager Princess, and his sister Elizabeth. My stay in Neuwied, which lasted several days, was very pleasant. I met the Princess Elizabeth, then about eighteen years old, afterward so well known as Carmen Sylva. She showed me in the park the places where they went to hear the stags roar during the hunting season. At that time the present King of Rumania, who was Prince Charles of Hohenzollern, had arrived in Europe from Rumania, and it was,generally understood that he was on search for a wife. One afternoon when the Princess was walking with me, she spoke of the matter and wondered whom he would take. A day or so afterward the Prince, a very pleasant, 137 138 of excellent preservation, and containing the principal types of both the mammals and birds which the Prince had de- scribed. He therefore made the pur- chase and had the collection sent to the Museum. Another purchase was selected from the Verreaux Collection in Paris. The Messrs. Verreaux in the Place Royale in Paris had for many years been recog- nized as the largest dealers in natural history objects then in Europe and their collection of mammals and birds, shells and other material represented speci- mens from all over the world. Dr. Elliot spent several months studying the collections and as rapidly as he selected birds or mammals, they were mounted by Verreaux and shipped to New York until several thousand speci- mens had been obtained. Still a third collection which though very much smaller than the Manxi- milian or Verreaux, yet afforded some very valuable specimens, was that of Mme. Verdray. From her he got many rare specimens, as the collection was not a general one but consisted more particu- larly of species which were rare and difficult to procure. He also obtained valuable specimens from Frank of Amsterdam, a dealer on a considerable scale who obtained material from the Eastern Archipelago, his Dutch connections giving him greater facilities for such enterprise than had any other person in the trade. It was in the Museum of Messrs. Verreaux in Paris that a group! com- frank personage, arrived in Neuwied, and I with the many others was a guest at the grand dinner given in his honor at the Palace in the wood. It was during that visit that he became engaged to Princess Elizabeth. 1The group was done fairly well and had re- ceived the gold medal at one of the great exposi- tions. The animals and the man’s face too were strikingly well done — for the time. This group stood in the hall of the Arsenal and afterward in less and less conspicuous positions in the new THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL posed of an Arab on a camel attacked by two lions was purchased — not by Dr. Elliot however who preferred to put the 20,000 francs to a purpose more valuable to technical science, but by one of the trustees from New York who was visiting him. Besides these larger collections Dr. Elliot was able to pick up valuable single specimens from time to time during his stay in Europe. He one day chanced to find in a_ taxidermist’s window in London a specimen of a great auk in winter plumage, which he purchased for one hundred and _ five pounds.’ It was on one of the rare visits that Dr. Elliot made to New York during his stay in Europe that he succeeded in obtaining still further valuable bird ma- terial for the Museum. This had be- longed to his friend, Dr. A. L. Heerman, had been collected in the western and southwestern portions of the United States, and kept in unusually perfect condition. The collection was bought by Dr. Elliot and presented by him to the Museum. Added to his own one thou- sand birds which the Museum had gained possession of several years before, it brought the American Museum’s col- lections as regards the birds of North America to a state unsurpassed in num- bers and importance by any other col- lection of the time, unless perhaps by that of the National Museum at Wash- ington. On his final return in the early eighties building in Manhattan Square but has consider- able value to-day from the historical standpoint. It is now in the possession of the Carnegie Mu- seum, Pittsburg. 2 This specimen has a prominent place to-day in the bird collection on the second floor of the Museum. The label announces that it is the gift of Robert L. Stuart, which reminds us of the fact that when the great auk shipped by Dr. Elliot arrived in New York, it was paid for by the per- sonal check of Mr. Stuart, then president of the Museum. DANIEL GIRAUD ELLIOT — BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH after a sojourn abroad of nearly ten years, he brought with him a large col- lection of humming birds, made during his stay in Europe. At that time it was probably the most complete in the world. He had had the great good fortune to be present when large collections of hum- ing birds, like the Boucier, Mulsant and others, had been broken up and sold, and had therefore fortunately been able to make selections from them all, gain- ing many rare species and a number of types. In 1887 when moving from New Brighton, Staten Island, where he had made his home since his return from Europe, he gave this collection to the Museum in the case that he had had made forit. At about the same time the Museum gained Dr. Elliot’s books, a very full working library for ornitholo- gists, practically complete for the time with the exception of the serial publica- tions. Dr. Elliot has traveled in connection with his work more than have most naturalists. He visited the West In- dian Islands when scarcely out of boy- hood and also the southern portion of the United States, his curiosity and his desire to study and collect specimens greatly excited by the strange birds and mammals that he saw. In 1857 more than ten years before the founding of the American Museum, he went to Rio de Janeiro and did some study and collecting in Brazil. Immediately after, he went to Europe, of course with his interests as ornithologist and sportsman uppermost, passed from Malta to Sicily and on to Egypt, giving a few months to a trip up the Nile, shooting and preparing specimens. He returned to Cairo, formed a party and with camels crossed the long desert to Palestine. On reaching the eastern side of the Sinaitic PeninsuJa, he journeyed to the land 139 of Moab visiting the ancient city of Petra (capital of Esau’s kingdom), also going to Bethlehem and Jerusalem and on into Palestine as far as Damascus, crossing the Lebanon Mountains at an altitude of ten thousand feet, and re- turning to Europe from Beirut. Later in life he made two zoological trips to Alaska, once as a member of the Harriman Expedition, the researches of which in many volumes are still in the course of publication. In 1896 he was commissioned by the Field Museum of Natural History in Chicago [he had gone there in 1894 as head of the department of zodlogy] to lead an expedition into Africa to get specimens for the institution. He spent a year in passing through Somaliland and Ogaden and was on his way to the Boran country when he was prevented by illness from carrying on the work. This expedition was highly successful in obtaining specimens of the African spe- cies of quadrupeds many of which are on exhibition in the Field Museum to-day. Also somewhat later he led an expedition for the Field Museum into the Olympic Mountains. He has spent eighteen months in an alound-the-world journey since 1906 when he began the preparation of his re- cently published Review of the Primates. He had not progressed very far in the preparation for this work when he realized how impossible it was to do much on the subject in the United States since representatives of the Primates from either the Eastern or Western Hemispheres are very few in American museums. He therefore sailed for Eu- rope in April 1907 and did not return until 1909. During this time he visited place after place, studying the types of lemurs and monkeys both in museums and zoological gardens. After working in one after another of the large Euro- 140 pean museums, he went to Egypt, went up the Nile to the second cataract and then directed his course to India. He studied monkeys of various species there, still other species in Ceylon, and then went over from Calcutta to Rangoon and passed through Burma, going as far north as Mandalay, the old capital on the Ira- wadi River. Returning to Rangoon he passed over to the Straits Settlements and visited the museums and zodlogical gardens there. He went from Singa- pore to Java and stopped at Batavia for some time. Returning to Singapore he moved to Hong Kong, passed up the river to Canton, and then returning went to Shanghai. Then he journeyed eight hundred miles up the Yang-tse- kiang River to Hankow, and from there crossed through the heart of China, to Peking, to Tien-tsin, and back by sea to Shanghai. From China he went to Japan, passing through the Inland Sea and landing at Kobe; then to Kioto, where he remained a considerable time because exceedingly interested in the zoological gardens and in the wild mon- keys which inhabited the forests all around the city. He visited the places in Japan likely to further his researches, and then started for home. On his way to San Francisco he visited a number of the islands of the Honolulu group, among them the one on which is Mauna Loa, the smaller voleano at the foot of Mauna Loa being in action at the time of his visit. After reaching the United States, Dr. Elliot came at once to the American Museum to devote research in hand. Somewhat later he went again to Europe — to London, Paris Leiden, Berlin, Dresden, Vienna and Munich, to do certain comparative study still necessary. Comparative data on Primates was difficult to obtain. For more than a century they have been himself to the THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL a subject for study by naturalists in many countries and thus the types are to be found in all corners of the earth — wherever scientific research has been done. Since the material is so greatly scattered, it could seldom be brought side by side for comparison of charac- teristics. Thus the monograph proved to be an immense labor — which was conscientiously accomplished. The work now finished is an elaborate treat- ment, in three quarto volumes, of the lemurs and monkeys of the Old and New Worlds, as well as of the anthropoid apes. It was published as a mono- graph! of the American Museum. Dr. Elliot is the author of many volumes? besides the recent Review of 1 The series of illustrations in Dr. Elliot’s mono- graph (from photographs by A. E. Anderson) both in fidelity to nature and artistic treat- ment of half tones, are of an excellence never before reached in works on osteology or craniol- ogy. As reviewers have said, ‘‘....by means of more than one hundred photographic plates of skulls, giving lateral, frontal, ventral and dorsal views, the close student of the monkeys has all the world’s types, as it were, brought to him. The value of these plates cannot be overesti- mated, and the work would be a notable one were it merely a portfolio of them.’’ 2 The following is a list of some of the important publications of Dr. Elliot: A Monograph of the Tetraonine, or Family of the Grouse. 27 pls. col., with descriptive letterpress. fol. New York, 1864-1865. A Monograph of the Pittide, or Family of the Ant Thrushes. 31 pls. col., with descriptive letterpress. fol. New York, 1867. (Second edition, pp. xxiii, 1 tab., 51 pls. col., with descriptive letterpress. London, 1893-95.) The New and Heretofore Unfigured Species of the Birds of North America. 2 vol. illust. col. fol. New York, 1869. A Monograph of the Phasianide, or Family of the Pheasants. 2 vols. illust. col. fol. New York, 1872. A Monograph of the Paradiseide, or Birds of Paradise. 37 pls. col., with descriptive letter- press. fol. London, 1873. A Monograph of the Bucerotidae, or Family of the Hornbills. 59 pls. col., with descriptive letterpress. fol. London, 1876-82. A Classification and Synopsis of the Trochi- lide. pp. xii, 277. text illust. (Smithson- ian Contributions to Knowledge) 4°. Wash- ington, 1879. A Monograph of the Felide, or Family of the Cats. 43 pls. col., with descriptive letter- press. fol. London, 1883. DANIEL GIRAUD ELLIOT— BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH Primates and in addition to hundreds of papers published in scientific journals here and abroad. Some of his books such as North American Shore Birds and The Wild Fowl of the United States and British Possessions have had some educa- tional influence in bringing about the popular interest in birds that exists in this decade in America. These books are wholly untechnical in character, and were designed largely for sportsmen and bird lovers. Dr. Elliot stood as an expert adviser for the Museum in its early days. The American Museum would not forget that North American Shore Birds: A History of the Snipes, Sandpipers, Plovers and their Allies. pp. xvi, 268. 74 pls. text illust. 8°. New York, 1895. The Gallinaceous Game Birds of North Amer- ica. pp. 220. 46 pls. and color chart. 8°. London, 1897. The Wild Fowl of the United States and British Possessions, or the Swans, Geese, Ducks and Mergansers of North America. pp. xxii, 316. 63 pls. 8°. New York, 1898. Synopsis of the Mammals of North America and the Adjacent Seas. Field Col. Museum Publ. 1901. The Land and Sea Mammals of Middle America and the West Indies. 2 vols. Field Col. Museum Publ. 1904. A Check List of the Mammals of the North American Continent, the West Indies and the Neighboring Seas. Field Col. Museum Publ. 1905. A Catalogue of the Collection of Mammals in the Field Columbian Museum. 1907. A Review of the Primates. 3 vols. 11 color pls. 32 pls. American Museum of Natural His- tory, 1913. The Life and Habits of Wild Animals. [In collaboration with J. Wolf]. 4°. 1874. 141 time or that obligation. In giving him congratulations and heartfelt wishes at this anniversary, we would go back with him to the young days as he recalls the joy of his early collections, the joy of the travel and the work, the joy throughout the years of continued learning and dis- covery, the joy too of feeling himself a very palpable support to the Museum during the days of its greatest need, before it had even a home of its own. He said at the Linnean Society dinner two years ago: “As I look around upon this assembly and see so many naturalists gathered here, I am instinctively carried back into the long ago when New York and the Museum and I were young. There is no one here who remembers that time —for I am the sole survivor of those days.” The American Museum of to-day gives him greeting with grateful recog- nition and appreciation of those days. From all departments the institution extends to Daniel Giraud Elliot the welcome of fellowship in scientific en- deavor — whenever to-day he walks through her galleries and laboratories, viewing their present gigantic propor- tions, seeing also the promised growth of the next few years, and through the eyes of memory living again the insti- tution’s early days of which he was so intimately a factor and a guiding in- fluence. MUSEUM NOTES Stncz the last issue of the JouRNAL the following persons have become members of the Museum: Associate Founder, Mr. J. P. Moraan; Associate Benefactor, Mr. Tuomas Der Wirt CuyLer; Patron, Mr. Grorce F. Baker; Life Members, Mrs. JAMES M. Lawton, Miss Epiru W. Tiemann, Master Henry 8. Repmonp, and Messrs. Epwarp W. C. Arnotp, Max Wm. Stour, JAMES STREAT and FrREDERIC DELANO WEEKES; Sustaining Member, Mr. J. KENNEDY Top; Annual Members, Mrs. Fritz ACHELIS, Mrs. GrorGe Percivat Cooutrmas, Mrs. M. E. Dwicut, Mrs. M. C. Escuwece, Mrs. Currorp Harmon, Mrs. CHartes M. Mucunic, Mrs. Routanp RepmMonp, Mrs. FraNKtyn B. Sanpers, Mrs. C. F. Swan, Mrs. Cuarues B. Towns, Misses E. H. Davison, NatHauig F. Low, Dr. ADELAIDE Mitts, Dr. W. G. Eckstein, Dr. BERNARD Sacus, Master Wixtui1aAM T. Biopcert, 3d, Master Howarp G. CusHIne, JR., MASTER RaupH StowEevtt Rowunps, Jr., and Messrs. Cuarues B. CoLtesrook, C. B. Davison, W. H. Euuis, Sou. Futp, THomas Francis Fox, FREDERICK FRELINGHUYSEN, RicHARD H. Gosman, ALEXANDER Hamitton, F. J. Huntinaton, Francis DrMitr JAcKsoN, Epq@ar A. Levy, ALpHons Lewis, Horace R. Moorneap, A. W. Parker, FREDERICK H. Parrerson, AuFRED L. Simon, Leo L. Srron, Epwin H. Stern, Moses J. Srroock and Matcoutm Herrick TALLMAN. A rorMAL word of greeting and apprecia- tion was extended by the trustees and mem- bers of the staff of the American Museum to Dr. Daniel Giraud Elliot on the occasion of the eightieth anniversary of his birth, March 7, 1835. Tue recent Indian disturbances in eastern Utah and adjoining territory are of interest to the Museum, since the department of anthropology is engaged in an extensive and intensive survey of all the Shoshonean Plateau tribes. In the newspaper accounts the Paiute are made to figure as the trouble- makers. From the geographical data at hand it appears that they are not identical with the tribe so designated by ethnologists, since both the Northern and Southern Paiute, using 142 accepted scientific terminology, live well to the west of the area in question, which does form the home of the Southern Ute. One band of this tribe is called Paiyutsi by the others, and this is apparently the one that has come into conflict with local authorities. THE recent acquisition of a bust of John Burroughs together with a marble pedestal designed to harmonize with the bust was made possible to the Museum through the generosity of Mr. Henry Ford. This inter- esting piece of sculpture was shown at the last exhibit of the National Academy of Design. The sculptor is Mr. C. 8. Pietro. Tur annual meeting of the board of trus- tees of the American Museum of Natural History was held at the residence of President Henry Fairfield Osborn, on Monday evening, February first. The trustees were the guests of President Osborn at dinner. At the annual meeting of the board of trustees the following trustees were reélected in the class of 1919: George F. Baker, Henry Fairfield Osborn, Joseph H. Choate, James Douglas and George W. Wickersham. The following officers were also reélected: presi- dent, Henry Fairfield Osborn; first vice- president, Cleveland H. Dodge; second vice- president, J. P. Morgan; treasurer, Charles Lanier; secretary, Adrian Iselin. Tue department of education has arranged to extend its courses of lectures for school children by having certain of the lectures which are given at the Museum repeated in three local centers,— namely, the Washington Irving High School, Public School 64 on the lower East side and a school to be selected in the Bronx. This plan will benefit many pupils who cannot afford the necessary car- fare to the Museum. Ar the annual meeting of the board of trustees the following elections of members were made in recognition of generous contri- butions and genuine interest in the growth of the Museum: J. P. Morgan, associate founder; Thomas DeWitt Cuyler, associate benefactor; George F. Baker, patron. FINANCED by a committee of friends of the Museum interested in the paintings of Mr. E. W. Deming, the work on the series of MUSEUM NOTES murals for the Plains Indian hall will begin at once. The series will include eight panels. Added to his many years spent in study of the Indian and in recording Indian life, Mr. Deming made new studies for the work last summer, especially among the Blackfoot Indians of Glacier National Park. [A por- trait of Mr. Deming is shown on page 91.] As a number of its Anthropological Series, the Museum will soon publish a paper by Mr. M. D. C. Crawford on prehistoric Peruvian fabrics. Mr. Crawford’s familiarity with all the materials, implements, machinery and processes of present day weaving has enabled him to analyze and describe the processes by which these cloths were made. The Museum’s collections from the ancient graves of Peru contain the cotton and wool in all stages from the raw state to the finished yarns, and contain also looms with cloth in process of manufacture. The fabrics be- sides being some of the most beautiful ever woven have always excited the wonder and admiration of those who know anything about weaving by their technical qualities. It is difficult to understand how a primitive people, with the simple tools at their command, could have produced cloth technically better than can be made by the wonderful looms of to-day. In some of the fabrics the cotton thread has three times as many turns to the inch as the best cotton thread commonly used in our mills, and the twist is remarkable for its evenness. Some have a warp of forty- two fine cotton threads to the inch, crossed by two hundred and eighty-two ply woolen threads to the inch. This weft had been beaten so compactly that the instrument used in mills to count the number of threads to the inch is useless, and the cloth has to be fastened down firmly and the threads drawn out, one at a time, with a hooked needle point, under a magnifying glass, the counting of an inch taking three and a half hours. Some twelve hundred specimens of arche- ological and ethnological material from vari- ous parts of the world have been deposited by the Museum at Barnard College, Columbia University, to be used as a study collection by its students of anthropology. ATTENTION may be called to the fur-seal group just opened to the public in the North American mammal hall, adjoining the re- 143 cently constructed beaver group. The back- ground, which is remarkable for its illusion of distance, was painted by Mr. Albert Operti. It shows a part of Kitovi rookery at the Pribilof Islands. From recent cable advices we learn that James Chapin with about one-fourth of the collections of the Congo expedition left Boma on the western coast of Africa January 31. He is expected to arrive in New York the latter part of March. THE exhibits in the Jesup North Pacific Indian hall are being rearranged and the cases repainted to produce a more harmonious color scheme. THE opening lecture of the fifth series of the Museum’s “Science Stories’? for the children of members was given on Saturday morning, February 20, by Admiral Robert E. Peary. His subject, “Children of Ice and Snow,” proved of great charm and he gra- ciously repeated the lecture and showed the Arctic pictures a second time, to the overflow audience of children who waited. Mrs. WiuuraM H. Buiss of New York has enriched the Museum’s gem collection with a very beautiful .blue aquamarine, weighing 144.51 carats. It is a Brazilian stone from Minas Geraes, cut in an oblong brilliant, and easily exceeds in color beauty and size any of the aquamarines previously brought from that locality. Tue photograph reproduced in sepia opposite page 102 of this JouRNAL, is a copy of one of two new mural canvases by Mr. Will S. Taylor. It represents Indians of the Tlingit tribe engaged in a shamanistic cere- mony for curing the sick, and was recently put in place on the east side of the North Pacific hall. Any reproduction of this pic- ture not in color is unfortunate, since in the color lies a considerable part of its power. The scene is an interior with steps leading down into a room like a pit. Weird figures in dim light sway to the chanting of Voices and the beat of a drum, while in the circle of firelight, the shaman in ceremonial dress, his hair adorned with clipped eagle down, dances about the man to be cured. The second new canvas represents Haida Indians in a house-building ceremony. [A portrait of Mr. Taylor is given on page 90.] 144 THE AMERICAN THE spring members’ course of popular lectures at the Museum was opened on the evening of March 4 by Dr. Wilfred H. Osgood in a presentation of the subject, the “Fur Seals and Other Animals of the Pribilof Islands.” A THIRTY-PAGE pamphlet, the Report on the Street Trees of New York City published by the Tree Planting Association of New York City in coédperation with the New York State College of Forestry at Syracuse University may be secured without cost at the sales desk on the first floor of the Museum. This report by Mr. H. R. Francis gives the results of the survey of the trees of the sev- eral boroughs of New York City made by him during the summer of 1914, and offers suggestions for an organized system of scien- tific tree culture especially adapted to New York City. THERE has recently been installed in the Darwin hall an exhibit of the Galapagos finches of the genus Geospiza to illustrate geographical variation as a result of isolation. The Galapagos Islands, made classic through the observations and researches of Darwin, furnish many types of animal life which are not found in other parts of the world, al- though in most cases they bear resemblance to the corresponding fauna of the mainland of South America. Each island of the archipelago is the home of a species or variety not found elsewhere. While these forms are often distinct from those of neighboring is- lands, they differ widely from those of the mainland. A map of the islands is shown in the exhibit together with specimens of the various species mounted in such a way as to indicate their geographic distribution on the archipelago. As the degree in which they differ is doubtless correlated with the length of time during which the islands have been _ separated, a relief map of the archipelago showing the deepening of the channel of the surrounding waters is introduced to further emphasize this correlation. THE latest addition to the exhibits in the hall of public health is a group showing the enemies of the fly. The setting is a section of a stable with its stable yard, a corn field and orchard showing in the distance. The most important enemies are shown in char- acteristic activities. A hen is busily engaged in picking up fly larve; a toad is waiting under burdock leaves for a fly to appear; MUSEUM JOURNAL swallows are skimming over the yard, catch- ing flies on the wing; wasps are abroad on a similar quest; while in dusty corners of the stable and on the broken window are waiting spiders and centipedes, and waiting bats hang suspended from the beams. ANOTHER shipment of birdskins, including seven hundred and four specimens collected by Mr. W. B. Richardson in eastern Panama, has been received by the Museum. Mr. Frank M. Byrruy, who exhibited before the faculty of the Museum in January a long series of autochrome plates in stereop- ticon views of unusual beauty, will give a lecture to members of the Museum on the evening of March 25. Mr. H. E. AnrHony has recently been appointed assistant in the department of mammalogy. Dr. Davin G. Steap, Commissioner of Fisheries of New South Wales, recently visited the Museum. He is returning to Australia from an investigation of the fisher- ies of England during the past few months, and expects to visit the United States govern- ment fish hatcheries at Woods Hole, Massa- chusetts, and several other points before sailing for home. A GENERAL meeting of the New York Acad- emy of Sciences and its Affiliated Societies is to be held at the Museum Monday, March 22. Professor Raymond Dodge of Columbia Uni- versity will lecture on the ‘‘Incidence of the Effect of Moderate Doses of Alcohol on the Nervous System.” TurouGcH the courtesy of Dr. Emilie Snethlage the Museum is to receive from time to time collections of birds and mammals from the Museu Goeldi, Pard, Brazil. The first shipment contains six hundred and four birds and fifty mammals and includes several species new to our collections, one of them the wonderful opal-crowned manikin, Pipra opali- zans, pronounced by Count von Berlepsch to be the “ finest bird in the world”’. Mr. Francis HarPer has been working recently at the Museum, in the preparation of a paper on fish material which he collected on the expedition sent out in 1914 under the Canadian Geological Survey to Great Slave Lake. The American Museum of Natural History Seventy-seventh Street and Central Park West, New York City Open free to the public on every day in the year. The American Museum of Natural History was established in 1869 to promote the Natural Sciences and to diffuse a general knowledge of them among the people. It is dependent upon private subscriptions and the fees from members for procuring needed additions to the collections and for carrying on explorations in America and other parts of the world. The membership fees are, Acai aus Weim DELS S46. clone Gist cai siete oo $ 10 Sustaining Members (annually)........ 25 Neihes MEM Nens sca ..cechet oe sxecevete tee coe. ie acct 100 LAGLON Eigen ae Ewen ag. rae neice oT ae 500 PateOus: caecater Ceri ett te is $1,000 Associate Benefactors............... 10,000 Associate: *Founders: Soos0 tose B,. Loot oe ~ ve, eer we N I 93 ggested joyous sound and move- Birds are just at the moment of flitting; toads and ‘‘tree toads”’ are calling ov a + a =| bh ° el p=) c o a iss) & [= o A, =} 4 Me) o y w o ee o o S vo 1S) D ue) f=} a uo) ° ° Everywhere are su THE “TOAD GROUP A New England w American Museum. ment and the exuberance of new life. ee ne wall. The down sto -the-pulpits, anemones and fficult to see that they are mble THE TIME OF MAY =| YW is) a] o > ° = 8 Jo} iB n OT a] o o we Ww o 2 a. a. iss) sc} Sas 5 < om A “4. ie) aS ele fall ag aa 5 § wo) 3 2 ~© Do eo oo oO # o J) & 8 | M 7] o€ as reat ae erer as - wo o = pe) ° i=) Riva se aie A COVE WHERE GREEN FROGS LIVE Detail from the Toad Group in the American Museum of Natural History AQUARELLES OF OUR COMMON WOODLANDS* By Warren H. Miller Editor of Field and Stream UR Museum has many wonder- lands of American wild life upon which the hungry city dweller may feast his eyes, but none more beautiful than the collection of scenic cases presenting the amphibian life of the ponds and brooks of our familiar wood- lands. It is a veritable fairyland that one enters here, a fairyland in more ways than one, for it is the gateway back to one’s own forgotten youth, a fairyland having the power to touch the mystic chords of memory and reawaken the keen pleasures that one experienced, with the tenfold sensitiveness of youth, when going into the woods in the spring- time to collect wild flowers, to renew acquaintances with the birds, and to watch the still pools for signs of the activities of the small creatures which give the touch of life to such places. I presume that these cases are given such prosaic names as the “toad group,”’ and the “bullfrog group,” but my soul will have none of it. To me the scene presenting the life of our common toads, is May; fresh, bounding May, the eternal New Year of the wilderness: when the new leaves have just unfolded, soft and feathery as fine plumes, the forest floor is carpeted with anemones, dog-tooth violets and jack-in-the-pul- pits; and every dell has its wild bird finding melodious breath over the nod- ding sprays of Solomon’s-seal. When I look upon that scenic picture of May in the woods I hardly see the wild life at all, at first. Isee, dimly, a Boy of Ten, with 1 Photographs for this article and the preceding as well as for the four-page sepia insert, made from the Toad Group by Mr. Julius Kirschner, Museum photographer a net and an aquarium pail, and dimly recognize in him my own weatherbeaten and battle-scarred self. That boy is — somehow different. He is free, and bare- legged, and eager with the devouring eagerness of childhood; keen in his observation of every least detail of the pool beside which he is standing. It is a pool very like the one shown in the scenic case, every feature of the latter recalling similar scenes that were then of poignant interest to the Boy of Ten. Impelled by the hunter’s ardor of pur- suit and the scientist’s eagerness to col- lect new specimens, the boy is gradually filling his pail with fish, tadpole, froglet and turtle, until after a morning’s work he returns home triumphant and adds the spoil to the wild life already inhabit- ing his large aquarium. I suppose that nearly every boy who lives anywhere within reach of our ordinary woodlands has maintained an aquarium; certainly all the boys in our town did, and therein lies the appeal of the “May” scene to many observers of the male persuasion. To the feminine minds also come memo- ries: of girlhood days in the Maytime woods collecting wild flowers, memories coupled probably with amazement that the abundant pond life of these same woods had been utterly overlooked dur- ing the careless days of youth. Of course in these groups, the wild life of many pools must be concentrated into one, perhaps far beyond the capacity of the normal insect supply to support life. The boy who spent his morning collect- ing for his aquarium had, I am sure, to visit many such pools to secure even part of the complete series shown here — but there were no doubt many creatures 167 168 that he did not see in hiding in each pool, while here in the group all are brought out into plain view. Moreover, while your memory may tell you that you have seen just such a pool many times in the woods, as a matter of fact you have seen no such pool, for Nature, in her grand, haphazard way, has no place for Art in her small canvases; she shows a detail here and a detail there, but to assemble a complete scene that will lead the eye hither and yon accord- ing to the prearranged purposes of the artist, requires a skillful staging of the scene, using only legitimate natural “properties,” and this Miss Dickerson has most ably done for us. Describing the groups more in detail, the May scene, representing specifically the life histories of our various species of toads, frogs and tree frogs, assembles all of them under the banner of early spring. a ay ‘“k*> ore = ‘ a wg . ¥ = + y] 4 > * be | pan emer ee or « Aat Ades ; ye RF ac, *. AQUARELLES OF OUR COMMON WOODLANDS bending low to the water. A kingfisher sits above, and the water flows toward you over many a rocky riffle, streaming the long fronds of brookweed in the cur- rent; flowing, flowing endlessly — right into your lap seemingly, a wonderful example of arrested motion by the artistry of the Museum preparators who will have Nature presented to us just as she appears in reality. Even the very stones of the brook bottom have that brown, velvety look that settled sediment, and that comes of peculiar — slippery covering that brings many a trout fisherman to grief! Herein are depicted the life history and habits of the giant sala- mander, familiar to those who wade the mountain streams. A greedy voracious beast and a canni- bal, with clumsy ways. Here is one that has seized a fish of the school which is swimming upstream, for in spite of his clumsy the mander’s body, sala- protec- tive coloration, blending — exactly with the rocks of the brook bed, en- him — when he is quick to strike, and his mouth opens the full extent of the width of his head. Here are two big fellows fighting over a string of eggs. The one on guard over the eggs was lying among them under the rock watch- ing, when along came a second salaman- der and started to bolt the eggs, whereat ables him to le in wait until a brook fish hovers over About a moss and violet covered root in the water (from the toad group). The common ‘‘tree toad’’ or so-called ‘‘weather prophet” (Hyla versicolor) is in the pond but a short time and then resorts to the orchard, the garden or edge of the woods. Notice the small clusters of this hyla’s pearl-like eggs on the water plants 174 he has been seized amidships by the angry guard, although how well he is to be finally punished for his misdeed the scene does not tell us. Young salaman- ders are to be seen foraging along the bottom, and the red, land form of the newt is out on the bank of the river to serve as astandard of size for comparison with the giant species. Another group, which I have never had the good fortune to observe in the natural state, is that showing some of the rep- THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL tilian life of the desert. Looking sea- ward on an island in the Gulf of Cali- fornia, appears to be this scene, the red voleanic rock, the cactus life, saguaro, ocotillo and palo-verde, being prominent in the stage setting. Under a volcanic fissure is the lair of a great rattler of the desert, he is just raising his head from his coils to look over the possibilities of prey outside. Small highly colored desert liz- ards are there for the catching, and an iguana is climbing up over the spines of a great cactus to sleep in the sun at the top. lizards of the North American continent Various chuckwallas, as the largest are called, sport among the rocks or dig in the sand, while two black chuck- wallas are fighting for the possession of a cactus blossom, suggesting that their food is vegetable. It is a wild, stern land, where water is not and men die of thirst, a land of the agony of black protruding tongue and_ alkali-scorched throat. Nevertheless, it has a fascina- tion for all of us, it is so strange, so differ- ent, one of those typical bits of American wilderness scenery with which all of us ought to be better acquainted. One is loath to close without some The pickerel frog (Rane palustris), with head above the surface of the pond (photograph from the Toad Group), and old egg mass and hatching tadpoles. The portion of decayed stump and sphagnum moss beside it (at the left) are real, the frog, tadpoles and marsh marigolds are wax, the egg mass is blown glass AQUARELLES OF OUR COMMON WOODLANDS word as to the inspiration these groups! give to go out and see for oneself these scenes put forth so powerfully. The appeal to children is strong; they are the nature lovers of the future, in whom the love of wild life imparted by the great story of the Museum cases will bear fruit in better protection of what wild spots we still have left. We know nothing about immortality, but this we know, that in our children we do live, and in them there will be carried forward what character the world once knew as ourselves. The Boy of Ten stands in the flesh before me, myself, yet also so differ- ent, my own son, just turned ten years. How do these scenes strike him? Well— there is little that those bright blue eyes overlook; not a tiny detail that passes unnoticed. He is living in the midst of the thing, not viewing it from a distance as we older ones must. Every scrap of pond life refers at once to his own aquarium: here’s where you look for this particular kind of tadpole — he didn’t know that there were several varieties of tadpoles before; that back- water is the place where those newts grow; never knew before that those pe- culiar greenish warty bulbs were a frog’s egg mass, thought all eggs were in strings like toad’s eggs — Oh, these cases were a mine of practical information to him, and we look for a large increase in the population of the aquarium this spring! And, what of that other child, not so 1 Photographs of the reptile and amphibian groups of the American Museum, other than the Toad Group will be found in previous issues of the Journat as follows: Bullfrog Group, October, 1911; Giant Salamander Group, December, 1912; Lower California Lizard Group, February. 1914. 175 fortunate as to have his mind directed from infancy to the world of the great out-of-doors and with no large country- side to roam over, the city waif who comes in here to look—and wonder? Who can tell but that many such re- ceive their first call to go back to the land, here; to forsake the crowded slum where body nor soul has a chance, and to earn their bread in their future close to the green soil, with just such a pond right over the dip of the hill! And what of the older ones, we whose pathways in life are fixed, and may not be changed because here in the city we earn the bread that those dependent upon us must eat? to us? What of the appeal Here is Nature, spread before us; Nature in her most charming mood, . with her silver filaments of still waters, her teeming abundance of humble (but not really familiar) pond life. And Na- ture can be found within an hour’s train or trolley ride of the city. Shall we pre- sume that, to the thousands who look upon these scenes there comes no desire to look again at the forgotten brookside? To discover for themselves many things besides flowers and birds, things that were before passed over unheeded, not knowing what to look for, nor realizing what a wealth of interest lay here un- touched? Shall we not rather rest as- sured that thousands have here had reborn in them an inspiration to re- visit old scenes, and a resolve not yet to let the home country-side relapse into the limbo of forgotten memories, not yet to let one’s love of Nature be deep-buried in the dust of the city’s turmoil. 9ZT OUIVG OF YOTMPM UT 1OIVM MOT[VYS [OOD uy? WOT} 0} 9AT}ORAYIL OLOTH SuTOU st osoy) ‘YYSnoap Jo ow) ur Apeyoodso pur AOYVROA JOY Ul YVY} JOqWMIOTHOL YSN OA ‘SN VOU SPATG PTLM OY SUPIG OF YSTM OM JT HLV@ GHId V YOsS YAGT1NOG ALINVYS V ONIINVH Pe eats Saat yo: he BIRD BATHS AND DRINKING POOLS’ By Ernest Harold Baynes drought, there is nothing more attractive to birds than water. They need it to drink and to bathe in, and when the natural pools and streams are dried up, they will come from far and near to visit a properly constructed bird bath. At the very time this chap- ter is being written the weather is very hot and dry and birds are coming to the artificial baths in this village, Meriden, New Hampshire, not one at a time, but by scores. Only this morning they gathered at a little cement bath just outside my study window, and gave it the appearance of an avian Manhattan Beach. I saw two bluebirds, a che- wink, a white-throated sparrow, a song sparrow, a junco, a chipping sparrow and a myrtle warbler, all bathing at once and at least a score of other birds were hopping about in the grass or perched in the bushes nearby, awaiting their turn. There are similar scenes at nearly all the bird baths in Meriden. One example will suffice. In the Bird Sanctuary there is a bath made from a granite boulder, or rather half a boulder, for it was split in two, ages ago, proba- bly by the frost. It broke in such a way that one half had a gently-sloping concave surface and we took this half, turned the concave surface uppermost that when filled with water it might form a natural pool for the birds. It was set upon a well-made stone founda- tion, and a hole was drilled down through to admit a lead pipe which supplies running water. As I ap- proached this bath one evening after |" hot weather, especially in time of 1 This article is from Mr. Baynes’s forthcoming book, Wild Bird Guests and How to Entertain Them. E. P. Dutton and Company, New York. sundown, I saw the whole surface of the water dancing as though a shoal of little fish were sporting in it, and spray was flying in every direction. It was simply a flock of birds taking their evening bath. Perhaps because night was com- ing on they were too impatient to wait their turn, for all seemed to be trying to get in at once, and most of them were successful. Juncos seemed to be most numerous, but there were several blue- birds and myrtle warblers and some sparrows which in their wet plumage and in the uncertain light I could not identify. A little apart a phoebe sat on a twig above the pool, watching for chances to dip down into the water for an instant, after which she would re- turn to the twig to preen her feathers. Birds come to our bird baths every day in summer and fall, in an almost con- tinuous procession, but usually just a few are present at the same moment. They come in large flocks only at exceptional times, usually during severe drought. Bird baths may be as simple or as elaborate as one likes. A rough earthen- ware saucer from six inches to twelve inches in diameter and with half an inch of fresh water in it, is a great deal better than nothing and may attract some of the most delightful birds. I have seen robins, catbirds, Baltimore orioles and rose-breasted grosbeaks and many others bathe in an earthenware saucer. But the supplying of water is so very impor- tant that most of us will wish to do rather more than put out a saucer. Even from a selfish standpoint it is well to give birds all the water they want. If we do, they will be much less likely to destroy our small fruits which they sometimes eat chiefly for the fluid contained. 177 178 In making any bird baths, the first thing to look out for is the depth of the water. Few of the birds which will come to bathe will use water of greater depth than two and a half inches, and even for blue jays and grackles five inches is about the limit. But most birds will not jump off into any such depth, so if we had a pool with a uniform depth of two and a half inches, birds THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL popular with the birds, is made on the principle of a flight of broad steps, each one of which is two feet long and seven inches wide. There are five of these steps, each one-half inch lower than the last, so that when the water is half an inch deep on the top step, it is two and a half inches deep on the bottom one. The birds invariably enter the water at the top step. Their favorite steps are Birds will come from far and near to visit a properly constructed bird bath. Mr. Baynes has seen in a simple little cement pool like this of the photograph seven species of birds at one time: bluebirds, a chewink, a white-throated sparrow, a song sparrow, a junco, a chipping sparrow and a myrtle warbler — and at least a dozen other birds awaiting their turn nearby would come and drink, but few if any would bathe. So we must arrange for shallow places where the birds can enter the water; they will go in deeper presently, but they are very cautious. Half an inch is a good depth for the shal- lows and if the depth grades off to nothing at all, so much the better. A bath which the writer invented some time ago and which has proved very the second and third; they seldom go lower than that. The bottom is covered with clean sand and bright pebbles from a trout brook, and here and _ there among them are strewn beautifully tinted shells. Close beside the bath is a wooden tray of earth, on which are scattered every morning, birdseed of several kinds, bits of bread, a little suet, ripe raspberries BIRD BATHS AND and a piece of banana perhaps, as addi- attractions for the feathered guests. The smallest visitors are the chipping sparrows, gentle, modest little fellows, that come to the food tray quietly as mice, crack a few seeds, and then take a bath on the top step where the water is shallow. Almost burly in comparison, are the purple finches, which come, often two or three at a time, make a full meal in the food tray, and then souse themselves thoroughly in the deeper water, regardless of theories concerning the dangers of bathing too soon after dinner. Perhaps the most amusing visitor is a eatbird, which has a nest in the lilac bush, from whose top, in the early morn- ing, he sings his wonderful song so sur- prising to those who know him by his cat-call only. He comes boldly to the food tray, hops lightly about, jauntily flirting his long tail, swallows a ripe rasp- berry, takes a bite or two of banana, and then proceeds to inspect the bath as if he had never seen it before. He cocks his head first on one side and then on the other, hops into the shallow water and begins to peck at the shells and pebbles at the bottom. Perhaps he will take one in his bill and hold it for a moment before dropping it back. Then he goes out into deeper water, and with wings vibrating as though operated by an elec- tric current, takes a thorough bath “all over.’ When he comes out, he is a sorry-looking object, dripping wet and with tail-feathers stuck together. But apparently he cares nothing for appear- ances, and proceeds with his toilet forth- with. He shakes himself vigorously, flips his tail from side to side to get rid of the bulk of the water, and then it is surprising how soon, with the aid of his deft bill and a warm sun, he makes himself into a clean fluffy catbird again. Sometimes, toward evening a_blue- tional DRINKING POCLS 179 bird visits the bath, and after washing himself in a very business-like way, flies off to a dead tree to preen and dry his feathers. Occasionally a phoebe comes, but apparently takes a bath more from a sense of duty than from any love of bathing. He seems to dislike cold water about as much as does the average small boy, for instead of getting right into it as most birds do, he flits through it, barely getting his feet wet. Perhaps this habit has been acquired by re- peatedly darting after insects, and pos- sibly is common to all flycatchers; at any rate I have seen a kingbird bathe by dashing through the water of a stream time and again, returning after each dip to a snag, from which he made a fresh dive after stopping a moment to preen his feathers—and perhaps to catch his breath. The song sparrows are perhaps the most numerous visitors to this bird bath; they come earlier and stay later than any of the other birds. They act as if they owned this particular sheet of water, three feet by two, and if any other bird ventures too near while a song spar- row is bathing, the former is promptly driven away. These sparrows seem to love the water, and not only splash in it, but squat right down in it until practi- eally nothing but their heads are stick- ing out. Sometimes when it is almost dark, and the last red tinge of afterglow is reflected in the tiny pool, a couple of dark spots on the shining surface tell just where two little song sparrows are cooling off for the night. We have been altogether too busy to keep close watch on this bath but at different times we have observed the following birds using it: flicker, phoebe, Baltimore oriole, purple finch, white- winged crossbill, American goldfinch, vesper sparrow, white-throated spar- row, chipping sparrow, junco, song 180 sparrow, chewink, cedar waxwing, black- and-white warbler, Nashville warbler, myrtle warbler, chestnut-sided warbler, catbird, brown thrasher, hermit thrush, robin and bluebird. Probably there have been many more which we have not observed. The arrangement of steps, interesting, is by no means necessary. A bath about three feet long, two feet wide and three inches deep, with a con- tinuously sloping and roughened bottom, starting at one end half an inch from the top and ending at the other at its lowest point, would probably answer the purpose just as well. Speaking of the roughened bottom, reminds me that almost if not quite as important as the depth of water, is the character of the footing on the bottom. This should never be slippery, for birds lose confi- dence when they find they cannot keep their feet. A layer of coarse sand or fine pebbles will usually give the de- sired “footing” in a bird bath, and a slippery pan or dish can be rendered safe by placing in it a freshly-cut sod, having about half an inch of the grass submerged. This makes a wet spot such as many of the small birds are very fond of. while Concrete is very useful for the con- struction of pools for the comfort of birds; it may be used alone, as in the case of a bird bath in my own garden, or in connection with natural rock crop- ping out above the earth. The former was made as follows. I scooped out in the lawn an elliptical hollow, four feet by three feet six inches, the sides sloping down in all directions toward the center where the depth was four or five inches. I then took some Portland cement and some coarse sand and mixed the two, in the proportion of one of cement to four of sand, adding just enough water to give the consistency of common mortar. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL Then with my hand, I plastered the surface of the hollow, putting in enough to make the depth at the center about two and a half inches. I was careful not to make the sides too smooth, although the concrete itself gives an excellent foothold for the birds. We have no running water in this; about once a week we sweep the water out with a stiff broom and put two pails of fresh water into it. It has been a complete success, and being within ten feet of the house we have had great pleasure in watch- ing the birds from the windows and from the piazzas. We have seen six blue- birds — the parents and four young — bathing in it at once, and at other times there have been whole flocks of song sparrows, white-throated sparrows and juncos, in addition to the many birds that come in smaller numbers. With a few shrubs and hardy flowers planted about it, such a bath can be made a beautiful little feature in any garden. And of course there is no reason in the world why it should not be made much larger if one has plenty of room and the time to make it. Dr. Ernest L. Huse, president of The Meriden Bird Club, has a somewhat similar bath in his garden, but he has carried the idea a little farther. In the center he has sunk a tub, and from the rim, which is perhaps two and a half inches below the surface of the ground, the concrete slants outward and upward in all directions, making shallows in which the birds will drink and bathe. In the tub, pond lilies are planted, and spread their leaves and blossoms over the surface. Round about, shrubs and tall grasses are planted, and here and there among them one catches a glimpse of little food trays, filled with hemp and millet which tend to keep the birds about the spot even when the bath is over. There is hardly a limit to what Two and a half inches is about the proper depth of water for a bird bath, with five inches the maximum for blue jays and grackles. A successful bath may be provided with an arrangement of steps under water, giving shallow spots for the bird’s cautious entrance and deeper places for his later delight From a hearty meal at the food tray birds may fly directly to the bird bath, entering the shallowest water first, then sousing themselves thoroughly in the deepest part — with no respect for theories regarding a bath too soon after dinner ‘ 181 shrubs or grassabout it, for behind such things a cat will crouch. I have spoken of a bird bath made of a granite boulder; we have two like this in Meriden, New Hampshire, and they are among the most satisfactory baths we have. The one in the Meriden Bird Club’s sanctuary, es- timated to weigh five tons, was lying where the glacier Such a pool at dusk may emit a flying spray from the wet plumage of left it on a hillside bathing bluebirds and song sparrows, while an exclusive phoebe is waiting on a branch above for a chance to cool off for the night by a few dashes rather more than a through the water. A concrete pool with tlowers planted about it, may mile away. For the be made an attractive feature of any garden benefit of those who may be done with concrete in this way, may have similar baths in view, I will especially if it is used in connection with | say that several teams of oxen were re- beautiful stones, pebbles, sand and shells. quired to move it, and that to haul it, Of course in the case of bird baths set it on a good foundation of stones, which are not raised well above the ground, great care must be taken that the little bathers are not pounced upon by cats, which would other- wise have the songsters at an unusual disadvantage. In the first place the birds are so engrossed with the joy of the bath that they are less rary than usual, and their feathers being wet they fly slowly and heavily, often close to the ground. If we cannot be sure about cats, we must either have the bath raised well above the ground on some object which a cat cannot climb, or else we must be content with a very plain bath out in the open, without 182 A bird bath in the Bird Sanctuary at Meriden, New Hamp- shire, is made in the natural hollow of a split granite boulder. The boulder has been placed upon a stone foundation and fitted with a pipe leading upward through a hole drilled in the boulder to give a continual supply of fresh water t2 OF NVA tay ye WNT pS Oe : BRONZE BIRD FOUNTAIN Exccuted by Mrs. Louis Saint Gaudens for the Bird Sanctuary at Meriden 184 and drill a hole through it for the water pipe, cost forty dollars. It is a beauti- ful object, very suitable for its purpose and will last forever. It was presented to the Club by a Boston lady who de- sired to establish a bird fountain in memory of her friend, Dr. Edward Everett Hale, himself a lover of birds. I often think how much more appro- priate as a memorial to a real man or woman is a beautiful thing like this, made by Nature, carved by her mighty forces, and dedicated to the use and enjoyment of the loveliest of her children, than is a shining, ugly and utterly useless polished shaft, whose chief recommen- dation is that it costs from a hundred to a thousand times as much. The lovely bronze fountain executed by Mrs. Louis Saint Gaudens, is another of the charming features of the Bird Sanctuary at Meriden, and makes one realize that with the sculptor as an assistant there is no end to the artistic bird baths which may be designed. This particular bath was made in com- memoration of the first presentation of Percy MacKaye’s Bird Masque, Sanc- tuary, and was presented to the Meri- den Bird Club by a New York lady who THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL witnessed the play. It will be seen by the shallowness of the basin at the top that my remarks about the depth of the water apply just as much to a formal work of art as to a granite boulder or an earthenware saucer. The rule about surface also applies, and the sculptoress purposely left the surface of the inside of the basin slightly rough that the feet of the little bathers might not. slip. Below the shallow bowl and in bas-relief may be seen in procession the principal characters who took part in the masque. Below these are interesting inscriptions, some of them historical, others consist- ing of quotations from the masque itself. Of these the one that sends the reader away filled with determination to do something for the cause of bird conserva- tion is the compact proposed by the poet to the converted plume-hunter and the naturalist : — A compact, then, that when we go Forth from these gracious trees Into the world, we go as witnesses Before the men who make our country’s laws, And by our witness show In burning words The meaning of these sylvan mysteries: Freedom and sanctuary for the birds! In the country of the Apache Indian MOTION PICTURE RECORDS OF INDIANS FILMS THATSHOW THE COMMON INDUSTRIES OF THE APACHE By Pliny E. Goddard HE ethnologist is not primarily | concerned with the actual ob- jects displayed in a museum. The true subject matter of ethnology is made up of the habitual movements and activities of a people. An Indian on horseback does not differ in general appearance from a white man in that position, but the fact that an Indian mounts from one side and a white man from the other constitutes an important fact in ethnology. It is one of the small habits which in their combined effect make the difference between a white man and an Indian. Such habits are the most important means of mak- ing comparative and historical studies in ethnology, for they are generally learned from one’s neighbors or ances- tors. Through them, therefore, one may trace the distribution of habits and cus- toms geographically or historically. In the past, such habits have been studied by observing the daily life of a people and reducing such observations to writing, using drawings and _ photo- graphs as illustrations. It is tolerably difficult to observe and record every significant movement involved in the work of a single individual engaged in such a simple task as making a flint arrowhead. When several individuals are engaged in the same undertaking, it becomes impossible for a single observer to follow the movements of each worker. The moving-picture camera furnishes an excellent method of making a perma- nent record of the movements of one or, if properly localized, of several people. This record can be scrutinized in detail for as long a time as is desired and can be viewed repeatedly. It records many things which otherwise would not be made objective, such as the character- istic nervous coérdinations and move- ments of different people. To make such records of value, great pains must be taken not to arouse self-conscious- ness in the subjects being photographed. Such unavoidable self-consciousness as 185 186 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM 1— Posture assumed and position of the hands in dis- charging an arrow 2— From the film the movement of the hands in basket- making can be observed ' 3 — Liquid pitch is being applied to a basket to render it water- tight JOURNAL arises when one first faces a camera disappears as the persons become interested in the work or ceremony. It would require a very long time to secure a record of the various industries of a tribe if these were all taken as they are actually performed as a matter of yearly routine. In practice, it is necessary to have these duties undertaken for the special purpose of photo- graphing them. When this is done, however, it is usu- ally possible to allow the subjects to assume their own poses and _ positions even if the result is less attractive in arrangement. The photographer needs only to insist on a proper relation to the source of the light. To take the entire action of a piece of work lasting for several hours, such as the preparation of the pitch and its application to a water basket, involves too great an expense and more film than can be uti- lized. In such cases it is necessary to have the cam- era constantly in position, and to operate it only when movements of significance occur. It is seldom neces- sary to change its position for simple industrial acts. During a field trip to the San Carlos Apache this year a small daylight load- ing camera was employed. Films were made of such industries as basket-mak- ing, the boiling and applica- MOTION PICTURE RECORDS OF INDIANS 187 tion of pitch to make a basket water- atically and energetically in North tight, the gathering of mesquite beans, America, while there are Indians still the grinding of corn, the preparation living who have habitually performed and cooking of the century-plant stump. these native industrial acts. After the Men were photographed flaking arrow- disappearance of primitive life, films of heads, feathering arrows, and put- this sort will be invaluable. ting sinew on a bow. The rather simple process of discharging an ar- row from a bow, taken on twenty- five feet of film, illustrates the posi- tion of holding the bow and the arrow release practised by the Apache, two points of con- siderable compara- tive interest. It was not possible to secure films of re- ligious ceremonies because of the su- perstitious attitude of the Indians. Films of a gam- bling game in pro- gress and of two old men taking a sweat bath were secured. Considering the results obtained, the method is not excessively expen- sive. It ought to 1 — Apache women shelling acorns and grinding and shelling corn b i 2 — Gathering mesquite beans, the pods only of which are edible e applied system- [Still pictures taken in connection with motion films] AUGUST WEISMANN, ZOOLOGIST, 1834-1914 A follower and supporter of Darwin, whose work played an important part in the development of the theory of heredity 188 AUGUST WEISMANN Born January 17, 1834, died November 5, 1914 By Frank R. Lillie Professor of Zodlogy at the University of Chicago HE life of Professor Weismann a spanned the most interesting and important period in the history of biology. In his early child- hood Schleiden and Schwann established the cell theory (1838-1839); he was a young man of twenty-five at the time of publication of Darwin’s Origin of Species (1859). During his active life as zodlogist were discovered those great principles concerning cell-division, the fertilization of the egg and the history of the germ-cells, which he applied with such success to the theory of heredity. He participated in the grand struggle over the evolution theory and the factors of evolution during the latter half of the nineteenth century; he witnessed the rise of experimental zodlogy and in his old age came the period of exact research in genetics, which his own studies had done much to prepare. The last weeks of his life were sad- dened by the great war. He had liveda long life full of loving and disinterested labor, crowned by many honors and the universal respect of the scientific world. An immense pathos inheres in his last public act —the relinquishment of the academic honors bestowed on him in England. Like so many of the zodlogists of his time Weismann studied medicine, but he found opportunity during the short period of its practice to carry out z06- logical investigations on the life history and especially the post-embryonic devel- opment and metamorphosis of flies. In 1863 he became attached to the Uni- versity of Freiburg, and spent the re- mainder of his life, fifty-one years, in this quiet provincial University, in spite of offers from larger universities. Here he found the leisure and the quiet beautiful surroundings in which he could devote himself heart and soul to investi- gation and reflection. His objective in- vestigations were limited by serious trouble with his eyes which began in the seventies, and later compelled him to relinquish the microscopical studies for which he had such unbounded enthu- siasm. His vision was thus turned more and more inward to constructive think- ing; it was no doubt in part due to this physical handicap that we owe his great theoretical generalizations. Weismann was a true naturalist, who viewed nature with a loving enthusiasm which appears clearly in the objective researches in zodlogy of the first fifty years of his life. His main contributions are classical in their mastery of detail, wealth of observation and broad outlook. His earliest studies were physiological and histological (1858-1862). Then fol- lowed a series of papers on the embryonic and post-embryonic development of flies (1862-1866). Studies on the seasonal dimorphism of butterflies next engaged his attention in which he raised questions that led to later fundamental researches by other investigators. In 1875 he began a long series of studies on the natural history and reproductions of Daphnids (continued to 1889) which constitute the foundation of all subse- quent study on this group and were especially important for the funda- mental problems of parthenogenesis, sex- 189 190 determination, and significance of the polar bodies. Between 1880 and 1883 he was engaged in his epoch-making researches on the germ-cells of hydroids which uncovered the fundamental facts on which his theory of the continuity of the germ-plasm was based. The special papers and memoirs deal- ing with these and other investigations constitute a great body of knowledge to which zoologists will constantly refer as the foundation of many important lines of research. About 1884 he was forced to turn from such investigations, owing to increasing eye troubles. From this time date those contributions to the theory of evolution and heredity for which he is best known to the general educated public, as one of the greatest of Darwin’s successors. These were however by no means his first publications on these subjects, for in 1868 he had published a “ Justifica- tion of the Darwinian Theory,” in 1873 a study of the influence of isolation in the origin of species, and a volume of studies on the theory of descent, later translated into English. His best-known contributions on these subjects began with a series of essays published between 1881 and 1891 on the “Duration of Life”? (1881), on ‘ Hered- ity’ (1883), “Life and Death” (1883), “The Continuity of the Germ-plasm as the Foundation of a Theory of Hered- ity’ (1885), “ The Significance of Sexual Reproduction in the Theory of Natural Selection ’’ (1886), ete., ete., all of which led up to and culminated in his volume on The Germ-plasm (1892). In 1896 his Germinal Selections appeared. In 1902 all of his theoretical considerations were brought together in two volumes on, The Evolution Theory, translated by Professor and Mrs. J. Arthur Thompson in 1904. It is impossible to discuss in any full- ness the theories of these publications. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL All centered around his conception of the continuity of the germ-plasm, and of heredity as developmental recapitula- tion; thus the denial of the prevalent belief in the inheritance of acquired characters was a necessary corollary of this conception of inheritance. Weis- mann maintained not only that the in- heritance of variations and mutilations of somatic origin was theoretically im- possible, but he labored to show that it was by no means a necessary support of the evolution theory, as had been gener- ally assumed. He met with greatest skill and keenest logic the many attacks which followed the statement of his position; his controversy with Herbert Spencer on this subject between 1893 and 1895 constituted the most notable of these debates. In the end he com- pletely won over the great majority of to his way of thinking, and freed the theory of evolution and heredity from an enormous incubus. In his theory of the continuity of the germ-plasm, Weismann formulated a point of view on which all subsequent genetic research must be based. He recognized with Darwin that a theory of evolution must find its final analysis in the life history of the individual, which contains the key to heredity and variation. Darwin’s theory of pangene- sis, constructed as a formal hypothesis of heredity and variation, involved un- naturalists necessary and untenable conceptions; he had assumed that each cell of the body produced, at all stages of its life, living particles (gemmules) capable of reproducing the parent cells. These particles were cast off from the parent cells and accumulated in the germ-cells, each of which was supposed to contain a complete assortment arranged in a definite fashion. The development from the germ-cell depended on the successive liberation and development of these AUGUST WEISMANN particles into cells like those from which they originally arose. The inheritance of acquired characters could thus be explained on the assumption that modi- fied cells produced modified gemmules which reproduced the acquired modifica- tion in the succeeding generation. Weismann rejected the centripetal part of the Darwinian theory, while still retaining certain fundamental concep- tions of pangenesis. The theory of the continuity of the germ-plasm however offers a complete antithesis to Darwin’s theory in the sense that, whereas Darwin regarded the germ-cells as a secretion of the entire body, Weismann regarded them as genetically distinct from all the remainder of the body or soma — as producing the soma but not produced by it. In the production of the soma not all of the active protoplasm (germ-plasm) of the original germ-cell was used up; but a certain amount of it was retained unmodified and formed the germ-cells of the new generation. Thus the germ cells of any one generation were regarded as a direct unmodified product of the germ-cells of the parents, and so were handed down from generation to genera- tion, essentially uninfluenced by the soma, retaining their original attributes and developmental capacities unchanged. This conception constituted an immense simplification of the Darwinian scheme. However, Weismann accomplished Darwin’s theory had been a purely imaginative construction and was frankly acknowledged by himself to be a formal hypothesis. Weismann’s theory on the other hand was based on the newly discovered facts concerning cell division, the fertilization of the egg and the processes involved in the origin of germ-cells. As a theory of heredity it has precisely the same relation to Dar- win’s theory of pangenesis that the latter’s theory of natural selection had much more. 191 borne to preceding evolution theories. It permitted test and verification and involved predictions which have been verified in certain cases, the most crucial test of any theory. The studies of cell-division carried out by Fleming, Hertwig and others had revealed a precise set of phenomena in nuclear division common to animals and plants, which suggested (Roux) a funda- mental réle of the nuclear elements or chromosomes in the cell life. Similarly the studies of Hertwig, Strasburger, Fol, and Van Beneden on fertilization had shown the predominantly — significant part played in the process by the nucleus and its chromosomes; and the begin- nings of knowledge, destined soon to be carried very much farther, concerning the maturation phenomena of the germ- cells, had demonstrated a similar pre- dominance of significance of the chromo- somes in these processes. Weismann used all of these data first in the identi- fication of the chromosomes as the really significant part of the germ-cells (germ- plasm), and second in the construction of a detailed theory on this basis. He was thus able to predict as a logical necessity, the occurrence at some stage in the life history of a reduction division of the nuclei of the germ-cells which would halve the number of chromosomes instead of maintaining the whole number as in all of the other divisions. This prediction has been universally realized in plants and animals. The phenome- non was later found to parallel exactly the Mendelian laws of inheritance and to furnish their explanation to a consider- able extent. There are few instances in the history of science, outside of astronomy, in which prediction has been so adequately and significantly fulfilled. The fundamental assumption of the theory of continuity of the germ-plasm involved corollaries of the most signifi- 192 cant kind. If the germ-plasm is at all times distinct from the soma, then defi- nite characters acquired by the individ- ual in the course of its lifetime must perish with the individual. There was no known or conceivable mechanism by which such characters could be trans- ferred to the germ-cells and thus carried over to a succeeding generation. Weis- mann at once recognized this, and began that attack on the belief in the inheritance of acquired characters which furnished the sharpest post-Darwinian debate of the nineteenth century. Weis- mann argued in the following ways: (1) Such inheritance is theoretically in- conceivable; this argument was devel- oped in so thorough a fashion as to be regarded by many as conclusive in itself. (2) The data usually cited to support the case of the inheritance of acquired char- acters were shown to be so uncritical as not to bear examination, in some cases as to the facts themselves and in others as to their interpretation. Under the latter head the supposed inheritance of diseased conditions, as inferred at that time, was shown to be equally explicable on the assumption of inheritance of germinal weakness. (38) Weismann carried out detailed critical experiments to investi- gate the commonly accepted idea of inheritance of mutilations; for many generations he amputated the tails of white mice and found by measurement that the tails came as long at the end as at the beginning. (4) He argued suc- cessfully against the contention that inheritance of acquired characters is necessary to explain evolution. If heritable variations do not arise by use or disuse of parts or by action of incident external forces upon the organ- ism, it is necessary to explain how they come about. Weismann put forward three ideas which contain the germ of our modern working hypotheses, viz. (1) THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL the theory of germinal selection; (2) the results of amphimixis; and (3) direct action of environment on the germ. The theory of germinal selection in- volves the postulated architecture of the germ-plasm, which was conceived as composed of a great number of elemen- tary particles (determinants), each the representative of some unit-character of the organism. Weismann reasoned in general that conditions in the germ- plasm must be conceived as variable, and thus more or less favorable for the growth of these elements; favored ones would tend to increase, those in unfavor- The concep- tion of the struggle for existence was able positions to decrease. transferred to the germ-plasm and varia- tion-producing modifications of the germ- This Weismann himself laid great store, has been sterile; it was plasm were attributed thereto. theory, by which purely formal and has had no effect on research. The second hypothesis concerning the effects of amphimixis, or admixture of parental germ-plasms in fertilization, was by no means original with Weismann; but he was the first one adequately to prove its significance and to show how the admixture of different sets of paren- tal characteristics, their shuffling in the filial germ-plasm and redistribution in the half reduction divisions of the filial germ-cells is a constant, and perhaps the greatest, source of heritable varia- tions. However, he did not proceed quite to the extreme of the past presi- dent of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, Professor Bate- son, and postulate the possibility that evolution has been productive of nothing essentially new from its inception. The third source of heritable varia- tions postulated by Weismann, viz. the action of incident external forces AUGUST WEISMANN upon the germ-plasm directly was never adequately analyzed by him. He al- ludes to it in his earlier essays, without following the matter farther. It has required the detailed investigations of Tower and MacDougal especially to give this real meaning, and such studies are still in their infancy. However, it is important to recognize Weismann’s fore- sight with reference to this. It is no part of this review to point out the weaknesses of Weismann’s theories, for this is not the place for an adequate critical review. However, we should be open to the charge at least of incom- pleteness if we failed to point out that Weismann’s theories were based on the data of a purely morphological period of genetic research. The experimental studies which followed close on the heels of his fundamental publications swept away, probably irrecoverably, some of the elements of his conceptions. Genetic conceptions are coming to be more and more physiological; and it is a logical necessity that analysis should continue to proceed in this direction. Biologists generally have discarded the Weisman- nian notion of living independent en- tities (determiners) in the germ-plasm, representative of entire unit characters, and have replaced it by the conception 195 of differential (chemical) factors located in the germ-plasm and interacting with other factors (or chemical substances) in the cell. But when we effect such a change of conceptions, fundamental as it may be, we still deal to a considerable extent with those phenomena of the chromosomes whose significance Weis- mann did so much to make plain. Simi- larly we can no longer deal with the development of the individual in terms of qualitative nuclear analysis as Weis- mann did, for it has been proved that the cytoplasm has a predominant determin- ing influence in many of the phenomena at least, and it has not been proved that nuclei in general grow qualitatively dif- ferent. However, it must be realized that Weismann’s precise formulation of his theory of individual development furnished the stimulus for some of the fundamental investigations that have made real advances in this difficult field. I think it is fair to say that Weismann played as important a part in the devel- opment of a theory of heredity as Dar- win did in the theory of evolution in general; he must, therefore, be regarded as among the greatest of Darwin’s fol- lowers and supporters. The biological world must forever hold his memory in reverence. MORGAN’S “HEREDITY AND SEX”: A REVIEW By E. G. Conklin HIS book is the outgrowth of the Jesup Lectures for 1913 which were given by Professor Morgan at the American Museum of Natural His- tory. It is a very difficult thing to make a book interesting to the general public and at the same time valuable to scientific readers, but this difficult task Dr. Morgan has accomplished in an admirable manner. His book is a work of extraordinary interest to the intelligent layman and at the same time one of great value to professional biol- ogists, and its wide success is attested by the fact that the first edition was exhausted and a new one issued within a year. The book embodies the results of a large amount of research work by Dr. Morgan and his pupils as well as by many other investi- gators. The subjects dealt with in the eight chapters are: Evolution and Sex; The Mechanism of Sex Determination; The Mendelian Principles of Heredity and their Bearing on Sex; Secondary Sexual Characters and their Relation to Darwin’s Theory of Sexual Selection; The Effects of Castration and Transplantation on the Secondary Sexual Characters; | Gynandromorphism, Hermaphroditism, Parthenogenesis and Sex; Fertility, and Special Cases of Sex Inherit- ance. Hach of these general topics is dealt with in a manner which is not only instructive but also illuminating and interesting. As to the “Evolution of Sex’”’ it is shown that we know actually nothing about the manner in which sex has come to be. Sexual reproduc- tion brings about many new combinations of characters but such recombinations do not furnish the materials for evolution as Weis- mann assumed. However these new com- binations of ancestral characters produce a ereat amount of individual variation and this may be beneficial to a species in helping it to survive. Furthermore if a new character arises in a single individual it may be grafted on, as it were, to the species by sexual re- production. 1 HprReDITY AND Sex, by Thomas Hunt Mor- gan, Ph.D. Professor of Experimental Zo6logy in Columbia University, pp. ix + 292 with i121 illus- trations in the text. Columbia University Press: New York, 1913. Revised Edition, 1914. 194 There is an interesting discussion of the various types of accessory organs of repro- duction which serve to bring the spermatozoa and ova together and of the secondary sexual characters which distinguish males and females such as brilliant colors, instincts and behavior in courtship. “In man courtship may be an involved affair.... Nowhere in the animal kingdom do we find such a mighty display; and clothes as ornaments excel the most elaborate developments of secondary sexual characters of creatures lower in the scale.’ With remarkable clearness and brevity the author presents the facts of the complicated structure of the germ-cells, their origin, maturation, union in fertilization, the way in which sex is determined and the mechanism of hereditary transmission. He accepts un- reservedly the view that sex is determined at the time of fertilization; if the egg is fertilized by one type of spermatozo6n a male is produced, if by the other type a female results. He also holds that the evidence is “almost convincing in favor of the view that the chromosomes are the essential bearers of the hereditary qualities.” In favor of the chromosomal theory of heredity he pre- sents evidences drawn from cytology, from experiment and from sex-linked inheritance. The latter is a type of inheritance, first clearly distinguished by Morgan, in which characters are transmitted to male or female offspring in exactly the way in which certain chromo- somes are transmitted. On the other hand in sex-limited inheritance “the secondary sexual characters appear in one sex only and are not transferable to the other sex without an operation.” After discussing the principles of inherit- ance discovered by Mendel the author presents the results of his own work on the inheritance of sex-linked characters in the fruit fly. This is perhaps the most important part of this book, as it is one of the most valuable contributions to the study of hered- ity which has been made in recent years. The author concludes “‘that when inheritance factors lie in different chromosomes they freely assort and give the Mendelian expecta- tion; but when they lie in the same chromo- CROCKER LAND EXPEDITION some they may be said to be linked and they give departures from the Mendelian ratios.” Inasmuch as factors which usually le in different chromosomes may sometimes come to lie in the same chromosome, Morgan has suggested that when the maternal and pater- nal chromosomes pair in the maturation stages of the egg or spermatozo6n, the chro- mosomes of each pair may actually fuse at certain pots where they cross each other and thus portions of the chromosomes with their factors exchange places. With this interesting hypothesis as a basis he has been able by means of his breeding experiments with fruit flies to plot the location of particu- lar inheritance factors in individual chro- mosomes. This work, although in many re- spects hypothetical, is well supported by evidence and it is probably the most impor- tant work ever done on the ‘‘architecture of the germ-plasm.” A large number of cases are presented in which the sexes differ in color, form or habit and the inadequacy of Darwin’s theory of sexual selection to account for these second- ary sexual characters is generally admitted. Similarly it is shown that the selection of continuous variations, or of what might better be called non-inherited variations, is of no evolutionary significance. Even in the case of discontinuous or hereditary variations the author shows that natural selection plays no part in the formation of these variations. The effects on secondary sexual characters 195 of the removal and of the transplantation of ovaries or testes are described in the fifth chapter and the conclusion is reached that “the secondary sexual characters in four great groups, viz., mammals, birds, crustacea and insects are not on the same footing.”’ Those interesting cases in which both sexes are united in the same individual or in which eggs develop without being fertilized are treated at some length in the sixth chapter, and here as everywhere else Morgan draws to a large extent upon his own researches. In the chapter on fertility and sterility many scattered and diverse observations are summarized, though the facts cannot at present be satisfactorily generalized or ex- plained. The last chapter deals with special cases of sex-inheritance, such as sex in bees, peculiar forms of sex-linked inheritance in fruit flies, and the sex ratios in birds, frogs and man. This book was written on the firimg lines, as it were, of biological science and it deals with many matters which are not finally settled. It is inevitable that such a book should encounter differences of opinion on the part of other investigators in this field, but the author is peculiarly happy in his manner of presentation. He writes as one who is convinced and yet tolerant and open- minded. His style is brief, keen, attractive, and best of all in a scientific work he shows a thorough, first-hand acquaintance with the phenomena described, and sound judgment and good imagination in dealing with them. NOTE ON THE CROCKER LAND EXPEDITION SHIP By George H. Sherwood Acting Chairman of the Committee in Charge HE Committee in Charge of the Crocker Land Expedition announces that it has chartered the ‘George B. Cluett”’ for the purpose of trans- porting to New York the members of the ex- pedition party which went north in 1913 on the chartered ship ‘Diana.’ The ‘‘Cluett”’ is a three masted auxiliary schooner owned by the Grenfell Association and used by it for carrying hospital and food supplies from St. Johns, Newfoundland, to the various mission stations along the coast of Labrador. The “‘Cluett”’ was launched on July 1, 1911, and is one hundred and thirty-five feet over all. She is well built and heavily timbered and is to be “fortified”? as a further protection against the ice before starting on her journey northward. The “Cluett’’ will leave Battle Harbor about the first week in July, go directly to Etah, there taking on board the members of the expedition party, their collections and equipment, and willreturn to New York some time during September. Captain George Comer of East Haddam, Connecticut, hasbeen engaged by the Committee to serve as ice 196 pilot and as a Museum representative on the ship. Captain Comer has had many years’ experience in the ice fields of Hudson Bay and the Committee has the utmost confidence in his ability to guide the ship safely through the ice of Baffin Bay, land at Etah and start on the homeward journey before the winter ice begins to form. The Crocker Land Expedition, as will be remembered, was organized under the aus- pices of the American Museum of Natural History and the American Geographical Society with the codperation of the Univer- sity of Illinois. Its staff, consisting of Donald B. MacMillan, leader and ethnologist; Fitz- hugh Green, U.S. N., engineer and physicist; W. Elmer Ekblaw, geologist and botanist; Maurice C. Tanquary, zoélogist; Harrison J. Hunt, surgeon; Jerome Lee Allen, wireless operator; and Jonathan Small, mechanic, has been in the Arctic for nearly two years. The party sailed from the Brooklyn Navy Yard on July 2, 1913, in the ‘Diana”’ and stopped at Boston and Sydney, Nova Scotia, for addi- tional supplies. After leaving Sydney, how- ever, much ice was encountered in the Strait of Belle Isle and in a dense fog on the morn- ing of July 17, the ship went fast aground on Barge Point, Labrador. The ‘ Diana” was finally pulled off the rocks and returned to St. Johns where the equipment and supplies THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL were transferred to the “Erik” in which ves- sel the party safely continued its northward trip. It was found necessary to make the headquarters at Etah, North Greenland, in- stead of on Ellesmere Land as originally planned and it was there that the party spent the long Arctic nights of the winter of 1913- 14. In November of last year the Museum, through the kindness of Mr. Knud Ras- mussen, the Danish explorer, received word that Mr. MacMillan accompanied by Ensign Green had made the one hundred and twenty- five mile dash northwest from Cape Thomas Hubbard across the ice of the Polar Sea in search for Crocker Land but that they had found that Crocker Land did not exist, at least within the range originally ascribed to it. According to the original plans, the expedi- tion is exploring and mapping the Greenland ice cap this spring and will later return to headquarters at Etah to await the coming of the ship chartered for the return to New York. The Committee begs to call the attention of the friends of the expedition to the urgent need that exists for additional funds to help defray the cost of sending this relief ship northward. The unfortunate wrecking of the “Diana” with its incident expenses has been a heavy burden and additional subscrip- tions are earnestly desired. MUSEUM NOTES Tue frontispiece of this issue of the JOURNAL is a photograph of the marble bust of John Burroughs, naturalist and author, made by Mr. C. S. Pietro and presented to the Museum by Mr. Henry Ford. The bust has been put on exhibition at an appropriate season — April, the month of reawakening nature and return of the birds — and in an appropriate part of the Museum, the local bird hall. April 3, the anniversary of the birth of John Burroughs, has been made a national ‘bird day”’ in Utah and was cele- brated as a bird day for 1915°in New York and various other states. : A bird day bulletin to the New York public schools, decorated with a portrait of the great horned owl in color by Louis Agassiz Fuertes was sent out March 25 from the State Educa- tion Department of the University of the State of New York. The bulletin was prepared by the three authors of the State Museum memoir, Birds of New York, and is endorsed by Dr. John H. Finley in the fol- lowing words, ‘‘If these suggestions are gener- ally followed, the State will be made richer by many millions and a great source of human happiness will be kept at our doors.” Mr. James P. CHaprin of the Museum’s Congo Expedition, after a six years’ absence in Africa, arrived in New York March 30 by way of England. He brings the details of the wonderful success of the expedition, not only in the work of a scientific survey but also in having lived without mishap for the’ex- tended period of six years amidst the dangers of the equatorial forest and among the negro races of Central Africa—a success due in part to the cordial coédperation of the Belgian government. Mr. Chapin brings with him MUSEUM NOTES about one-fourth of the expedition’s collec- tions. The balance remains in the hands of Mr. Lang, leader of the expedition, who also will come out of the Congo immediately after the final work of packing and shipment is completed. The entire collection numbers some 16,000 specimens of vertebrates alone, 6000 of which are birds and 5000 mammals. The specimens are accompanied by some 4000 pages of descriptive matter and 6000 photo- graphs. It includes full material and careful studies for museum groups of the okapi, the giant eland and white rhinoceros, besides many specimens of lions, elephants, giraffes, buffaloes, bongos, situtungas, yellow-backed duikers, black forest pigs, giant manis and chimpanzees. The ethnological section of the collection is rich in specimens of native art of the Congo including several hundred objects of carved ivory, a revelation as to the capacities of the Congo uneducated negro. There are also seventy plaster casts of native faces from the Logo, Azande, Avungura, Mangbetu, Bangba, Anadi, Abarambo, Mayoho, Ma- budu, Medje, Mobali and Pygmy tribes. Each cast is supplemented by a series of photographie studies of the individual. Mr. Chapin will take up again his zodélogi- cal studies at Columbia University and will retain his connection with the American Museum as assistant in ornithology. In this position he wiJl work up for publication the 6000 Congo birds of the new collection which in point of preservation as well as size and number of specimens new to the Ameri- can Museum, surpasses any collection that has ever been secured by the institution. THERE is on exhibition in the west as- sembly hall for the month of April a series of photographic transparencies illustrating cer- tain noteworthy features of the work of Professor Percival Lowell and his staff at the Observatory, Flagstaff, Arizona. The series shows, first, the Observatory, the great 24-inch telescope, and following, the spectra of the Moon, Jupiter and other planets. Of special interest are the photographs showing various aspects of Mars, including the much discussed “canal system.’’ These are sup- plemented by drawings by Professor Lowell which illustrate the vegetation on Mars and the condition of the snow-caps at the north and south poles. Perhaps the most striking of the series is the large photograph of 197 Halley’s Comet, which includes not only the comet itself, but the stars drawn into lines on account of following the comet with the camera, the planet Venus, and lastly a meteor which chanced to pass directly across the plate during the exposure. Photographs of the Moon show the craters and the shadows of the great crater walls which rise almost vertically 10,000 to 15,000 feet. As the transparencies are brilliantly illuminated in a darkened room, it gives the effect of looking at the sky itself. “Ortain and Meaning of some Funda- mental Earth Structures’ was the subject recently discussed by Professor Charles P. Berkey of Columbia University in the Jesup lectures for 1915. The course consisted of eight lectures and opened with a discussion of the origin and nature of the earth. The nebular and meteoric hypotheses of the origin of the earth were contrasted with the later and now widely accepted view that the earth has been built up by the slow accretion of planetesimals, or fragments of a disrupted sun that was the parent of the whole solar system. Reasons for the existence of elevated areas and basin-like depressions, namely of the continents and oceans, were discussed; these elevations and depressions and the move- ments of the earth’s crust were all traced back to gravitational forces, which were manifested in earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, mountain-forming uplifts, and submergences, all due eventually to the balancing of conti- nents and oceans against each other (isostasy). The place and work of volcanic activity and the agencies and forces involved in the metamorphosis of rocks were treated, with constant reference to rock structure and to the cycles of transformation from sedimentary to metamorphic and igneous structures and the reverse. All this was finally applied to the interpretation of local geology and to such practical matters as foundation work, tunneling work, water supply and the quali- ties of structural material. The Jesup lectures, which are Columbia University lectures given in codperation with -the American Museum, form an important medium for the presentation in concise form of scientific progress. The first course of the series was given by Professor Henry Fairfield Osborn in 1907, his subject being the “Evolution of the Horse.” In the second series (1909) Professor Richard C. 198 Maclaurin presented ‘‘Newton’s Experi- ments and Contributions to Optical Theory.” In 1911 Professor Frederic 8. Lee lectured on “Seientific Features of Modern Medicine,” and in 1913, Professor T. H. Morgan sum- marized recent advances in the study of “Heredity and Sex.’ The Jesup lectures are being published by the Columbia Univer- sity Press. Since the last issue of the JouRNAL the following persons have become members of the Museum: Annual Members, Mrs. FrepEertc N. Gop- parRbD, Mrs. Everard B. Hopwoop, Mrs. C. D. Jackson, Mrs. Samuren W. Wetss, the Misses Leia S. Frissett, MArcaret W. Watson, His ExceLnuency, IRA NELSON Morris, Dr. Herrmann FISCHER AND Mrssrs. LatHroe Brown, G. E. CHAPrin, J. WARREN CuTLER, ALBERT DE Roope, SamuEL JACKSON, RosperT E. NOLKER, Emit T. PALMENBERG, FRANK H. PARSONS, WILLARD ScuDDER AND IF. B. WrpBora. “Men of the Old Stone Age’’ was the topic at the April 12th meeting of the Academy of Sciences. Professor Henry Fairfield Osborn presented some of the chief results of his synthetic work on this subject and made special acknowledgments of the codperation of the following archeologists, anatomists and geologists: Messieurs Abbé Breuil, Cartailhaec, Obermaier, MacCurdy, Nelson, MacGregor, Starr, Penck, Reeds. He exhib- ited a chart illustrating the successive ad- vances and retreats of the glacial ice in Europe and the corresponding succession of mammalian faunas and races of man. — Illus- trations of the skeletal remains of the palso- lithic races were then passed in review. Professor J. Howard MacGregor then exhibited his remarkably lifelike and accu- rate series of busts of prehistoric men. He explained the methods adopted in building up corrected models of the skulls, from casts of the imperfect original specimens, and in restoring the flesh, from data secured by dissection of recent types. Dr. A. Hrdlicka, formerly of this Museum and now of the National Museum, was present and took part in the discussion. ADMIRAL PEARy’s Arctic ship, the ‘‘ Roose- velt,”’ has been sold and after it has been fitted with oil-burning machinery and other improvements, will be used by the Bureau of Fisheries in the Department of Commerce THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL and Labor in connection with the fisheries service in Alaskan waters. The “Roosevelt” was the ship used by Admiral Peary on the expeditions in which he reached the “farthest north”? record in 1906 and the North Pole in 1909, and was built expressly for the pur- pose in the spring of 1905. It is to be remem- bered that Apri) 6 marks the sixth anni- versary of the discovery of the North Pole. A LIFE-sIzE model of the beautiful Portu- guese man-of-war (Physalia arethusa), a remarkable product of the glass-blower’s and colorist’s skill, has recently been installed in the Darwin hall. The Portuguese man-of- war is not a single animal as might be sup- posed from its appearance, but a colony of animals in which the phenomenon of division of labor is most strikingly exemplified. One of the individuals in the colony is specialized to act as a float. The other individuals are attached to it, pendant from the lower surface. Some of them have mouths and feed for the entire colony; others are sensory in function and have no mouths; still others are armed with rows of stinging cells and form the offensive and defensive members of the colony; and still others can neither feed nor fight but are the reproductive individuals. The colony as a whole, the “ Portuguese man-of-war,”’ floats on the surface of the sea, especially in warmer regions, but is often brought north upon the Gulf Stream and drifts in upon the New England coast. Cer- tain of the individuals making up the colony, those armed with the most powerful stinging cells, extend as long retractile streamers into the depths of the sea, at times to a length of forty feet. These also act as a drag anchor and keep the head of the float to wind- ward. The coloration of the animal is strik- ingly beautiful, varying from deep cerulean blue through deepest purple to brilliant car- mine. In the West Indies it is often seen floating in large squadrons on the sea. Apropos of the ever-widening scope of the lecture work which is being carried on by the Museum’s department of education, it is interesting to note that a course similar to the Museum’s Saturday morning stories for the children of members was inaugurated this year in Cleveland, Ohio. Mr. George H. Sherwood gave the introductory lecture of the series which included lectures by Mr. R. W. Miner, Mr. R. C. Andrews, Mr. Ernest Harold Baynes and Mr. Albert H. Pratt, of himotori, colorist, s.s and Mr. that floats at the surface of warm seas. ’ Ge pe ae aw eee ~ wre Se ee oe - “ a ne EN hs page BE — eet ai ai Se ae in co 4 ’ glass blower ’ oe pe ~~ ieee sgh pts ——< / MODEL OF THE PORTUGUESE MAN-OF—WAR H. Miiller Preparation of model by Mr. An animal, or more exactly speaking, a colony of animals The transparent ‘‘float,’’ blue, purple and crimson tinted, sails before the wind, trailing long retractile filaments. Model on exhibition in the Darwin hall the American Museum 00 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL Tue Hopi Indian group in the Southwest Indian hall has been completed and is now open to the public for mspection. This group aims to present a unified complete picture of pueblo life as illustrated in the home and industrial life of the Hopi Indians. The foreground is the roof of a Hopi dwelling, which is the center of daily life for the Hopi home. Here are shown life-size character- istic figures of Hopi men and women at their respective occupations: the men spinning and weaving, the women making baskets and pot- tery. In the background is the village of Walpi, on the end of the first Hopi mesa, with the village of Sichumovi in the distance. The group was designed and executed by Howard McCormick, an artist already dis- tinguished for his paintings of scenes of the Southwest, and the figures were modeled by Mahonri M. Young, who codperated with Mr. McCormick in the planning of the group. It is the first anthropological group con- structed by the Museum at all comparable to the bird groups for which the institution has become famous, and marks the turning point in the development of the anthropological exhibits. An opening view of the Hopi group was given to friends of the Museum on April 8 and was preceded by an exhibit of motion pictures taken by Mr. McCormick illustrat- ing many phases of Hopi life which are represented in the group. Worp has been received from Mr. H. E. Anthony, who is making a collection of birds and mammals for the Museum in Panama, that on February 21, he reached the base of Mount Tacarcuna in eastern Panama where he is favorably situated for the projected explorations to Mount Tacarcuna. Earty in the spring of 1914 Lord William Perey of Northumberland, England, under the auspices of the American Museum, joined the revenue cutter “‘Bear”’ on an expedition to the coasts of Alaska and Siberia for the purpose of securing water birds and especially Visher’s eiderduck. While Lord Perey was still in Alaska the ‘‘Bear” chanced to take by wireless a message which gave the news of the war. Lord Perey, who is a reserve member of the Grenadier Guards, left the ship immediately, made arrangements for transportation to Seattle and arrived in New York about a month afterward, and from there sailed immediately to join his regiment at the front. Since that time occasional letters with personal facts of the war have come to New York. He was in France for four months. At one time the English troops were stationed only one hundred yards from those of the Germans and as he ex- pressed it, ‘‘For us the war consists of shell- ing and shooting at the Germans all day and all night and of being shot at and shelled by them. It is not a very attractive\form of warfare.’ A short time ago Lord Percy’s friends in the Museum learned that he had been wounded and had lain for several hours in a shell-hole before he received medical attention. We are glad to learn that his wound, although serious, will probably admit of an early recovery. MopE ts have recently been installed in the hall of public health illustrating how the mosquitoes which transmit diseases are con- trolled upon the Isthmus of Panama. One model is a street scene which shows a disin- fecting squad at work destroying yellow fever in the houses where the disease has occurred. A second model illustrates the burning of grass and the oiling of ditches to destroy malaria mosquitoes in open country. Mr. Leo E. Miniter writes from South America that he has completed his work in Antioquia and on March 30 sailed from Barranquilla to Colon en route to Bolivia, where it is proposed to inaugurate a zodlogical survey similar to that which the Museum has conducted in Colombia for the past five years. Mr. Miller’s collections amounting to two thousand birds and mammals have been re- ceived and make an exceedingly important addition to the Museum’s Colombian collec- tions. Tue Librarian would be glad to receive back numbers of the JouRNAL, even those of quite recent date, as they are frequently asked for by libraries and other institutions desiring to complete volumes. THE government of Porto Rico has made the second annual appropriation of five thousand dollars for the continuance of the scientific survey of the island under the auspices of the New York Academy of Sciences in codperation with the American Museum and other institutions. Several members of the Museum staff will be engaged in this work during the coming months. The American Museum of Natural History Seventy-seventh Street and Central Park West, New York City Open free to the public on every day in the year. The American Museum of Natural History was established in 1869 to promote the Natural Sciences and to diffuse a general knowledge of them among the people. It is dependent upon private subscriptions and the fees from members for procuring needed additions to the collections and for carrying on explorations in America and other parts of the world The membership fees are, Amuso tViem bers: < «,. vs. seas alelesiee oe-5 $ 10 Sustaining Members (annually)........ 25 Mrhem Viemb eran ai. takots acc aletouelk aa stieee ss 100 eto eee erevotocte othe, hens oy -.eueiousuere sh 500 PATRONS Se serepeectheceho cen yater ee heir ten ote $1,000 Associate Benefactors............... 10,000 Associate: Hounders. <2: .....0d. coe 25,000 IBenetactorst vtec ies Gooscec aleuneee 50,900 Guides for Study of Exhibits are provided on request to members and teachers by the department of public education. Teachers wishing to bring classes should write or telephone the department for an appointment, specifying the collection to be studied. Lectures to classes may also be arranged for. of children. In all cases the best results are obtained with small groups The Museum Library contains more than 60,000 volumes with a good working collection of publications issued by scientific institutions and societies in this country and abroad. The library is open to the public for reference daily — Sundays and holidays excepted — from 9 A.M. to 5 P.M. The Technical Publications of the Museum comprise the Memoirs, Bulletin and Anthropological Papers, the Memoirs and Bulletin edited by J. A. Allen, the Anthropological Papers by Clark Wissler. the institution. These publications cover the field and laboratory researches of The Popular Publications of the Museum comprise the JourNAtL, edited by Mary Cynthia Dickerson, the Handbooks, Leaflets and General Guide. The following list gives some of the popular publications; complete lists, of both technical and popular publications, may be obtained from the Librarian. POPULAR PUBLICATIONS HANDBOOKS Norra AMERICAN INDIANS OF THE Piatns. By Clark Wissler, Ph.D. Paper, 25 cents; cloth, 50 cents. INDIANS OF THE SouTHWEST. By Pliny Earle Goddard, Ph.D. Paper, 25 cents; cloth, 50 cents. ANIMALS OF THE Past. By Frederic A. Lucas, Sc.D. Paper, 35 cents. ILLUSTRATED GUIDE LEAFLETS GENERAL GUIDE TO THE COLLECTIONS. issued December, 1914. Price, 25 cents. Tue CoLLection or Minerats. By Louis P. Grata- cap, A.M. Price, 5 cents. Nortu AMERICAN RUMINANTS. Price, 10 cents. THe ANncreENT Basket MAKERS OF SOUTHEASTERN Uran. By George H. Pepper. Price, 10 cents. Primitive Arr. Price, 15 cents. Tue Birbs oF THE Vicinity oF New York City. By Frank M. Chapman, Sc.D. Price, 15 cents. Peruvian Mummies. By Charles W. Mead. Price, 10 cents. Tue METEORITES IN THE FOYER OF THE AMERICAN Museum or Natrurau Hisrory. By Edmund Otis Hovey, Ph.D. Price, 10 cents. Tue Hasirat Grours or Norta AMERICAN Birps. By Frank M. Chapman, Sc.D. Price, 15 cents. New edition By J. A. Allen, Ph.D. Tue InpraAns oF Mannartran Istanp anp VICINITY. By Alanson Skinner. Jn preparation. Tue Stokes PAINTINGS REPRESENTING GREENLAND Eskimo. Price, 5 cents. Brier History oF ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION. 10 cents. Trees AND Forestry. By Mary Cynthia Dickerson, B.S. A new edition in course of preparation. Tue Protection oF RivER AND HARBOR WATERS FROM MonicipaL_ Wastes. By Charles-Edward Amory Winslow, M.S. Price, 10 cents. Piant Forms In Wax. By E. C. B. Fassett. 10 cents. Tue Evoturion or THE Horse. Ph.D. Price, 20 cents. Price, Price, By W. D. Matthew, REPRINTS Tue GrounpD SitotH Group. By W. D. Matthew, Ph.D. Price, 5 cents. MetuHops AND RESULTS IN HERPETOLOGY. Cynthia Dickerson, B.S. Price, 5 cents. Tue Wauarr Pitre Grove. By Roy W. Miner, A.B. Price, 5 cents. Tue SEA Worm Group. Price, 10 cents. Tue ANCESTRY OF THE EDENTATES. thew, Ph.D. Price, 5 cents. By Mary By Roy W. Miner, A.B. By W. D. Mat- the wild apple tree. A red squirrel eagerly watching the toads from the stone wall behind He is fond of a taste of meat in the spring after his winter on nuts and seeds. (From the Toad Group in the American Museum) PHOTOGRAPHS OF STARS AND PLANETS EUROPEAN CAVES A ND EARLY MAN yr » ‘ ee” A GREAT PORTRAIT PAINTER OF BIRDS PENGUINS “JOHNNY PISHES HAT LIVE MILES UNDER SEA The American Museum of Natural History BOARD OF TRUSTEES President HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBORN First Vice-President CLEVELAND H. DopGE Treasurer Secretary CHARLES LANIER ADRIAN ISELIN, JR. JoHN Purroy MitcuHert, Mayor or tue City or New York Witu1AmM A. PRENDERGAST, COMPTROLLER OF THE City or NEw YORK Casot Warp, PRESIDENT OF THE DEPARTMENT OF PARKS Second Vice-President J. P. MorGan GeorcE F. BAKER FREDERICK F. BREWSTER JosepH H. CHOATE R. Fuitron Curtina Tuomas DEWITT CuYLEeR JAMES DouGLAsS ; Henry C. Frick Mapison GRANT Anson W. Harp ArcHER M. HuNnTINGTON ARTHUR CURTISS JAMES Wa.ter B. JAMES SetH Low OGpEN MILLs Percy R. PYne Joun B. TREVOR Fetrx M. Warsura GeorGE W. WICKERSHAM A. D. JUILLIARD ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS Director Freperic A. Lucas Assistant Treasurer Tue UNITED StaTEs Trust CoMPANY Assistant Secretary GeorGE H. SHERWOOD oF New York SCIENTIFIC STAFF Freperic A. Lucas, Se.D., Director Geology and Invertebrate Paleontology Epmounp Oris Hovey, Ph.D., Curator Cuester A. Reeps, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Mineralogy L. P. Gratacap, A.M., Curator GerorG_E F, Kunz, Ph.D., Honorary Curator Gems Woods and Forestry Mary Cyrnrara Dickerson, B.S., Curator Invertebrate Zodlogy Henry E. Crampton, Ph.D., Curator Roy W. Miner, A.B., Asst. Curator Frank E. Lutz, Ph.D., Asst. Curator L. P. Gratacap, A.M., Curator Mollusca A. J. Murtcuuer, Assistant Frank E. Watson, B.S., Assistant W. M. WaeeE ter, Ph.D., Hon. Curator Social Insects A. L. TREADWELL, Ph.D., Hon. Curator Annulata CHARLES W. Lena, B.S., Hon. Curator Coleoptera Ichthyology and Herpetology Basurorp Dean, Ph.D., Curator Emeritus Louis Hussaxor, Ph.D., Curator Ichthyology Joun T. Nicuous, A.B., Asst. Cur. Recent Fishes Mary Cynruia Dickerson, B.S., Assoc. Curator Herpetology Mammalogy and Ornithology J. A. AuLEN, Ph.D., Curator Frank M. Cuapman, Sc.D., Curator Ornithology Roy C. Anprews, A.M., Asst. Cur. Mammalogy W. DeW. Miter, Asst. Curator Ornithology H. E. Anruony, B.S., Assistant Mammalogy Herpert Lane, Assistant Mammalogy James P. Cuapin, Assistant Ornithology Vertebrate Paleontology Henry FairFiELD Ossorn, LL.D., D.Sc., Curator Emeritus W. D. Martruew, Ph.D., Curator WaALTER GRANGER, Assoc. Curator [Mammals] Barnum Brown, A.B., Assoc. Curator [Reptiles] Wituiam K. Gregory, Ph.D., Assoc. in Palz#on- tology Anthropology CuiarRK WissuerR, Ph.D., Curator Puiny E. Gopparp, Ph.D., Curator Ethnology Rosert H. Lowiz, Ph.D., Assoc. Curator HeRBERT J. SPINDEN, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Nets C. Netson, M.L., Asst. Curator CuarRLes W. Moeap, Asst. Curator ALANSON SKINNER, Asst. Curator Harwuan I. Smitu, Hon. Curator Archeology Anatomy and Physiology Rautpex W. Tower, Ph.D., Curator Public Health CHARLES-Epwarp A. Winstow, M.S., Curator IsraEL J. Kuicuer, B.S., Assistant Public Education Gerorce H. SHerwoop, A.M., Curator G. Ciype FisHer, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Ann E. Tuomas, Ph.B., Assistant Books and Publications Rauteu W. Tower, Ph.D., Curator Ipa RicHarpson Hoop, A.B., Asst. Librarian THe American Museum Journac VoLUME XV MAY, 1915 NUMBER 5 CONTENTS Cover, “The White Gyrfalcon’”’ From a painting by Louis Agassiz Fuertes _ > ERP SO ak SES ln SEIRBAR E Rae o R ma ne el BN ate Menge ie, RN UP OnE A Ph Sy It 202 Wixiiam T. Hornavpay, Director of the Zodlogical Park of the New York Zodlogical Society and advocate of wild animal protection Hereert Lana, Leader of the Congo expedition of the American Museum James P. Cuapin, recently returned to America after six years field study in the Congo Lovis AGassiz FuERTES, portrait painter of birds. Frontispiece, Johnny Penguins Climbing to the Rookery.................... 206 Scene photographed in the Antarctic by Robert Cushman Murphy Sec, ies Warer on Mans 2 fore On. s ie Ses ek ay PercivaL LOWELL 207 Observations, direct photographs and spectrograms made through a long period of years at the Flagstaff Observatory, tending to prove the presence on Mars of oxygen and water vapor, the two great requisites for life ieee MMO erton I. AStFODOMY so O26 05 6 teva lage ee E. C. SLIpHER 211 Illustrated with a series of remarkable direct photographs and spectrograms of celestial bodies Louis Agassiz Fuertes — Painter of Bird Portraits...... FranK M. CHAPMAN 221 With an insert in duotone from photographs of eight of Fuertes’ bird portraits and decorative panels The Penguins of South Georgia.................. RoBerT CusHMAN Murpuy 225 ’ A close study of the life history and habits of the ‘‘Johnnies,’’ with many illustrations from photographs by Mr. Murphy — The article will be continued in the October JourNaAL, in the story of a friendly acquaintance with the *‘kings”’ Ruropesas Caves and Harly Man...) 220. an 21 ene © oes oes N. C. NELson 237 Description of a visit to the shelters and painted caves of Europe, with a view to reproduction in the American Museum of one of these antique haunts of man Rees rae DCS ea ORs kos ae sates hey Cilmy aa oe cee: L. Hussakor 249 Volcanoes of the Lesser Antilles................-.... Epmunp Oris Hovey 254 (Grannd- sloth froma Gave im. Patagonia... 22.3... 20. sas W. D. MatrHew 256 aomaikon Dance ab. ciGhumMoVl. :\. 22-4. . net. eee do F.S. DELLENBAUGH 256 Lalrsairee teh ay PSS ie Bis Mt A eae icy URE rhs Rene Aber) AL ieee ube ee Aen er 20. ahge 258 Mary Cyrntuia Dickerson, Editor Published monthly from October to May by the American Museum of Natural History, at the Cosmos Press, Cambridge, Mass. Terms: one dollar and a half per year, twenty cents per copy. Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-Office at Boston, Mass., Act of Congress, July 16, 1894. Subscriptions should be addressed to the AmericAN Museum JourNAL, 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City. The Journal is sent free to all members of the Museum. WILLIAM T. HORNADAY The Director of the Zodlogical Park of the New York Zodlogical Society has no doubt inaugurated and carried to success more movements for the protection of wild animal life than has any other man in America. We owe to him the Wichita and Montana national bison herds, Elk River Game Preserve of British Columbia, and Snow Creek Game Preserve of Montana. He drafted the Bayne Law which since 1912 has prevented the sale of native wild game, as well as the law which since 1913 has prevented all impor- tation of wild birds’ plumage for milliners’ use. His name is connected also with saving the fur-seal industry. As to his effort to put such protective work on a permanent finan- cial basis for the future, see further mention on page 260 202 HERBERT LANG Mr. Lang, as leader for the past six years of the American Museum’s expedi- tion to the Belgian Congo, has traveled some three thousand miles under an equa- torial sun, and for the most part with heavily loaded caravans, to accomplish the remarkable success achieved in the collection of zodlogical specimens and study of Congo native tribes. Mr. Lang still remains in Africa to attend to the final pack- ing and shipment of specimens (This photograph of Mr. Lang was made before he sailed for Africa six years ago] JAMES P. CHAPIN Mr. Chapin has returned to New York after six years of tramping through African jungles as a member of the Congo expedition of the American Museum, during which time he secured the largest and most valuable collection of Congo birds ever brought together [Mr. Chapin will contribute to the next number of the Journat an article on his experi- ences in collecting birds in Africa] LOUIS AGASSIZ FUERTES A portrait painter of wild birds who bases his work on an intimate sympathetic study of the subject in nature and succeeds in portraying the character of the bird in addition to its external appearance. He is an illustrator of technical and popular books as well as a painter of decorative canvases of considerable size JOHNNY PENGUINS CLIMBING TO THE ROOKERY make their homes on the summits of the windy shelterless ridges and trudge gravely Broad beaten thoroughfares show the effect of the The Johnnies back and forth to the sea where they get their food. pattering of little leathery feet through many generations —‘ The Penguins of South Georgia,’ page 225 206 THe American Museum Journal VoLuME XV MAY, 1915 NuMBER 5 OXYGEN AND WATER ON MARS By Percival Lowell Director of the Lowell Observatory, Flagstaff, Arizona EXT to the photographs of the canals of Mars, perhaps the most vitally interesting photograph in the recent work of the Lowell Observa- tory is a spectrogram of Mars by Dr. Y. M. Slipher, disclosing to the average ob- server merely a darkening of one of the spectral lines (a) to the red end of this spectrum over the same line in the col- lateral spectrum of the moon. But to scientific insight this bit of glass is other- wise transparent. For the slight differ- ence in tone between these identically positioned lines in the two photographs means all the difference between life and death. It reveals the fact that water-vapor is present in the atmos- phere of Mars. The moon, an almost absolutely airless body, delivers us the sun’s rays unaffectedly and the absorp- tion line in question in its spectrum is caused by water-vapor in our own air. Indeed the spectrum of the moon is simply the spectrum of the sun plus that of the earth, the moon acting only the self-effacmg part of a mirror. But in the Martian spectrum the sun’s rays have passed in addition through that planet’s air and in so doing reveal of what it stands composed. The empha- sis it lays upon this line indicates that water, without which all life, vegetal or animal, is impossible, exists upon our neighbor, even as it does here. Nor is this all that this spectrogram dis- closes. In the able hands of Professor F. W. Very, measurements of the intensity of another line (B) have revealed the presence of oxygen too, in that other world. Here then we have demonstra- tion that both of the chief substances necessary to life are present on Mars. This evidence was obtained several years ago at a most propitious time, be- cause at the time and place when the earth’s air happened to be particularly dry, thus permitting of accentuated contrast. In addition to this however, spectrograms taken by Dr. Slipher more recently, have added to it in an unlooked- for way. Our air, on this latter occasion, was unavoidably more moisture-laden and little was hoped for from the spec- trograms beyond a faint corroboration of previous results. When behold, not only did measurement of intensities dis- close both water-vapor and oxygen on Mars as before, but these intensities were such as fitted the changed terrestrial conditions, thus adding to qualitative proof, quantitative proof as well. And both fitted in with the Martian meteor- ology which visual study of that planet has shown us must exist. Even this is not the limit of the infor- mation conveyed by these communi- eative lines. In Dr. Slipher’s latest results, four plates were taken so varied that in two the air above the equatorial regions of Mars was examined, in two 207 THE GREAT REFRACTINC TELESCOPE, LOWELL OBSERVATORY This is well known because of the perfection of its great lens and because of the important dis- coveries made through its use, concerning Mars, Saturn, Jupiter, Uranus and other planets, the stars, comets and nebule. Constructed by Alvan Clark and Sons, Cambridgeport, Massachusetts 208 OXYGEN AND WATER ON MARS others the polar atmosphere. The polar snow-cap was then in process of melting and the plates showed that the band in the Martian spectrum, denoting water-vapor, had been intensified sev- enty per cent in the planet’s polar regions and but sixteen per cent in the equa- torial over what the band showed in our own. Furthermore, Professor Very remarks about one of the polar plates “there is a brighter streak of continu- ous spectrum, corresponding to a region of melting snow or of clouds, which gives a larger intensification of a (the water- vapor band) than the associated dark streak, when these are measured sepa- rately. The diversity of intensification appertains to a_ exclusively —a_ has changed by nearly fifty per cent and this change is certainly Martian.”’ He con- cludes by saying with regard to oxygen that with the higher altitude of Mars in 209 the later results, the oxygen interposed by the earth’s atmosphere being less by one-half an atmosphere, he found the fifteen per cent due to Mars in his earlier measures increased to twenty-four per cent in his later ones, “proving again that this apparent intensification is also real, and is truly Martian, and indicat- ing that the actual amount of oxygen in the Martian atmosphere is about half as great as upon the earth.” ~ Surprising as have been the disclosures due to spectroscopy, perhaps none is greater than that that instrument should inform us of the possibility of life upon another world, a_ possibility, which, combined with facts that visual observa- tion has revealed (size, mass, tempera- ture and lastly details of the canal-oasis system), amounts, viewed in the light of the doctrine of probabilities, to practical certainty of its existence there. Mars Moon che, Ree? Moon is 4 D Ca BY een Photo by Dr. V. M. Slipher Spectra of Mars and the moon. The band marked a, well on the right of the spectra, is the band of water-vapor. In the case of the moon the light has traveled only through our own atmosphere, and in that of Mars through the Martian and our own. The difference in darkness shows that water- vapor exists in the atmosphere of Mars. This spectrogram shows also that oxygen exists on Mars, by comparing the line B, oxygen, with C, hydrogen, in the sun for relative intensities. Its presence was found by very careful measurements by Professor Very with his devised comparator, at the time he evaluated the amount of water-vapor in the Martian air OIG SeLIOAOOSIP [RUOT}dooxe AURUT 9IqISSOd oYVUT 07 podjey sey UOTBOO] SITY, “WoRSuIpseAA “AIA JO doy oy) uey soy sy joey puRsnoy? oo ‘yo0y OGZZ JO OPNINTS Ue 4B pazVIOT STAT ‘“N GST oSS ‘OPNINR[ pues *M TTF oTTT 9Pnylsuoy UL st ‘vuOZy ‘YRqsse]y “A10}VATaSqO [JoMO'T AdO0SATSL ONILOVYSSY HONI-¢’e AHL AO AWOG SHL Saturn, photographed by Dr. Lowell, March 12, 1915, showing the ring open to its widest extent THE PHOTOGRAPH IN ASTRONOMY By E. C. Slipher? Lowell Observatory, URING the last two decades the application of photography to researches in astronomy and in other sciences as well, has been fraught with advances. Through its use in astronomy we have facts numerous important learned many new which have confirmed or refuted the old theories and created new scientific belief; and furthermore photography furnishes per- manent pictorial record of the evidence, accurate and incontestable, that all may see and believe. No argument carries a conviction equal to that gained by seeing the thing oneself. Excellent photographs of the great planet Jupiter have been made through the 24-inch refracting telescope of the Lowell Observatory, Flagstaff, Arizona. They show at a glance the conspicuous belted appearance of the visible surface— probably the zoned formation of the vari- ous gases of a very dense atmosphere beneath which we seldom if ever see — and innumerable, finer, wisplike mark- 1 Mr. E. C. Slipher has been directly associated with Dr. Lowell in his work on Mars at the Flag- staff Observatory for many years. He has gone also on various expeditions, among them one to Alianza, Chile, in 1907, to observe Mars. Flagstaff, Arizona ings interlacing the belts. Photographs of the planet showing different longitudes present a varied aspect of these belts, and the photographs taken in different years indicate many evident chaotic changes there. Across the ball of the planet Saturn there will be noted in the photographs quite similar although less pronounced beltlike markings paralleling the equator; this indicates a like condition of the atmospheres of Jupiter and Saturn. The unique rings about Saturn are re- markably well shown in_ photographs, with Cassini’s division distinetly visible all the way around, separating the two brighter rings. The third and inner ring —the filmy crépe ring —is too faint to show except where it crosses the ball, without an overexposure, although much of the original definition is lost in the enlarged reproductions due to the separation of the silver grains of the emulsion. It will be seen that the ball of Saturn shines through the outer ring where it crosses the planet on the lower side; this tells how ‘very thin the rings are and evinces their meteoric constitu- tion. The definition of these planetary 211 senting a direct demon- stration of the fact first found mathematically, that the ring system is composed of disjoined particles. In the spec- trum of the planet Ve- nus the absence of in- clination of the lines shows its diurnal rota- tion to be exceedingly slow, which confirms the early observations of Schiaparelli and Dr. Lowell who found its day and year to be Jupiter, September 23, 1914. To the left of the planet is seen a Bs , small round bright spot against the sky. This is Satellite Ill. It has equal. This causes Ve- just crossed the face of the planet. On the extreme right of this face nus to present always (the left of the photograph) is its shadow just entering on the disk. h It denotes an eclipse of the sun taking place for Jupiter at that point. the same face to the Some distance to the right of the planet is shown another round bright sun. The d ay ot spot. This is Satellite I, soon to transit the disk and cause another if : solar eclipse. This plate, securing both planet and satellites on such a Uranus was unknown, scale and definition, is, as far as known, unique photographs where exposures of as much as thirty seconds were required, attest to the exceptional atmospheric conditions existing at Flagstaff. Although less picturesque than the direct photographs, the spectrographic observations are just. as replete with revelations. After the light from a celestial object has passed through the prism of a spectrograph, many important facts are disclosed concern- ing it which would be impossible to learn by other means. It is from spectrum analysis that we obtain much of our knowledge of the density and constitution of planetary atmos- pheres; of the motions, constituents and the states of stars, comets and nebule. The spectrogram of the Saturnian system shows the lines in the ball spectrum and those of the rings to be oppositely inclined show- ing that the rate of revolution differs for each part of the rings, thus pre- 212 due to the absence of any marked _ surface Saturn, December 23, 1912. It is as seen in a tele- scope magnifying about 1400 times, thus covering an area approximately 200 times that of the moon to the naked eye. Cassini’s division is the dark gap separat- ing the two bright rings. The inner or crépe-ring is visible where seen against the ball of the planet. Saturn’s belts are a counterpart of Jupiter’s; both planets are in a ‘‘youthful chaotic state, swathed in cloud”’ : ar ? THE PHOTOGRAPH IN ASTRONOMY detail from which it could be deduced, until photographs of its spectrum made at Flagstaff in 1910 and 1911 revealed for it a retrograde rotation which it accomplishes in a day of about ten and three-fourths hours. It is from a similar analysis of their light that the motions of stars and nebule are found. The incandescent condition of these bodies makes it possible to ascertain the identity of the substances of which they consist; and by a com- parison of their spectra with that of our sun, some knowledge is obtained of their state of evolution. Many startling dis- coveries result from these investigations, especially in case of some of the nebulz whose velocities of approach or recession are so great as almost to defy belief, reaching in several instances, one thou- sand kilometers per second. 213 In one case at least, that of the nebula in Virgo, Dr. V. M. Slipher has detected the rotation of this great mass by the inclined lines of its spectrum. Another interesting and unique spectrographic discovery is that the wisplike nebula in the Pleiades in all probability shines by reflected light received from relatively near by stars. This is the only known example of a nebula that shines by any but its own light. Direct photographs of the great Hal- ley’s Comet and Comet a 1910 show details and the their tails which stretch from thirty to fifty degrees or The cloudlike streamers in the tails of these comets remarkable structural great length of more across the sky. indicate something of the rapid flow away from the head of the mingled meteoric and gaseous material, and Jupiter, August 11, 1913. advisable, since our air is never at its best for long, to make many exposures consecutively, moving the plate first laterally and then up and down. more one photograph corroborates another Photo by C. O. Lampland In order to secure the best images of a planet photographically, it is We thus get a chance at a good photograph and further- 214 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL particularly in case of Comet a 1910 in the tail gives evidence of solar forces the curved, fanlike form of the matter repelling them. The dark-line nebula in the constellation Virgo. Photographed with the 40-inch reflector, April 18, 1911. An object of unusual interest on account of sts rapid motion — 600 miles per second in the line of sight — and also because it is the first nebula for which rotation about an axis and proper-motion have been observed The ‘‘dumb-bell’’ nebula in the constellation Vulpecula. Photo- graphed with the 40-inch reflector of the Lowell Observatory Both slit and slit- less prismatic photo- graphs of Halley’s, Gale’s, Brook’s and other comets of recent years, segregate and make known the va- rious constituents. In this analysis the prism differentiates the con- stitution of the head and tail, and even the substances composing different streamers in the tail can be iden- tified. In general, comet spectra are quite similar; they show the existence, usually, of cyanogen, sodium and_ hydro- carbons in the head while carbon mon- oxide and solid sun- lit particles produce mainly comet tails. The spectrograph serves also as a ba- rometer which enables one to read many of the existing conditions of planetary atmos- pheres. It tells us that Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune are surrounded’ by very dense atmos- pheres and that the densities of these in- crease with the dis- tances of the planets from thesun. It was by this means that evidence has _ been secured at the Lowell Photo by C. O. Lampland COMET a 1910 One of a series of direct photographs taken at Lowell Observatory 215 Globe of Mars, longitude 270°, 1909. wane, have what appears to be a ‘‘live”’ and a‘‘dead’’ season. From drawing by Percival Lowell Dr. Lowell has discovered that the canals of Mars wax and They are thought to be strips and oases of vegetation sustained by the waters of melting solar snow-caps, distributed through canals constructed by intelligent beings Observatory, that not only does Mars have an atmosphere, although less dense than the earth’s, but that it contains the essential life-supporting substances, oxygen and water-vapor. Photographs by Mr. C. O. Lampland taken with the great reflecting telescope of forty inches aperture, at the Lowell Observatory, show star clusters contain- ing almost countless suns similar to our own, but so distant that their light travels hundreds of years to reach us; as well as examples of the different classes of nebule presenting 216 unique and interesting forms. Also, photo- graphs of our moon show clearly the great craters many times larger than any on the earth, and mountains which rise to a height of ten thousand feet or more. What has created most interest, how- ever, are the non-pareil photographs of the Martian canals — the possible in- genious handiwork of intelligent beings. These peculiar markings characteristic of Mars only, were first detected in 1877, by the eminent Italian astronomer, Schiaparelli. Because of similarity of Jeisia e Dg PML DIFF Mars, longitude 90°, 1909. 7 - . periee @ tl sexe Minto: From drawing by Percival Lowell These drawings agree with the photographs taken of the planet. al- though made independently without any knowledge of what the photographs would show, some of the latter having been taken indeed at a station in Chile seven thousand miles away color and of their connection with the large dark green regions, which were then generally supposed to be lakes and seas, Schiaparelli was led to believe them to be rivers or channels dividing the continents, and thus they received from the 1892 the same linear markings were found to invade also the “ of Mars, and it was found too that the positions of This disproved the existence of the supposed seas. him name canale. In 99 seas these canals remained permanent. Then it was soon discovered by Dr. Lowell that the canals waxed and waned, that they had a “live” and “dead”’ season and thus he announced, in 1894, the theory that the canals and lakes of Mars were not water but strips and oases of vegetation sustained by the waters of the melting polar snow-caps, and distributed over the arid planet by an artificial canal system constructed by intelligent beings. As time passes and our knowledge of Mars increases, this theory becomes more It satisfies all the facts brought out by observation and and more probable. accounts for the remarkable changes 21% 81G pourtmaojop AjoyRanooe oq UO Avp S,sojTdng JO YASUI, oY Sour] oY JO FURIS Sty Sunmmsevou Aq ‘szoqidne jo uoyejoa pidea oy} JO gouonbosuod ul ‘oSpo dog oy} 9¥ AJo] OY} 09 URE] WUNAQOOdS AojIdNe oY UL SOUT, YAVp OUT ‘um.ajoods uostiedur0s oy} Jo ore wunajoods roq1dn¢ oY} JO Sospo JoMO] pure soddn oy} ye soul IYsaq OU ‘oroydsourye osuop AJOA B@ sey gouR;d sry) YVyy UIBo, OM ‘royidnyg JO wWeiso01jo0ds oy} WOIy ‘sqouUlOD puv ayNqou ‘siejs JO SyuUOnyySUOD pueR SsUOTJOUT OY PUB ‘sqjourtd jo so1oyd -soul}e OY} JO WOINNSUOD oY UADDUOD oso, “AVA AOYJO OU UL POUAoT SUOMB[OAOA SOAS Ydeasoajoods B Jo wistd oy YSsnoay) Suyssed Apoq [eysepoo BV WoAy FYB] Y3aLIdAr JO WVYSOYLOsAdS waydug W *A fq 0,04d THE PHOTOGRAPH IN ASTRONOMY occurring in the peculiar network of markings which geometrically thread the planet’s surface. Critical and serial observations embracing years of study of the planet by the keen eye of Dr. _ Lowell have revealed a close connection between the melting of the polar snows and the intensification of the canal sys- tem. This development of the marks of vegetation follows the passing of the sun from one hemisphere of the planet over the other and is most intense during the Martian spring and summer seasons. Mars is in a more advanced stage of planetary evolution than the earth and it has but a meager supply remaining of either air or water. Dr. Lowell believes that the numerous linelike markings seen there are those of vegetation growing by an enforcedly constructed irrigation system. Two significant facts found by observation support his theory: first, the marked geometric directness of the lines — no natural causes can account for them; second, the characteristic manner in which they develop with the seasons and the melting of the snow-caps. That the canals and oases do change markedly in intensity from time to time, is evidenced, directly and indirectly, by the observations of a number of astron- omers. The photographs of the planet also prove this. As far back as 1877 Schiaparelli observed their disappear- ance and subsequent reappearance which he attributed to the presence of Martian clouds but it is now known that clouds never occur on Mars sufficient to obscure such surface details. In fact clouds are very rarely indeed observed there and when they do appear, they are seen only as dust storms along the planet’s termi- nator. It is clear therefore that the changes he saw in the intensity of the canals were not apparent and due to clouds as he thought, but real and due to seasonal variations in the vegetation. 219 Ever since Schiaparelli discovered the canals a spirit of skepticism, although not general, has existed regarding their reality and the observations of those who have seen them have met with consider- able criticism. Various theories have been advanced to explain them as illu- sions, but these theories suffered sure and sudden destruction when in 1905 Mr. Lampland with camera and methods of his own design first succeeded in photographing them. Subsequent im- provements of the method brought better results and during the succeeding oppo- sitions of the planet a majority of the canals and oases have left their imprint on the photographic plate. However it is to be remembered that seeing with the eye is almost instantaneous, while with the photographic emulsion frequently a time exposure is required. Because of this, and the fact that even in the most tranquil air the telescopic image remains quiet but for a very short period of time, the photographic image stands at a great disadvantage, being a poor average picture of the planet at that moment. The importance of these Martian discoveries has been indicated and em- phasized by the denunciation they have called forth. It is the old story over again of the reception of an advanced idea, the same intellectual inquisition which scouted the discovery by Roemer of the velocity of light, and refused publication to Mayer’s and then Helm- holtz’s detection of the law of the con- servation of energy. Every new idea in science, Huxley said, starts as a myth to end as a superstition. The very same cast of mind that rejected the conserva- tion of energy for publication in the best physical magazine of Berlin because of its supposed absurdity, when it was young, is proclaiming it, now that it is old, the greatest scientific advance of the nineteenth century. gassiz Fucestes, Courtesy of D. Appleton and Company SOME OWL PORTRAITS Fuertes’, bird. portraits, like those of a great painter of men, depict character and individuality LOUIS AGASSIZ FUERTES — PAINTER OF BIRD PORTRAITS By Frank M. Chapman OVE of birds as “the most eloquent expression of nature’s beauty, Joy and freedom”’ is the rightful heri- tage of everyone who in one way or another hears the call of the outdoor world. But that inexplicable fascination for birds which awakens an instinctive uncontrollable response to the sight of their forms or the sound of their voices, which arouses a passionate desire to become familiar their haunts and obtain an intimate insight with them in into their ways, and which overcomes every obstacle until, at least in a meas- ure, this desire is gratified, is the gift of the gods which marks the true orni- thologist. always developed, love of birds is sup- In him the universal, if not plemented by the naturalist’s longing to discover the seerets of nature. Your true bird student, therefore, is a curious, and sometimes contradictory combina- tion of poet and scientist. Men in whom this taste and ambition combine to make birds the most signifi- cant forms of the animal world, are not numerous; but a great painter of birds must be primarily a man of this type. When therefore one considers how small is the chance that the essential attributes which make on the one hand an orni- thologist, on the other an artist, will be found in one individual, it is small won- der that the world has known so few real bird portrait painters. Artists who introduce into their can- vases birds as impossibly feathered as conventional angels, artists who paint birds with more or less accuracy of color and form and, more rarely, pose, have not been few in number; but the artists who paint bird portraits based on an intimate, sympathetic, loving study of their subject in nature, and who have the ability to express what they see and feel, can be counted on one’s fingers, and the name of Louis Agassiz Fuertes would be included before the second hand was reached. Fuertes in possession of a_ freshly captured specimen of some bird which was before unknown to him is, for the time, wholly beyond the reach of all sensations other than those occasioned His con- centration annihilates his surroundings. by the specimen before him. Color, pattern, form, contour, minute details of structure, all are absorbed and assimilated so completely that they be- come part of himself, and they can be reproduced at any future time with amazing accuracy. Less consciously, but no less thoroughly and effectively, does he store impressions of the bird’s appearance in life, its pose, mannerisms, characteristic gestures of wings, tail or crest, its facial expression — all are re- corded with surprising fidelity. This indeed is the keynote of Fuertes’ genius —for genius it is. His mind appears to be a delicately sensitized plate designed especially to catch and fix images of bird life; and of such images he has filed, and has at his finger tips for use, a countless number; for his oppor- tunities for field study have been greater than those of any other painter of birds. It has been my good fortune to be with Fuertes on many occasions when for the first time we met with some particularly interesting bird in nature. At such times there was perhaps no very marked difference in the extent of our enthusiasm or the manner in which it was expressed; 221 22 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL but all the time, subconsciously, Fuertes’ mental photographic processes were mak- ing record after record. At the moment not a line would be drawn or a note written, but so indelibly and distinctly was what he had seen, etched on his memory that it could later be visualized as clearly and faithfully as though the original were before him. Fuertes’ bird portraits, like those of a great portrait painter of men, depict not only those externals which can be seen by any observant person, but they reveal character. Examine, for instance, the drawings of owls’ faces, or the sketches of toucans which are reproduced in this connection, and note how much in- dividuality is expressed in each drawing. These pictures are instinct with life and differ from the work of the inexperienced or unsympathetic artist as a living bird differs from a stuffed one. Fuertes was born at Ithaca, where he now lives, in 1874. In 1897 he was graduated from Cornell, of which his father was director of the College of Civil Engineering. Drawing birds was with him as natural an outward evidence of an inward condition, as with most children spinning tops is an expression of an inherent love of play. Before his graduation he had made the illustrations for Florence Merriam Bailey’s Birding on a Bronco, and Mabel Osgood Wright’s and Elliot Coues’ Citizen Bird. It was the encouragement he received from Coues that led him definitely to decide to become a painter of birds, and the immediate recognition his work re- ceived permitted him to give rein to the naturalist’s longing to see the birds of other lands. In 1898 therefore he went with Abbott H. Thayer, under whom he was studying, Gerald Thayer and Charles R. Knight, to Florida. The following year, as a member of the Harriman Expedition to Bering Sea, he had exceptional oppor- tunities to meet in life many boreal birds which had been studied by few, if any, bird artists. The reports of this ex- pedition contain some of the studies In 1901 he accom- panied a party of the Biological Survey In 1903 he studied in California and Nevada; in 1904 in Jamaica; and in 1909 in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. In 1902, 1907, 1908-11 and 1913, Fuertes acted as artist to the American made on this trip. into western Texas. Museum’s expeditions, which during made field studies and gathered material for habitat groups in the Museum from the Bahamas, Florida, Saskatchewan and Alberta, Yucatan, Mexico and Colombia. On these expeditions he has collected about thirty-five hundred specimens which are beautifully prepared and fully labeled with data of special value to the artist, when necessary. These data are in the shape of color sketches of bill, feet, eyes, or other unfeathered areas, the colors of which disappear after death. Such studies can be obtained only from the living or freshly captured bird, and Fuertes’ collection of them is unique. As the artist of Museum expeditions, Fuertes has not only made sketches of the birds secured, but oil studies of the landscape selected as the panoramic background for the habitat group in which the birds were later to appear. In each instance these are accompanied by detailed color sketches of leaves and these years blossoms for the guidance of the pre- parator of the vegetation modeled for the group. Where birds appear in the background of the completed group, they are painted there by Fuertes him- self; and the landscapist who realizes his limitations gladly avails himself of this expert codperation. Thus we have in these groups (notably the flamingo rn ane 3 LABtar [gveors PLA lessus ) Green Tous ae : (Avtacorbar phus) i Dr ns te oLé fe /PRlam PhO4STOs. | STUDIES OF SOUTH AMERICAN TOUCANS Fuertes’ opportunities for field study have been greater than those of any other painter of birds. For just his work on the bird groups in the American Museum he has studied in the Bahamas, Florida, Saskatchewan and Alberta, Yucatan, Mexico and Colombia 223 224 group), paintings by this artist which to bird lovers of later generations will have all the interest a panoramic painting by Audubon of, for example, a flight of wild pigeons would have for us to-day. & Because of the accuracy of his work, Fuertes is ever in demand as the illus- trator of technical and popular books and articles on ornithology. His con- tributions to publications of this nature amount to thousands of drawings; many of them have been adequately produced in color and through their wide circula- tion, they have exercised an educational influence of the highest importance. Such for example are the illustrations in Eaton’s great work on the Birds of New York, published by the State; those in the National Geographic Magazine, and the series appearing in Bird-Lore. Peregrine falcon with bufflehead. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL In all of these illustrations everything is made subservient to the bird itself, which usually claims as large a share of the picture as it does of Fuertes’ atten- tion. But in a series of twenty-four large panels in oils, done for the library of Mr. Frederick F. Brewster of New Haven, the birds, chiefly water-fowl and shore birds, take their proper place in a series of strongly handled landscapes which reveal Fuertes’ art in a new aspect. With no sacrifice of his skill and insight as a painter of bird portraits, he has here placed his subjects in a setting which adds immeasurably to their beauty and to the appeal they make to the imagi- nation. These pictures, in the writer’s opinion, are Fuertes’ greatest achieve- ment and point the way for the develop- ment of his exceptional gifts. \ Property of F. F. Brewster From painting by Fuertes. \6 \ N Property of the Artist BARRED OWL The ‘hoot owl” is still a fairly common bird in all of the wooded parts of eastern North America. Like most birds of prey, it is misunderstood and is persecuted on sight, although its food consists almost exclusively of small destructive mammals, birds forming no regular part of its fare Property of Truman EF. Fassett GOLDEN EAGLE AND PTARMIGAN IN THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS Property of F. F. Brewster WILD TURKEY Formerly inhabiting the entire forested parts of North America from Hudson Bay to the Gulf of Mexico and west to the Great Basin, the turkey is now extinct north of Pennsylvania and common only in a few greatly restricted regions. It is America’s finest contribution to domesticated poultry Courtesy of ‘‘Bird-Lore”’ TROGONS FROM COLOMBIA The trogons are tropical birds of superlative beauty, being of the richest iridescent greens, violets and blues above, with underparts of blood red or purest yellow. The most gorgeous of all, the sacred Quetzal of the Aztecs, is related to the larger bird figured SYOVESVANVO aagsmang “of “ fo Msadorgq Property of F. F. Brewster OLD SQUAWS Old squaws breed closer to the pole than any other bird except the knot sandpiper. They are wonderful divers and are frequently caught in the Great Lakes in whitefish nets set in fifty fathoms 7 ? £ ap ay iG Property of F. F. Brewster SNOWY OWL Nesting mainly within the Arctic circle, this owl comes well within the United States in winter, being always more abundant along the sea-coast. Its food is largely fish, caught from the edge of the ice or gleaned from the beaches at low tide Owned by the Artist DISPLAYING , ARGUS PHEASANT Little is known of the habits of the argus pheasant of Mala y Peninsula, Java and J ny ~ n oO in S) ol se g s SG c Al = o = uu as = a =i a Sl Lot 3 fa 2) fe) B ae = n a fe) vo a Lod 3 Q Deserted by his fellows, this young Johnny has his ‘‘heart in his throat’’ THE PENGUINS OF SOUTH GEORGIA “ JOHNNIES’”’ AND “KINGS”? ON A DESOLATE SUBANTARCTIC ISLAND! By Robert Cushman Murphy Illustrations from photographs by the Author HE territory of the “Little People of the Antarctic”’ has lately been subjected to so many friendly invasions that we are beginning to feel fairly well acquainted with a number of their tribes. First in entertaining word pictures, then in photographs, and finally in the beauty and realism of the cinematograph film, we have been shown something of the life histories of the jolly little Adélie penguin, the stately emperor and several others. Owing to the recent interest in ex- ploration and discovery upon the south polar continent itself, the penguins? 1 Article and photographs copyrighted, Feb- ruary, 1915, by Robert Cushman Murphy. 2A study of the habits of penguins is partic- ularly valuable at this time when public interest has recently been given to Sir Douglas Mawson’s wonderful moving pictures of penguins, taken on the Australasian Antarctic Expedition and inhabiting those uttermost shores have been studied somewhat to the exclusion of species equally intc resting, and longer known to man, which dwell outside the Antarctic Circle and make their homes upon the chain of desolate Subantarctic islands. During the American Mu- seum’s recent expedition to South Georgia, which lies within the ice-fields of the South Atlantic, two species of penguins were intimately encountered — exhibited daily at Weber’s Theatre in New York City during one of the spring months. It is to be noted that none of the species pictured by Sir Douglas Mawson (the Adélie, emperor, gentoo, Victoria, king and royal) nor those de- scribed by Mr. Murphy have ever been kept in zoological gardens, although a few unsuccessful attempts have been made with the king penguin in Europe. One can study in the New York Zo6- logical Park at the present time several speci- mens of the blackfooted penguin (Speniscus demersus) from South Africa [purchased through German dealers]|.— Tue Eprror. 225 226 the magnificent king penguin (A pteno- dytes patachonica) and the companion- able little Johnny penguin (Pygoscelis papua). The former are dignified, im- posing birds, standing a yard high, contented with their own society, and indifferent toward other creatures. As a badge of aristocracy they around their necks gleaming gold collars. The Johnny penguins, on the other hand, are roly-poly and plebeian, in- terested in everybody, and quite re- mind one of small boys. The two species live on the same territory and wear follow the same vocation of deep-sea fishers, yet their society is inviolably distinct. We first met the Johnny penguins on the southward voyage in latitude 43° S., on November 15, 1912. Cold westerly winds had raised a heavy swell on this day, and just before nightfall penguins began to pass the ship in couples or small groups. They remained below the water most of the time, but their braying calls frequently attracted at- tention to sleek heads and upright tails, the only visible parts of birds at the surface. Some of the Johnny penguin rookeries at South Georgia were on low ground near the sea, but the largest rookery that we discovered, comprising between four and five thousand birds, was dis- tributed over knolls and ridges behind a great moraine-beach at the Bay of Isles. The site is bounded by two glaciers so that it can be reached only from the bay. In 1912-13 the penguin settlements, beginning half a mile from the water front, extended inland and up the hills to a height of about six hundred feet. As long as young penguins were on this nesting ground, processions of adults might at all times be seen coming and going between the high land and the sea. The birds met and_ passed THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL each other without a visible sign of recognition, each trundling gravely along on its own business. A _ broad thor- oughfare had been stamped across the moraine, worn down doubtless through generations of the pattering of little leathery feet, while deeply grooved, sinuous avenues extended up the long snowbank to the highest portions of the colony. This type of rookery is common at South Georgia wherever high land is at all accessible. No matter how much available territory there may be near the water, no matter how wearisome the scramble up the hillsides, a certain proportion of the members of each colony selects as home the summits of the windy, shelterless ridges. Why should marine birds which lack altogether the power of flight, and which are at best indifferent walkers, prefer to make the period of propagation difficult for themselves by retreating as far as possible from their only source of food? A consideration of the history of South Georgia may help in an interpretation of the strange instinct which drives the Johnny penguins to nest among the hills. The island is small, but its glaciers are as mighty as those of Spitzbergen, and there is ample evidence that it was formerly completely buried by an ice- cap. The interior, which rises to an altitude of more than six thousand feet, is no longer ice-clad, excepting on the peaks, but is covered with an everlasting névé of the Alpine type. This con- solidates at the sources of all the valleys to form tongues of ice, most of which extend into the sea, ending in abrupt walls. Since most of the fiords have been carved out by former extensions of the valley glaciers, the coast is almost beachless, the few areas of low, flat land being terminal moraines or beds_ of moribund or extinct glaciers. Even THE PENGUINS OF SOUTH GEORGIA 227 now, with the fluctuating seasons, the glaciers sometimes advance their fronts and flanks over considerable ground once abandoned, but in general glacia- tion is on the wane, and an appreciable decline has taken place even within a century. From such a condition it may be assumed that for a long period follow- ing the last ice-cap very little territory suitable for breeding purposes was ex- posed. Whatever bare earth existed must have been found along the ridges which separated the ice-filled valleys. During such a period these small pen- guins may have developed the trait which still leads them to seek lofty places for their nests. The fact that South Georgia was formerly the home of a far more abundant fauna than at present would have tended to fix the “moun- taineering”’ instinct, for animals ob- taining their sustenance only in the sea would have a tendency to increase more rapidly than the proportionate area of the beaches, and through sheer overflow of population many birds would be forced to content themselves with the less accessible ground, leaving the shores to great herds of summering seals, and the adjacent nesting-sites to powerful rivals such as the king penguins. The faith which the Johnny penguins hold in the protectiveness of high land is strangely shown by their habit of running away from the water whenever danger threatens. Their terrible ma- rine enemy, the sea-leopard, a large carnivorous seal, has fixed within the Johnnies an instinct which urges them. to seek safety only on terra firma. Con- sequently they do not govern their acts according to their perceptions. Time and again I have seen a group of them standing at the water’s edge when a fox terrier, brought ashore from the vessel, started toward them at a run. If the penguins deigned to show any fear at the approach of the barking dog they invariably responded not by taking to the water, where they would have been rid immediately of the tormentor, but by deliberately running up the beach, heading for the nearest bank or hillside. Even after the dog had seized a penguin by its bristly tail and had swung it round and round merely for the fun of At a rookery of Johnnies 228 teasing, the poor dazed victim would still persist in scampering away from the water. I often found that the surest way to keep penguins ashore was to try to drive them into the sea. The antiquity of the hill-climbing instinct among the Johnny penguins is finally attested by a strange and roman- tic phenomenon, namely that the pen- guins go back to the seclusion of the heights to die. In a hollow at the summit of the coast range south of the Bay of Isles lies a clear lake on a bed of ice-cracked stones. This transparent pool, formed entirely of snow-water, with a maximum depth of twelve or fifteen feet, is a penguin graveyard. In January, 1913, I found its bottom thickly strewn with the bodies of pen- guins which had outlived the perils of the sea and had apparently accomplished the rare feat among wild animals of dying a natural death. They lay by THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL scores all over the stony bed of the pool, mostly on their backs, with pinions out- stretched, their breasts reflecting gleams of white from the deeper water. Safe from their two enemies, the sea-leopard in the ocean and the skua gull ashore, they took their last rest. For months, perhaps years, they would undergo no bodily change in their frigid graves. Nesting Johnnies are generally timid, scampering off at the approach of a man, but never retreating more than a few paces. A small proportion of them stand their ground on the nests and show fight, employing as weapons both bill and wings. With the latter they can strike rapid and forceful blows. On one occasion a bird which I had roused from sleep attacked me and beat such a furious tattoo upon my leather leggings that its own pinions were soon bleeding. When a brooding penguin is driven away from young nestlings it lingers near by, An adult Johnny with the first chick. Three or four days usually intervene between the hatching of the two eggs. the head Note the penguin’s long tail pointing stiffly upward, and the white fillet which crosses THE PENGUINS OF SOUTH GEORGIA 229 trumpeting loudly until the disturbance is over; then it examines its offspring very minutely, stooping down near- sightedly, and scrutinizing one and the other over and over again. When satisfied that all is well it settles down contentedly. The incubating birds turn about in their nests so as to keep their bills pointed toward the skua_ gulls, which walk about the rookeries with evil purpose and wait patiently hour after hour for a chance to steal an egg. Eternal vigilance is the price of safety for the penguins. The sharply whenever a skua draws near, and the free penguins make angry but vain rushes at the common enemy. Besides the hiss of wrath the Johnny penguins have a variety of louder calls. sitters hiss The ordinary trumpeting note sounds like the noise of a tin horn or the braying of an ass; the sound is double, being produced by both expiration and inspira- tion, and is accompanied by a rising The voice is pitched in a much lower key than that of the king penguin. Usually the head is pointed upward while the The mouth is held and falling of the lower throat. penguin trumpets. wide open, with the spiny tongue show- ing, and the expelled breath condenses The trumpetings are often repeated many times without interruption, and under excitement the into clouds of vapor. bird’s whole bodily energy seems to be put into the call. Another note is a short, single “caw,” which the penguins are apt to utter as soon as they emerge This call sounds like a hail from one man to another, and the from the sea. human suggestion is enhanced by the penguins’ habit of waving their flippers A proud parent with two healthy, pot-bellied youngsters. The near young one is trumpeting 230 as if beckoning. The weak trumpetings of nestling Johnnies have a_peevish, scolding quality, even hysterical at times. The youngsters have a soft, peeping note also, indicative of well-fed contentment. By the middle of January the young penguins were mostly two-thirds grown, and their incessant chattering could be heard a long way from the rookeries. The older youngsters walked about in an uncertain, wobbly fashion, tagging TT Wa: The Johnny on the left has fallen and soiled his clothes. youngsters is the signal of the approaching molt after their fathers and mothers and trumpeting nervously when left too far behind. When I the nests, all but the youngest chicks left them and herded together. walked among The brood- ing adults too, rushed away, but a few squeaks from the abandoned little ones usually brought them back, scampering hither and thither and swinging their wings frantically. If the youngsters happened to be old enough to walk, the parents coaxed them along by giv- THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL ing small tastes of food, with promises of more, but in hysterical fashion they would soon forget to wait for their feeble babies, and would have to be called back repeatedly. By the end of January all but a very few of the young penguins, still clad in the softest of gray and white “fur,” had permanently deserted the nests and had congregated by themselves, but always under the guard of adult nurses. In fine weather they might be seen The white spot on the heads of these sunning themselves on the snowbanks, and at other times crouching from the wind Some of them were as large as the adults, but they were still dependent for their food, and they had not yet been to the sea- shore. I often saw them pleading to be fed when the old birds evidently did not wish to gratify them. Such begging youngsters ran about after the adults, following every dodge and turn, con- tinually bumping into them and stepping in sheltered hollows. THE PENGUINS OF SOUTH GEORGIA on their tails until the harassed adults gave up ip despair. The young ones would then press closely against the provider, open their little bills expect- antly, and lose nothing of the regurgi- tated meal. About the first of February most of the young Johnnies begin molting their down, thus exposing the adult plumage feathers which have developed under- neath the down. The down is shed in sheets and patches; the process re- sembles the peeling of the velvet from a deer’s horn. By the middle of February, or toward the close of the molting period, clinging tufts, collars, or top-knots of down give the otherwise smooth young penguins the appearance of clowns and pierrots. The molt of the nestling Johnny penguins is succeeded closely by the annual molt of the adults. Toward the end of February the feathers of the latter, already much faded and frayed, begin to drop out, still further to litter the ground of the rookeries. The molt- ing season of the adults seems to endure all through the Antarctic summer. On March 12 I observed that a few of the adults had not yet begun to doff their old coats, which were brown, rough and threadbare. Many more, the majority of the birds in fact, were in the throes of the process and were exceedingly ragged, the new plumage showing in spots. Still others had completed the molt of the old body feathers, but still retained their long tails, while the most advanced birds had lost all their feathers including the tail, a temporary loss which gave them a more dumpy outline than ever; for appearance sake a Johnny can ill afford to be without its luxuriant caudal bristles. The Johnny penguin has not in any degree the fearless and courageous dis- position of its Antarctic cousin, the 231 Bands of Johnnies along the beaches are prone to take alarm if a man appears suddenly among them. The most successful course of action is to approach them slowly, halting at a discreet distance and so in- viting the penguins to take the initiative. They have a large bump of curiosity Adélie penguin. and will presently push the acquaint- ance, their familiarity increasing in direct proportion to the quietness and seeming indifference of the observer. A description taken from my notes of 1912, On the afternoon of this day I walked to a glacial pond on the far side of which stood a group of Johnny penguins. As December 23, is characteristic. soon as they saw me one of their num- ber across walked toward me. water and I remained motion- less until it came up quite to my feet and stood there. When I moved quietly, it followed, and when I stopped, it did likewise. Then, one by one, it was joined by the other penguins from across the pond. It was whimsical to see this troop of mimicking small brothers with no other wish than to keep me company. I finally broke the spell by stooping to pat one on the head, when they all wiggled their tails, hurried back into the pond, and swam across like porpoises. On March 12 I rowed ashore during a brisk snowstorm and found a _ whole army of penguins near the rookery at Possession Bay. They were standing by hundreds in a long double row along the beach. These rows marched for- ward to meet and surround me, and their numbers were continually aug- mented by new arrivals which kept popping out of the surf, and came running up the shingle as if much astonished to find me there. The Johnnies walk in a deliberate manner, raising their feet high at each step, carrying their tails well above the swam under Off to sea! ground, thrusting their wings behind them as balances, and poking the head the sighted attitude. forward into accustomed near- Their nearsightedness is probably no less real than apparent, because of the specialization of their eyes for vision through a medium of water. In crossing the stony or hummocky beaches that separate various arms of the bays, or that lead from the sea to the snow-water ponds in which the penguins delight to play, they follow When bent on a definite journey across the regular, well-tramped avenues. land they trudge along very steadily and unconcernedly, and for the time seem to take no notice of their fellows. When in great haste they fall upon the belly and run on all fours. By this well-known mode of progression, called “tobogganing,”’ they can lead a mana Their most curi- ous attitude is assumed when they walk very creditable chase. down an incline, such as a snowbank or a steep beach. The head is then thrust so far forward that the straight neck and the spine form a right angle; the 232 Relieved sitters setting their balancers and starting on the long walk to the water wings are held stiffly back as far as possible, and the round belly projects as the bird proceeds with gingerly steps. Their fat bodies seem to be made to stand hard knocks, for not only do they tumble over frequently wherever the walking is rough on shore, but they also suffer fearful batterings on the shingle when they come out of the surf, some- A group of Johnnies — downy young ‘‘nurses,”* and molters. times being bowled over by four or five successive breakers before they can scramble out of the undertow. When wading into the water the Johnny penguins invariably round their shoulders, bend down their heads almost to their feet, and scoop beneath the surface as soon as there is depth enough to float them. Once under way, all One is in the ecstatic attitude of trumpeting their terrestrial awkwardness vanishes. They swim with well-nigh incredible speed, remaining below the surface ex- cept when they leap out porpoise-like, giv- ing an audible gasp for air — to be gone again within the twinkling of an eye. One evening I stood knee-deep in the water of the Bay of Isles and watched at close quarters four Johnny penguins swimming. The sea was fairly calm, the water clear and brilliant in the sun- set light. The quartet of penguins darted hither and thither all about me, now and again almost brushing my legs. Frequently they rolled their backs above the surface, and more rarely they leapt out. I distinctly observed that the strokes of their flippers were sometimes made alternately and sometimes in unison. Probably they were feeding, although I could not see their prey. Whether for sport or a more serious purpose they occasionally swam in the ridge of an advancing swell, going so far up the beach that they were left stranded fora moment. Presently three of them walked out of the sea, shook the water from their tails and became so 233 234 immensely interested in watching me, that they pursued me for a while when I left the spot. On another occasion I witnessed an extraordinary diversion of the penguins in the graveyard pool already mentioned. This pond, lying in a hollow of the hills, was bordered on three sides with a perpendicular bank of hard snow, the remaining shore being a stony slope. On the afternoon of my visit penguins - were swimming jn it, for pure enjoyment of course, for there was no food, no living thing, not even a visible alga, in the transparent snow water. How alert and reptilian the penguins seemed in How unlike the inelegant, ridiculous creatures they are ashore! They dashed straightaway un- der water the length of the pool and their own element! back again, with a velocity which I had then an opportunity to compute as about thirty feet a second. They chased each other round and round, flashing into the air twice or thrice during their bursts of speed, every action plainly revealed through the clear, quiet water, with the white dead birds down below them. When the swimmers rested at the sur- face, only the white-filleted head and up-pointed, ridged tail showed, as a rule, but sometimes they would float higher, like grebes. Several of them tried to leap out onto the bank of frozen snow which rose a yard above the water. Strangely enough they misjudged their distance repeatedly; they jumped too soon, and were on the downward seg- ment of their arc before they had cleared the edge. dozen times and fail; it always leapt a I saw one individual try a few lengths too soon and whacked its shiny breast against the wall of ice. A group of birds, which had been sunning on a snow bank, entered the water as if by mutual agreement. Some of them walked to the rocky slope and waded, THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL arching their necks and tucking their heads under water before they made the plunge. Others flopped off the edge of the ice. I say flopped because they did not make graceful standing dives, such as I had expected; on the contrary they entered with flagrant, splashing “belly- The great discrepancy be- tween the Johnny penguin and the Adélie penguin in jumping and diving ability first sight rather surprising. Through the medium of the films taken whoppers.” is at during the Australasian Antarctic Ex- pedition I have seen the prodigious, salmon-like leaps of the plucky little Adélies, while the photographs of Scott’s Expedition well illustrate the graceful dives of these denizens of polar shores. It must be borne in mind, however, that the Johnny, with a Subantarctic range, breeds on no land which has an ice-shelved coast. The ability to gain the land by a catapultic spring has doubtless vanished with the disappear- ance of the necessity for such a method. The Johnny penguins often feed far at sea, but during the long breeding season they apparently all return to the land for the night. In late afternoon we usually saw long troops of them “porpoising”’ into the fiords from sea. This habit is so well known that sealers, overtaken in their boats by an impene- trable South Georgian fog, rely upon the home-coming penguins for the direction of the flat beaches. Considering the fact that most marine birds swim as soon as they emerge from the shell, the tardiness of young penguins in taking to the water has been pointed out as a remarkable phenomenon. The explanation of this, however, is doubtless that the speed and stamina required in capturing living pelagic food, in escaping from the dreaded sea-leopard, and in swimming through breaking surf, cannot be developed early in life by birds which THE PENGUINS OF SOUTH GEORGIA use the wings instead of the feet as propelling organs. Certainly the pin- ions of nestling penguins seem extraordi- narily underdeveloped. The little birds begin to exercise them soon after birth by flapping them, weakly at first but vigorously later on —a trait that sug- gests ancestral aspirations for flight. On many occasions I put nestlings of various ages, as well as fully grown, molting young, into the fresh water ponds, where they proved themselves almost as helpless as human_ beings unfamiliar with swimming. They in- stinctively put their heads under water and tried to swim below the surface in the approved fashion, but it was a feat quite impossible for them. They beat the wings simultaneously, and bobbed up and down without making much progress. Such a scene always attracts a band of skua gulls to the spot, as if 235 these ogres realized the helpless misery of a young penguin in the water. The skuas do not strike while their prospec- tive victim is swimming, but pace along the shore waiting to intercept its land- ing. Once a half-grown youngster, with which I had been experimenting, crawled out of the graveyard pool into the very jaws of seven skuas which attacked it en masse. The little penguin struck with its feeble wings and cried out piteously. Insignificant as it was, not one of the skuas dared seize it outright, but they made quick rushes from all sides, striking the penguin on the head with closed bills, and then retreating. I hurried to the rescue and restored the little bird to its nest where I afterward saw it resting characteristically with its head hidden between its mother’s warm feathered thighs. {Story of King Penguins in next issue of JouRNAL] A group of king penguins. of the American Museum of Natural History Above is Lucas Glacier named by Mr. Murphy in honor of the director 986 UOMRAJEsSoId JO 09R9S JOoJIOd Ul o1e sommsy oy ‘TING oy) Jo suLoY oY} pur MOD OY9 JO [le} UOYyorq oy ‘ABT oY} JO Surkap 09 onp syoevdo oy} 1oJ JdooxG, + “SOUuT? om owyed woiay Suyep suljepou - \ . = " *, heal The Vézére River, its floodplain and cliff wall as seen from the entrance to the Gorge d’Enfer, above Les Eyzies, France. The station of La Micoque is on the extreme right, Laugerie Haute at the foot of the distant cliff and Laugerie Basse nearer by off the first bend in the stream EUROPEAN CAVES ability, and the general nature of his everyday life. The caves, on the other hand, served him mainly as galleries for a remarkable series of paintings, engrav- ings and carvings, which in a measure reveal to us his mental attitude toward life. The caves, it must be understood, were exceedingly dark and damp, ordi- narily unfit for habitation, except pos- sibly as temporary retreats during the y mr ee 1 Entrance to the cavern of Tuc d’Audoubert near Saint-Girons, France. AND EARLY MAN 239 Cavern near Montréjeau, France, and likewise the Altamira Cave, near Sant- ander, Spain, appear to have been occu- pied for protracted periods although in both cases only very close to the en- trance. On the other hand, some of the shelters such as Cap Blanc, near Les Eyzies, France, have preserved, mainly through accident, a fine series of high relief sculptures. But as a_ general A stream still issues from this cave, which is the most beautiful and in a way the most interesting of all the known Pyrenean haunts of the ancient artist who has left here not only mural engravings but also models in clay and even his footprints hard and the shelter walls, having been exposed for thousands of years to the weathering winters, contrariwise, elements, could not have preserved for us either paintings or delicate engravings that may have been made upon them. There are several somewhat qualifying exceptions to these sweeping statements however. For instance, the Gargas thing the camp-sites are in large half- open shelters, usually facing the sun, while the entrances to the painted caves face in any direction and for the most part are very small and inconspicuous. At Castillo only there is the perfect com- bination — a large sunny grotto which was occupied periodically throughout most of palolithic times and which 240 served besides as the vestibule to a con- siderable cave, famous for its mural art. An examination of the various Dor- dogne shelters coupled with a study of the changing types of objects found in them is most instructive. Nearly all of the stations here are at the base of the high cliffs that hedge the narrow valleys on one or both sides; but in a few in- stances the relic-bearing débris lies on an eroded ledge some distance up the THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL defy the English in 1410; still another ledge marked by ruins of what looks like some old baronial chateau; and end up finally with the more or less well-kept houses of the modern peasant. These houses often stand on several meters of ancient relic-bearing débris and seem to cling in an infantile sort of way to the overhanging cliff in spite of its cold damp nature. Some distance up the Vézére, at the Rock of St. Cristopher, Anniversary occasion (July 20) of the discovery of the Tuc d’Audoubert cavern. thusiastic sons who made the discovery of the famous modeled bison. The amia- ble Count Begouen is seated in the center while behind him and on the extreme left are his three en- Professor Emile Cartailhac is seen to the left of the Count and on the right are two French zodlogists, students of the cave fauna face of the protecting wall. Almost within earshot of Les Eyzies are a series of stations which taken together furnish data on human history practically from Acheulian times to the present day. These stations begin with the old ob- scured shelter of La Micoque, include the partially-ruined shelters of Upper and Lower Laugerie; another ledge- shelter that served old-time brigands as a rendezvous and also as a fortress to where the last houses have been removed, there are over four meters of débris dating from neolithic to present time and the adjacent cliff is marked by sev- eral series of parallel holes, cut for the insertion of ceiling beams, precisely as we find them in our own Southwest. Some of these holes are high up the cliff but others are below the surface of the accumulated débris which is itself below the high-water mark of the river. Laugerie Haute, showing present-day dwellings built against the cliff. Beyond the houses a tremendous overhang which once sheltered Aurignacian and Solutréan people has dropped down, burying possibly some of the ancient inhabitants The ideal shelter, Grotte d’Enfer, was probably not occupied as long as might be supposed as it was subject to floods 241 242 With all this evidence suggestive of con- tinuous occupation, it is not to be won- dered at that some students profess to see among the local inhabitants a num- ber of individuals that resemble the physical type of palzeolithic man. A visit to the painted caves is the experience of a lifetime; but while it is an adventure bound to excite more en- thusiasm than the examination of the shelters, it is less instructive and cer- tainly less convincing. It is also an undertaking fraught with some diffi- culty and disappointment, except per- haps in such cases as Altamira, Niaux and Font-de-Gaume. The painted and incised representations on the cave walls are seldom so plain and striking as one might infer from the superb reproduc- tions in the published reports, and to make them out the visitor must take time. In this effort to decipher, he is most ably assisted by Professor Emile Cartailhae of Toulouse, who has given THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL a good part of his life to the study of paleolithic art and who at present guards nearly all the Pyrenean caverns. In Spain and in the Dordogne country, however, local guides must be taken and as these are not always competent, the student who would profit by his oppor- tunity must prepare himself beforehand in regard to what is to be seen and then insist on being shown, or he may not see much. The last cave to be discovered and also the most beautiful is the Tue d’Audou- bert, located on the estate of Count Begouen near Saint-Girons, France. This is perhaps the most difficult cavern to explore. But to risk passage in the improvised boat that the visitor must sail in order to reach the intericr, and to crawl on his stomach along muddy pas- sages that are really too small for a full- grown man, and finally to receive in- numerable bumps on his head from pending stalactites is not too much to Valley of the Rio Pas at Puente Viesgo, Spain. nent peak on the left is the cave of La Pasiega and a little lower down on the side facing the river (within view) is the famous Castillo cave and Grotto where man lived periodically almost from the earliest stone age down close to historic times Over half way up the farther side of the promi- Outlook from the Hornos de la Pena cave. Not a human habitation is in sight and the rug- ged semi-forested country is still the home of the wolf, the bear and the wild boar Upper entrance to the Mas d’Azil cavern, near Foix, France. 'The Arize River has here tun- neled a high rock formation about one-fourth of a mile thick and which now accommodates the public road. Within the 200 foot-square entrance, on the left bank, is the ledge which was occupied in Magdalenian and Azilian times. In the interior are immense galleries also rich in archeological material, but now the home only of thousands of screaming bats 243 Entrance to the Pindal cave, north coast of Spain not far from Colombres. The people are stand- ing on the fallen roof of a long sea passage in the rock which when the entrance was choked permit- ted the cave behind it to silt up and become an art gallery of considerable note. Professor Henri Breuil is on the left and the second from him is his colleague, Professor Hugo Obermaier. The upper photograph shows the view seen from the entrance of the cave. Stratified limestone stands nearly on end and the waves have cut out long passages in the softer strata 244 EUROPEAN CAVES pay for the privilege — which, as it happened, was accorded the Museum’s representative as the first American — to see the wonders inside. Ordinarily, the natural wonders of the caverns are more or less discolored with mud, but here is gallery after gallery of be- wildering forests of pillars and pendants and posts —all a pure white and glit- tering as if studded with myriads of diamonds. Here and there the stalac- tites hang in large sheets like folded draperies and by placing a light behind them the translucent substance flashes up into colors of green and rose too beautiful to be — deseribed. No fairy palace was ever more adorned! You are led along de- vious passages, stepping again and again lakelets of visibly in in- clear water and when on dry footing you are warned to cumspectly for fear of obliter- ating some an- cient human footprints that are faintly visible under the thin coat of stalagmite which covers the clay floor. Bones and skulls of the giant cave bear and other animals lie all about, cemented in place. Finally, near the extreme inner end of the cavern comes the real object of the laborious journey, viz., the representa- tions of two bison (male and female) modeled in clay. The figures which are about two feet in length, are propped against the sloping side of a rock which rises from the floor, and in front of the move cir- AND EARLY MAN 245 animals on the floor there are some trac- ings as if the artist had here sketched and improvised before beginning his real work. About twenty-five feet away in a low side chamber is to be seen the place where the modeler scraped to- gether the clay off the floor and kneaded it. Two or three worked rolls of his material still lie there. The whole thing looks as if done a week ago and yet the bison has been absent from the locality probably for thousands of years. The last suggestion of skepticism is in keeping with the general impression that er Oa Ba =. -_ ee’ 4 Sagy 7 see The Schweizersbild station near Schaffhausen, Switzerland. This limestone excrescence rises abruptly from a meadow-like spot, and in its shelter — facing approximately west — people lived in Magdalenian times. who gave three years to the investigation of the site, stands on the right Dr. Jakob Nuesch, the visitor retains from the painted caves. It is a most baffling experience. When the investigation is confined to the stra- tified deposits everything is beautifully simple. Art objects have a definitely ascertainable place in the series and go back to Aurignacian times. The cave art proper is of the same general style as that of the stratified refuse and must of course be of the same date; moreover, the animals represented are in nearly all cases either extinct or absent from the region. And yet almost all the mural 246 figures in the caves are within reach of the hand. In other words, the caves have undergone no particular changes since the artist did his work. Not a few of the paintings, and especially the finer THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL in these caves? It is unsafe to move ten steps in them without a light. It is true that a very few stone basins have been found that may have served pur- poses similar to the Eskimo lamp, or the A weathered indentation in the limestone cliff such as served to shelter early man. down the Vézére Valley from the point of its junction with the Beune Valley, at Les Eyzies, France. Several caves are to be found in the distant cliff and on one of its high sheltered terraces there is the interesting ruin of a church dating from the early Christian era engravings seem as fresh as if done yester- day. In the Pindal cave is the repre- sentation of a fish incised on the wall and the visitor who examines it closely would swear that he could make a line exactly like it with a lead pencil, but with Pro- fessors Breuil and Obermaier standing behind him he says nothing. And how did paleolithic man manage to get about Looking artist’s right-hand man may have car- ried a torch; but there are no signs of such torches or of carbonization on the walls in the vicinity of the paintings, although smoke spots made by modern lamps and candles held too close are abundant enough. The conviction that this cave art is not so old as some would have us believe seems irresistible. EUROPEAN CAVES There are other difficult problems relating to palolithic culture though none so seemingly baffling as those pertaining to the cave art, but these cannot be dealt with at present. Mean- AND EARLY MAN 247 while the skeptic take some consolation in the fact that Professor may Cartailhae and his French colleagues were themselves doubters for over twenty years. Section of relic-bearing débris recently exposed at Le Moustier shelter near Les Eyzies, France. In the face of the natural matrix may be counted hundreds of worked and unworked reject flint flakes 8PG joyessny 7 iq Jo uoNooip 94) Jopun ‘AuMeprxe} Jo JUoUTJIedep s,WAMesn] ay} JO U0 A A “AIT Aq porwedead o1aM soysy 94, “9ZIS [eINjVU 9} SOUT} [BIOAOS poSiejue Apsour ‘sjepour oie suoumoeds ot,L sues10 JUsDso10ydsoyd UMG aay) Aq ATWO dn 4 ‘vos oY} Ul avodde 07 pasoddns oie AoY} se ssouyIVp UL Uey} pue ‘QU SIT [INF UL spuodes Moy V JOF YSay Woes aie Ssysy oy) IV) pajsu(pe Os st dnous oy} JO MONVULUNTTL oy, “Wnoesnyl URooury oy} ULseysy Jo [Tey 9} Ur polleqsut Ayjusded dnois e Woy paydeasojoyd ‘aovjams oY} WO.TF o10UL JO OTT @ sTVY “Bas oY] JO SyJdop punojord oy} UL punoys soysy Jo sodA} dStIojJORIeYO BUG SSHSI4 VASd3d5d0 AWOS FISHES OF THE DEEP-SEA By L. Hussakof P TO the time of the “ Challenger” expedition, little known regarding the fish life of the abyssal depths of the sea. Only about thirty species were known. But the wonderful collections brought back by the “Challenger” WEY Was four- year cruise (1873-1876) made known from her the vast diversity, the strangeness and even weirdness of this fish fauna. Sev- eral hundred kinds of deep-sea fishes had been collected —some of them dredged from a depth of more than a mile — and it required a huge quarto! to describe and picture them. From this volume dates our real knowledge of the fishes of the abyssal deep. The “Challenger” expedition was, indeed, a “Columbus voyage” in ichthyology; it opened a new chapter in the history of the science. Since that time many deep-sea ex- ploring expeditions have been sent out by the various nations, and hosts of other fishes have been brought up from the oceans in all parts of the world. More than a thousand species are now known, and we can appreciate at its full value the this faune know the richness and strangeness of Moreover, not only do we fishes themselves, but as a result of the scientific investigations carried on by the various expeditions, we now know a good deal of the physical conditions under which they live, so that we can, in a measure at least, ex- plain the why and wherefore of their ex- traordinary characteristics. When we think of life in the deep-sea, there comes to mind, first of all, the enormous pressure which these creatures must withstand. This pressure becomes 1 Challenger Reports, Vol. XXII, 1887. the greater the deeper we go down, and in the profoundest depths it equals thou- sands of pounds to the square inch. The result of this pressure is that the tissues of these fishes are tender and loosely knitted together. When they brought up out of the dark depths, and are the great pressure under which they live is removed, the explosion of the gases within them bulges out the eyes, and often blows out the viscera through the the collapse, leaving them soft and flabby like moist mouth, while muscles rags. Most deep-sea fishes are very small also, usually only a few inches in length, and it is probable that this re- duction in size has come about to some extent at least, from the great pressure under which they live. Another important condition is the dimness of light, or even darkness in the profound depths of the sea. If we im- agine ourselves descending into the deep ocean, we see the light grow dimmer and dimmer as we go down, until finally a level is reached beyond which no light penetrates at all. The entire vast depth below it, is in eternal darkness. Now the fishes living in this dim light, or in total darkness, have been profoundly modified by it. In some forms the eyes have become very small, and in some cases have entirely disappeared. There are even fishes in which the skin and scales of the body have grown over the place where the eyes should be, so that these fishes are, as has been aptly said, “blind Other forms, on the other hand, have been affected in an entirely different way. The eyes, instead of growing smaller, have grown larger, as if in an attempt to catch every fleeting ray of light. In 249 beyond redemption.” 250 some fishes this has been carried so far that the eyes have become like enormous goggles. Most deep-sea fishes have luminous organs of one kind or another, so that they carry their own light about with them. In some the entire body glim- mers, the coating of slime which exudes from the pores and lateral canals, emitting a soft silvery glow. In others, rows of minute, luminous organs run along the sides of the body, or there are flashing light-spots on the head or face. What a wonderful sight would be to us a small black fish flitting through the silence and darkness of the deep with its headlights and row of pores gleaming through the darkness like some small ship passing through the night with its port- holes all aglow! Some deep-sea fishes have a luminous organ at the end of a feeler on the head. This is waved to and fro to act as a lure to attract the prey. A pertinent question may be asked: How do we know these fishes glow and glimmer, since no human eye has ever beheld them in their abyssal home? We know this partly from analogy and partly from actual observation. When one is in a boat in the tropics, on one of those sultry nights when everything is a dead calm, and the black clouds hang so low that sky and sea form one con- tinuous blackness, then one may see the glimmering fishes darting out of the path of the boat, their forms, silvery and ghostlike, outlined for one moment against the blackness of the sea. This effect is chiefly due to the oxidizing of the slimy secretion covering their bodies. Why shall we not believe, then, that in deep-sea fishes a similar phenomenon takes place, particularly as in many of them, the slime pores and canals are greatly developed and must exude large quantities of slime? Then too, on deep- sea expeditions, on favorable occasions, THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL as for instance, a dark calm night, fishes that have been brought to the surface and placed in water were seen to flash light from the ends of the tentacles or the phosphorescent pores, precisely as we should have expected from a study of these organs. Major Alcock, in his interesting volume, A Naturalist in Indian Seas, mentions a_ specimen brought up from a profound depth which “olimmered like a ghost as it lay dead at the bottom of the pail of turbid sea- water.”” So that by inference, as well as by actual observation, we must be- lieve that what we call luminous organs in deep-sea fishes, emit light into the darkness about them. In the case of fishes totally blind, the absence of light is compensated for by the development of enormous antenne-like feelers, modi- fied from fin rays, so that these fishes can feel their way, as it were, through the darkness. The absence of light however entails another important consequence. As is well known, no plant life can exist in darkness. There is, therefore, no vege- tation of any kind in the profound depths of the sea. The deep-sea fishes are, in consequence, all carnivorous, the more powerful ones seizing and devour- ing the weaker ones. It is a cold black world where might reigns supreme. Many have enormous mouths, and formidable teeth to insure holding the prey. In some forms the teeth are so large that the mouth cannot be shut! Moreover, since meals are perforce far between, they must be as large as pos- sible; hence many forms have extraor- dinarily capacious stomachs. Specimens have been dredged from the deep which were enormously distended through having swallowed fishes larger than themselves. The temperature of the water in the profound depths of the sea, is always low FISHES OF THE DEEP-SEA and near the freezing point. This is true everywhere, even at the equator. Undoubtedly this has an effect upon the fishes, although it is not yet known what it is. The amount of oxygen dissolved in the water also, is much less than in water nearer the surface. The breathing apparatus of the deep-sea fishes is modified to suit these peculiar conditions. The gill filaments have become much reduced in size, and in a number of instances some of the gill- arches bear no gill filaments at all. The fishes are apparently adapted to a much smaller oxygen supply than those living in rivers or in the shallow sea. When we think of the vast diversity among these fishes, the question arises: Are they all representatives of a single family, or group that has become spe- cially adapted to life in the deep sea; or do they belong to different families or groups? One need hardly be an ichthyologist to answer this question. Even a cursory examination of the plates in a work on deep-sea fishes will show that different types are represented. In fact, a great many families are included in the deep-sea fauna. There are sharks and rays; salmonoids, herrings, perches, eels, and representatives of many other families. We can explain this hetero- geneity among them in this way. We may imagine that fishes of many differ- ent kinds in their search, so to speak, for the unoccupied corners of the sea, found a haven in these deeper waters where they were free from pursuit by their enemies. In the course of time they migrated farther and farther into the deep, a change in habits taking place pari passu with the changes in structure. Having started out with different organi- zations, and possessing different degrees of variability, they became differen- tiated in diverse directions, so that while some developed enormous mouths, pow- 251 erful teeth, or phosphorescent organs, others became bottom-living and partly or completely lost their eyes. Still others developed long feelers for groping their way through the darkness. Now and again however, fishes of separate groups developed similar structures, so that there are many striking cases among deep-sea fishes of what the biologist calls “convergence,” or paral- lelism. The Museum has recently prepared for exhibition a number of typical deep- sea fishes arranged in the form of a group. The preparation of this exhibit involved many technical difficulties, such as the modeling of the fishes in transparent or translucent media, to represent them as glimmering or shining with lit-up “portholes.” Considerable experimenting was necessary to accom- plish this group, but all the difficulties were overcome, thanks to the ingenuity and perseverance of Mr. F. F. Horter of the Museum’s taxidermist staff. The group, as it is now installed, represents ten types of deep-sea fishes. It is not, of course, a group in the sense of the habitat groups displayed in the Museum; it is not a section, so to speak, taken from nature and transplanted to the Museum. In nature so many deep-sea fishes are not to be found in so small a space. What the group represents is a number of fishes which are in nature scattered over a vast area and through a great height of water, here brought together for museum purposes into a few square feet of space. Each fish is re- produced accurately with its phosphor- escent pores and tentacles as these are known to exist. With one or two ex- ceptions they are enlarged several times, as the fishes themselves are very small. And since it is known that the phos- phorescent organs do not glow with a steady light, the illumination of the A small, silvery, eel-like fish which has been found in all the oceans at depths ranging from a little less than a mile to two and one-half miles. It has a row of luminous pores running the length of the body; and in the blackness of the profound depths it must appear like a miniature long dark boat with gleaming portholes. Its greenish, glittering eyes are perched on the ends of slender, hornlike tentacles — a'feature which has suggested its scientific name, Stylophthalmus paradozrus group has been arranged so as to have these luminous organs flash intermit- tently. Furthermore, the installation is arranged so that one may view the fishes for a few seconds in full light, as if in a synoptic exhibit, and then see them, when the light goes out, as they are supposed to appear in the darkness of the profound depths, lit up only by their own phosphorescent organs. Near the top of the group is seen a fish which lives on the border line be- tween the region of dimness and total Many of the fishes living in this region are not of a uniform sombre hue, but are brilliantly colored. Neo- scopelus is one of these. The body is “one dazzling sheen of purple and silver and burnished gold, amid which is a darkness. sparkling constellation of luminous or- gans”’ (Alcock). The glowing fish in the center is small fish known from a single specimen, which Barathronus diaphanus, a In this deep-sea fish the head glows with a soft pale light, while the body is quite dark, being covered with large opaque scales. The species (Opisthoproctus soleatus), is known by only two examples dredged from a depth of two and a half miles; one off the northern, and the other off the western coast of Africa (This specimen is not shown in the general photograph of the group, having been cut out for con- venience in reproduction. 252 It is situated in the group below the bottom fish on the right hand side] FISHES OF THE DEEP-SEA was dredged in the Indian Ocean at a depth of a little over four-fifths of a mile. The model of it is one and one-half times the natural size. The phosphorescent fish with the curious long tail (at the right) is Gigantura chuni. It, also, is This known by only a single specimen. was brought up from a depth of four- fifths of a mile in the Gulf of Guinea, on the west coast of Africa. is twice the natural size. The two dark fishes with enormous The model 253; Near the bottom of the group at the left-hand side, is seen an eel-like fish with a line of lit-up pores. This is an enlarged model of Stylophthalmus para- doxus, a small silvery fish widely dis- tributed in all the oceans, whose young also are known. The generic name it bears was given it in allusion to the fact that the eyes are perched on long slender tentacles. The species ranges from a depth of a little less than a mile to two and one-half miles. Another form with This strange deep-sea fish (Gigantura chuni) is known by only a single specimen dredged from a depth of four-fifths of a mile, in the Gulf of Guinea on the west coast of Africa. shimmering glow of iridescence, while the protruding eyes shine like automobile headlights. formidable teeth mark it as a ferocious carnivore gaping mouths (near the top, at the right) are Gastrostomus bairdi. This species is commoner than some of the others, a number of specimens being in several museums. The models of it in the group are copied life-size from a specimen in the Museum. The species occurs in the Atlantic Ocean, near the American coast, in the path of ocean liners. Specimens have been dredged from a depth of nearly three miles. The body of the fish is a The tentacles is Gigantactis vanheffeni, a species typical of many deep-sea fishes which have a tentacle, terminating in a luminous organ, attached to the head. This tentacle serves as a lure for attract- ing prey. The present species is known by only two specimens which were found in the Indian Ocean at a mile and a mile and a half from the surface. The creature is a very small fish, the model being enlarged six times. VOLCANOES OF THE LESSER ANTILLES OBSERVATIONS ON THE PRESENT CONDITION OF THE ACTIVE VOLCANOES OF MARTINIQUE, ST. VINCENT AND GUADELOUPE! By Edmund Otis Hovey T. PELE and the ruined city of St. Pierre at its base hold chief in- terest on the island of Martinique. The old summit plateau of the voleano is 4050 feet above the sea. This formerly bore the pool of fresh water known as ‘‘Lac des Palmistes,” but there is no trace now of the old lake basin under the coating of ten to fifty feet of new ash that covers the plateau. The new cone, which stands as the enduring monument of the great eruption of 1902-3, nearly fills the old crater adjoining the plateau and rises some five hundred feet above it. The famous spine, or obelisk, which rose more than six hundred feet farther into the air, disappeared nearly ten years ago through disintegration, and the cone as viewed from the sea, presents a flat top, whose apparent smoothness does not prepare a visitor for the actual ruggedness 1 Dr. Edmund Otis Hovey, curator of geology and invertebrate paleontology in the American Museum, has returned from the first expedition undertaken with the assistance of the Heilprin Exploration Fund. This fund was established in 1914 by relatives of the noted explorer and geog- rapher, the late Angelo Heilprin, for the purpose of aiding geographical work under the auspices of the American Museum. On account of Pro- fessor Heilprin’s well-known work on the 1902— 1903 eruptions of Mt. Pelé, Martinique, it was considered particularly appropriate that the first work under the fund should concern the active volcanoes of the Lesser Antilles in continuation of the work already done by the American Museum in 1902, 1903 and 1908. The object of the visit was to make a comparison of conditions past and present, in connection with assembling for publi- cation all previous observations on the eruptions. The first stop was made at Guadeloupe where sixteen days were spent, three of which were passed on the summit of the Soufriére. On Martinique eleven days were spent in camp on the old summit plateau of Mt. Pelé, while on St. Vincent more than three weeks were given to the study, twelve days of the time being spent in camp on the volcano. Many specimens were brought back to New York to illustrate the changes that have taken place in the rocks during the past seven years, and scores of photographs were taken to add to the extensive collections already in the possession of the Museum as a result of former expeditions. 254 of surface which he finds on climbing the mountain. In 1908 when I last visited Martinique the new cone was seamed with fissures which dis- charged great volumes of steam and gave temperatures as high as 500 degrees C. (932 degrees F.). Considerable steam is still issuing from these vents, but there are no temperatures exceeding 100 degrees C. (212 degrees F.). The fumarole area and the plateau on the west side of the mountain, between the rivers Blanche and Claire mid- way between sea and summit, which com- prised vents giving temperatures of nearly 500 degrees C. in 1908 have likewise greatly diminished in activity, although vents were found which even now give a temperature of 128.5 degrees C. (265 degrees F.). On the whole however it is evident that the activity of the voleano has greatly and continually diminished since the outbursts of 1902-1903, and apparently there is no present danger of recrudescence. On the east or windward side of the vol- cano, the vegetation has reéstablished itself to the summit of the mountain, and even the forest is beginning to reassert itself. The whole aspect of this side of the volcano is verdant and peaceful, and gives no indication of the devastation of thirteen years ago; even the rocks of the new cone are more or less thickly coated with moss, while the side and top of the old cone are covered with grass, ferns and bushes, in addition to moss and lichens. On the summit plateau we found an abundance of red raspberry bushes bearing flowers and green and ripe fruit. Sugar plantations on the west side of Mt. Pelé have been reinstated as far as the Roxelane River, within the border of the original zone of annihilation, while the ruined city of St. Pierre now contains about thirty new buildings of durable construction and a resident population of possibly two hundred people. The southwest side of the voleano lying between the Seche and Blanche rivers, which VOLCANOES OF THE LESSER ANTILLES 250 was the route traversed by hundreds or perhaps thousands of destructive eruption clouds, still lies drear and desolate, because the soil was completely swept away by the blasts, and the material left behind as well as that added by the eruption is too porous for the retention of the water necessary to restore it to fertility. Furthermore, the rainfall of the west side of the island is much less than on the east side, and the region is dried by the rays of the afternoon sun. The vicinity of the Soufriére on the island of St. Vincent also shows evidences of re- covery from the previous activity. Here as in Martinique, the vegetation has reéstab- lished itself more thoroughly on the windward than on the leeward side of the mountain. Considerable portions of the Soufriére re- ceived immense deposits of gravelly ash from the recent eruptions, and these are largely barren at the present time. Other areas received a finely comminuted ash which retains water better than the coarse material, and suffers more rapid decomposition. This fine ash is now coated more or less thickly with moss and lichens, and often bears, in addition, bushes, trees and tree ferns. The outer limits of the original zone of annihila- tion show merely a destruction of the vegeta- tion then coating the mountain slopes, and did not suffer destruction or deep burying of the soil. Palms and tree ferns have regained their pristine development and beauty in this region, and forest trees are growing. On the east side of the mountain the sugar-cane plantations which flourished before the eruptions are now largely restored to culti- vation and present a heavier growth of cane than before, while on the west side peasant proprietors are already taking up “provision ground”’ on the slopes of the volcano itself. The great crater of the Soufriére is beautiful enough to repay the lover of scenery for mak- ing a special trip to the island. It is about nine-tenths of a mile across from east to west, and three-quarters of a mile from north to south, and a lake approximately half a mile in diameter now occupies its lower portions, as its predecessor did in the days before the eruptions which changed the whole appear- ance of the mountain. In 1902-3 there was a little pool of muddy water in the bottom of the bowl through which disturbing columns or puffs of steam were continually rising. In 1908 the pool was much larger, was yellow- ish green in color and was not disturbed by any eruptive discharges, but it did not fill the bottom of the crater. In 1915 the lake is apparently some hundreds of feet deeper than it was in 1908 and occupies the entire bottom of the crater, rising well up on the vertical walls in most places. Careful measurements with the theodolite established the surface of the lake as being 760 feet below the point where the trail from the western side of the island reaches the rim of the crater, or approximately 2140 feet above the level of the sea. The interior walls of the crater are coated with moss and tufts of grass wherever there are slopes of volcanic ash, and tree ferns and bushes are reéstablishing themselves in the ravines cut by the rains, while the vertical faces of the old lava beds making up a large part of the mountain add tones of reddish and yellowish gray to the color effect. The voleano on Guadeloupe, unlike those of Martinique and St. Vincent, shows no de- crease of temperature over the past. The summit of the Soufriére gives opportunity for temperature observations on the fumaroles and the study of the escaping gases. These fumaroles have been active, with varying degrees of strength, during all the historic period of the voleano. A marked increase of discharge of sulphureted steam took place at the time of the eruptions of Martinique and St. Vincent, and an area several acres in extent was then added to the active region. The vents maintain to-day the force of their discharge, but the temperature does not in any case exceed 100 degrees C. (212 degrees F.). The eastern member of the twin islands forming Guadeloupe is sedimentary in origin, and presents geological facts of value in their bearing on the general history of the Antilles. GROUND-SLOTH FROM A CAVE IN PATAGONIA By W. D. Matthew OLONEL ROOSEVELT has recently ic placed on deposit with the Museum three fossil specimens of remarkable interest. These are a fragment of the skin and hair, a piece of the bone and a mass of dung of an extinct ground-sloth from the cave at Last Hope Inlet in Patagonia, presented to him by Senor Moreno, director of the La Plata Museum, near Buenos Aires. The great ground-sloths of South America are among the most remarkable and inter- esting of the giant quadrupeds which formerly inhabited that country. Many skeletons have been found, especially in the Pampean formation of Argentina, and a fine series of them is shown in the Quaternary mammal hall. They were supposed however to have been extinct for many thousands of years, and it was a disputed point whether or no they were contemporaries of primitive man in that continent. The exploration of this cave about fifteen years ago furnished abun- dant proof that one species at least of these strange animals survived to within a few centuries of the present day, and was not only contemporary with primitive man but was in some sense of the word domesticated by him. Numerous bones and pieces of skin were disinterred from a layer composed of dust and ground-sloth droppings beneath the floor in a dry protected corner of the cave, in company with tools or weapons of stone and bone and bearing unmistakable marks of being cut and fashioned artificially. Bundles of grass spread as though intended for fodder, and other indications showed that the animals had been stabled or imprisoned within the cave and fed by their captors. The dry floor protected against damp and weather has preserved skin and bones with bits of tendon and dried flesh clinging to them, and the hair is often in perfect condi- tion. Making all reasonable allowance for these favorable conditions, one can hardly suppose that these remains are more than a few centuries old. There is reason to believe that they are not much less than that, and that they antedated the arrival of white settlers in this region. ‘ The skin is covered with a thick coat of golden brown hair, of the same peculiar coarse brittle texture as that of the modern tree- sloth, the nearest living relative of the great ground-sloths. In the under side of the skin are imbedded numerous rounded nodules of bone studded thickly enough to make it a fairly effective defense against the attacks of carnivora. Quantities of similar nodules have been found associated with petrified skeletons of ground-sloths and it had been supposed but never before proved that they were imbedded in the skin during life. The bone fragment has remnants of the dried flesh and tendons still adherent, and shows clearly the marks of the tools used in cutting it up. The mass of dried dung, utterly unlike that of any living animal of that region completes the illusion. It is difficult indeed to believe that these are relics of animals extinct for some hundreds of years. But the rumors that the Grypotherium still survives in the wilds of Patagonia, based probably on the extraordinary freshness of these remains, have been repeatedly investi- gated by subsequent explorers and found to be baseless. Miss Dora Keen of Philadelphia, who visited the locality a few years ago, has also presented to the Museum a sample of hair of the ground- sloth taken from this cave. THE SOMAIKOLI DANCE AT SICHUMOVI By F. S. Dellenbaugh RTICLES in the March number of the JOURNAL on dances of American In- dians recalled to me that I have seen several Indian dances in years past. In 1884 I spent some weeks on the East Mesa 256 of what we then called the Moquis Villages, now the Hopi, at that time a somewhat remote region. There were no white men in that country except three or four at Keam’s trading post, fourteen miles from the East THE SOMAIKOLI DANCE AT SICHUMOVI Mesa, until one reached Hubbell’s Pueblo, Colorado, forty-six miles from Keam’s, and then thirty-five miles farther east at Fort Defiance. To the south it was eighty miles to the new town of Holbrook on the just completed Atlantic and Pacific Railway, now the Atchison, Topeka and Santa Fé, and to the west and north there was no camp or set- tlement until the great cafion of the Colorado was crossed and then it was about one hun- dred miles to Kanab. The only other white man in the Hopi Province at the time I was there, was Dr. Jeremiah Sullivan, who lived in Sichumovi with the chief, Anawita, and had been to some extent initiated into that tribe. I had rented from Tom Polacka, a Hano (Tewa) native, the top story of Tewa, a single large room with a fireplace in one corner, and with a porch in front of the door, formed by the roof of the house below, where I could smoke my pipe and easily imagine myself, as I looked along the entire mesa toward Walpi, much farther away from the toiling world than actually I was. On Saturday, November 8, I recorded in my diary: To-day the Moquis have been making great preparations for to-morrow which is a great dance day. To-night they cleaned up the rubbish and threw it over the cliff. To-night is T6-td-ki-d, Tod-td-ki-pi or Tok- tight-d, the “night of dancing.” My diary for Sunday, November 9, further records: To-day was a great one on this mesa. About sunrise I heard the drum going at Sichumovi and a great yelling, and getting up I saw a crowd in the plaza, but the princi- pal actors soon returned to their kiva. The dancing did not begin again until about eleven o’clock and then it did not stop until sunset — dancing with singing and hammer- ing on the drum. The drummer, with his big drum, sat in the center of the plaza with Six or seven singers, around whom was a circle of about forty men, boys, women and girls, all togged out in their best. ‘‘Mose”’ was there dressed all in black (cambric) and did not look half so well as in his ordinary clothes. It is strange what a fancy these Indians and the Navajo have for black. One man had on calico trousers, one leg one pat- tern, the other another. The women wore white blankets with red borders and they had their hair done up in quite a different fashion from the ordinary. It was brought down smoothly and fastened 207 behind in a sort of long knot wrapped with red yarn. Over the forehead from ear to ear was a kind of thick fringe of black hair about four inches long, sewed to a string and tied about the head in such a manner that the eyes were almost obscured. Their feet were moccasined, which they are not on ordinary occasions, and the buckskin of the top of the moccasin swathed their legs, as when they ride. The members of the circle sang together as the circle slowly moved from left to right. Each man or boy chose a partner and joined the circle with her. It was absurd to see a tall Indian enter with a girl of only seven or eight years. [I learned later that the older girls were not permitted to take part]. Presently there was a shouting in the direction of the kiva, ‘‘ Yah-hai— yah-hai,”’ very loud, and looking that way I perceived a man coming, nude excepting for a kilt, and painted yellow. On his head were feathers. His hair was “banged’’ in front above the eyes, cut short on the sides, and hung down long behind. From his waist at the back trailed afoxskin. In his right hand he carried a gourd rattle painted green and white and filled with small pebbles, judging from the sound. In the left hand he carried a sort of baton with a cloud symbol in the middle and a free swinging pendant at either end. Imme- diately behind him was one of the most grotesque figures I have ever seen. It was one of those innumerable Hopi ghosts, saints or minor gods known as a “katcina,”’ covered with all sorts of trappings, and heavy wrap- ings about the head with the semblance of a mask in front (the mask fantastically deco- rated with green and other colors), a strong bow in his right hand which he used as a staff (the quiver being hung to his left side), and in his left hand an ear of corn and a small bent stick. He came prancing and dancing and jumping after his leader in the most extraordinary way. The deer hoofs hung around his waist rattled loudly. He was supposed to be blind. His leader rattled as hard as he could rattle and advanced a few steps toward the group shouting an incanta- tion, then suddenly turned and faced the kateina and yelled ‘‘Yah-hai — yah-hai’”’ at the top of his lungs. Then he walked on shouting, the drummer thumped away on the drum, the singers and dancers sang, and the katcina capered about in frantic spasms of tramps and jumps, never stopping for an 258 instant. They neared the circle, which broke on one side, and as it became a semi- circle, the dance ceased. The leader and katcina then circled around the drum. The leader shouted in the ear of the katcina at frequent intervals his ‘“‘ Yah-hai — yah-hai”’ and yelled his incantation, waving the balance-looking arrangement. This, by the way, is the charm that attracts the katcina and yet holds him off [Sullivan]. After several rounds of this yelling, singing, shouting and jumping, the leader returned to the kiva, slowly followed by the skipping katcina. The circle continued the dance, closing its ranks, and so on until another leader and katcina made their appearance. Sometimes there were three or four at the same time and then the noise was deafening. All day long this continued, and all day I stood my ground with camera and sketch book, notwithstanding certain disapproving looks from the dancers. At one time I THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL thought they meant to tell me to stop using the camera but they did not do so; probably as they had never seen a hand camera before, they did not understand its nature. With the plates manufactured then, and the slow shutter, it was very difficult to get the swiftly darting figures; and that day I was as much of an object of interest to the visiting Navajo, and the Hopi from the other towns, as were the katcinas and the dancers. Nobody molested me however and at sunset when the long procession of katcinas and leaders had passed through the village and received the contributions of sacred meal and prayer feathers from the populace, all weird enough in the gloaming, I returned to my housetop and slept without a break until Hoski, my native boy, after his usual fashion, threw the door open in the morning and set down the olla of water which he always brought up fresh from the spring near the foot of the mesa, some seven hundred feet below. MUSEUM NOTES A JoINnT anthropological expedition will be undertaken with the University of Colorado of which the distinguished anthropologist, Dr. Livingston Farrand, is now president. The field party will be under the direction of Mr. N.C. Nelson, assistant curator of anthro- pology in this Museum, and Mr. E. H. Morris, curator of the University Museum, and will explore the little-known cliff-dwelling regions of Colorado. Tue New York Academy of Sciences has published an essay on ‘‘Climate and Evo- lution” by Dr. W. D. Matthew. This is an attempt to find in the slow cyclic climatic changes of geologic time a fundamental cause controlling the course of evolution and geo- graphical dispersal of animals and plants. The author accepts the view that the deep ocean basins have been substantially perma- nent during the later ages of geologic time, the continents alternately emerged and more or less completely united to the northward, or submerged and extensively overflowed and isolated by shallow seas. The continen- tal shelf at or near the one hundred fathom line marks the extreme limit of emergence. The epochs of elevation have been associated with arid climates and polar cold; the epochs of submergence with warm moist uniform climates. The record of the evolution and dispersal of the various races of mammals is interpreted in accord with this theory, that of the lower vertebrates briefly outlined. Tue New York Aquarium gave its second annual reception to the members of the New York Zodlogical Society on the evening of May fifth. About five hundred guests were present and were entertained with motion pictures of marine life. The Aquarium had just come into possession of a new collection of tropical fishes from Key West, which were on exhibition, and two more porpoises had been secured for the porpoise pool. Some years ago Mr. G. Frederick Norton began a special study of the so-called blue or “‘olacier’’ bear (which had been named Ursus emmonsi). These bears are confined to the vicinity of Saint Elias range of mountains in Alaska and have a very limited distribution. Mr. Norton secured a number of skins and skulls which have satisfactorily demonstrated that the blue bear is only a color phase of the black bear (Ursus americanus). The black bear apparently is a polychromatic animal and has several well-marked color MUSEUM NOTES phases which in some instances are very local. A few years ago the Museum secured two beautiful skins and skulls of the white bear from Gribbell Island, British Columbia, (which had been named Ursus kermodet), through Mr. Kermode, curator of the Pro- vincial Museum, Victoria, British Columbia. There seems to be little doubt that instead of being a new species, the white bear is also a color phase of the black bear. The so-called cinnamon bear is a well-known color phase of this same species. Very often in a single litter black and cinnamon bears are found together. The Museum has in mind the preparation of a group showing all of these color phases of the black bear. Through a gift to the Museum by Mr. Norton of a mag- nificent specimen of a glacier bear taken in Disenchantment Bay, Yakutat, Alaska, there remains only the lack of a cinnamon bear to allow the construction of such a group. THE department of invertebrate zodlogy will actively participate in the Porto Rico Survey during the coming summer. Dr. F. E. Lutz and Mr. A. J. Mutchler will prose- cute entomological investigations in various parts of the island; Mr. Roy W. Miner and Mr. H. Mueller will establish headquarters at Guanica Harbor for studies upon marine invertebrates; while Professor Raymond C. Osburn will carry on dredging operations mainly along the southwest shores, codper- ating with Mr. Miner. For several weeks Dr. A. G. Mayer of the Carnegie Institution and a group of zodlogists will also be carrying on special investigations about Guanica. SINCE the last issue of the JouRNAL the fol- lowing persons have become members of the Museum: Patron, Mrs. BASHFoRD DEAN; Fellow, Mr. Henry Forp; Life Members, Dr. EM1ILie SNETHLAGE, and Messrs. FREDERIC ALMy CAMMANN, JAMES P. CwHaprn, ANDRE DE Coppet, FRANK LeGranp GILLIss, HERBERT Lane, P. W. LIVERMORE, HERMAN STuTzeER and JAMES B. WiLBur; Annual Members, Mrs. GrEorGE CoNnRAD Coox, Mrs. Racuet Lenox Porter, Miss Autce L. CuarK, Miss EvizaBetuH Doucuas, Dr. P. Maxwentt Fosuay, Dr. Harry Justin Roppy, Dr. Cuarues H. Youna, and Messrs. I. p—E Bruyn, Grorce H. Capp, HERBERT STANLEY CONNELL, HENRY 259 Doscuer, FREDERIC HUNTINGTON DouGLAs, Houutanp S. Dusit, Joun M. Gienn, F. HERRMANN, AuGust Kuun, Jutius Kun, Lee Lauriz, Ivy L. Lez, E. A. McInHENny, WiuuramM C. Murpny, D. E. Pomeroy, RoGER M. Poor, Ropert W. Sayues, H. JERMAIN Sitocum, Jr., FRANK B. Smipt, JAcoB STEIN- HARDT, CARLL TUCKER, WILLIAM YOUNG WESTERVELT and FREDERICK N. WILLSON. Mr. Hersert Lana has been appointed assistant in mammalogy and Mr. James P. Chapin assistant in ornithology. Mr. Lang and Mr. Chapin have also been elected life members of the Museum in recognition of their efficient services in conducting the Congo expedition. Mrs. BasHrorp DEAN has recently been elected patron of the Museum in acknowledg- ment of her recent contributions toward the preparation of the bibliography of fishes; Mr. Henry Ford has been made fellow, in appreciation of his generosity in presenting to the institution the bust of John Burroughs; and Dr. Emilie Snethlage, life member, in recognition of her practical interest in the development of the Museum’s South Ameri- can collections. Dr. CHrestTeR A. REEDS and Mr. Prentice B. Hill of the department of geology and invertebrate paleontology will leave on May 29 to carry on stratigraphic and palzontologic investigations in Porto Rico in connection with the Porto Rico Survey. Messrs. H. E. AnrHony and D. S. Batu have returned from an expedition to the mountains of the Isthmus of Darien in eastern Panama, bringing with them a collection of 1100 birds and 250 mammals, many of which are new to the Museum’s collections and some undoubtedly new to science. These col- lectors left for the field the latter part of January, but owing to the inaccessibility of the country to be explored, they had only about two months in which to accomplish their work before the rainy season set in. It took them nearly a month to reach the ground where they were to do their collecting and almost as long to return from there. At the City of Panama they were joined by Mr. W. B. Richardson, who had been doing some preliminary work in Darien. The party left the City of Panama on February 8 and going 260 down the coast in a gasolene launch to El Real, began to ascend the Tuyra River, a river several miles across at the mouth. In the lower part of the river they were obliged to leave the launch and take to canoes, travel- ing in this way as far as the foothills of the mountain. There they got natives for pack- ers and carried their outfit for three days’ journey to the foot of Mount Tacarcuna, from which point most of the work was done. Later camp was made at the very highest point on the mountain where there was any water. From this site on the mountain range that forms the boundary between Panama and Colombia, the Atlantic could be seen in the distance. The region, probably because of its inaccessibility, has never before been explored biologically. Indeed the Indians there had never seen a Northern white man before. Its fauna presents an important scientific problem because it seems to indicate that the mountain range which forms the Isthmus of Darien was at one time connected with the western Andes of northern Colombia. In 1913 Dr. Wiliam T. Hornaday, advo- cate of wild life protection, decided that the cause could not be adequately supported through annual subscriptions. He deter- mined upon the creation of what is now known as the ‘‘Permanent Wild Life Protec- tion Fund,” for nation-wide campaign work during the next one hundred years, the “in- come only for use on the firimg-line.” The wild life protective principles are formulated as follows: Stop the sale of wild game; promote laws to prevent unnaturalized aliens from owning or using rifles and shot-guns; stop all spring and late-winter shooting; stop all killing of insectivorous birds for food, and of all birds for millinery purposes; increase the number of game preserves; oppose the use of all extra deadly automatic, auto-loading and “pump” guns in hunting, and secure the pas- sage of laws against them; secure perpetual close seasons for all species of wild life that are threatened with extinction from our fauna. The plan has already received a remarkable series of indorsements. The minimum fixed upon was $100,000, and up to date $73,050 has been subscribed. This is the second largest endowment fund in existence for the benefit of wild life. The Banking Trustees of the Fund are Messrs. Clark Williams and A. Barton Hepburn. Dr. Hornaday, as the ampaigning trustee, expends the annual THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL income of the Fund in accordance with the principles originally formulated. A rather novel feature of the plan provides that the names of all persons who make large sacrifices for the formation of the Fund shall be known as Founders, and that their names shall be permanently associated with the Fund and its results. The most important work to be undertaken in the immediate future under the auspices of this Fund, is the promotion of a very comprehensive plan for the creation of game sanctuaries in national forests. This campaign will begin on September first and will be prosecuted with much vigor until complete success is achieved. THROUGH interest created by the Roosevelt South American expedition, the Museum has received six hundred birds and fifty mammals, presented by the Goeldi Museum of Para, through its director of zodlogy, Dr. Emilie Snethlage. The members of the North American expedition when passing through Pard in May, 1914, called on Dr. Snethlage to examine the rich collections of Amazonian fauna which she, and her predecessor Doctor Goeldi, have amassed. Dr. Snethlage writes that shortly after the Roosevelt party passed through Parad she herself embarked on an expedition into the unexplored portions of the Upper Xingt, on which she was absent seven months. Unfortunately, within a month after her departure from Parad, the middle finger of her right hand was bitten off to the base by a piranha, the small man-eating fish of South America. AN exhibit to illustrate the principles of Mendelian heredity has recently been in- stalled in the Darwin hall and is temporarily labeled. As at present exhibited, there are five panels showing as many instances of inheritance in plants and animals: first the classical case of the seed color of the common pea, based on Mendel’s original experiments; second, complex inheritance as illustrated by the colors of the sweet pea, based on the experiments of Bateson; and third, three panels to illustrate the inheritance of coat color in the common rat, namely, the effect on the third generation of crossing one, two and three varieties of unit characters respec- tively. A more detailed account of this exhibit will be given in a future issue of the JOURNAL. MUSEUM NOTES Tue exhibit in the Darwin hall showing variation under domestication has been rearranged and forms one of the items in a series illustrating Darwinian principles. In this case the chief variations of the dog, the pigeon and the common barnyard fowl are shown. Mr. N. C. Netson of the department of anthropology is engaged in excavating the prehistoric and early historic ruined villages in the neighborhood of Santa Fé. “ THE Evolution of the Jaw Muscles of Ver- tebrates”’ was the subject of a recent presenta- tion before the New York Academy of Sciences by Prof. L. A. Adams, who has been investigat- ing this subject in the Museum laboratory of vertebrate evolution. By means of the stere- opticon he exhibited a series of very clear drawings of the skull and jaw muscles of a score or more of representative vertebrates of all classes, and showed by what comparatively slight successive changes the arrangement of the jaw muscles of primitive fishes has given rise to the various modifications that are characteristic of the higher types. THE civic exhibition at the National Arts Club is one of the most instructive yet brought together on the problems touching artistic betterment of New York City. Maps, photographs, architectural designs and sculptural models bring out many proposed plans for beautifying Riverside Drive and its docks, besides various bridges, streets and parks. Among suggested features for deco- ration of buildings may be noted mural de- signs by E. W. Deming and WillS. Taylor and sculptural animal designs by Carl E. Akeley, all of the American Museum’s staff and at present engaged in work for the artistic im- provement of the Museum buildings. SUBSTANTIAL progress has been made in installing the new storage system for dino- saurs and other fossil reptiles. Most of these large and heavy specimens have hitherto been laid out on mats on wooden tables ranked three deep, filling up the large dino- saur storeroom at the top of the southwest tower wing; the remainder stored in wooden trays piled up in every available corner of the storerooms and laboratories. The ar- rangement was originally intended as a temporary one, but for lack of a better equip- ment has lasted fifteen vears. It was some- 261 what cumbersome, the larger fossils were exposed to dust and risk of breakage, the smaller ones difficult of access, and the danger of serious fire damage became continually greater as constant additions crowded the collections more and more. The new system will provide ultimately three double stacks of steel racks twelve feet high with strong but light steel framed trays three by four feet, and wall racks for the smaller wooden trays. The specimens are laid out on mats in the large trays and lifted up by a small movable elevator. The sys- tem is adjustable and compact, and en- ables the large heavy and often fragile bones to be moved with safety and convenience. The great saving in space is shown by the fact that the one double stack now installed accommodates most of the contents of the storeroom, so full under the old system as to be unmanageably crowded. Other collec- tions which for lack of room were temporarily placed elsewhere will find ample storage space and security in the second stack now under construction and in the wall racks. The third stack is planned for accommodation of future collections but will not be installed at present. The trays will be protected from dust by fireproofed covers and curtains. The risk of fire is now slight as there is practically noth- ing to burn except the old wooden trays which must be retained for the present to contain the smaller specimens, and the adequate space around these will make it easy to con- trol any fire that might get started. The room now available to lay out dinosaur skeletons for study and comparison has been urgently needed for research work on these collections. The lighting of the storeroom has also been greatly improved. THE Southwestern Anthropological Society for promotion of research work in the history and ethnology of the Southwest has recently been organized at Santa Fé. Dr. Livingston Farrand, president of the University of Colo- rado and formerly curator in the American Museum, was elected president and Dr. Paul Radin, secretary. Dr. P. E. Goddard and Mr. N. C. Nelson of this Museum have been invited to become members of the committee on research. Mr. Cuarutes W. MEap, assistant curator of anthropology, in charge of the South 262 American collections, has just completed an exhaustive investigation of the native copper and bronze industry of the New World. The primary part of the investigation was the chemical analysis of one hundred and sixty Museum specimens, so selected as to give typical series for each important locality. The laboratory tests were made by Mr. W. A. Wissler, A. M. Mr. Mead finds by corre- lating the chemical determinations with the distribution and types of implements, that the prehistoric Peruvians thoroughly under- stood the art of making bronze from copper and tin. In addition, he has brought to- gether the early fragmentary accounts of Spanish explorers as to how these metals were worked, which became more intelligible in the light of the chemical studies. Among the obscure and little-known sources is the Arte De Los Metales by Alvaro Alonso Barba, published early in the seventeenth century, a copy of which was kindly placed at Mr. Mead’s disposal by Mr. E. P. Mathewson of the Anaconda Copper Mining Company. The full report of this study will soon appear in the Anthropological Papers of the Museum. Dr. Rosert H. Lowrie and Mr. ALANSON SKINNER of the department of anthropology have just completed five publication reports upon their last year’s field work among our western Indians. Dr. Lowie made a special study of the societies and social organiza- tions of the Ute and Shoshone, while Mr. Skinner investigated the same aspects of primitive culture among the Iowa, Kansa and Ponca tribes. These reports will appear in a special volume of the Anthropological Papers now nearing completion, treating the societies and social organizations of the Plains Indians in an exhaustive manner. On April 9, Dr. W. H. R. Rivers of Cam- bridge University, England, visited the de- partment of anthropology of the Museum, having stopped a day in New York on his return from attendance at the Australian meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of Science and a subsequent visit to several of the South Sea Islands. Dr. Rivers is known among _ anthropologists throughout the world for his intensive re- searches into the ethnology of the Torres Straits Islanders and of the Todas of southern India. More recently he investigated vari- ous of the Melanesian groups as director of the Percy Sladen Trust Expedition. He has THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL profoundly stimulated ethnological thought by developing the genealogical method as a means of research in the study of social usages and by directing attention to the im- portance of kinship nomenclature. His latest publications, Kinship and Social Organisation and The History of Melanesian Society are largely devoted to the latter topic and form a landmark in the history of the subject. At the Museum, Dr. Rivers examined with interest the collections in the South Sea hall and dis- cussed the investigations of kinship terminolo- gies of North American and Oceanian peoples. Mr. Russet J. Coins has presented to the Museum an eighteen-foot female Manta (devilfish or giant ray). This was caught on April 11 in the Gulf of Mexico, some one hundred miles south of Tampa, after a danger- ous twenty-two-minute fight with the giant fish. Mr. Coles was instrumental last year in procuring for the Museum two specimens of Manta, respectively eleven and seven and one- half feet across, but knowing that the species reached a much larger size, he has not rested until a finer specimen was secured. The one just captured is, as far as we are aware, the largest recorded on our Atlantic coast, for while the species is popularly said in books to reach a width of twenty feet, none of these giants has as yet come to hand. A reproduction of this eighteen-foot animal will make a magnificent addition to our exhibit of fishes. In the New York City building at the Panama-Pacific Exposition, to the right of the entrance, is an alcove containing photo- graphic exhibits of the several museums and libraries of New York City. The selected exhibits from the American Museum of Natu- ral History aims to indicate to the general public the institution’s scientific scope, its financial status, and its place in the city as an educational institution. Dr. Rosert H. Lowte will leave early in June for field work among the Kiowa Indians of Oklahoma, the Hopi of Arizona and the Paiute of Nevada. From the Kiowa Dr. Lowie hopes to secure information concerning their military societies; the investigations among the Hopi will cover social organization or clan system; and the work in Nevada is a continuation of that undertaken last year as part of the Museum’s extensive survey of Shoshonean tribes. MUSEUM NOTES Tue American Ethnological Society, which was founded in 1842 by Mr. Albert Gallatin, has adopted a new constitution with a view to incorporating a society for the safeguarding of its growing endowment fund. Tue Museum has recently secured a large collection consisting chiefly of pottery taken from the island of Marajo, Brazil, by Mr. Algot Lange. This pottery was secured on Mr. Lange’s second expedition to South America, the first having been made for the University Museum of Philadelphia. A REPRESENTATIVE collection of Salvador archeology which Dr. Herbert J. Spinden obtained last summer by arrangement with the government of Salvador, has lately ar- rived at the Museum and has been installed in the Mexican hall. The specimens include pottery and stone, and represent a long period of art with several distinct phases. There are many examples of archaic pottery which may date from before the time of Christ, as well as beautiful painted vases of the Maya civiliza- tion and glazed ware of the Aztec period. Proressor C.-E. A. Winstow has been appointed to the newly established Anna M. L. Lauder professorship of public health at the Yale Medical School. He will give up his connection with the New York State Department of Health and the Teachers’ College to take up this work next fall, but will continue to act as curator of public health at the American Museum. At the May meeting of the New York Academy of Sciences Dr. Charles H. Town- send exhibited moving pictures of recent Biological Survey dredging operations in Long Island Sound by the United States Fisheries steamer ‘Fish Hawk.” The fauna of the muddy bottom in the middle of the Sound, Dr. Townsend said, is considerably different from that along the margins where oyster beds abound. It includes great num- bers of spider crabs, flounders and whelks. Dr. Charles B. Davenport, director of the Carnegie Station for Experimental Evolution at Cold Spring Harbor, described the fauna of the brackish waters on the north shores of Long Island and showed how different forms which are dependent upon salt water, such as mussels, Littorea and barnacles, manage to 263 live in brackish water if they can get purer salt water at high tide. Professor Raymond C. Osburn read a paper on the ‘‘ Geographical Distribution of the Bryozoa of the Atlantic Coast of North America.” Nearly three hundred species of Bryozoa are known to inhabit the coastal shelf down to the hundred- fathom line. The species fall for the most part into three groups: (1) cosmopolitan species or those of wide range; (2) northern species often circumpolar, which range southward along the coast; (3) tropical species, which range northward from Florida. Charts indicating the relation of the bryo- zoan distribution to ocean temperatures and currents were exhibited. Dr. RaymMonp C. Osspurn of the New York Aquarium, assistant professor of zodl- ogy in Barnard College, Columbia Univer- sity, has accepted the professorship of biology in the Connecticut College for Women at New London. He will be greatly missed by his colleagues in New York, who hope that he will be able to keep in touch with his scientific interests here. Notice of the death of the distinguished English paleontologist and zoélogist, Richard Lydekker occurs in Nature for April 29. Dr. Lydekker was well known as a high authority upon mammals both living and extinct. His most notable contributions to scientific re- search dealt with the fossil mammals and dinosaurs of India and Argentina, but he is perhaps better known as the author of a number of excellent text-books and treatises of a more popular kind dealing with the liv- ing and extinct mammalia. Among these may be especially mentioned: A Geographic History of Mammals, Mammals Living and Extinct (Flower and Lydekker), Manual of Paleontology (Nicholson and Lydekker), The New Natural History, Deer of All Lands, The Horse and its Relatives, The Ox and its Kin- dred, Game Animals of Africa, Game Animals of India, Mostly Mammals (a collection of essays). He was the author of the Cata- logues of Fossil Mammals, Reptiles, Am- phibians and Birds in the British Museum, of numerous articles in the last edition of the Encyclopedia Britannica, a frequent con- tributor to Nature, The Field, Knowledge, Science Progress and other English periodicals, to the Proceedings of the Zoélogical Society and other journals of research. 264 Mr. Howarp McCormick has begun work on the canvas for the background of a second Indian habitat group to be placed in the Southwest Indian hall. The group represents Apache Indians engaged in various occupa- tions under a flat-topped shelter of boughs and gives as a background a view of the San Carlos river valley and neighboring moun- tains where these Apache live. Studies for the group were made by Mr. McCormick in Arizona in 1914. THe Museum has recently secured by purchase through the Dodge fund, from Mr. P. A. Bungart, a local collector of Lorain, Ohio, a valuable collection of Dinichthyids from the Devonian shales of Ohio. The collection of thirty-three specimens includes several complete crania and a number of other remains of high scientific value. Mr. F. A. Watson is on the north coast of Santo Domingo making collections for the department of invertebrate zodlogy. The ex- penses of his trip are being covered by Mr. B. Preston Clark of Boston, Massachusetts. Mr. Clarence R. Halter, who is spending May and June in the same region, is collecting reptiles and batrachians for the Museum. Tue sledge used by Admiral Peary on the expedition which reached the North Pole, has been loaned to the Oakland Museum for exhibition during the period of the Panama- Pacific exposition. Tue purchase of the collections made by Mr. Richard Douglas in Matebeleland, South Africa, a few years ago, secures to the Museum a large series of prehistoric stone implements and a considerable series of baskets and other ethnological specimens, as well as small col- lections of reptiles, mammals and birds from the region. Two accessions of interest recently received by the department of anthropology are an Indian-made canoe, weighing thirty-nine pounds and decorated with beads on the bow, the gift of the Hudson Bay Importing Com- pany, and a beautiful feather hammock from Brazil presented by Mr. Charles R. Flint. A PRELIMINARY report on the fishes ob- tained in Porto Rico last summer by Mr. John T. Nichols is published in the American Museum Bulletin. Mr. Nichols lists twenty- THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL two species not previously recorded from the island and describes two new species. His work on the fishes of Porto Rico was done in connection with the biological survey of the island made by the New York Academy of Sciences for the insular government. Amone the recent anthropological publi- cations of the Museum is one on Pawnee Indian Societies by James R. Murie, a dis- tinguished Pawnee chief. For several years Mr. Murie has been gathering data from the oldest men of his race and under the immedi- ate supervision of Dr. Clark Wissler, has prepared several manuscripts for publication, of which the present issue is the first. Proressor A. L. Kronper, head of the de- partment of anthropology in the University of California, will spend the next academic year in New York City as a guest of the Museum. He has also volunteered to assist in the Museum field work by spending the summer in the Pueblo of Zuni. Professor Kroeber was formerly connected with this Museum, when he distinguished himself in the investi- gation of American decorative art. Dr. Frank E. Lurz, of the Museum’s de- partment of invertebrate zodlogy, has been appointed a member of the board of editors of the New York State List of Insects. Mr. Charles W. Leng, honorary curator of Coleop- tera of the Museum, is also a member. GENERAL THomas H. Hupparp, lawyer, veteran of the Civil War and director in many corporations, died at his home in New York City on May 19 after an illness of but a few days. General Hubbard had been a member of the American Museum of Natural History since 1875 and had been somewhat closely associated with it through his interest in Arctic explorations. He was an active mem- ber of the Peary Arctic Club from the date of its first meeting in 1899 and was its presi- dent after the death of Mr. Morris K. Jesup in 1908. It was his financial aid together with that of Mr. Jesup, Mr. Crocker and other members of the Club, which made possible the discovery of the North Pole by Peary. Several Arctic geographical names, such as Hubbard Glacier and Cape Thomas Hubbard, bear witness to Peary’s acknowledgment of General Hubbard’s aid. General Hubbard was also one of the most generous contrib- utors to the Crocker Land expedition. The American Museum of Natural History Seventy-seventh Street and Central Park West, New York City Open free to the public on every day in the year. The American Museum of Natural History was established in 1869 to promote the Natural Sciences and to diffuse a general knowledge of them among the people. It is dependent upon private subscriptions and the fees from members for procuring needed additions to the collections and for carrying on explorations in America and other parts of the world The membership fees are, Atmmitaly Wlembersict,. Giecs.. «7.0 cresctornsencnate $ 10 Sustaining Members (annually)........ 25 PafedMMlembersicvsckrs we tak ence ehetthe oi she avers 100 GN OWS: ovo aeteh oe roles le okeit Sey oy buat iol 500 Patrons eee ty soe cee tats sisters cols ree once $1,000 Associate Benefactors............... 10,000 Associate Founders... ...<.0.0.60<¢0% 25,000 Benefactors co. Soniacalstaente americans 50,000 Guides for Study of Exhibits are provided on request to members and teachers by the department of public education. Teachers wishing to bring classes should write or telephone the department for an appointment, specifying the collection to be studied. Lectures to classes may also be arranged for. of children. In all cases the best results are obtained with small groups The Museum Library contains more than 60,000 volumes with a good working collection of publications issued by scientific institutions and societies in this country and abroad. The library is open to the public for reference daily — Sundays and holidays excepted — from 9 a. M. to 5 P.M. The Technical Publications of the Museum comprise the Memoirs, Bulletin and Anthropological Papers, the Memoirs and Bulletin edited by J. A. Allen, the Anthropological Papers by Clark Wissler. the institution. These publications cover the field and laboratory researches of The Popular Publications of the Museum comprise the JourRNAL, edited by Mary Cynthia Dickerson, the Handbooks, Leaflets and General Guide. The following list gives some of the popular publications; complete lists, of both technical and popular publications, may be obtained from the Librarian. POPULAR PUBLICATIONS HANDBOOKS Nortu AMERICAN INDIANS OF THE Piatns. By Clark Wissler, Ph.D. Paper, 25 cents; cloth, 50 cents. INDIANS OF THE SOUTHWEST. By Pliny Earle Goddard, Ph.D. Paper, 25 cents; cloth, 50 cents. ANIMALS OF THE Past. By Frederic A. Lucas, Sc.D. Paper, 35 cents. ILLUSTRATED GUIDE LEAFLETS GENERAL GUIDE TO THE COLLECTIONS. issued December, 1914. \ Price, 25 cents. Tue CoLuLectTION oF MINERALS. By Louis P. Grata- cap, A.M. Price, 5 cents. NortuH AMERICAN RUMINANTS. Price, 10 cents. Tue ANCIENT BASKET MAKERS OF Uran. By George H. Pepper. PrimitTiIvE Art. Price, 15 cents. Tue Birpbs oF THE VICINITY OF New York City. By Frank M. Chapman, Sc.D. Price, 15 cents. PerRuvIAN Mummies. By Charles W. Mead. Price, 10 cents. Tue METEORITES IN THE FOYER OF THE AMERICAN Museum or Naturau History. By Edmund Otis Hovey, Ph.D. Price, 10 cents. Tue Hasitrat Groups or Norra AMERICAN Brrps. By Frank M. Chapman, Sc.D. Price, 15 cents. New edition By J. A. Allen, Ph.D. SouTHEASTERN Price, 10 cents. Tue InpraAns or MANnATTAN ISLAND AND VICINITY. By Alanson Skinner. Jn preparation. Tue Strokes PAINTINGS REPRESENTING GREENLAND Eskimo. Price, 5 cents, Brier History oF ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION. 10 cents. TREES AND Forestry. By Mary Cynthia Dickerson, B.S. A new edition in course of preparation. Tue ProrecTION oF River AND HARBOR WATERS FROM Municipat Wastes. By Charles-Edward Amory Winslow, M.S. Price, 10 cents. PLANT Forms In Wax. By E. C. B. Fassett. 10 cents. Tue Evo.uTIon or THE Horse. Ph.D. Price, 20 cents. Price, Price, By W. D. Matthew, REPRINTS Tue Grounp StotH Groupe. By W. D. Matthew, Ph.D. Price, 5 cents. MeEtHops anp ReEsuLts iv HERPETOLOGY. Cynthia Dickerson, B.S. Price, 5 cents. Tue WuHarr Pitre Group. By Roy W. Miner, A.B. Price, 5 cents. Tue SEA Worm Group. Price, 10 cents. Tue ANCESTRY OF THE EDENTATES. thew, Ph.D. Price, 5 cents. By Mary By Roy W. Miner, A.B. By W. D. Mat- Protected entrance to the Altamira cave, near Santillana, northern Spain. Long ago the thinner part of the cavern roof fell in, creating a sink-hole from which one could walk in under the roof that still held. Here, near the entrance, Solutréan and Magdalenian men made their homes for a time and in a side gallery left a most remarkably preserved collection of paintings, the admiration of both the artist and naturalist who sees them. Later the wall entrance was sealed up by débris and was accidentally discovered in modern times by a fox hunter. I WY Z, e, ai rl < foal can a0, e ag p jad eo) Ex o < ONGO THE © DA N a a ri COLLECTING sal gn DIN GIANT The American Museum of Natural History BOARD OF TRUSTEES President HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBORN First Vice-President CLEVELAND H. DopGE Treasurer CHARLES LANIER Second Vice-President J. P. Morcan Secretary ADRIAN ISELIN, JR. JoHN Purroy MitcHet, Mayor or THE City or NEw YorK Wiuu1AM A. PRENDERGAST, COMPTROLLER OF THE City or NEW YORK CaBot WaRD, PRESIDENT OF THE DEPARTMENT OF PARKS ’ GrorcE F. BAKER FREDERICK F. BREWSTER JosEPH H. CHOATE R. Fuitron Curtine Tuomas DreWitr CuryLEeR JAMES DouGLAs Henry C. Frick MapIson GRANT Anson W. Harp ARCHER M. HUNTINGTON ARTHUR CURTISS JAMES WALTER B. JAMES Seta Low OgpEN MILs Percy R. PynEe Joun B. TREVOR Fetrx M. WarBuRG GrorGeE W. WICKERSHAM A. D. JUILLIARD ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS Director Freperic A. Lucas Assistant Treasurer Tue UNITED States Trust CoMPANY Assistant Secretary GerorGcE H. SHERWOOD or New Yorke SCIENTIFIC STAFF Freperic A. Lucas, Se.D., Director Geology and Invertebrate Paleontology Epmunp Oris Hovey, Ph.D., Curator CuHester A. ReEeEps, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Mineralogy L. P. Gratacap, A.M., Curator GerorGE F. Kunz, Ph.D., Honorary Curator Gems Woods and Forestry Mary Cyntrsaia Dickerson, B.S., Curator Invertebrate Zoology Henry E. Crampton, Ph.D., Curator Roy W. Miner, A.B., Asst. Curator Frank E. Lutz, Ph.D., Asst. Curator L. P. Gratacap, A.M., Curator Mollusca A. J. MutcuHuer, Assistant Frank E. Watson, B.S., Assistant W. M. Waeeter, Ph.D., Hon. Curator Social Insects A. L. TREADWELL, Ph.D., Hon. Curator Annulata CHARLES W. Lena, B.S., Hon. Curator Coleoptera Ichthyology and Herpetology BasHrorp Dean, Ph.D., Curator Emeritus Louis Hussaxor, Ph.D., Curator Ichthyology Joun T. Nicuots, A.B., Asst. Cur. Recent Fishes Mary Cynruaia Dickerson, B.S., Assoc. Curator Herpetology Mammalogy and Ornithology J. A. Auten, Ph.D., Curator Frank M. Cuapman, Sc.D., Curator Ornithology Roy C. Anprews, A.M., Asst. Cur. Mammalogy W. DewW. Mi ter, Asst. Curator Ornithology H. E. Antuony, B.S., Assistant Mammalogy HERBERT Lana, Assistant Mammalogy James P. Cuapin, Assistant Ornithology Vertebrate Paleontology Henry FairFiELD Ossorn, LL.D., D.Sc., Curator Emeritus W. D. MattHew, Ph.D., Curator WaLTEeR GRANGER, Assoc. Curator [Mammals] Barnum Brown, A.B., Assoc. Curator [Reptiles] Wiwturam K. Gregory, Ph.D., Assoc. in Palwon- tology Anthropology CuiarRK WIss_LER, Ph.D., Curator Purny E. Gopparp, Ph.D., Curator Ethnology Rosert H. Lowie, Ph.D., Assoc. Curator HersBert J. Spinpen, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Nets C. Netson, M.L., Asst. Curator CuHarRLes W. Meap, Asst. Curator ALANSON SKINNER, Asst. Curator Haruan I. Smitu, Hon. Curator Archzeology Anatomy and Physiology RautpeH W. Tower, Ph.D., Curator Public Health CuHaRLES-Epwarp A. WinsLow, M.S., Curator IsraEL J. Kuiauer, B.S., Assistant Public Education Grorce H. SHERwoop, A.M., Curator G. Cuype FisHer, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Ann E. Tuomas, Ph.B., Assistant Books and Publications RaurexH W. Tower, Ph.D., Curator Ipa RicHarpson Hoop, A.B., Asst. Librarian THe AMERICAN Museum Journal VoLUME XV OCTOBER, 1915 NUMBER 6 CONTENTS Cover, Kikuyu Boy, British East Africa Photograph by Carl E. Akeley Selicsvorerecent .Miuseunal Grolpss 2a: tes. oo oh: ack aioe ena ee Se eee 266 Laysan Istanp Brrp Group.— University of Lowa Fur SEAts on Kirovi Rooxery.— American Museum of Natural History, New York VirGinta Deer IN THE ApIRONDACKS.— Brooklyn Institute Museum NEAR THE END OF 4 TrGeR Hunrt.— Bristol Museum and Art Gallery, England Tyrannosaurus, the Largest Flesh-eating Animal that Ever Lived BarnuM Brown 271 With illustrations of the model for a proposed group in the American Museum and of the first mounted skeleton for this group Story of the discovery and excavation of the petrified bones of these gigantic dinosaurs in the Bad Lands of Montana US he Ole te COMO as). Sd vow lee tiie | ieee Ne oem JAMES P. CHAPIN 281 Illustrations from photographs by Herbert Lang Reproductions in Duotone of African Photographs. ................ opposite 292 From the work of Herbert Lang and Carl E. Akeley thes ral or Wari Viacedonia. +... .ee.t.0,. aos Davip STARR JORDAN 293 The Penguins of South Georgia................ RosBert CusHMAN Murpuy 301 The story of the ‘‘kings,”’ following the story of the ‘‘Johnnies’’ in the last issue of the JOURNAL Ancient Gold Art in the New World.............. HERBERT J. SPINDEN 307 Collection of 15,000 specimens in gold, stone and pottery excavated from the ruins of a pre- historic city in Costa Rica — Discovery made during the clearing of a great banana planta- tion at Mercedes by Mr. Minor C. Keith Brederie- Ward Putnam, 1839-1915... 1.23. o.oo wa CLARK WISSLER 315 Brief review of the work of one of the most eminent of American anthropologists Avestan ORES caete ceststl bok eee ac abl Anise pekabo el eee LL. ee Sli Including illustration of white rhino presented to the American Museum by Mr. John H. Prentice Mary Cyntuta Dickerson, Editor Published monthly from October to May by the American Museum of Natural History, at the ‘Cosmos Press, Cambridge, Mass. Terms: one dollar and a half per year, twenty cents per copy. Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-Office at Boston, Mass., Act of Congress, July 16, 1894. Subscriptions should be addressed to the AMericAN Museum Journal, 77th St. and ‘Central Park West, New York City. The Journal is sent free to all members of the Museum. 99¢ Sp4lq JO SuOT]]IUT JO oto O44 Sy ‘soyita ovends OM) UY} SSO] JO vore UL YIM ‘OYIOrg oy) UI purysy ueskey ‘oovds 100py Jo 4o0j orenbs OF SUIOS SIOAOD PUNOASOIOJ V PUL FYSIOY Ul JOOJ ZT PUL Suo] yOoJ SET St SRAUO OL ‘UNnOSNYY VMOT OY9 JO [[VYy ouO SUIT JO YQUOJ-9UO) vUTRIO[OAD JO UOTVIOg fo Ut I 1 W90J |! LL W 1 II my GO! I : [sdnoup wnasnyy quaoay fo 8arlag] VMOI JO ALISHSAINA 3LVLS ZHL—'dNOYDS GNVISI NVSAV7 L9G 000 4SeeT 4% TO9q DAT Anu O10 LZST Ul ang ‘eI STVOS OOTT O4OM O1OY} ZEST UL “FUIOG ULTURYNT preVMOJ qsvoyyIOU SuPZOOT ,,“loyeoyHYdure ,, oy} Se UMOUH ‘purjsy [Ned “4S ‘AToHOOY [AOI JO qaed vB SApNpOUL MOTA OY, “ONTOSeTE YoMopoay Aq OF savok owos poyunouwrt spros ‘Ado Joqry Aq svauro Jo Sumured pue puno1s010f; Jo Sutpapoywe sdnou ULNASN PAL uUada O Saldagy Ie v Wee MYHOA MAN ‘AYOLSIH IWHNLVN JO WNASNW NVOIMSAWV —AYaNOOY IAOLIM LV S1VAS YN4s 892 SARI MOT[OA PUB Pot JO SSOOXO OY} SOPEUTTATTO YOIYA U9OIOS JOTOO % puR sdurvy poT[y-uososj1U JO osn 99 YSnoayy poureyqo 4ys1 -Avp [Bangeu sttoas yeyM AG pops] Sr dnoas oy, “Apnyos, “a ‘H Aq poqured odvospury ‘[Poaypoy “Ww Aq poyuUNow pue poJodT]Oo OSvyod JoUTUINS UF syeUMTUy [sdnowy wnasnyy yuavay fo saruag] WNASNW ALNLILSNI NATMOOYNS —SMOVGNOYIGV SHL NI YSS0 VINIDSYIA 696 punoasyorq oy} ur UMOYS sv JuRydoo ue UO pojUNOW ‘ssouYsrFT [VAOT SIT AvoU UOATAP Udsq Sey 10519 oy} PUR UT posoyo svY SdojyRoq JO opoayO oY} UO FuNY B JO YSsIuy oy} MOYS 09 pozTTIN A]I[NJTIPIS uoog sey ‘vrpuy ‘TedoN UL‘ A os100yH Bury ‘Aqsofeyy st Aq JOYS ‘10519 SIU L [sdnouy wnasnpy yuavay fo sar1ay'| GNVIDNA ‘AYSTIVSD LYV GNV WNASNW TOLSIYS ~LNNH YADIL V JO GNA SHL ONIYVAN a — ae = Saget et OE aie THE PROPOSED TYRANNOSAURUS GROUP FOR THE AMERICAN MUSEUM, AS SHOWN IN A REDUCED MODEL BY MR. ERWIN CHRISTMAN 270 THe AMERICAN Museum JOuRNAL VOLUME XV OCTOBER, 1915 NUMBER 6 TYRANNOSAURUS, THE LARGEST FLESH-EATING ANIMAL THAT EVER LIVED By Barnum Brown AWN glows along the shore of a |) lagoon near the sea three mil- lions of years ago in Montana. The landscape is of low relief; sycamores and ginkgo trees mingle with figs, palms and bananas. There are few twittering birds in the tree-tops and no herds of grazing animals to greet the early sun. A huge herbivorous dinosaur Tracho- don, coming on shore for some favorite food has been seized and partly eaten by a giant Tyrannosaurus. Whilst this monster is ravenously consuming the carcass another Tyrannosaurus draws near determined to dispute the prey. The stooping animal hesitates, partly rises and prepares to spring on its oppo- nent. With colossal bodies poised on massive hind legs and steadied by long tails, ponderous heads armed with sharp dagger-like teeth three to five inches long, front limbs exceedingly smali but set for a powerful clutch, they are the very embodiment of dynamic animal force. This is the picture conjured by a group of three fossil skeletons in the American Museum which completed will occupy a space fifty-four feet long and twelve feet wide. The erect Tyrannosaurus skeleton now finished measures forty- seven feet in length from tip to tip and eighteen and one-half feet in height. Larger herbivorous dinosaurs have been found in the United States and in Africa in rocks of an earlier age but their carnivorous contemporaries were at least a third smaller than Tyrannosaurus which we can safely state is the largest terrestrial flesh-eater of all ages. A complete skeleton has never been found; even scattered remains are rare; but the Museum’s skeletons fortunately supplement each other in such a way that bones missing in the one have been cast from the other. Only the tip of the tail and the lower part of the front limbs have been modeled from an allied form. The discovery of these rare fossils is of peculiar interest. While hunting deer along the Missouri River some years ago, Dr. W. T. Hornaday, director of the New York Zodlogical Park, dis- covered several large fossil bones. One of these shown to me, I identified as part of a horn of a dinosaur Triceratops; and photographs which Dr. Hornaday had taken of the scene of discovery showed a striking similarity to localities in Wyo- ming where many Cretaceous fossils have been found. The following year, 1902, an expedi- tion was sent to the new locality. Our outfitting point and base of supplies was Miles City, Montana, a point on the railroad one hundred and thirty miles from the “bad lands.” After five long days across measureless undulating prairie, past numerous flocks of sheep 271 THE GIANT CARNIVOROUS DINOSAUR TYRANNOSAURUS "The skeleton is forty-seven feet in length, and stands nineteen feet in height from the floor. The gigantic head, sharp teeth and claws all show the carnivorous adaptations and habits of the animal It can safely be said that Tyrannosaurus, which lived three millions of years ago, is the largest terrestrial flesh-eater of all ages. The skeleton is intended to form part of a group representing two ‘Tyrannosaurs quarreling over the carcass of a Trachodon or duckbilled dinosaur. When the new west wing is built the Tyrannosaur group will be the central exhibit of the Cretaceous dinosaur hall. Owing to lack of space, only one skeleton can be mounted at present and this has to be placed temporarily in the Quaternary hall on the fourth floor 272 THE LARGEST FLESH-EATING DINOSAUR and fewer herds of cattle, we arrived at the little log post-office Jordan. A few miles beyond this point at the head of the small streams tributary to the Missouri River, the prairie abruptly changes to a panorama of wonderful bad lands; a wilderness of variegated sculptured cliffs and domes intersected by deep cafions with scattered pine trees and pockets of junipers; while on the hillsides in the broader valleys, lines of cottonwoods mark the stream courses. The dullness of the denuded earth is relieved by bright-colored clay in bands traceable on the same level for miles. Hard globular sandstones of all sizes are scattered among the layers of sand, and groups of them cluster the slopes of the hills. We established camp on Hell Creek near the old Max Sieber ranch, where the first bones had been discovered. Nearby, the stream has cut into a hill exposing rounded sandstones, many of 273 which have rolled down to the water. Some of the stones contained bones and we traced them up the hillside by broken pieces until the original position of the layer was located. Here in the buff- colored sand half way up the hill we found the first skeleton of Tyranno- saurus lying in the position in which it had been interred and petrified millions of years ago. The skeleton was disarticulated and scattered on the same level and almost every bone was separately enclosed in a bluish sandstone as hard as granite. The loose surface sand was easily re- moved but below the frost line the hard cemented mass was almost unyielding to a pick. The area over which the bones were scattered and the almost vertical slope of the hill necessitated removal of a vast amount of material. With additional help, plows, scrapers and dynamite we attacked the task, carving off slices of the hillside down to SKELETON RECENTLY MOUNTED IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM The successive expeditions under Mr. Barnum Brown in the Cretaceous of Montana and Alberta have secured for the Museum a large series of dinosaur skeletons representing all the principal types of this period. The Tyrannosaurus mount is regarded as the finest piece of work in this line which has yet been accomplished. The articulation and pose are the result of prolonged and thorough studies and criticism, and the mechanical problems have been solved and managed with great skill and a clear appreciation of the artistic and scientific concept which was to be executed. The mounting was done by Mr. Charles Lang under the direction of Professor Henry Fairfield Osborn and the scientific staff of the department of vertebrate paleontology 274 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL the bone layer, where the bones were taken up one by one. Part of a second summer was required to complete taking out this skeleton and the work when finished left an excavation in the hill thirty feet long, twenty feet wide and twenty-five feet deep. Some of the sandstone blocks containing the bones shipped back to the Museum were of huge size; one containing the pelvis weighed 4150 pounds and required four horses to transport it to the railroad. A second skeleton, the one just mounted, was found six years later in the same Montana bad lands on Big Dry Creek. This is considerably more complete than the first one. Tyrannosaurus is a giant reptile dis- tantly related to lizards, crocodiles and birds. Its hind legs are formed like those of birds and the bones are pneu- matic. It was a powerful creature, doubtless swift of movement when occasion demanded speed, and capable of destroying any of the contemporary creatures, a king of the period and monarch of its race. The rear view of the skeleton shows the narrow birdlike construction of the pelvis, and compact rib-basket, the massive proportions of the great hind limbs, which bend forward at the knee as in birds, instead of outward as in crocodiles and lizards. The tail is enlarged out of its due proportion by the perspective, but its sweeping curves are clearly brought out, as well as the slighter curves of backbone and neck, all care- fully studied for the pose adopted. The sudden pause in its forward rush on coming close to its crouching enemy is well suggested, but the attitude could be more clearly seen if the out- lines of the flesh of the body and limbs were restored. GLZ SONVT GVA SNOFJOVLAYO JHL NI LNO ONIMSHLVaM SNOILAYONOOD ANOLSGNVS rng re ire oa — Coed aed wl ee E* i TYRANNOSAURUS QUARRY. HELL CREEK, MONTANA Excavating with team and scraper, to remove a Tyrannosaurus skeleton lying in the position in which it had been interred and petrified millions of years ago 276 FIGT JO UoMpedx| wnesny HAAIN HaaIG Gay ‘W3aHO GNVS JO HLNOW LV dANVO WOYS GVOUTIVY OL NOILOATIOO ONIINVH poephtisp ot jo ssouyjnp ot, So[ttr 10 [OAS] oles OY} UO 9[GRadvI4 Spud UI ARID polO[oOd-JY Sq AQ PASTE ST F419 ‘SoSInod WRAI{S OY} YALU SPOOMUO}I0S JO Soul] ‘SAOT[VA JOpvOIg oY} UI SopIs|Ty oy} UO o{ITTM ‘saodrunf Jo syoyood pur sooay ourd poi0}7R0S YIM Suouvd doop Aq pojJdOSI0JUI SoMMOp PUB SYI[D poIngdqnos poyesolzeVA JO ssouJopyIM we ‘onbsoangord ATOA pure YoeVqossoy UO e[qIssedul ysowyy IYNOSSIN, SHL GYVMOL ONINMOOT SGNV1 GVd SNOAOVLAYO FI6T Jo uonrpodxg| wmosny uvdtoury GHO4 V DNISSOYO GYSH ‘VOVNVO ‘VLYAETV ‘HYSAIN Y3SS0 GAY (ITURI DISTRICT) uu > Q uJ = oc < uJ z = ip) Lu o Oo ve = ao = < = n aE 10) 2 oO oc ae = > < S Lu ip) = 78 WJ xs - ee =) O = 7s O Wu Zz uJ O W = Y) lJ x O LL THE TRAIL OF WAR IN MACEDONIA By David Starr Jordan Notr.— The following interesting and significant statement is quoted from Dr. Jordan’s letter to the Editor, who had suggested at some time previous that an article on the effect of the war on science would be interesting to readers of the JourNAL: “....I am sorry my sketch does not more nearly meet your needs. However there are certainly elements of science in a study of the unscientific ways of the men of the Balkans....The effect of the war on scientific endeavor in Europe can be stated in few words. It has been to blast it — excepting only in the lines in which science has been prostituted to murder, and in the lines in which men try to save life, even if only to destroy it when saved. Half the young scientific men are in the ranks and many have been killed or wounded. A few scientific papers are printed, mostly written before the war, but science cannot thrive in an atmosphere of lawless hate. center of gravity in scientific work will have shifted to America. T was my fortune, not long ago, with three good friends ! and two soldiers, to follow in a King’s automobile along the trail of war. This was in Macedonia. The line of an army’s march is not pleasant to look upon even though the people along it had not much tolose. The pinch of suffering is very real even if, as in the Balkans, folks | have grown used to. |. it. There are two plain marks’ by which you recognize the path of war in a land of farmers. The one is the charred vil- lage, with its white- washed stone walls blackened by fire. The other is the presence here and there in the ploughed field of three poles fas- tened together at the top, and from the crotch a baby suspended just high enough to baffle inquisitive dogs or goats. where in the field, anywhere in the Balkan may Some- valleys in May, you will see one woman 1Dr. John Mez, R. H. Markham and Emil F. Hollmann. Photo by Antonio Reinwein Characteristic scene on the hills above Rjeka near Cettinje, Montenegro The end of the war will come — before long, I hope and believe — but the Europe will be supine.” driving or leading a bullock or a buffalo, while another behind her holds the plough. The men are in the army — or else they were there. The memory I shall longest hold of Montenegro is a picture taken by my guide, Antonio Reinwein, of this land of stony graves, of the resolute people of the limestone crags who have never done homage to the Turks nor to other outside any power. It will be remem- bered that all these Balkan folk were for years under the dominion of the Turk, that none of them have been free for half a century. The Turk was most ac- and ceptable when he was asleep. When he was awake, he had his own ideas of “Union and Progress.’”’ Union meant uniformity. A nation should have one ruler, one flag, one religion, one language. Progress was his way of bringing about this condition. This was by massacre. And as the actual Turks were few in 293 294 number, ruling over an empire of Slavs, Greeks, Italians, Jews, Armenians, AI- banians, Kurds, Egyptians, Moors and Arabs, it demanded eternal vigilance to keep them all in a state of union and progress. These people have had constantly be- fore them the choice of revolt, conversion, assimilation, banishment and massacre. And at one time or another, some of each race have chosen each one of these, often two or three of them at once. Mean- while, following the wicked lead of Bis- marck and Disraeli, Europe has kept the Turk alive, because from financiers in each nation, the Ottoman Sultan has borrowed considerable sums of money. If the “Sick Man of Europe” should die, his debts might be left unpaid; worse than that, they might be unse- cured. And so the Balkans were kept in confusion and the rest of the Otto- man Empire as well, in the hands of wild soldiers. Besides there were still wilder hordes of local andartes, comitijt, ruffians, camp-followers, or bashi- bazouks, always ready for murder and plunder. Whenever a period of peace and tolerance set in, as was sometimes the case, it was due to sheer inanition on the part of the Turk and as such it was followed by a fierce relapse. one the Balkan different fashion escaped from Turkish rule. First Greece and Serbia, Rumania and Bulgaria; then Rumelia, to become part of Bulgaria; Bosnia and Herzegovina to be absorbed by Austria, and in the war of 1912, Macedonia with Thessaly and Thrace, to be unequally divided their and finally Albania to be segregated as an impos- sible kingdom under an impossible king. Macedonia lies along the southern slopes of the Balkan Peninsula. It is a fertile region crossed by chains of One by states, in among neighbors, rounded mountains, with green valleys THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL and swift streams, in physical conditions not unlike the south of France. It has 45,000 square miles of territory, is about as large as the state of Maine, with a population nearly two-thirds that of the city of New York, and before the war of liberation it had about 2,250,000 people. The majority of these were Bulgarian in blood and they were allowed to have their own churches and schools. Some _ called Pomaks had adopted the Moslem re- ligion, others were Greeks in language as well as in religion. These were in the west (Castoria) adjoining the land called Thessaly. But Greek or Bulgarian, they were nearly all of the same blood originally, for the modern Greek is not the son of the incomparable Hellenes, but is described as a “Byzantinized Slav.” The suicidal wars of Athens and Sparta, with the greater and lesser struggles which history describes, ex- terminated the choice blood of Hellas and when the Greeks were gone, with them went “the glory that was Greece.” Turks, Jews, Armenians, Rumanians (Valaques) and gypsies made up the population of Macedonia. The Jews in Saloniki were refugees from Spain, still speaking a dialect of Castilian. In the face of “democratic famine working day and night,” fully half of these have now found their way to New York. As to the campaigns which have desolated Macedonia in the last few years we need say only a word. The history of the two Balkan wars is given with accuracy and justice in the monu- mental report of the Balkan Commis- sion of the Carnegie Endowment, a document of especial value in any study of the conditions preceding the “third Balkan war” which to-day has set the world in flames. The first Balkan war was altruistic as far as any war can be. Its purpose was THE TRAIL OF WAR IN MACEDONIA 295 the relief of a distressed people, suffering for centuries from the laxities of Turkish rule, always incompetent and every- where unscrupulous, and on the other hand continuously overrun by the out- law patriots which kept the land in incessant turmoil. The Balkan alliance was a Russian inspiration. It was planned by Hart- wig, Russian minister at Belgrade, “the A burned Macedonian village Greek refugees at Saloniki (from Thrace) 296 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL Evil Genius of the Balkans.”” It ended on the kingdom of Albania, leaving the in the Treaty of London, where the _ states to fight it out so far as Macedonia blind intermeddling of the Powers, was concerned. This brought on the baffled by Austrian intrigue, agreed only second Balkan war, in which Bulgarian Greek refugee camp at station of Demir-Hissar in Macedonia Levenovo, in Macedonia, a burned village partly restored THE TRAIL OF WAR IN MACEDONIA 297 diplomacy made all the mistakes it had a chance to make. For these she was duly punished by the brigand Treaty of Bucharest, in which Rumania _ forced into her own hands the fertile meadows of the Dobrudja, while the best of Mace- donia was divided between Serbia and Greece. If the Powers had not been a group of wrangling agents sparring for ad- vantage, they would have considered the interests of Macedonia first. They would have made it an autonomous province held in trust for the welfare of its people and above all, with entire tolerance of religion, language and race. But no such tolerance yet exists in Europe outside of its westernmost na- tions. The Treaty of Bucharest left Mace- donia crossed by artificial boundaries. The effect of intolerance, worst in Greece, bad enough everywhere, was to drive out of each nation all who belonged to the wrong language or religion. I do not say race, for they are all of the same general stock, even the bulk of the “Turks” and Greeks. This has filled the region with refugees, men and women whose fault is that they lived on the wrong side of boundaries made for them in the Treaty of Bucharest. Passing down the long highway which leads over two hundred miles from Sofia to Samokov and Dubnitza in old Bul- garia, then across the border of Mace- donia, down the Struma River past Dzumaia to Petritch, we found every- where the Bulgarian refugees from the Saloniki district in Greek Macedonia. These have been roughly estimated at 50,000 in number. Some of these have been given farms or houses abandoned in Macedonia by Turks who followed the Turkish“army away. Others re- ceived farms left by Greeks when the Greek army went back after the treaty el of Bucharest. The government grants each person some fourpence a day. Some find work, but after the war there are few employers. The cost of living has doubled, the means of living has fallen. At Petritch, near the present boundary of Greece, there were hundreds of these waiting about on the stone side- walks day by day. They were waiting for the Powers to revise the Treaty of Bucharest and give them back their homes in the region above Saloniki. Some local journal had said that this revision was coming soon. It was my duty to assure them that it would never come. The phrase in Sofia, “Europe * is the truth so far as Balkan affairs are concerned. exists no more,’ The reason for that is clearer now. Europe was paralyzed by the great terror which has since come on it in an unthinkable catastrophe. There were some in the “Concert of the Powers,” who were striving to bring on this catastrophe. The “war of steel and gold” was about to give place to real war, which would end, they hoped, in speedy victory and world power. It has not ended in that way. It has not yet ended at all. But those who most looked forward to war were the ones who had least conception of its certain consequences. The condition of the Bulgarian refu- gees has been especially hard because their flight took place mostly in the fall and winter and before the cholera was stamped out. Very many died on the road, and many more died after reaching the inhospitable Bulgarian towns, where they received scanty welcome because the people were overborne by their own troubles. The Rumanian invasion caused also great hardship in Bulgaria. The annex- ation of Silistria and the Dobrudja, with its population of about 180,000, was by * Ma a aces, Greek army stationed on Bizbutza River boundary between Bulgaria and Greek Macedonia. Third from the left, General Evangelos Tsanas; fifth, Themistocles Papajeaines; seventh, beside Dr. Jordan, John Pappamelins THE TRAIL OF WAR IN MACEDONIA followed by the exodus of all those unwilling to be summarily Rumanised in language and in religion. These refugees swarm in Varna and Plevna, while it is said that at Burgas, near the Turkish frontier, there are now 48,000 more forced out of Turkish Thrace since the recapture of Adrianople by the Turks with the wiping out of the Enos- Midia boundary line so carefully drawn by the Concert of Powers. In the whole length of the Struma Valley in western Macedonia, towns have been burned in whole or part by the Greek army which pursued the Bulgarians as far as the old border of Bulgaria. In Greek Macedonia, at the hands of some one or all of the three successive armies — Turkish, Bulgarian and Greek — most of the towns between Saloniki and Drama have suffered the same fate. Each of these towns has now its share of Greek refugees from Turkish Thrace. These have been esti- mated by Greek authorities as numbering 300,000. They have come by railway from Adrianople in box cars belonging to the Greek Government. These cars are left at the various stations, a dozen or more at each. In these the people keep their bedding and their scanty effects. The government of Greece allows them two or three sous a day, with rice which they cook on fires of thistles and other weeds. I was told by one of these at Demir-Hissar that their homes about Adrianople and Kirk Kilisseh, were wanted for Albanian refu- gees from the Novibazar (now annexed to Serbia), and that they were given by the Albanians from two hours to four days to get out of Thrace. He summed up the conditions in the Italian word duro (hard). I was told also that a Turkish town near Nigrita (or possibly Nigrita itself) had been turned over bodily to Greek refugees, and that the 299 rest of these would in time be placed on farms abandoned by Turks and Bul- garians. Other Greeks, not refugees, were coming from Russian ports, at- tracted by the prospect of free land in Macedonia. In a Turkish journal, vigorous com- plaint was made against the Albanian refugees in Thrace as more “proficient with the Mauser than with the plow, and skillful only as cattle thieves.” A plea was made for bringing back the Bulgarian farmers as far more desirable neighbors. “The Bulgarians are now our friends.” In the larger towns, as Saloniki and Kilkush, the refugees are ranged in tent cities, ten thousand or more in one en- campment. There were perhaps sixty thousand Greek refugees a little more than a year ago along the road from Drama to Saloniki. A little more than a year ago, when I was at Saloniki, the Turks were leaving in great numbers: 212,000 took steerage passage for Stamboul in April. Saloniki, (Thessalonike) beautifully situated, in full face of Mount Olympus and with a noble harbor should be one of the great cities of the world. In the aftermath of the second Balkan war it lost half its population. It is no better off to-day than in the times when St. Paul called out for help in Macedonia. A year ago, there were still many Turks in Saloniki, teamsters, laborers, idlers about the wharves, gentlemen smoking in the cafés. Even in Bulgarian towns, as Dzumaia, one may see the red fez, but its wearers seem to have nothing to do save to lie about in unoccupied lots or to sit upon the steps of burned buildings. In Serbian Macedonia, the Bulgarian is turned by force into a Serbian. If he resists, he risks his life. His name is changed, as from Popoff to Popovitch, from Stephanoff to Stephanovitch. His 300 religion, Greek in either case, transfers its allegiance from the heretic exarch in Sofia, to the orthodox patriarch in Athens. The theory is that Bulgarians in Macedonia are really Serbians per- verted by their environment. These harsh and often terribly brutal operations in Serbia and Greece result from the unchecked operations of the military element. The soldier, as such, considers neither economic conditions nor the soul of man. It was claimed that the two wise ministers Pashitch in Belgrade and Venizelos in Athens were both opposed to the policy of repression. Both would, if they could, have pro- claimed religious linguistic tolerance in those parts of Macedonia turned over to them by the Treaty of Bucharest. But the fact of victory, and especially victory over their sister state, Bulgaria, intoxi- cates the military, and fills the mob with the “east wind.” In such times the civil authority cannot hold its own against the military. Bulgaria, being on the defeated side, recognizes better the value of tolerance. A Greek church and school stand un- disturbed in Sofia. In the Bulgarian national assembly there are about a dozen Turkish deputies, representing Thrace. These Turks, supporters all of the King, hold the balance of power against the combined Democrats and Socialists, the group opposed to all war. The spirit of hate is still very strong among the people of Bulgaria. They hate Rumania, as the robber-state who has done them the most harm. They hate Greece and Serbia, but they cannot fight them, and the broad-minded among them recognize that when Bulgaria is strong enough to fight, she will be able to carry her points in some better way than by war. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL In the crisis of the early part of 1915, the upper classes of Bulgaria were strongly on the side of Germany. They hate Russia, believing (perhaps on insufficient evidence, for the Russian government had given them fair warn- ing) that Russia had betrayed and abandoned them in the Treaty of London. The common people do not want any more war, and they have a very high respect for England. Bulgaria has 250,000 soldiers, but very little in the way of arms. She is not sure what her army would do if it were called together. She does not care much for the rest of the world, but her heart is fixed on Macedonia and Dobrudja, for these were mainly Bulgarian, before the Bulgarian people were driven away. The public in Bulgaria expects the nation to go into the war somewhere. If it does so, it will fight for the group that promises the return of the lost provinces. De- mands for war and for neutrality fluctuate with each movement of the Russian troops in the Carpathians. Meanwhile, the old days have come back to Macedonia. Outlaw bands of dis- couraged farmers harass the Serbians and the Greeks as formerly they har- assed the Turks, from Monastir to Kavala. And the farmer still goes out furtively from his half-burned village to gather in his crops as he can or he dares. There can never be settled quiet in the near East, until the “Balkans be- long to the Balkans,” until civil author- ity everywhere dominates the military and until customs unions and other unions cause these people to realize that one fate befalls them all and that the welfare of each state is bound up in that of its neighbor. A pair of courting birds standing on a shoal overlooking the sea THE PENGUINS OF SOUTH GEORGIA “ JOHNNIES” AND ‘‘KINGS” ON A DESOLATE SUBANTARCTIC ISLAND ! By Robert Cushman Murphy UITE unlike the Johnny Penguin is its big neighbor, the king penguin. This species was once abundant at South Georgia, but it is now obviously in dan- ger of extinction, partly because of the foraging raids of sealers and whalers, partly from the ravages of traders in penguin oil. We discovered three king penguin colonies, all in the neighborhood of Johnny penguin rookeries, but all on low ground. The largest of these was situated south of the Bay of Isles among a barren waste of morainic stones. A great bank of unmelting névé bounded the settlement on the west, while a violent glacial torrent separated it from the sloping edge of a glacier on the east. In such a gulch, between walls of snow and ice, swept by southerly gales that 1 Continued from the last issue of the Journat. Illustrations from photographs by the Author. descended through a rift in the moun- tains, a band of about three hundred and fifty king penguins made their home. When we found the colony, on Decem- ber 16, many of the kings were incubat- ing eggs, while at the same time half a dozen young of the previous year, fully grown but with ragged patches of long down still attached to their contour feathers, were associating with free adult birds. The sitters stretched up to as great a height as possible at the approach of their first human visitors (at least during that season), and clung tenaciously to their eggs. After the members of our crew had gathered many eggs and had placed them in one spot on the ground, the robbed penguins approached the pile and slyly appro- priated eggs to replace the lost ones. But not only did they attempt to take one egg—the proper complement — several tried to tuck two in the space 301 02 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL A king penguin tucking its egg into the so-called ‘“prood-pouch,’’ which is merely the space be- {tween belly, feet and tail A Johnny standing over its eggs and momen- tarily spreading its brood-pouch, or_ incubating surface between belly, tail and feet. I was never able to discover in either sex of the king penguin anything resembling a “cavity,” such as Weddell mentions. Incubating king penguins can shift about slowly, in spite of the eggs on their insteps. They drag themselves along rather painfully, maintaining their hunched positions, and hitching their feet with short steps so that the egg may not roll out. They are fond of crowding together closely — yet seemingly for no better purpose than to facilitate quarrel- ing! Day after day at the colony I was a neutral witness of their noisy squabbles. The sitters glare at each other, with sinuous necks twisted and heads cocked sidewise, and deal resounding whacks with their flippers, or lunges with their sharp bills, to all their neighbors. Often whole groups will be engaged in an indiscriminate skirmish with these ra- piers and broadswords. The birds are careful to maintain their equilibrium while banging each other, but it is a wonder nevertheless, that no harm comes to the eggs. On February 5 I photographed a typical battle. One sitter was employing its bill to mutilate the back of another’s neck. The latter bird, grunting vehemently, was deliver- ing backhand blows with one wing but without turning to face its opponent. Only the intrusion of weapons of other pugnacious penguins succeeded in divert- ing the attentions of these two from each other. The affair ended in a general mélée in which nine birds took part, each for itself and against every other. Such is the reach and flexibility of the king’s extensible neck that each sitter can very easily become the center of a large circle of trouble. It seems probable that the breeding season of this species extends through the major part of the southern summer, with great individual variation in the ~~ nee ‘ SP ras & IN THE WATERS OF SOUTH GEORGIA A Johnny penguin swim- ming under water and roll- ing his back above the surface A king penguin entering the sea, and a king [the third photograph| coming ashore The king penguins on the left are in sleek new plumage. time of laying. I saw a few birds still engaged in pairing about the end of January. Courting couples stroll apart from the main flocks, and seem fond of standing side by side on high places such as knolls overlooking the sea. Caresses are then exchanged, the usual form being for the birds to cross their necks, swaying from side to side. King penguins commonly deport The central figure is completing its molt themselves in an amusingly lofty manner toward human beings, paying slight attention to a man’s quiet intrusion into their midst. If they are annoyed they march away, slowly and with an air of indifference, until they have been ac- tually frightened by abuse when they fall upon their breasts and scurry on all fours. I have seen a fox terrier put a whole band of kings to ignominious At the right — a yearling king penguin with his coat of down at its maximum length Main group — a yearling king molting into his first adult clothes, and a group of old birds in the throes of the annual molt 304 THE PENGUINS OF SOUTH GEORGIA flight. Sitting birds alone are stolid and fearless, refusing to be stampeded even after their eggs have been taken. The voice of an adult king penguin is a martial sound, a long-drawn bugle call, highly musical and almost worthy of being dubbed a tune. When delivering the call the bird stretches grandly to its full height, points its bill skyward, and the long volley rings forth from an expanded chest. At the close of the effort the head is tilted forward with a jerk and the bugler stands at attention — a rigid, artificial pose always held for several moments. The yearling pen- guin’s call is a clear whistle of three notes, as soft and sweet as the whistle of an oscine bird. The actions of “bachelor troops,” that is birds of both sexes which are neither molting nor incubating, furnish continual entertainment to an observer. Such bands frequently come out of the sea during the warmer parts of the day to sun themselves on the beaches. The birds sleep either prone or upright; if in the latter position, often with the bill turned behind the wing where ages ago the ancestors of penguins may have had 305 warm coverts. scrupulously They preen themselves and even perform the difficult stunt of balancing on one foot while they scratch their heads with the other. Their regimental characteristics, such as standing at attention, marking time, and marching in single file or in doubles, are very striking. As regards enemies, I judge that this species is little troubled by the skua gull, the scourge of the Johnny penguin rookeries. Its enemy in the ocean is the sea-leopard. From the stomach of one of these seals killed at the Bay of Isles, I took the remains of four king penguins, besides fish and other material. The magnitude of this breakfast may be more fully appreciated if I record that the weight of a mature king penguin in good condition averages forty-four pounds. Since South Georgia has been made a political dependency of the Falklands, the resident birds have come under the protection of law, but perhaps too late to save the king penguins because of the impracticability of enforcing legal re- straint along hundreds of miles of iso- lated uninhabited coast. Mimicking small brothers! wiggled their tails and hurried back into the pond I broke the spell by stooping to pat one on the head, when they all 90€ WINsN] URdeury 94} JO [[eY UOIXeTT OY} UI UOTJIGIYXS WO MOT ST DOTDET[OD OY, + ‘SaTLPOd010 Jo spvoy 94} YQIM pojrd -Oqe]a TIOJ psIq PUL [eUIUR ‘URTINY UI SpoS yUesoIded ‘eoTY VISOHM WOIJ JIB P[OS yusToUR JO MOMDOT[OO 9[qeyIVWIeI S,WIIOM “O AOUIPY “AP Ul Suowtoods Aue vol VLSOO WOY4 G10D ANOILNV ~~ ; yy? rregebe ANCIENT GOLD ART IN THE NEW WORLD By Herbert J. Spinden HE Isthmus of Panama includes part of Colombia and the entire republics of Panama and Costa Rica. It has long been famous for the beautiful specimens of gold work, as well as of pottery and stone sculptures found in the stone-box graves of its early inhabitants. Most of the gold objects were seemingly worn as orna- ments before being buried with their In these gold objects the characteristic animal life of the region is represented and there are also many figures with a mythological or religious significance. Gold is taken from only a_ small percentage of the graves — probably from those of chiefs. Pottery and stone carvings are found in the ordinary run of burials but rarely in the ones that contain gold. A systematic rifling of the ancient cemeteries by treasure- hunters has been going on since the coming of the Spaniards but most of their finds have gone into the melting pot. The burial places are sometimes made evident by low platforms built owners. Notre sy tHE AuvutTHor.— The ancient gold here described is part of a collection of more than 15,000 archeological articles in gold, stone and pottery collected by Mr. Minor C. Keith in Costa Rica. From this great collection about 7000 specimens chosen for exhibition and study, were deposited by Mr. Keith in the American Museum for an extended period. The exhibition now occu- pies about one-third of the Mexican hall and is unrivaled in beauty and richness as in more pro- saic scientific virtues. The gold specimens are installed in specially devised cases. Mr. Keith went to Costa Rica when a young man and engaged himself in the railroad building and commercial developments which have brought Costa Rica to the front rank among Central American republics. Foreseeing the great possi- bilities of tropical fruit in northern markets, he was instrumental in organizing the United Fruit Company which now operates the largest fleet of steamships under the American flag. Under Mr. Keith’s direction the growing, transporting and marketing of bananas has been brought to such over a number of graves. Sometimes the searchers use an iron rod giving forth a hollow sound when the stone cists are struck. The graves are small chambers lined with river boulders or with slabs of stone. Bones are rarely found in them but this may be no indi- cation of great age, for the climate is such as to hasten decay. There is little doubt that the makers of the gold figures were simply the ancestors of the Indian tribes that now inhabit the region. Costa Rica takes its name “rich coast” from the large quantity of gold obtained from the natives. Mr. Keith’s collection, now on deposit in the Mexican hall for a term of years, is the finest ever made in Central America. At Mercedes in northern Costa Rica many hundreds of graves were opened and a vast amount of pot- tery and stone sculptures was taken out, in addition to a considerable quantity of gold and jade. At this place there is now a great banana plantation but formerly the site was covered with dense forest. Mr. Keith relates that one night high efficiency, that this wholesome fruit of the torrid zone can now be purchased cheaply the year round in every city, town and village in the United States. The banana is grown in the humid lowlands. The great plantations of the United Fruit Company have been cleared from dark and dripping jungle; problems of sanitation similar to those encountered in building the Panama Canal have been met and solved; railroads have been laid across morasses; towns and cities have risen where before there were a few palm-leaf huts of squalid Indians. It was in clearing a great banana plantation at Mercedes that the remains of a prehistoric city were found. Mr. Keith at his own expense, car- ried on excavations for several years at this site, and his interest increasing with the finds, he extended the archzological survey to cover other parts of Costa Rica. Thus it happens that there is opened to the scientific world, results of explora- tion in the humid lowland areas of Central America to add to the results previously gained from the more easily explored arid districts. 307 308 a storm swept over Mercedes and up- turned a great tree. The next day in the earth that still clung to the upturned roots, he caught the glitter of gold and upon examination thirty pieces of ancient gold craft were found. The great tree had grown over the grave of some for- gotten chief and its roots had enmeshed the funeral offerings. In addition to long continued excavations at Mercedes, supplementary work was carried on in other parts of Costa Rica. Many fine THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL wax was melted out and a mould was left. Hollow castings were made by building the patterns over a core of clay held in position by sprues or pins. Ina number of specimens a portion of the clay core can still be seen. The rough castings were finished off by hammering and burnishing. Two kinds of gold plating were accomplished by the ancient metal-workers. One is a heavy plating made over copper and the other a very It has thin and impermanent gilding. Birds of prey are often figured in a simple but forcible fashion, with spread wings and tail and out- stretched talons. neck as ornaments examples of art in gold were found in the region of Rio General. The technical processes of the ancient goldsmiths are admirably illustrated in Mr. Keith’s collection. Many orna- ments including the disk-shaped gorgets are made of beaten gold and have de- signs in repoussé. Others are castings. Of the latter some examples were cast in one piece and others in several pieces afterwards welded together. The pat- terns were made of resin or wax. They were enclosed in clay and the resin or These pieces have a ring at the back for suspension and were probably worn about the been suggested that the molds were lined with leaf gold or sprinkled with gold dust before the copper was poured in. The metal runs from pure gold to pure copper with all the intermediate alloys. In addition to copper, silver and even platinum may occur as a natural alloy in the gold. Bronze was apparently not made. The gold was obtained from placer deposits that some- times yielded nuggets of good size. The range of natural forms is well covered. Human beings are represented The gold objects cover the range of animal forms in the Isthmus. The tapir is represented in one specimen while the jaguar and the monkey and various reptiles are favorite subjects. Sometimes com- posite forms are seen Human beings are represented either singly or in pairs. Various activities are shown. MHead- dresses and necklaces are on the otherwise nude subjects, and objects such as bells are held in the hand. A remarkable specimen [upper right-hand corner] shows a man being devoured by two vultures 309 soyoooid 10 Sone 91v OSoy} UoYJO ‘SpAezI[ Puv sso1j QUOSeIdoI 07 OPVUT GIB YOM pjos urony ewasoH Jo sosord Sur qUI JSOU OY} JO oULOg 09 sv OS POYIpoU U9}JO SVM PUL II MOU OM YOM Ul TIO oy} ATJOVXO UT OpVUT SVM [JOq S,yMeTL IO [[Oq IL€ AJaAMOodSod PACZT] V PUL OYVUS V ‘YSY BV SULINOAVP JO Joe oY} UL av BAOGR Sy SpoS-jeurue sai) of, ‘SpRoy O{IpOV010 PodtOeS 9 YIIM pPodJUIUTVUIO S IOS [VUIIUe PUR PIIG MOYS UOLZDIT[OO YOM ot} Ul SUDUTIDIdS 997BIOGRI[A JSOUL OL t I 4 I Y I T 109] tf) I I I L a poun G109 LNSJIONV SO Sd0dId JIGVMYVWSAY ASYHL Although naively drawn. there is an unmistakable touch of nature in many examples. The student of primitive peoples sees in these ancient pieces of gold craft the close relations existing between man and the animal life that surrounded him. The animals that were powerful or possessed some special efficiency were transformed into gods Mr. Keith’s collection illustrates excellently the ancient processes such as hammering, engraving. and hollow casting 312 ANCIENT GOLD FROM COSTA RICA with peculiar headdresses and with vari- ous objects carried in the hands. Some- times they are joined in pairs. Many of the most beautiful amulets are frogs arranged either singly or in groups of two or three. These little figures are all provided on the under side with a ring for suspension. Lizards, turtles and crocodiles or alligators, are also rep- resented in amulets. Clamshells were used as beads and clever imitations of them were made in gold. The monkey is an interesting subject, and we find it treated in the gold work much as it is treated in the stone sculptures. Perhaps the most numerous amulets are those which figure birds with out- stretched wings. Many of them are of the vulture and harpy eagle types. Others represent the gull, the man-of- war bird and the parrot. An interesting series of ornaments shows the amalga- mation of two birds into a single figure. Among the unique examples in the Keith collection are a large spider with egg ball attached, a fine figure of the tapir, a curiously conventionalized but- terfly, and a number of pins and odd pendants which represent highly modi- fied crocodiles and monkeys. The more elaborate specimens of ancient Costa Rican gold work deal with religious subjects. In particular the crocodile was deified and elaborated. It is often represented with a human body and a characteristic animal head. The profile of the crocodile head is used to embellish other forms. In pottery and stone sculpture as well, the crocodile motive is very prominent, while the jaguar and various sorts of birds are seen in many examples. Perhaps the finest specimens of gold work in the Keith collection are those which show some of the highly conven- tionalized figures of gods. One series of such figures have canopies made of 313 rectangular gold plates on standards. Others show the animal-god in question performing some act. Examples of this are two bird divinities, one with a lizard and the other with a flying fish in its mouth. In both cases the headdresses of these deified birds are elaborated with the profile head of the crocodile. In another instance a bird is shown with a fish in its mouth while four fish are attached to its head and legs. Gold and copper bells served as a medium of exchange among the peoples of Mexico and Central America. They were all of the hawk’s bell type. The gold bells of Costa Rica are exquisite examples of metal work. Many of them are modeled in the form of birds, monkeys and grotesque heads. Most of the tribes of Costa Rica belong to the Chibchan linguistic stock and are connected with the Indians of Colombia. The languages however are differentiated to such an extent as to be mutually unintelligible. The political units at the time of the Conquest were small and there was no centralized government. The Nicoyan peninsula in northwestern Costa Rica and adja- cent territory near Lake Nicaragua was inhabited by the Chorotega or Mangue Indians of a different linguistic stock. Intrusive Nahuan tribes from the high- lands of Mexico were also found here. Gold becomes scarcer as we go north from Colombia and Panama but identi- cal processes of metal-working were in use as far north as Central Mexico. The succession and interrelation of the vari- ous ancient civilizations have only been roughly blocked out for the Isthmian area. There isno doubt that the artistic development extended over many centu- ries. Many features of art and tech- nology can be traced to Mexico and it is hoped that future study will bring to light connections with Peru. FREDERIC WARD PUTNAM, 1839-1915 Professor Putnam was one of the most eminent American anthropologists. He had official con- nection with many learned societies and had been decorated by the French Government with the Cross of the Legion of Honor. It is directly due to his influence that anthropology has come to occupy its present high position in American museums, making these institutions the instrument of field research. Professor Putnam. was an optimistic believer that proofs of man’s presence in America during the last period of glaciation will ultimately be found FREDERIC WARD PUTNAM By Clark Wissler HE founder of anthropological re- search in the American Museum, Frederic Ward Putnam, died at his home in Cambridge, Massachusetts, Saturday, August 14, 1915. He was born in Salem, Massachusetts, April 16, 1839. He attended the Lawrence Scientific School of Harvard where he studied under the distinguished Agassiz. From 1857 to 1864 he was Agassiz’s laboratory assistant, and later he was curator of Vertebrata in the Essex Institute, Salem, and also curator of ichthyology in the Boston Society of Natural Thus at an early age he began an un- usual career in that he served a number History. of institutions simultaneously.! Professor Putnam’s interest in anthro- pology was a later development and seems to have had its origin in his mu- seum experience. He was above all a genius In museum development and is far and away the most conspicuous figure 1Some of the positions Professor Putnam has held in corporations and institutions are as fol- lows:— curator of ornithology, Essex Institute, Salem, Massachusetts, 1856-1857; assistant to Professor Louis Agassiz, Harvard University, 1857-1864; curator of Vertebrata, Essex Insti- tute, 1864-1866; superintendent of the Essex Institute Museum, 1866-1871; superintendent Museum East Indian Marine Society, 1867-1869; director Museum Peabody Academy of Science, 1869-1873; state commissioner of fish and game, Massachusetts, 1882-1889; curator of ichthyol- ogy, Boston Society of Natural History, 1859— 1868; permanent secretary, American Association for the Advancement of Science, 1873-1898; assistant Kentucky Geological Survey, 1874; instructor, Penikese School of Natural History, 1874; assistant to United States Engineers in surveys west of 100th meridian, 1876-1879; assistant in ichthyology, Museum of Comparative Zoology, 1876-1878; curator of the Peabody Museum, 1875-1909; honorary curator, 1909; honorary director, 1913; Peabody professor of American archeology and ethnology, Harvard University, 1886-1909; Peabody professor emeri- tus, 1910; chief of department of ethnology, World’s Columbian Exposition, Chicago, 1891— 1894; curator of anthropology, American Mu- seum, New York, 1894-1903; professor of anthro- pology and director of the Anthropological Mu- seum of the University of California, 1903-1909; professor emeritus of anthropology, 1909. in the history of American museums. Anthropology as we now use the term had scarcely come into existence when he took it up. Doubtless he saw in America a great undeveloped field for research and particularly for the investi- gation of the antiquity and the origin of man. At that time such museums as there were, contented themselves with receiving gifts of such random anthro- pological specimens as came to their doors, but Professor Putnam’s idea was to make the museum an instrument of field research, to go out with trained men, collect, and study the evidences of man’s antiquity on the ground. This is the modern idea and it can truthfully be said that Putnam is the father of municipal anthropological research institutions in America. The Peabody Museum in Cambridge as it stands to-day is due to his leader- ship; his coming to the American Mu- seum resulted in the development of anthropology as a department of re- search and the beginning of a policy of extensive systematic field investiga- tion. It was Professor Putnam who encouraged the late Marshall Field to establish in Chicago a great museum which now bears his name, and it was Professor Putnam who guided its de- partment of anthropology through the formative period. Later, he organized a department of anthropology and a museum at the University of California where he was director for several years. One of his strongest traits was his genius in interesting wealthy men in museum development. In almost equal measure he had a way of inspiring capable young men. Among those whose early anthro- pological careers were under his guidance are Franz Boas, Roland B. Dixon, George A. Dorsey, Alice C. Fletcher, 315 d16 George Byron Gordon, M. R. Harring- ton, A. Hrdlicka, A. L. Kroeber, Charles W. Mead, Warren K. Moorehead, George H. Pepper, Marshall H. Saville and Harlan I. Smith. When Professor Putnam was invited to the American Museum by President Morris K. Jesup, there had as yet been no important anthropological expedi- tions. At once Professor Putnam began to solicit funds and soon had important work under way. Among the most important expeditions were the Hyde explorations in the Southwest, resulting in the famous discoveries at Pueblo Bonito by George H. Pepper; the Loubat Mexican expedition by Marshall H. Saville; the organization of the Jesup North Pacific work under the direction of Professor Boas; and the Villard expe- dition to Peru under A. F. Bandelier. Under his own personal supervision were the exploration of the Delaware Valley for traces of early man and the archeological investigations in the vicin- ity of New York Bay. The field work for the former was conducted by Ernest Volk, and the latter by M. R. Harring- Each of these undertakings yielded important results and their published ton. reports are conspicuous in anthropologi- cal reference literature. In these, as in all other undertakings, Professor Put- nam’s chief work was administrative, but it was the kind of work that made possible these several researches bearing the names of others. In the main the history of Professor Putnam’s call to the American Museum can be read in the following quotation, from his own report to the trustees of the Peabody Museum: During the spring the trustees of the New York Museum offered to me the position of curator of the department of anthropology of that museum, with the understanding that I was to reorganize the department on a broad THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL basis, to plan for its future development and for exploration, and to direct its work. The opportunities here offered were in every way worthy of my most earnest consideration; _ but I felt that I could not leave the Peabody Museum to which for the last twenty years I have given my thought and my work. After several conferences with the trustees of both museums and with the president of the Uni- versity, it was finally arranged that I should continue my duties in Cambridge both in the museum and in the college, and should also accept the position of curator of anthropol- ogy in the New York Museum to which I should give one week each month. Thus since the first of June I have held both positions, and have so arranged my duties as to take one week of each month for my work in New York. This arrangement has thus far proved possible and I trust satisfactory to all con- cerned. My field of usefulness is certainly increased, and I am confident that mutual benefit will result from thus bringing into perfect harmony two important centres of anthropological research. The aims of the two museums are different, and _ perfect coéperation and harmony between them can- not fail to result in benefit to science.— F. W. PUTNAM A continuation of the history of Pro- fessor Putnam’s connection with the American Museum is set forth in the following quotation from a report of 1903 by Morris K. Jesup, the late presi- dent of the American Museum: Professor Putnam was appointed curator of anthropology in the spring of 1894. At that time the exhibition of the collections relating to Man was confined to what is now the shell hall on the fifth floor, and the west- ern half of the bird gallery on the third floor. There had been no systematic explorations, no scientific publications, and the head of the department had but a _ single assistant. Within these ten years the department has grown until, at the present time, the collec- tions occupy eight large exhibition halls and twelve storage rooms. Explorations have been made throughout America and parts of Asia, the scientific publications fill a score of volumes, and the present department staff includes no less than seven men of recognized scientific attainments—— Morris K. Jesup MUSEUM NOTES As we are reviewing Professor Put- nam’s work while he was connected with the American Museum only, it is not necessary to consider the expeditions sent out under his direction from other institutions. Yet, note may be made of the fact that he is the most conspicu- ous figure in Ohio mound exploration and really began what the state of Ohio is now carrying out so well—namely, a systematic archeological exploration of the entire state. Although living to an advanced age Professor Putnam was an enthusiastic anthropologist to the very last. Just a few weeks before his death the writer received from him a long letter in his own 317 handwriting discussing the problem of man’s antiquity in America. Notwith- standing the disappointments in the pur- suit of this problem, he was still cheerfully optimistic and firm in the faith that we should ultimately find satisfactory proof of man’s presence in America during the last period of glaciation. His death marks the end of a long and interesting career. To him was granted the privilege of living happily and long enough to see the results of his striving; but what is still more, he continues to live in the hearts of the many men and women he has helped to something better than they could have attained alone. MUSEUM NOTES A RARE collection of archological objects from the Department of Ica, Peru, was re- cently purchased by Mr. A. D. Juilliard and presented to the Museum. This collection represents the results of numerous expedi- tions during the last nine years by Mr. Manuel Montero to the desert regions to the south and west of Ica. These visits to the prehistoric burial grounds were his vacations, and every object in the collection was exca- vated by him. The most notable objects are nine large shawl-like garments covered with conventionalized figures in embroidery. The beautiful color schemes seen in these textiles make them a joy to the artist, and they will doubtless be copied eagerly by the numerous art students who make constant use of the Museum collections. Besides these shawl- like garments there are many smaller pieces of cloth which are highly ornamented. The metal work of these ancient people is represented by objects in silver and copper. There are several pairs of large silver ear- plugs, ornamented with embossed figures of birds, silver tweezers also ornamented with raised bird figures, and a number of shawl pins with finely executed figures of birds and pumas on the upper ends. The other objects in the collection consist principally of the women’s workbaskets, with spindles and various col- ored threads, a loom with cloth in process of weaving, feather ornaments, slings, musical instruments and a few choice pieces of pottery. Tue twentieth anniversary of the founda- tion of the New York Botanical Garden at Bronx Park was celebrated during the week of September 6. As early as 1888 the need of a botanical garden in the City of New York was considered. In 1889 the Torrey Botani- cal Club obtained the consent of the Depart- ment of Public Parks to the establishment of such an institution. By 1895 the necessary sum of $250,000 had been subscribed, and the site of the Garden covering an area of 250 acres had been selected. Through the concerted efforts of the several committees of the Torrey Club the Botanical Garden in twenty years has acquired such an extensive number of collections that an additional appropriation of land has been made neces- sary, totaling in the entire reservation nearly four hundred acres. Among the more important features of the week’s program were the several sessions for the reading of scientific papers, inspection of various botanical exhibits, and visits to Staten Island and to the Brooklyn Botanical Garden. ‘ News of the safety of Vilhj4lmur Stefdns- son, leader of the Canadian Arctic expedition, STé dnois ours of1YM S,taMesnyL 9Y9 1OJ suoutosds oY} JO 4SIy oY} SB YIV[O VT SouVP’ “ATT Aq ouop StM SUIQUNOU JO YOM OY, “Woy poUNOU UI UMEsNI URoLIoULy 9} 09 peJueseid pur ‘uRpNs uURydkSq-o[SuUy ‘soUTAOIg [ezVYyH-[e-qyeg ‘oAvpuG Opey oy} Jo YAAOU soIjUeIg “AY UYOL “ATL &q 9049 VOINaV JO .ONIHY SLIHM,, GA1TIVO-OS SHL ‘SOHSOONIHY GaddIT-ayVvNOS MUSEUM NOTES and of his success in finding new land north of Prince Patrick Island, has just been re- ceived. After a dangerous trip of seven hundred miles northward across the ice from Martin Point on the mainland, Stefdnsson and his two companions were able to reach Bank’s Island. Here the winter was spent and during the next spring exploration toward the north resulted in the discovery of land which may or may not be connected with the supposed large land mass north of Alaska and Siberia. In the meantime the Southern Party of the expedition has been carrying on work in geology, topography and ethnology along the northern coast of Canada from the Mackenzie River Delta to Coronation Gulf. Because of the great delay through the loss of the ‘‘Karluk” it is planned to continue the explorations until 1917. A base camp for the northern party has by this time probably been established at the northern end of Prince Patrick Island. This will allow a wide radius for exploration over the ice during 1916. Tue Collins-Day South American expedi- tion previously announced from these pages, presented on its recent return large collec- tions of birds and mammals to the Ameri- can Museum. The interesting itinerary of the expedition will be reported in a succeeding issue of the JOURNAL. ON June 24, the new orange, white and blue flag designed for the municipal buildings of the City of New York was hoisted on the American Museum building, where it has since floated on the tower of the east wing. The colors under which the new Constitution was founded in 1626 have again become the official colors of the City, their renewed adoption taking place on the 250th anni- versary of the installation of the first Mayor and Board of Aldermen. At the ceremonies in commemoration of this anniversary and of the adoption of the ancient civic emblem as a new flag of the City, the American Mu- seum was represented by the following dele- gates: Messrs. Cleveland H. Dodge, Frederic A. Lucas and Bashford Dean. The addresses of the occasion were by Governor Charles S. Whitman, Mayor John Purroy Mitchel, William Robert Shepherd, professor of history at Columbia University, and Dr. John H. Finley, president of the University of the State of New York. 319 Dr. Ropert H. Lowrie and four members of the Museum resident in California, Dr. Jaime De Angulo, and Messrs. W. B. Bourn, William H. Crocker and William Kennon Jewett, were appointed by the Museum and the appointment officially confirmed by Marcus M. Marks, president of the Borough of Manhattan, to act as delegates on Man- hattan Day, at the Panama California Exposition in San Diego, August 9, and the Panama Pacific Exposition in San Francisco, August 19. 5 Tue third and final shipment of the Lang-' Chapin collections from the African Congo was received at the Museum in August. Recent word from Mr. Lang indicates that’ he will probably arrive in New York about the middle of October. Tue American Dahlia Society in coopera- tion with the Horticultural Society of New York gave with gratifying success their first annual exhibition of dahlias at the American Museum of Natural History, September 24-26. Durinc the summer President Osborn accompanied the new Assistant Secretary of the Interior, Hon. Stephen Tyng Mather, on an excursion in the High Sierras, from the region of the Sequoia National Park westward. The tour included the ascent of Mount Whitney and extended to Owen’s Lake on the east of the Sierras, from which point the party passed northward and took part in the opening of the reopened roadway along the line of the old Tioga Trail. The object of Mr. Mather’s tour was to survey the region lying west of the Sequoia National Park with a view to its enlargement to include the. superb region around Mount Whitney. THE Museum was represented at the recent meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science by Professor Henry Fairfield Osborn and Dr. W. D. Matthew, who took part especially in the conferences and discussions on the past history of the Pacific coast region during Miocene time. The meeting was followed by an expedition to the region of the Mohave Desert where fossil beds containing horses, camels, and other extensive Miocene forms have been discovered within the last few years. Pro- fessor John C. Merriam of the University of 320 THE AMERICAN California, who led this excursion, has been instrumental in presenting to the Museum recently several very fine skeletons of the mammals from the Rancho La Brea deposits near Los Angeles, including a complete sabre-tooth tiger and a complete wolf, which are now being mounted as an addition to the group exhibit prepared two years ago. A sEerIEs of enlargements of the remarkable photographs taken by the Australasian-Ant- arctic expedition under Sir Douglas Mawson has been placed on temporary exhibition in the west assembly hall of the Museum. Mr. N. C. NELson assisted by Mr. E. W. Morris of the University of Colorado, has completed for the time being the survey and excavation of the Galisteo ruins. At San Marcos, one of the largest of the ruins south of Santa Fé, Mr. Nelson excavated 475 rooms. Besides the San Marcos ruin five other ruins were excavated. Mr. Nelson will also visit the Mesa Verde country to inaugurate joint work between the University of Colorado and the American Museum. TuHeERE has been on exhibition during the past few months in the west assembly hall of the Museum a collection of paintings and bronzes by William de la Montagne Cary from studies made by him in the West be- tween 1861 and 1874. Mr. Cary’s sketches are unusually interesting from the historic standpoint. They record the phase of western life when the buffalo was still on the Plains and the Indians were living according to their old ways. Proressor A. L. Krorser of the Univer- sity of California spent the month of July and part of August among the Zuni of New Mexico where he secured over nine hundred specimens illustrating the everyday and re- ligious life of these people. He made a de- tailed study of their system of relations and the terms employed to denote relationship. Dr. Ciark WIssiLER, curator of the de- partment of anthropology, has spent the summer in an intensive study of the religious ceremonies of the Pawnee, with the aid of James Murie, the religious leader and chief of the tribe. Mr. Murie is able to read and write not only English but his own language as well, using for the purpose an adapted form of our ordinary alphabet. MUSEUM JOURNAL ATTENTION has already been called in the notes of the JourRNAL to the remarkable Laysan Island group in the University of Iowa. The photograph published in this number (page 266) represents one-tenth of the whole cyclorama. Laysan Island in the mid-Pacific has a surface of sand and ‘‘phos- phate” rock and is encireled by an irregular series of coral reefs. It has no human in- habitants but in 1902 was said to be populated by nearly ten million birds. The group reconstructs this island, at- tempting to show the real conditions on the island and the twenty-four species of birds nesting there. The canvas (138 ft. long) was painted by Mr. C. A. Corwin and the fore- ground (400 sq. ft.) was built by Mr. Homer R. Dill, requiring three years to mount the many birds and make the more than fifty thousand artificial leaves and the grasses used in the construction. THE annual meeting of the National Asso- ciation of Audubon Societies will be held at the American Museum Tuesday, October 26. Among other features there will be an exhi- bition of motion pictures by Mr. Herbert K. Job, who was sent by the Association on a tour of inspection of the bird reservations in Florida and Louisiana. It was during this trip that Mr. Job was detailed by the Na- tional Association as Colonel Roosevelt’s photographer when the latter inspected the bird islands off the Louisiana coast, made reservations during his presidency. Mrs. Wixi1aM M. Ivins has recently pre- sented to the Museum a very valuable col- lection of baskets from Arizona, California and British Columbia. Durina the past summer Mr. Roy C. Andrews spent several weeks in the Adiron- dack Mountains securing specimens and material for a group of Virginia deer which will be placed in the North American mam- mal hall of the Museum. The site selected for field study for the group was Shingle Shanty Stream on the Brandreth Preserve. Mrs. WILLIAM CHURCHILL, who was born in Samoa and lived there for many years, has presented to the Museum a large collection of photographs and ethnological specimens illustrating the native life of the Samoan Islands. The American Museum of Natural History Seventy-seventh Street and Central Park West, New York City Open free to the public on every day in the year. The American Museum of Natural History was established in 1869 to promote the Natural Sciences and to diffuse a general knowledge of them among the people. It is dependent upon private subscriptions and the fees from members for procuring needed additions to the collections and for carrying on explorations in America and other parts of the world. The membership fees are, AmnimaleMiembers' js ois eer eretencle ete: «1008 $ 10 Sustaining Members (annually)........ 25 MaferNVembers: 6s... sree «osc cvsthesei sieve etevenels 100 | Poel LGN; Fo pereceiey icy by OEE OR NER AP es ae 500 PALnOUStr con eich acion etre eee eres $1,000 Associate Benefactors............... 10,000 Associate Founders................. 25,000 BONCLAGtOES< fr; a7s cele ob sie ets ara eons. cre 50,000 Guides for Study of Exhibits are provided on request to members and teachers by the department of public education. Teachers wishing to bring classes should write or telephone the department for an appointment, specifying the collection to be studied. Lectures to classes may also be arranged for. of children. In all cases the best results are obtained with small groups The Museum Library contains more than 60,000 volumes with a good working collection of publications issued by scientific institutions and societies in this country and abroad. The library is open to the public for reference daily — Sundays and holidays excepted — from 9 a. M. to 5 P.M. The Technical Publications of the Museum comprise the Memoirs, Bulletin and Anthropological Papers, the Memoirs and Bulletin edited by J. A. Allen, the Anthropological Papers by Clark Wissler. the institution. These publications cover the field and laboratory researches of The Popular Publications of the Museum comprise the JourNaL, edited by Mary Cynthia Dickerson, the Handbooks, Leaflets and General Guide. The following list gives some of the popular publications; complete lists, of both technical and popular publications, may be obtained from the Librarian. POPULAR PUBLICATIONS HANDBOOKS NortH AMERICAN INDIANS OF THE Piarins. By Clark Wissler, Ph.D. Paper, 25 cents; cloth, 50 cents. INDIANS OF THE SOUTHWEST. By Pliny Earle Goddard, Ph.D. Paper, 25 cents; cloth, 50 cents. ANIMALS OF THE Past. By Frederic A. Lucas, Sc.D. Paper, 35 cents. ILLUSTRATED GUIDE LEAFLETS GENERAL GUIDE TO THE COLLECTIONS. issued December, 1914. Price, 25 cents. Tae CoLuection or Minerats. By Louis P. Grata- cap, A.M. Price, 5 cents. NortH AMERICAN RUMINANTS. Price, 10 cents. Tue Ancient Basket Makers OF SOUTHEASTERN Uraxu. By George H. Pepper. Price, 10 cents. PrimitivE Art. Price, 15 cents. Tue Breps oF THE Vicinity or New York City. By Frank M. Chapman, Se.D. Price, 15 cents. PeruviAN Mummies. By Charles W. Mead. Price, 10 cents. Tue METEORITES IN THE FOYER OF THE AMERICAN Museum or Narurau History. By Edmund Otis Hovey, Ph.D. Price, 10 cents. THe Hasitat Groups or Norta AMERICAN BIrps. By Frank M. Chapman, Sc.D. Price, 15 cents. New edition By J. A. Allen, Ph.D. Tue InpIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND AND VICINITY. By Alanson Skinner. In preparation. Tue Stokes PAINTINGS REPRESENTING GREENLAND Eskimo. Price, 5 cents, Brier History of ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION. 10 cents. TREES AND Forestry. By Mary Cynthia Dickerson, B A new edilion in course of preparation. Tue Protection oF River AND HARBOR WATERS FROM MonicrpaL_ Wastes. By Charles-Edward Amory Winslow, M.S. Price, 10 cents. Piant Forms 1n Wax. By E. C. B. Fassett. Price, 10 cents. Tue Evo.uTIon oF THE Horse. Ph.D. Price, 20 cents. Price, By W. D. Matthew, REPRINTS THE Grounp SLotH Group. By W. D. Matthew, Ph.D. Price, 5 cents. MeEtHops AND RESULTS IN HERPETOLOGY. Cynthia Dickerson, B.S. Price, 5 cents. Tue Warr PILE Group. By Roy W. Miner, A.B. Price, 5 cents. THe SEA Worm Group. Price, 10 cents. Tue ANCESTRY OF THE EDENTATES. By W. D. Mat- thew, Ph.D. Price, 5 cents. By Mary By Roy W. Miner, A.B. Photographing the recently mounted skeleton of the giant dinosaur Tyrannosaurus, American Museum of Natural History TE ERS TT ET SES THE “AMERICAN MUSEUM == jOURNAE = Regs, BS apie 7 A WOMAN ELEPHANT HUNTER NEW LAND IN THE ARCTIC ? > fm. “a ae % alt . HOPI: Tle Pr s * -_ - Be. ’ wes 3 The American Museum of Natural History BOARD OF TRUSTEES President Henry FAtRFIELD OSBORN First Vice-President CLEVELAND H. DopGE Treasurer CHARLES LANIER Second Vice-President J. P. Morgan Secretary ADRIAN ISELIN, JR. JoHN Purroy Mircuren, Mayor or THE City or NEw YORK WituiaAm A. PRENDERGAST, COMPTROLLER OF THE City oF NEW YorK Casot WARD, PRESIDENT OF THE DEPARTMENT OF PARKS GerorGE F. BAKER FREDERICK F. BREWSTER JosepH H. CHoaAtE R. Fuuron Currine Tuomas DrWitrr CuYLeR James DouGuLas Henry C. Frick Mapison GRANT Anson W. Harp ArcHER M. HUNTINGTON ARTHUR CURTISS JAMES Water B. JAMES SetH Low OagpEN MILs Percy R. Pyne JoHN B. TREVOR Fetrx M. Warsure GrorGE W. WICKERSHAM A. D. JUILLIARD ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS Director Freperic A. Lucas Assistant Treasurer Tue UNITED States Trust COMPANY Assistant Secretary GEORGE H. SHERWOOD or New Yor«K SCIENTIFIC STAFF FrepErRIc A. Lucas, Sc.D., Director Geology and Invertebrate Paleontology Epmunp Oris Hovey, Ph.D., Curator Cuester A. Reeps, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Mineralogy L. P. Gratacap, A.M., Curator GeorGE F. Kunz, Ph.D., Honorary Curator Gems Woods and Forestry Mary Cynrutia Dickerson, B.S., Curator Invertebrate Zodlogy Henry E. Crampton, Ph.D., Curator Roy W. Miner, A.B., Asst. Curator Frank E. Lutz, Ph.D., Asst. Curator L. P. Gratacarp, A.M., Curator Mollusca A. J. Mutcuuer, Assistant Frank E. Warson, B.S., Assistant W. M. Wueeper, Ph.D., Hon. Curator Social Insects A. L. TreapweEtt, Ph.D., Hon. Curator Annulata Cuarwes W. Lena, B.S., Hon. Curator Coleoptera Ichthyology and Herpetology BasHrorp Dean, Ph.D., Curator Emeritus Louis Hussaxor, Ph.D., Curator Ichthyology Joun T. Nicuots, A.B., Asst. Cur. Recent Fishes Mary Cynruia Dickerson, B.S., Assoc. Curator Herpetology ; Mammalogy and Ornithology J. A. Atuen, Ph.D., Curator Frank M. Cuapman, Se.D., Curator Ornithology Roy C. Anprews, A.M., Asst. Cur. Mammalogy W. DEW. Miter, Asst. Curator Ornithology H. E. Antony, B.S., Assistant Mammalogy Hersert Lana, Assistant Mammalogy James P. Cuapin, Assistant Ornithology Vertebrate Paleontology Henry Farrrietp Ossorn, LL.D., D.Se., Curator Emeritus W. D. Marruew, Ph.D., Curator WaLTER GRANGER, Assoc. Curator [Mammals] Barnum Brown, A.B., Assoc. Curator [Reptiles] Witiuiam K. Greaory, Ph.D., Assoc. in Palzon- tology Cuarues R. Eastman, Ph.D., Research Associate Anthropology CLARK WIssLER, Ph.D., Curator Purny E. Gopparp, Ph.D., Curator Ethnology Rosert H. Lowiez, Ph.D., Assoc. Curator Hersert J. Sprinpen, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Nets C. Netson, M.L., Asst. Curator Cuarues W. Meap, Asst. Curator ALANSON SKINNER, Asst. Curator Harwuan I. Smita, Hon. Curator Archeology M. D. C. Crawrorp, Research Associate in Tex- tiles Anatomy and Physiology Raupx W. Tower, Ph.D., Curator Public Health CHARLES-Epwarp A. Winstow, M.S., Curator IsrarEuL J. Kuicuer, Ph.D., Assistant Public Education GerorGE H. SHERwoop, A.M., Curator G. Cuyper Fisuer, Ph.D., Asst. Curator Ann E. Tuomas, Ph.B., Assistant Books and Publications Rautpeu W. Tower, Ph.D., Curator Ipa Ricuarpson Hoop, A.B., Asst. Librarian Tue American Museum Journa VOLUME XV NOVEMBER, 1915 NUMBER 7 CONTENTS Cover, The Staunch Support of the Explorer in North or South-polar Regions Erontispiece, Record ‘Tusks from Mount Kenya....-...2.....2..0.e.2<.0: 322 Elephant Hunting on Mount Kenya.................... Cart E, AKELEY 323 A woman wins the record tusks for the Mount Kenya region. Illustrations from photo- graphs by the Author Reproductions in Duotone of Antarctic_Photographs............ opposite 338 Representative of the Australasian-Antarctic expedition under Sir Douglas Mawson. Selected from the 115 enlargements of Mawson photographs on exhibition at the American Museum of Natural History The Stefansson Expedition of 1913 to 1915..Maysor GENERAL A. W. GREELY 339 A seven-hundred-mile ice trip of extreme hazard northward from the Canadian mainland to Banks Land — Discovery of new land north of Prince Patrick Island With map showing generalized route (through courtesy of the American Geographical Society) sthetome of the Hopi Indians: s.. 0... ce.6 2s. ese oe CuarRK WISSLER 343 A ‘‘human habitat group’’ constructed in the American Museum to show the home of the Hopi people and their daily routine of life Becmumes of Natural History. ........ 2.2.2.4. <6. CHARLES R. Eastman 349 Illustrated with drawings made some four centuries ago Evolution of Arms and Armor...............-.eeeeeeeeeee BASHFORD DEAN 357 Calling attention to the marvelous armor collection at_the Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York City, which gives opportunity for the study of armor historically and for a comparative study relative to the fitness of armor for practical service in the present Euro- pean war Tsimshian Stories in Carved Wood........ LIEUTENANT GEORGE T. Emmons 363 Hanploriaeaspurof the Andes. ...... 0... ..0:..2. 0h ssegeue Leo E. MILLER 367 MNES SPE OLESEN hn ori wd st Sa cbane S-¥ Shed Et. 8S Mee ane = oo OS 372 Mary Cyrnraia Dickerson, Editor Published monthly from October to May "by the American Museum of Natural History, at the Cosmos Press, Cambridge, Mass. Terms: one dollar and a half per year, twenty cents per copy. Entered as second < y <5 1400 SPIESS SHANK---------------- STRAPS——-------------— if BOHMISCHER OHRLOFFE£] HALBERD HEAD o} 4 ° = Se ss J BERDICHE 7200 AND ITS PARTS 7205 POLE ARMS THE DEVELOPMENT OF THEIR COMMONER FORMS DURING THE CENTURIES BASHFORD DEAN DIR 360 early form they were serviceable heavy axes with a hook-shaped end and a stout prong at the side. From this form were developed shapes which were very long and very narrow —the cutting blade suggesting a surgical knife and the prong at the side becoming a huge needle twenty inches in length. Now it is remarkable that this highly specialized type was used only toward the close of the Wars of the Roses when knights were SPIDER HELMET THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL armed “to the proof” with the most complete and efficient armor which the world has seen. Its plates could no longer be crushed, hence the heavy ax- head of our earlier pole-arm gave place to the long-bladed incurved knife which might be slipped neatly between the plates, say of shoulder, knee or elbow, and inflict a dangerous wound. So too this specialized billhook lost its stout beak or pick, for this could no longer be eis. IRON HAT-LINING PIKE MANS POT CREST —__ BOWL (TIMBRE) (BEVOR) CHIN GUARD THE PARTS OF A HELMET HELMETS THEIR KINDS AND DEVELOPMENT DURING THE CENTURIES 600 AD. --~ MORION: CABASSET ae CONICAL. OR NORMAN CASOUB Zz 1000 a Ss. “aA SPANGENHELM A.D. 600 EVOLUTION OF ARMS AND ARMOR pounded through the plates of gothic armor, but became long and slender, needle-like in form. By such a point, chain mail could be pierced, that is, because of the length and shape of the weapon it was best equipped mechani- cally to break a single ring in the knight’s collar of chain mail, which otherwise was “proof.” The fact that this type of bill did not long survive is_ interestingly accounted for by the changes which soon took place in knightly armor, for the collar of mail was subordinated to plate, and the huge elbow and knee pieces of gothic armor, which were easily “caught” by the incurved and inslipping blade, appeared in use only for a few years. If we study progressive changes in helmets, again we see generalized forms in the earliest times. Thus at the very beginning, the helmet was built of many pieces of iron and was a form much easier to make than a casque beaten out of a single piece of metal!'— the latter type of headpiece appearing only after armorers’ experiments had stretched through several hundred years. In our present series we see again highly special- ized forms as in the terminal members of the “lines”? of war hats (chapel-de-fer), barbutes and fifteenth century heaumes. In the first of these the brim of the hat became so wide that the headpiece could not be kept safely in place; in the second the expense of making it was extreme and it proved troublesome in the neck region; in the third the weight and size became excessive, and it disappeared as speedily as a highly developed variety in jousting went out of style. An advancing line in an evolutional series of helmets is seen in the closed helmet, or armet, which arose from the 1JIn all these cases we leave out of account armor and arms of Classical Antiquity: these were, with so much else of early culture, lost from the sight of the Middle Ages. 361 bowl-shaped helmet or salade and gave rise to many kinds of burganets, morions and cabassets. The evolutional fertil- ity of the armet appears to have been based upon several factors, such as the close modeling of the helmet to the head, enabling it to be kept readily in place, with the that a separate visor and a separate chinpiece coupled invention could be made to rotate from single lateral pivots — the latter adjustment of a great advantage since it made the headpiece easy to put on and take off. As a case of “ convergence,” or “ parallel- b ism’ in an evolutional series of helmets we may mention the form of closed hel- met called armet-d-rondelle which sug- gests the usual armet but which was not closely kin to it, and did not survive because it lacked convenience in manipu- lation. Thus in order to remove this casque the visor had first to be raised, then the cheek plates had to be separated By the time the wearer, cumbered with his from a peg at the point of the chin. mitten-shaped gauntlets succeeded in detaching the cheek flaps below, he might find that his visor would fall and cause him annoying delay. Another parallel to the closed helmet of the six- teenth century was the basinet in the late fourteenth century. It never led directly to the armet however, and had evident defects in its mechanism which cause it to be ranked as a “terminal”’ rather than a progressive form. In a series of helmets we have, again, decadent or degenerate forms. Thus in the line of closed helmets the latest examples have lost their tall crests, their modeling, the separate plates in the neck region, even the catch which clamps the chinpiece down (in the place of the last we find merely a strap and a buckle). Also in siege burganets one finds obvious eases of degeneration: crest vanishes, visor and umbrel disappear and their 362 ancient pivot is replaced by a simple hinge. These casques are exceedingly heavy and admirably designed to protect the wearer from gunshot at close range. They could be used in the trenches in Flanders even to-day very much as they were used in the days of Marlboro. Their utility in fact is clearly shown in the present revival of armor-wearing. The helmets to be finally noted are nu- merous degenerate and “rudimentary” forms descended from the lobster-tailed burganets of Cromwell’s times. Thus the ear defense in such a headpiece loses its lower portion, which was a part of the neck guard, and later becomes greatly reduced in size; also the neck-covering portion of the back of the casque devel- ops either a great number of strips, or else, merging them all together, becomes a single plate — which finally may disappear altogether. Such a head- piece had an interesting series of degen- erate successors.— One of them is hat- shaped, another becomes a_ skullcap enclosed within the crown of a felt hat, another persists as a lighter hat lining THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL made of a few wide bands of metal, still another assumes the form of a grat- ing made of light strips, and a final one appears as a light hat lining made of a few strips or bars of metal so hinged together that the whole defense can be folded and carried in one’s pocket. It is especially significant in the vari- ous instances noted above that the changes always take place in order of time, just as we find evolutional changes occurring in animals. Thus we are no more apt to meet the highly modified burganets of the seventeenth century among casques of the sixteenth century than we are likely to find fossil mammals in the old red sandstone. On the other hand, we may learn of archaic forms of helmets or halberds persisting for a long time, as we find the pearly nautilus or the gar pike, living to-day, which might well have died out with their kindred ages ago. Thus as an amusing case of sur- vival, we read of knights from Ireland appearing in Queen Elizabeth’s court armed in basinets and chain mail, nearly two centuries behind the English style. TSIMSHIAN STORIES IN CARVED WOOD By Lieutenant George T. Emmons HE Kitksan as well as the other | divisions of the Tsimshian pos- sess neither letters nor hiero- glyphics, yet through the plastic and graphic arts they have been enabled to preserve and illustrate their legends, traditions and much of their life history. Carving in wood, bone and _ stone, weaving in the wool of the mountain goat, in maple and cedar bark and spruce root show a much higher degree of de- velopment than painting. The last has never advanced beyond simple outline with no sense of perspective and with four simple colors, consequently little variation in shade or tone. Cruder and more primitive than either the Tsimshian proper or the Niska, the Kitksan nevertheless follow natural forms with wonderful accuracy, and besides portraying the typical features of their race, they express action in animal figures — born no doubt of that close study of nature upon which the hunter’s life depends. Their art is more realistic than conventional, but as it has been developed slowly through genera- tions a certain amount of usage prevails which is the more noticeable in the hu- man, bear and mythical animal figures. Without discussing the origin of the Kitksan, the fact that their art has been borrowed from the coast cannot be ques- tioned, for the reason that there are found more than two hundred miles inland in the midst of birch and cotton- wood forests, sea animal forms emblem- atic of the family crests that have come to them through intercourse and inter- marriage with the seaward divisions of this people. Besides, all their folk-lore and traditions speak of a migration down the Skeena to salt water, and a further proof is that the contiguous Déné tribes are wholly wanting in any sense of art. Some of the finest specimens of carv- ing are said to have been executed by Tsimshian imported for the purpose, but the average work represents home talent, and while often archaic, is more realistic and original and interesting in the por- trayal of local traditions and the fauna of the country than the finer carving. At the village of the old Kitzegukla on the Skeena River, some _ thirteen miles below Hazelton, is a very interest- ing heraldic column of the Kish-hasht family. It is rather crude in its execu- tion but’it illustrates more than the usual number of stories. The tree is simply barked and brought to a dull point at the top. Below this occurs in order representations of, first, the moun- tain goat painted white and _ black; second, the sun within which is the figure of the moose hunter, Kuke-shan, carrying a small basket; third, the monkey woman Pighish, and at the base the big horned owl (gwuk-gwu-nooks). These stories told in wood go back to the time when men and animals were supposed to be very close to one another; when they intermarried and saw each other under a spell of witchery that made all appear human, except that the ani- mals wore coats of fur which they could at will remove and appear in human form, or put on and become as animals. THE STORY OF THE MOUNTAIN GOAT (These stories were told by John Malo, an old Kitksan at Hazelton, June 20, 1913. They are prosaic but typical native explanation of a totem pole, similar to the many on exhibition in the American Museum) In the early days of life, before the great cold which caused the dispersion of the 363 Four stories illustrated in carved wood on a heraldic column Kitksan, when the whole tribe lived at Tumla- halm on the upper Skeena River, there was a great hunter, Kit-um-gieldo (man of the outside or wilds). He was chief of the Kon-nah-da clan, whose hunting grounds included Sthe-yordan-lah (steep sides), the precipitous aggregation of jagged mountain peaks that rise directly from the compara- 364 MR ET OS a bas a 28 ’ oe 5 tively level country beyond the mouth of the Buckley River. After the salmon season was over, when the animals had fattened on the abundance of the summer and had taken on their winter coats, he invited the most active hunters of the village to accompany him to the great mountain where the wild goats were abundant, for besides the flesh which was esteemed, the skins were used as bedding, the soft wool was twisted into yarn for weaving blankets, into cord for carrying bags and other household arti- cles, while the leaf fat that had been taken on as a protection against the extreme cold of winter was run into cakes for later use. The goats were hunted with bow, arrow and spear, the hunt- ers lying in wait for them along their rock-worn trails, and many were taken each year and sent down the mountain side to the people who were en- camped awaiting the hunters’ return. Then the meat was carried across the river to the village and a great feast was held. During one of these expedi- tions a young man put a bag of red paint in his wallet, to color his arrows for good luck, and after he had killed many goats he came across a kid which he caught and after painting its horns red and deco- rating its face in ceremonial design, he let it go. The fol- lowing spring two strangers dressed in white blankets ar- rived in the village and as was the custom with guests, they were invited to the chief’s house and offered food such as dried salmon, boiled dried goats’ meat and dried berries, but they would not eat anything. They gave all the people an invitation to visit their village, not saying where it was, but offering themselves as guides. After leaving the house some chil- dren noticed the strangers on their hands and TSIMSHIAN STORIES IN CARVED WOOD 365 knees eating grass like animals, but they did not mention this to the people at the time. The following morning at an early hour the villagers assembled and led by the visi- tors, crossed the river and climbed the moun- tain until they reached what appeared to be a broad level expanse where stood a large feast house. This was a delusion, however, they were really on a narrow rock shelf — for the people were under the spell of the mountain. Around the house were platforms of broad planks which overhung steep precipices, and their hosts who appeared as human beings in their white blankets were in reality moun- tain goats. The people were feasted and then the chief, their host, began to dance, singing a strange song of his people: ‘“‘I am shaking my hoofs over the mountain side,” and they saw the rock open and close again, which they could not understand. When night came they were given sleeping places on the platforms around the house, the chiefs on the lower ones and the common people on those above. The hosts, however, took their places on the inner sides and placed the guests on the outer edges, except in the case of the hunter who the previous year had caught the kid and painted its horns red. To him came a young man whose face was decorated in red, who asked him to share his sleeping bench with him, and he alone was placed on the inner side of the platform. In the night when all were sleeping, the goat hosts pushed the sleepers off into space and all were killed except the young hunter who had painted the horns of the kid, who in truth was his host and protector in human form. When he awoke and found his friends gone he was very sad, for he saw that he was on a narrow rock shelf of the mountain side in a place inaccessible to man. But his protector took off his shoes which seemed to be hoofs and putting them on the hunter’s feet he told him that with them he need have no fear, that he could jump from shelf to shelf with perfect safety. Also he told him to take them off when he reached the level ground and put them in a certain place where he could find them. When the young hunter reached the base of the mountain he found the bruised dead bodies of all who had accompanied him to the feast and only those were left who had remained in the village. THE STORY OF THE MOOSE HUNTER The great moose hunter, MKuke-shan (expert in gambling with the sticks) traveled great distances in search of game but after hunting a moose and killing it, he took only the paunch which he filled with blood. This he boiled down into a thick soup which was considered a great luxury. He was continually thirsty because he traveled far and fast and he cautioned his wife always to have water haskets filled when he was expected to return — and these he emptied at once. During one of his trips the wife neglected to go for water, and when he was returning she heard him shouting for water. In her confusion she answered ‘‘No water!’’ as she grabbed the baskets and hurried to the spring. Then he was carried up to the Sun and his voice grew fainter and fainter until. it was lost in the distance, for he was a child of the Sun and was always thirsty, and he could live on earth only as long as he could find plenty of water. He can be seen in the Sun, but no one must look at him because he may throw down blood from the paunch which he carries, and thus cause hemorrhage and fatal sickness. THE MONKEY WOMAN, PIGHISH Besides having a knowledge of the animals common to the country, the Kitksan held a general belief in mythical beings half human and half animal that lived in the depth of the forest, the inaccessible mountain tops and _ the waters. Such beings had been seen in early days by certain individuals, and in most instances the meetings had been productive of great good fortune. Rep- resentations of these beings had been assumed as crests and their supposed likenesses were displayed on heraldic col- umns, as well as upon ceremonial dress and paraphernalia. Pighish, who was seen first by one of the Kish-hasht clan, was an animal closely asso- ciated with the land ‘otter, although very human in appearance, and spoken of -to-day as a monkey woman. The presence of Pighish was indicated by the cry of a child, 366 for she always carried on her back ‘a small being much like herself. Only one without fault could see this miraculous creature, and when the voice called, he was obliged to follow as the sun goes around four times; then he would come to Pighish. He then must take the child, which immediately appeared to be human. The mother then pleaded for her infant and it was returned to her, whereupon she agreed to grant any wish asked. In returning the child, the face of the person had to be turned away as he stepped back, lest Pighish kill him with her long claws. This spirit is identical with the property women of the Haida and the Tlingit of the Coast. AN OLD LEGEND OF THE GREAT HORNED OWL There are many stories about the great horned owl (gwuk-gwu-nooks) but the one mentioned most often is in connection with the theft of children. One of the oldest of these legends, like that of the mountain goat, goes back to the days of Tumla-halm. During the winter season of extreme cold when the great communal houses were untenantable, the people occupied very small log structures — low, shedlike and chinked with moss. In one of these was a family including a little boy who cried continually. He was wrapped up in his rabbit-skin blanket and put to bed, but he would get up and crying go to one and another until the father said “Tf you do not stop the owl will take you.” Finally he went to the grandmother sleeping near the door, and when she pushed him away, the door opened and in truth the owl came in and carried him off. In the morning his family missed him, but they could hear his faint crying, so they searched far and wide but without any success. Then they commenced digging in THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL the ground, and from this incident the col- lection of winter huts below the main village received the name “An wurghash”’ (place where they dig). Finally the father took down his bow and quiver and putting some goat’s suet and red ochre in his bag, he set out through the woods. He had gone but a short distance when a grouse flew up from the trail and lit in a tree. Fitting an arrow to the bow the father was about to shoot, when the grouse cried, ‘‘Do not shoot for I will tell you of your lost boy, but first say if you have any goat’s fat and red paint in your wallet and will you paint red on my eyes?” This he did and the grouse said, ‘‘ How nice I look now! Go right ahead and you will see a big nest of twigs in a great spruce and in it is your boy.” The father reached the tree and climbing up found the boy asleep wrapped in his rabbit-skin blanket. This was the owl’s nest, and the owl had been feed- ing the child on live snakes, frogs and worms, telling him they were rabbits’ entrails. These ate through the child’s stomach and he finally died and his body was burned. In the fall of the year when the water was low and the barricade and salmon traps bridged the river, the villagers heard someone calling from the opposite shore, and soon they saw the owl which appeared more like an old woman. As she came to the bridge, she sang, ‘“‘Was it you that raised the child and took it away?’’ The father told some little boys playing about to pull out some of the foot boards and place dead sticks across so that any weight would break through. After doing this they called to the owl to come over knowing that she would press hard on the foot boards, and as she attempted to cross she broke through and fell into the river. As she floated downstream she came to a camping-place where children were hooking salmon. When they saw her they brought her to shore, but soon being frightened they ran away. Then she called, ‘““Come back my grandchildren and dry me.” They built a fire and wiped her feathers dry, when she became very vulgar in speech and they angrily threw her into the river and she was drowned. EXPLORING A SPUR OF THE ANDES By Leo E. Miller HAT lofty spur of the Andes jutting out of the Western Range slightly below altitude 7° is known by the name Paramillo. To explore this section was the object of the expedition’s leaving its base at Medellin on January 14, 1915, with equipment sufficient for about three weeks’ actual field work. The very good trail strikes toward the northwest, ascending the mountain side rapidly, so that four hours after starting we had reached the top of the range. A great cleft forms a natural pass, 8750 feet high, and saves a climb of at least an additional thousand feet. The slope on the other (western) side is more gentle. We were immediately impressed with the barren nature of the country, for with the exception of a few patches of low brush and the clumps of withered grass, no vegetation was to be seen; and an occasional glimpse of the Cauca River far below suggested the picture of a broad yellow ribbon lying upon a brown rocky plain. That night we reached a small town called San Geronimo (elevation 3200 feet). Near the town small patches of ground are irrigated with water brought from mountain brooks and distributed through a network of artificial ditches. In these spots rice, corn and pastur- age grow, although rather scantily on account of the rocky nature of the soil. Next morning we were on the road _ before six. A few hours later, on crossing the top of a small ridge, we came suddenly upon the town of Sopetrin completely hidden in a fertile little valley filled with palms, mangoes, and other beautiful trees. The cluster of some hundreds of neat white houses with red tile roofs, the well-kept streets, and the multitude of birds fluttering among the deep green foli- age render Sopetran quite the most attrac- tive town of its size I have seen in tropical America. At noon we reached the Cauca and crossed that sluggish, muddy stream on a well-built suspension bridge probably eight hundred feet long. Gravel banks flank the sides of the river, and bare sandy islands divide its waters. The elevation at this point is approximately two thousand feet. One league beyond the Cauca lies the town of Antioquia, altitude 2600 feet. The valley of the Cauca is here five to ten miles wide, rolling, and supports no vegetation except occasional clumps of mimosas and cacti which rather add to its desert-like appearance. The high ranges of the Western and Central Andes hem it in like huge walls of pink clay and sandstone. We reached Buritica January 16. Immedi- ately after leaving Antioquia, a mere ledge of a trail begins the ascent of the Coast Range, and while a good deal of anxiety was felt for the safety of the two cargo animals, it was nevertheless a relief to escape from the intol- erable heat of the low country. The altitude of Buritica is 6200 feet. On account of the jaded condition of the animals, we spent the morning of January 17 at Buriticd. Leaving at noon, we reached a small settlement known as Tabocal, altitude 5400 feet, at five o’clock. We could now no longer see the Cauca, our view having been shut off by a ridge of mountains several thousand feet in height which rises out of the valley between the ridge we were on and the river. A slight change was perceptible in the character of the country; extensive acres covered with low brush dotted the otherwise barren landscape, although far apart; and on the extreme tops of both ranges a thin fringe of green could be distinctly seen. Beyond Tabocal the country is extremely broken, there being frequent rises and de- scents of two thousand feet. Several sepa- rate mountains, not connected with the main ranges, stand here and there like huge monuments, rising from a basal elevation of three thousand feet to eight or nine thousand feet, which naturally magnifies their already tremendous proportions. Late in the afternoon of the eighteenth, we reached an altitude of eight thousand feet, and entered a fine strip of forest, the first we had seen since leaving Medellin. This is the beginning of the forested zone, which exami- nation showed to be at an equal height on both the Central and Coast Ranges, and to continue to the tops, which appear to rise to an altitude of nine thousand feet or more. The night was spent at an Indian hut called La Meseta, altitude 7900 feet just below the forest belt, and situated in the midst of an extensive strip of maize. Peque, the end of the 367 At one time on the way to the Paramillo, camp was made at an altitude of 10,000 feet after a climb of 5000 feet in eight hours. journey by mule, was reached at noon on the nineteenth. After leaving La Meseta the trail goes down abruptly; the town has an altitude of only five thousand feet. Peque boasts of about fifty decaying mud huts, and its popu- lation is mostly of Indian descent, including some pure-blooded Indians. One of the lat- ter, Julian David, received us most cordially and rendered us every possible assistance in securing the porters for the ascent of the Paramillo. Some of the country surrounding Peque once doubtless bore a light forest growth, with heavier forest in the ravines; but by far the greater part is naturally bare or covered with a dense growth of brush. I was told that at the time of the Spanish Invasion, forty thousand Indians inhabited this region; and as the several mountain streams supply an abundance of fresh water and its soil responds fairly well to cultivation, there seems to be no reason why it should not have sup- ported an extensive population. The forest zone, beginning at La Meseta at eight thousand feet, gradually extends its limits downward as we go farther north, until at Peque it reached as low as five thousand feet in the deeper and well-watered ravines; and as previously reported, at Puerto Val- divia, it reaches the very edge of the Cauca. We secured four half-breed porters to carry the equipment and as there was no trail to the Paramillo, a fifth man was engaged to go in advance and clear an opening with his machete. On the twenty-first we started at six in the morning, following a short trail that led to a 368 After leaving this camp the expedition was without water for two days lonely hut known as El Madeiro. This three hours’ walk took us through country covered with large areas of tall brush, blackberry briars and guavas, with occasional patches of forest, some of which had recently been burnt. Arriving at El Madeiro (eight thousand feet), we plunged into the magnificent forest, going in a due westerly direction. It was our plan to follow along the top of an undulating ridge, which one of the men said was the short- est and easiest route. He knew from experi- ence, having once visited that region some sixteen years before. It was during the course of arevolution; his father was pursued by the opposing forces and fled into the forest, taking his son, then a small boy with him, and even- tually reaching the Paramillo where they spent some time. At first the forest was fairly penetrable, but soon it assumed the character of the well- known San Antonio (above Cali) jungle, being composed of a solid wall of moss, ferns, creepers and epiphytes which burdened every tree-trunk and branch. Many birds, such as wood-hewers, yellow-headed tanagers, par- rots and blue-throated jays were observed, among them a number of species common at Santa Elena. On account of the long climb, we made camp at three o’clock, at an altitude of ten thousand feet, having ascended five thousand feet in eight hours’ marching. Water was obtained in a ravine over one thousand feet lower down on one side of the ridge, and I may here add that this was the only water we had until reaching the Paramillo, so that we went nearly two whole days without drinking. The second day’s march we had hoped would be over a gentler slope; but it was soon discovered that our ridge was composed of a succession of knolls rising from five hundred to one thousand feet above the mean level, and the forest grew denser constantly. We had to cut practically every foot of the way. In places we actually walked over the top of the masses of vegetation; the branches were a solid tangle of creepers, climbing bamboo, bromelias and mosses, and formed springy aérial bridges. More often it was easier to burrow through, and frequently ‘“‘tunnels”’ many yards long were cut, through which the carriers crawled on hands and knees. The tops of some of the hills were void of trees, their place being taken by a dense growth of grasslike bamboo, wild oleanders, thick-leaved shrubs, and thickets of a tall, coarse grass with leaves eight feet tall and six inches wide. Half-breed porters to carry the expedition’s equipment. It was the duty of one to goin advance and clear an opening through the forest with his machete. In some places every foot of the way had to be cut; in others the party actually walked over the tops of the vegetation, a solid tangle of creepers, climbing bamboo, bromelias and mosses, which formed springy aérial bridges 369 OLE S1oSsvue, PUB SOOYMO} ‘SIOUTUUNY ‘s1oyo ROA pue svsurjoo ‘sopoordey ‘saodoo1d Aouoy ‘soyouy — Aue ATOUIOIYXO PUR OdIvOS OTOAL Spalq ‘SOUIARI O49 UL Soar) po vuNgs pue soysnd UMOJIS-ssOU YIM ‘ssvis Ysnoj9 pure soysnq AdioqonT{q ‘souofoTiedy ‘UOIRIESOA OUURARd [ROTC YAIM padoAod oe Sopris urejunotw oy, ‘sommssy doop pure SOUIATA YIM Posdods.197Url ‘Joos OOO'ST JO UOMVAS]O UB Suryorod gsoysty oy} ‘syvod pourjour A[daevys JO solos eB JO posodwioo st (RIqUIO;OD ‘eiInbonuy) oyTTeaeg out, SAQNV AHL 40 YNdS ALAON V EXPLORING A SPUR OF THE ANDES ail We camped this night at 11,350 feet up. The men eagerly cut down clumps of bromelias hoping to obtain water, but all that the leaves contained were a few drops of a liquid mud, utterly unfit for use. Although we traveled steadily for ten hours, I doubt if we covered more than three miles. A few hours after starting on the morning of January 23, we emerged suddenly from the dark forest. Instead of the tall, overburdened trees, there were extensive areas of bushes, evergreens, stunted pines, and plants with thick, round rubbery leaves, interspersed with clumps of tall rank ferns. Beyond stretched the bleak, wind-swept surface of the Garam. The Paramillo region is composed of a series of sharply inclined peaks, the highest of which attains an elevation of thirteen thousand feet, interspersed with ravines and deep fissures. The surface consists mainly of dark sandstone which in many places has been shattered so that a thin litter of the particles covers the fundamental rock. Occasionally a thin vein of white quartz crops out, especially where, as often occurs, the strata stand in a perpen- dicular position. Water is scarce. We dis- covered but one *small, { trickling brooklet; but at the bottom of one of the crevices several potholes were found, each containing several hundred gallons. At night the temperature fell to 28°, and ice formed in our pails half an inch thick; in the morning the ground was white with frost. The vegetation is of a typical paramo char- acter, consisting of low clumps of frailejones, blueberry bushes and tough grass. In the ravines grow thick bushes and stunted trees, all heavily moss-covered. Birds were extremely scarce and, strange to say, exceedingly wary. The typical slaty finch of Santa Isabel and two species of honey creepers were by far the commonest, followed by a small, slaty tapacolo. Then there were white-throated hummers and flycatchers. The finches (including gold- finches), honey creepers, tapacolos, cotingas and flyeatchers, seem to belong strictly to the paramo; the hummers, towhees and tanagers it seems come only from the forests below. It is difficult to guess just where this typical paramo bird fauna originated. On all sides excepting a break toward the west, Paramillo is surrounded by ridges, some reaching an elevation of 12,000 feet, the tops of which are covered with dense forest, so that it stands like a mountainous brown island amid the sea of green. MUSEUM NOTES Stnce the last issue of the JouRNAL the following persons have become members of the Museum: Patron, Mr. Jonn H. PRENTICE; Life members, Mrs. ApriaAN HorrmMan JoLInE, Mrs. Joon Maacer, Dr. J. V. LAUDERDALE and Messrs. Gerorce OD. Barron, Russett J. Cores, Atrrep M. Couurns, Lez Garnetr Day, JoHn W. Mercer and R. G. Packarp, JR.; Sustaining member, Mrs. N. M. Ponp; Annual members, Mrs. W. H. Burton, Mrs. E. Brunswick, Mrs. Lintian M. CuHarues, Mrs. K. D. CHeney, Jr., Mrs. CHARLES Dovuauass, Mrs. JosepH HErziIG, Mrs. Grorce Leary, Mrs. JoserH LoEewt, Mrs. Wiuur1am MircHett, Mrs. C. W. Pierson, Mrs. Horace F. Poor, Mrs. ELEANOR ATKINSON Reap, Mrs. GEeorGE S. Rinc, Mrs. Howarp C. Smits, Misses ConsTANCE Griaes and ANNA L. SLATER, Dr. José D. Atronseca, Dr. Grorce H. SEMKEN, Dr. Jutes A. VuILLEUMIER, Dr. B. W. WEINBERGER and Messrs. JOHN AITKEN, ALBERT B. AsHFoRTH, FREDERIC D. Barstow, Henry G. Bartou, Paut Baum- GARTEN, RicHarD A. CARDEN, ALBERT HeEy- MANN, GEORGE S. Hoyt, VINCENT LOESER, M. R. Mayer, Painre AiInswortH Means, CarL ScHurz PretTrascH, Henry M. Rau, Max ROSENBERG, CHARLES SALOMON, Francis UpHaM STEARNS, S. H. Stone, C. J. Sruspner, LamMBert Suypam. ZJr., HERBERT SyreTT, Harry Tipper and a membership in memoriam to Mr. AnprR& C. CHAMPOLLION. In accordance with resolutions taken by the First Pan-American Scientific Congress, meeting in 1908 at Santiago, Chile, a Second Pan-American Congress will be held in Wash- ington, D. C., in December, 1915, under the auspices of the United States Government. Through the courtesy of the Pan-American Union the offices and sessions of the Congress will be located in the Pan-American building and the Director-General of this organization will act as Secretary-General of the Congress. The purpose of the Congress is to foster the cordial relations existing between Pan-Ameri- can countries and to give a broader acquaint- ance with current progress in education, public health, international law, antiquity of man, conservation of natural resources and bl2 all branches of scientific research. At the recent invitation of the Secretary-General, the American Museum appointed as official representatives, Dr. Frank M. Chapman, delegate and Dr. Herbert J. Spinden, alter- nate. THE one hundred and third meeting of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America will be held in New York City, at the American Museum of Natural History for three days in November begin- ning the fifteenth. On Monday, the first day, a lecture will be given in the auditorium by Dr. Michael Idvorsky Pupin, of Columbia University, on “The Problem of Aérial Transmission,” to be followed by a general reception in the hall of the Age of Man. On Tuesday morning, Tuesday afternoon and Wednesday morning, public scientific sessions will be held in the west assembly hall of the Museum at which various short papers will be read. Among those scheduled are: — ‘‘The Nature of Cell Polarity,’ by Prof. Edwin G. Conklin of Princeton University; ‘‘ Heredity of Stature,” by Dr. Chas. B. Davenport of the Carnegie Institute, Cold Spring Harbor, New York; “Origin of the Gall Midges,”’ by Prof. E. P. Felt of the Geological Hall, Albany; ‘Fossil Caleareous Alge from the Panama Canal Zone,’ by Prof. Marshall A. Howe ot the New York Botanical Garden; ‘Recent Ex- plorations in the Cactus Deserts of South America,” by Dr. J. N. Rose of the Smith- sonian Institution; ‘Can we observe Organic Evolution in Progress?” by Dr. Herbert Spencer Jennings of John Hopkins Univer- sity; “A Suggested Explanation of Ortho- genesis in Plants,’ by Prof. John M. Coulter of the University of Chicago; “The Life of Radium,” by Dr. Bertram B. Boltwood of Yale; “The Colorimeter as an Interpreter of Life Processes,” by Prof. Graham Lusk of the Russell Sage Institute of Pathology; “The Solar Radiation and its Variability,” by Charles G. Abbot of the Smithsonian Astrophysics Observatory; ‘Interference of Light Waves of Slightly Different Length,”’ by Prof. Carl Barus of Brown University; “The Influence of Certain Minerals on the Development of Schists and Gneisses,”’ by Dr. Charles R. Leith of Wisconsin Univer- sity; “Glacial Sculpture of the Mission MUSEUM NOTES Range, Montana,’”’ by Prof. W. M. Davis of Harvard; “Crystallization of Quartz Veins,” by Waldemar Lindgren of the United States Geological Survey. President Henry Fairfield Osborn of the American Museum, will speak on ‘‘The re- cently mounted skeletons of Tyrannosaurus and Ornithomimus in the American Museum of Natural History.”” He will describe the two extremes of carnivorous dinosaur adap- tation which these specimens respectively represent. Dr. Frank M. Chapman, curator of ornithology at the American Museum, will read a paper on “The Distribution of Bird Life in Colombia: a Contribution to a Biological Survey of South America,” and Mr. C. William Beebe, curator of birds, New York Zodlogical Park, on “The Origin of Flight in Birds.” Since Mr. Donald B. Macmillan has not returned from the Arctic in time to present to the members this fall an account of the Crocker Land expedition which he led North in 1913, arrangements have been made to show to members of the Museum on the evening of December 9 the motion pictures secured by Sir Douglas Mawson on the Australasian-Antaretic expedition. ) Aim Explorer's: View ol the. omen... 9.0 3 «0 es oo HERBERT Lana 379 An authoritative study of the conditions in the Congo and of the natives in their relation to the Belgian administration Illustrations from photographs of the Congo natives taken during a six-years’ residence among them *% Reproductions in Duotone of African Photographs.............. opposite 388 Twelve photographs selected from the seven thousand brought from Africa by Mr. Herbert Lang, to give a picture of the life of the Congo negroes micieni ascites: of “(New Mexieo.': 2... 208 a0 ee N. C. NEetson 389 Illustrations from photographs of the ruins under process of excavation by Mr. Nelson Explorations in the Southwest by the American Museum..CLark WIssLER 395 Resume of the Museum’s field research in the southwestern United States between 1909 and 1915 mainisee-Liown.. Glass: : ....24 $..) aces. eae eee HerMAN O. MUELLER 399 A glimpse behind the scenes in the American Museum’s preparation shop The American Museum’s Reptile Groups in Relation to High School Biology. Grorce W. Hunter 405 Hunting Deer-in the Adirondacks................ Roy CHapMan ANDREWS 409 Illustrations from still and motion pictures by the Author Newssixom-the ‘Crocker Land Expedition... 225) 2. ..~.; $2. 520203 te 415 Quotation from letters from the Arctic Beginnings of American Natural History............ CHARLES R. Eastman 417 Concluded from the November issue of the JourNau A Valuable New Bird Book: A Review.............. T. GiLBerT PEARSON 423 Mragmentsrot sopider Lore ©. $4. vax5 a) b. Roe Ao Frank E. Lutz 424 Corythosaurus, the New Duck-billed Dinosaur. W. D. Matruew and Barnum Brown 427 MPMscninieeIN@tese 55.0.5 fd ook: . eee eee ACS ee eet eee yee ae ae 428 Mary Cyntaia Dickerson, Editor Published monthly from October to May by the American Museum of Natural History, at the Cosmos Press, Cambridge, Mass. Terms: one dollar and a half per year, twenty cents per copy. Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-Office at Boston, Mass., Act of Congress, July 16, 1894. Subscriptions should be addressed to the AmEricAN Museum Journat, 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City. The Journal is sent free to all members of the Museum. Photo by DeWitt C. Ward MR. HERBERT LANG, LEADER OF THE AMERICAN MUSEUM’S CONGO EXPEDITION; 1909-1915 THe American Museum Journal DECEMBER, 1915 NUMBER 8 VotumE. XV AN EXPLORER’S VIEW OF THE CONGO By Herbert Lang Illustrations from photographs by the Author The history of the Museum’s work in the Congo is well-known to JouRNAL readers.} Mr. Herbert Lang, leader, and Mr. James P. Chapin, assistant, have carried the Congo expedi- tion successfully through more than six years’ work in Central Africa. The expedition was organized in 1909 on a tentative basis of three years’ work and was supported by the contribu- tions of the following men of New York: Messrs. John B. Trevor, Charles Lanier, Cleveland H. Dodge, J. P. Morgan, Jr., William K. Vanderbilt, A. D. Juilliard, Robert W. Goelet and William Rockefeller. An extension of time for the work, in order to complete a zodlogical survey of the unexplored territory, was made possible through the Jesup Fund of the Museum. Mr. Lang and Mr. Chapin have now returned, and the large and splendidly preserved collections with their valuable data, ready for extensive scientific research as well as for the construction of habitat groups for exhibition, have reached America and are safely housed in the Museum buildings. The following article by Mr. Lang on the natives of the Congo, is author- tative in that it is based on a six-years’ intimate acquaintance with natives of many tribes and a six-years’ first-hand knowledge of conditions in the Congo.— Tur Eprror REAT progress in civilization unfortunately often seems to be accompanied by incidents which throw some gloom on the result. At the time of the Belgian occupation of the Congo Basin no other power coveted this particular piece of territory. Practically all of its inhabitants were cannibals, a large portion had been laid waste by Arab slave-traders and by the Mahdists, and the country certainly deserved its reputation of being one of the most unhealthful regions. Other European nations had plenty of opportunity to carry the torch of progress into the swampy regions of darkest Africa, but the possession al- ready by these colonizing powers of really prosperous colonies seems to show that political, financial and commercial advantages were preferred by them to what they probably considered a glori- had ~the internecine warfare which ous but venturesome task. The Congo was therefore left to the King of the Belgians. Nor would it have been advantageous to continue to abandon its natives to the Arab slavers with their indescribable atrocities; to the Mahdists, who had already left a large and once prosperous section of Africa in a nearly desert condition, and to the horrors of is the inevitable sequel of cannibalism. It was well that some power should under- take the civilization of the natives even though difficulties and misunderstand- ings might ensue. If there had been (as some critics of the government seem to infer there were) 1The full story of the aims of the expedition and its start from New York on May 8, 1909, is told in the Journaut for October, 1910; various briefvarticles regarding the work in progress have appeared at intervals between that date and the present. 379 380 vast numbers of noble-minded and well- equipped men available for this task, progress would undoubtedly have been easier; but most men were deterred by the dangers and discomforts, and those offering their services were naturally of an adventurous and independent character. In many cases it proved to be a question as to whether the King of the Belgians could accept the responsi- bilities that naturally were connected with the services of such people, because positions in the Congo in those early periods often meant full autocratic power, with very little immediate con- trol by superior officers. In the greater part of what has been written however, about the Congo and its administration, these initial difficulties are overlooked and more criticism than praise has been bestowed. Men of high distinction and indubitably noble sentiments have en- rolled themselves in the campaign against this administration, in perfect good faith and in the belief that they were rendering a service to humanity. The greatest reproach — the matter which seemed to arouse unlimited criti- cism —was the collecting of rubber by natives in payment of their taxes, and the stories of the horrors connected therewith. There is no doubt at all that the sale of this rubber netted some very handsome financial gains, and cer- tainly honest criticism was much needed at one time in order to correct the methods employed by some of the administrative officers, who were natu- rally anxious to show what they consid- ered high ability in administrating their territories; or to put it correctly in just these faulty cases, in ruling what they considered their own little kingdoms. What was needed however was not a campaign against atrocities, but an honest effort toward improving certain conditions so as to induce a larger num- THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL ber of men of a higher type to live in the Congo. These might have devoted themselves actively to civilizing efforts, and by their very presence a change in defective conditions would have been brought about without causing embitter- ment. As a matter of fact, if the well- being and civilization of the natives alone are to be considered as the ultimate object of conquest, there are few portions of Africa which have a higher record for truly remarkable advance than the Belgian Congo itself; but the impetu- osity of the unfortunate campaign of the reformers is responsible for producing a number of laws of such great leniency that the strong and successfully guiding hand is often stayed by mappropriate measures, which positively injure the general welfare of the natives. Some of these laws actually seem systematically to encourage degradation by openly en- couraging idleness, although the negro would be perfectly willing to contribute his share to the progress and elevation of his race, which will probably never be attained except by giving him a fair chance for useful work and by estab- lishing correct compensation. This unsatisfactory legislation indeed, seems to have been the chief result achieved by the agitators, whereas if we consider the Belgian Congo as a whole, with a view to determining what great reforms have benefited the natives, we find that it is to the Belgian govern- ment that they are essentially due. The natives of the Congo like meat, and from all we saw they enjoy a mar- velous digestion. They have been called by opponents of the government “poor defenseless children.” As a matter of fact there were eleven millions of canni- bals, who in a single day probably killed for mere food purposes more of their un- fortunate fellow-men than the number laid by these critics at the doors of all T8& SOATVU OY} SUOUTR JUOUZUOJMOD JO 9}¥4S OY} JO PUL TONVAYSTUTUIpPL JUOTIUIOAOS ATOJOVIJSTVVS OY} JO OAISOBSns st sty, “Aanf{uy your 10 pozvoddesip peo] o[3uIs B yOu UOeUT OFT M Aq UOISTAJOdNS [VUOIsSedD0 ATMO YIM Osesoj10d ,sAVp AQJY JO doUBISIP V JOAO PollIVd SpeOT L8ZT 94} JO 4No ey} 4sodojUr ‘QuejSISSe OATIVU B JO A[WUO OSIvVYO UT S4oj10d yorylq Jo skepfor Aq ‘af{peiey Jo ysod oy} Suravoy suojsod porpuny e& Jo uvARIeO MYOA MAN OL ASNHYNOP ONOT YISHL ONILYVLS NOILIGSAdX4S ODNOO AHL AO SNOILOA1100 yonu JO joey BST AT ‘Wovo spunod A4xIs Jo peor. e surAaIvd Avp B SoTTU U90}JY OF U9} HEM AOUL qsod 0} 4sod woud speoy oy} Jo uoKez10dsue1y IOJ posuvaIe A[SNOo}MOD s[eVIoyjO JUSUTUIOAOK) Old Mobali man. The hair is allowed to grow long in age; the young men wear it shaven or short the trespassing government officials to- gether. Even their dead were often sold to neighbors to satisfy the hunger Incidentally — this for meat. horrible Azande woman. The headdress is made of human hair, woven upon a framework of rattan and decorated with cowrie shells THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL practice produced some fairly good results in eugenics, as in many tribes weakened people or crippled children helped to nourish their more sturdy brothers. From the very start the government stopped internecine war and cannibal- ism; invited professional reformers; made traveling through these regions practically safe; established a system of river navigation; drove out slave-traders and Mahdists; introduced an elaborate judiciary system, and built in spite of apparently insurmountable difficulties, a two-hundred-and-forty-mile railroad near the coast belt, which really meant the opening of the Congo to the world at large. For over two years we lived in a dis- trict where, at that time, probably greater quantities of rubber were being collected by the natives than in any other region of the Congo. We often received specimens for our zodlogical collections from these rubber caravans which entered the forest for a week or a fortnight. In fact they considered us rather as friends and thus we had ample opportunity of seeing them at work. Only a few re- marks are necessary to throw light on the general conditions as we observed them. Long ago, when cannibalism was still flourishing, these negroes always left be- tween the localities of the principal tribes large, uninhabited belts in the forest, so that the chance of continued or immedi- ate invasion by their ever-hungry neigh- bors might be slightly reduced. This belt was naturally also the hunting ground, as in such a reservation game was fairly abundant, and not many natives would dare to venture alone into this wilderness. At certain periods how- ever, two or three times a year, the great chiefs would collect their natives and would enter this uninhabited forest-belt, either to gather household necessities AN EXPLORER’S VIEW OF THE CONGO or with the intention of organizing a raid upon the villages beyond. They often formed caravans of several hundred in- dividuals — men, women and children — carrying everything for the necessities of life with them, most of the men of course being armed with spears and arrows. No halfway respectable negro would leave his wife in the village. Even the chief’s more important women would have considered it a disgrace if they had been compelled to stay at home. Naturally the children were only too glad of an outing and no mother would leave her youngster behind. The forest sup- plies these negroes with everything their small plantations are unable to provide: building and household mate- rial; meat to be dried over the fire; the hides of game; plants for medicines; a great many charms; in fact every- thing they cannot find in the neighbor- hood of their villages, where they have usually cut down the forest. Rubber collecting is exactly the same kind of occupation as this other collect- ing, only it excludes all raids. There is not the slightest change, except that the natives add rubber to all the other things they gathered before. The remunera- tion given by the state at the time we entered the Congo was still in trade goods of excellent quality. In 1910 the natives, in spite of delivering this rubber as taxes, received more for it than later in 1914 after the introduction of cur- rency, as the price of this commodity had then dropped in the European market. When we passed through the same region again the natives openly complained that the commercial agents paid even less than the government officials formerly. Before the advent of the government these natives had to work much harder, as a result of the continued destruction brought about by internecine war. Vil- lages were burnt down and plantations ©" A ‘Parisienne’’ of the Mangbetu tribe. The head is bound with a fine cord made of raffia, banana fibre or hair, while the natural hair is woven into a frame of rattan fibre. This toilet takes two days to perform destroyed and the men had to rebuild and replant and always to keep them- Makere woman. out as a tribal mark, and a bone pin is worn through the nasal septum The concha of the ear is cut selves fit for fighting. After the pacifi- cation of these regions, which actually contained so many able-bodied men, it was surely better that they should be intelligently organized so that their unemployed energies might serve the progress of civilization, than that they should be left to drunkenness and sloth. In most of the districts there was nothing of value but rubber and ivory, and the natives were put to work to collect some of the rubber. They prefer this work to porterage or road-making, which latter they consider a woman’s occupation. The freedom of trade and the intro- duction of currency could hardly have been brought about more rapidly. In many districts however, the first arrivals oS A pment - % Pygmies from Nala, in the Uele District. agricultural tribes for vegetables. plaster casts to be made of their faces THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL representing this freedom of trade were of the most ordinary class of adventurers, who considered the native but an object for their greed. The wisdom of with- holding these people so long was abun- dantly apparent, for only the confidence which the government officers enjoyed among the natives saved the lives of some of them. These natives are rather independent in their decisions and rash in action. . To-day the country is well policed; the natives are — or at least were before the war — perfectly peaceful, and in our six years among them we never saw a single atrocity. Fortunately the posi- tion of the lower administrative officers has been rendered much more attractive, They live by hunting, and exchange their spoils with the Two hundred of them visited the expedition and many allowed The pieces of iron in the shape of spearheads represent currency and, together with the dog and lumps of crude iron, constitute the man’s offering to the parents for his bride. The chief of the tribe, in public palaver, decides as to the justice of the bargain and now most of the men engaged look upon their more stable position with satisfaction. This alone does away with irresponsible actions and the increased comfort and security tends greatly to minimize the dangers of the dreaded Congo climate. Many of the local dis- turbances in administrating the native population have been due to the tempo- rary illness or general indisposition of European officers, who on this account were unable to show that high degree of patience and firmness which the success- ful handling of these natives requires. The latter express themselves as fairly content, comparing past times with the present. Only one blessing they still covet, “The remedy to avoid ultimate death.”” They have not the slightest tendency toward philosophic § specula- tion, nor are they capable of attaching themselves readily to purely spiritual beliefs. Their happiness or safety de- pends, according to their idea, upon all sorts of conditions or objects which, like a talisman, are supposed to possess powers of preventing mischief or disaster. So imbued are they with these supersti- tions that death, with all of them, is not the final and natural destruction of life but the result of witchcraft. Those who know the natives well never doubt that their faith is infinitely stronger than that of many Christians. Their superstitions are more than a belief. These superstitions often repre- sent stern laws the very cruelty of which frightens them away from wrong-doing. This is the rock of salvation for reform. These natives‘sometimes kill their fellow-men without what may be called a trial, but it is only a few hundred years since white men killed thousands of their brethren simply because they had a dif- 385 386 ferent faith or conviction, and it is only to-day that they recognize that the defec- tive organization of society is responsible for many criminals. None of the natives indulge any longer in cannibalism; yet those most anxious to help them, and many of the professional reformers, Makere women and children watching a dance. heads are wrapped to lengthen the occipital region, this elongation being considered a mark of beauty. speak even now about their “degraded condition,” ‘shameless manners,” and “behaviour like animals,” perhaps be- cause the warm climate allows them to walk about in just the state that seems, from all accounts, to have been the most satisfactory in Paradise. The dancing costume of the women" consists of a green banana leaf slit into ribbons THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL They are not necessarily degraded because they enjoy life according to their own standards, which in essentials do not differ so very widely from those of civil- ized people; nor because they are cap- able of living well on native food with- out silverware or china. It is true that they are born and die in the densest super- stition, but this latter is their religion, their code of morals, their own very rigid set of laws, which binds them together in spite of all savage feeling in true democratic spirit. The saw dis- played a most admira- ble spirit of fellowship, negroes We cordially assisting one another in any diffi- culty. They might be hungry themselves but they unselfishly divided their food, and this so naturally that anyone could see that the con- trary would have con- stituted a breach of the generally accepted The great- est fallacy in judging standards. natives is the common habit of travelers and many residents of bas- ing their judgment about them upon infor- mation received from workmen, servants or half-civilized negroes. Even the most truthful individuals among these natives generally try to speak from the white The children’s man’s point of view, displaying in this great shrewdness, so that any question asked is answered with the desire of pleasing the inquirer. This really ac- L8& e 119d W9pooOM sqI YIM Sop Suyuny oy Jo pre eyy Aq Sjou oY} PAVMO} UDATIP puv Poors} sy [RUTUR oY, “punoris oY} Yono} 07 Ysnf se os syoys Aq A[[VoA0A poqsoddns pur JoYyI0S0) pousysey ore Arwvd AOI sqou OU, INNH V WOY4 MOVE ‘SSAILVN 3YSyVAN 388 counts for the many contradictory state- ments as to what would benefit these tribes most and what might be their greatest grievances. The missionary societies in many cases receive special subsidies and are teaching mainly elementary classes in principal centers such as Boma and Stanleyville, some extending facilities for certain branches of industrial train- ing. A really unified system of educa- tion can be introduced only when the facilities of communication lead to a greater centralization of the now widely scattered population. It is probable that the present war- fare in Central Africa, and especially in the Congo Basin, will prove relatively more disastrous to the black race of these regions than the European war to the different nations engaged therein; in spite of the fact that the belligerents on both sides have given out orders to the native soldiery to direct their princi- pal aim to the destruction of the com- manding white officers, so that it is not remarkable that only very few black men have been killed in the various en- gagements. Neither firearms nor plosives will play havoc among the e€x- THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL natives, but unfortunately the greater part of the territory in which this war- fare is waged includes the districts most affected by the terrible sleeping-sickness, such as the Uganda, Tanganyika, Kat- anga and Sanga frontiers. Thousands of armed natives will certainly be in- fected before their dispersal at the con- clusion of the war. They will carry this dread disease into nearly every re- gion. Since the tsetse flies, the carriers of the sleeping-sickness germs, are widely distributed they will cause the rapid spread of this plague, for if they have an opportunity to suck the blood of only one infected person they may cause dis- aster by transmitting the disease to others living nearby. Once a region is thor- oughly infected the natives are simply wiped out. This condition is the more hopeless since the usual prophylactic measures are considerably weakened as a result of the war and there is thus prac- tically no hope of checking the scourge; for it needs the most exacting efforts of a well-equipped medical service, which en- tails an enormous expenditure. Most authorities believe that after the conclu- sion of peace there will be no large funds available for the benefit of African colonies. Logo women dancing in thanksgiving for a good harvest REPRODUCTIONS IN DUOTONE OF PHOTOGRAPHS GIVING GLIMPSES OF THE LIFE OF THE NATIVES IN THE CONGO Photographed in Africa between 1909 and 1915 by Mr. Herbert Lang Ae ore B fbn +e & tn Ve x pw *% * ee 4 ¥ Ai : ‘ ahs ot ee ai ~ ars s “am, ‘ “Firs en at's Ye > NMSA Davee at Vhs Stoke Oe el =: MBS, a : " \ LOGO HUNTERS OF FARADJE, UELE DISTRICT They use these large bows and arrows for the bigger game, as antelopes and wild pigs. In war they pull the string with a twang-which startles the foe, causing him to stop or turn, when a quickly fitted arrow brings him down. ‘The small bells attached to the bow each indi- cate a particularly fine shot; during a hunt the bells are stopped with leaves but at a dance they jingle merrily. The man in front is a famous elephant hunter, the most famous in his tribe puvy Jayjte uo ‘daap aaj Uaalzy SAUIAWIOS ‘19}eM JY} POA O} YOO1 ay} UO Sulouvyeq ‘Jods awes ay} yw daap-1apjnoys }SOW[L VpVM O} pasttqo sem Ajn[ UL Youq SuLwod ynq ‘Yoo JO saspl oyl[Wep ‘suo] ay} JO 9UO UO W|.I}s SIy] passo1o Ajuvd s Suey apy Avy UT NOSV4S AUG FHL NI 'SCOVeVA YVAN VWOLV YSAIY AHL bk = on Cet See . TR alte PS S9qlI} INYO puV alayxVIY ‘Njaqsuvyy IY) SIOGYSlou Itay} Wos VINj}[NO [VIIa}BVU JO AVM ayy UL YONU pajdope puv peuivea] aaey Ady} a1a4YM pue ‘paysi[qeise ATWAy Mou aie Ady] V1aYM ‘IpURYOWO, a[NAIF 910 JY OJUL UMOP ULpNS dy} Wo AVM IaYy} Surysnd ‘preMyjnos ay} 0} S1oqy slau 19} UO 1M Suryeu AT[(eNuyUOS a19M Ain}UIS YJUda}aUTU aU} JO J[VY 19}}L] OY Sump pue ‘suowueM sv snowy are | ‘WIN-WIN ,, 10 ‘apuezy at], VYVONVIN YVAN ‘A9OVITIA S.VOIZNVYW NI..ASO DNIMOHS.. NANYVAdS JGNVZV “tI 7 EQS MANZIGA, A CHIEF OF THE AZANDE All important Azande chiefs in this region belong to the Avungura, the reigning clan. Most of the Azande believe that after death they will be reincarnated as animals, and the Avungura will then become lions. Manziga is one of the most important native chiefs around Niangara, ruling a large territory. He is unusually intelligent and exhibits much tact and diplomacy in deal- ings with the Belgian administration HEAD WIFE OF CHIEF ABIEMBALI; MAYOGO TRIBE, ITURI DISTRICT Beneath the small, square-topped hat of woven vegetable fiber, she wears a sort of skull-cap adorned with hundreds of dogs’ teeth, mostly canines. The crown of the hat is decorated with the red tail-feathers of the African gray parrot, which bird is often kept in captivity so that the much prized feathers can be pulled out as fast as they grow. The larger hatpin is made entirely of ivory, while the smaller consists of a thin, pointed bone from the forearm of a monkey SOSNOY AY} JO S|[VM OY} UO JIM puB Youlq ‘pat ul payuled sustsap ayy Jo Aple[nsaa ay} punoisyovq ul aJ0N ‘s[vAJayUL Jv A[UO pasodia}Ul SUleg SAUO JaS1L] ay) WOIZ }Vaq a[SUIs v ‘19}U99 ay} UL SWO}-WO} [[BUIS OM) AY Aq paonpo.d st astou ay) Jo Iso puv sdauunp jtadxe A[[eMoadsa aye sAoq [[VUIg *adLI[IA ay) Ul SedURP LOJ BW] Yeaq 0} pasn 10 AaUANOl v UAAtTUA 0} JarYO B Jaye palavo aiv asayy, NLAGONVW AHL AO SNWOL-WOL NS3QGQ0OM GNV SNYOH ANOAI aie py j= leg A Saxe} 10F s}diaoad JUBIUIDAOS aie ‘UAL ay) JO OM} Aq UIOM ‘S[RpaW WNUTWN]R [[BWS ay, “syaryo UMO Jay} Aq patna pue uorssaiddo wiosyz 9a.1j 918 MOU nq ‘apuezy ay} Aq uodn podaid AjAawaA0j; 919M pure a[doad jso10j o1v OSayT, INMH WsAaSSADSSONAS V ONILVESEATSSD SAYSaHNVN SHL AO SAONVG ‘so[puey Surpraoid [le} pue peasy 9uy SuoS [eusis aBiv[ & st punossoioj ay} UT = *SpA09 yAeq YA\ punog pue ‘pROIG YIM JYSY-ayVM SPU SJOOI ay} puw “Y1Bq JO sdijs YIM pasaaoo aie sasnoy at{} JO S[[e OL QoUBP IO SBI} 1OF UOTUUINS 0} 10 ASETIIA O} aSEI[IA Wor [BUSIS 0} pasn ST 1] ‘TeuUe Uv axl] podeys pue dal} B JO YUNA} oY} WO, UMOY ‘ Sla}fe1 94} O} SUIA}S I1aYy Aq payor}e Saava| Jey NONNY YVAN ADVTITIA NLAGONVN V NI ANAOS 9AOGE UMOYS SI ASRI[IA SIF] ‘*pnoad Ar9A st ay sty) JO “UOT}P.YSIUIUIpe UeIS[ag a4} Aq paziusooas sev yueI sly jo USIS [BIOYJO AY} SI You sIy Woy Sursuey pepou asiel ayy, ‘a[doad sty jo awios are pulyeq pue sjueasas 4JaIHSD NLAGONVW LNANINOd V'‘'VONVAG Apoq a[euay OM} pur}s uly apisog [PARI] BANU JSOU pajyuaaoid TEM [eqIIjI19}UI SuvadoINY Jo JUIAp 9} A10JOq Jn Ysa10J 9Y} YSNO1Y} spvo1 Jo Suruado ay} YIM JaYyJaS0} ‘Mou paseinooua SI saspiiq yons Jo Sulpjing sy yj, ‘surer Aq uaTjoms SI Ureat}S JY} UY JUdLINS 9Y} 0} BdULISISOI yeaIS Jo sjqedvo puv saulA Suos Aq 1ay}980} punog sajod 1apuays AUeIU JO S}sISUod }] NdVIN YVAN ‘VWIE AHL SSOUOV 39CIYa AAILVN sjuaivd ay} Jo sje JayjO pue oysawop oy} Sutures [eloods jnoYIIM Uv] ‘UspIeS pue ISKI[IA Ul Surdjay Aq ‘pue saat aaagorvo ‘Addey pee] usipyiyo asayy, “A[fweyz 1ayjOuN o}uL usxv} SABM]R SI ply uBYydio uv snyy ‘ asuadxa 10 Joqe] a[}I1] SAATOAUI UaIp[Iyo dn Sursuiq pue [njynuejd st pooy ‘usapyiyo ssayawoy jo asuas 9} Ul ‘OSuOD ay} ul SuvYydio OU a1v ala, J, SA9OVTITIA AHL NI AV1d OL YAHLVS ASHL SV NAYCTIHD AIA IVAN suooudayye AVpUNG UO SUOI}L}S JUDWUIDAOS Ul UDUIYIOM SAU Y}IM So}1OAV] ae puv ‘s}OII}SIp payesedas ATapIM Ul UdAS aq 0} ae ‘SUISUIS pue a[OII0 a4} Opisul Uayveq suIMAp YAIM ‘adA} Suyejos-A[MO]sS ‘xepNoI19 sty} Jo Sooueq = ‘“awiysed 107 ul pasjnpul osye ore Ady) ‘aouvoylUsIs sNOLsljaI uaJO aavY SadUep YSNoYT, SaraqvuVva YVAN ‘NSAWOM SCNVZV AO SONVAG INSERT PRINTED BY Mexican laborers at work clearing a part of the oldest eastern section of the ruin at San Pedro Viejo. The debris thrown out is a mixture of ashes and lumps of adobe from the fallen walls, in and under which are buried numerous human skeletons; also various implements, pottery, charred maize, and animal bones. View looking northwest ANCIENT CITIES OF NEW MEXICO! By N. C. Nelson ONG before Columbus and _ his Norse predecessors set foot on American soil there had arisen a peculiar type of town-building people in the southwestern part of the United States. This is a fact which at first strikes the observer as_ paradoxical. To the modern traveler who hastens across New Mexico and. Arizona by train or auto, the country seems foreign, being apparently devoid of all the forms of life familiar to him in the East. He sees mostly bare, tawny-colored plains and rockbound mesas, interspersed with black lava-sheets and flying sand. The beds of nearly all of the tortuous streams winding through the landscape 1This article was written by Mr. Nelson on November 2, out-of-doors, as he sat on the ruin under process of excavation and watched the men work. It was despatched to New York the day following from Camp Pueblo Pasko, Sante Fé, the expedition’s immediate base of operations in New Mexico. The illustrations in this article and the following are from photographs by Mr. Nelson.— Tue Epitor. are dry and lifeless and he conse- quently deems the whole region a desert waste incapable of supporting human existence. This estimate is only partially correct however, for while the southwest is arid and desert-like it is nevertheless far from infertile. Natural oases exist in this, as in other deserts, and artificial oases can be and have been created and maintained, from early aboriginal days to the present. In this region the ruins indicative of former life number tens of thousands. Not only this but the particular environmental conditions ob- taining here, and which appear so un- favorable, have produced, in a certain sense, the highest type of native American culture that we have within the limits of the United States. In speaking of the Southwest therefore, two outstand- ing factors, viz., aridity and fertility, must always be mentioned in conjunc- tion. These two factors have wrought 389 Excavated rooms in another of the oldest sections of the San Pedro Viejo ruins. the excavations is the ancient cornfield and farther on the Arroyo San Pedro. San Pedro Mountains. View looking east themselves deeply into the life and char- acter of the native people and have largely made them what they are. Town-building in the Southwest had its beginning in the distant past and reached its climax before the arrival of the white man. The first native settlers (at least-in the northeastern section of the pueblo area) who have left definite traces of themselves, appear to have lived in more or less thickly scattered small houses of one or two rooms. Just what relation these small-house dwellers bore to later village dwellers is not yet 390 Directly beyond In the distance are the clear, except in so far as their general mode of life appears to have been identi- cal. The question as to what brought about town-building is not easily an- swered. One may be strongly inclined to say that the Indian village (of which there are several types) had its origin in bare economic necessity. This as- sertion cannot however entirely preclude social and defensive considerations, and so, if we are to be on safe ground, we must allow credit to all three factors — eco- ‘nomic, defensive and social. The particular type of pueblo studied during the past three or four years by the Muse- um’s expedition to the Rio Grande valley of New Mexico includes some of the largest an- cient towns known in the Southwest. The ruins vary in size to be sure but several of them contain, or con- tained, from five hun- dred to three thousand five hundred rooms and more. The number of their inhabitants can- not be definitely esti- mated, but judging from the present-day Indian villages, some of which show a popula- tion ranging from one hundred to one thou- sand seven hundred, these ruins must in their day have sheltered even larger groups. These towns-people were not, as In our own modern cities, great masses of unorganized humanity, continually competing for a living at multifa- rious pursuits. They were rather closely or- ganized coéperative so- cieties, essentially com- munistic. The Indian’s needs were few but those few were imperative. In consequence of this his activities were limited and corre- spondingly intense. Agriculture was his mainstay and good crops generally de- pended on artificial watering. Under such circumstances, one man being un- able single-handed to maintain an irri- Excavated section across a communal building at Pueblo Tunque, showing the full width of six rooms. good condition, but the rooms do not ordinarily show such regularity in size and arrangement The walls are of adobe and in gation system, the natural outcome was coéperation. Codéperation was similarly necessary for purposes of defense against the inroads of less provident neighbors; for as there is no reason for supposing these permanently settled agriculturists to have been aggressive warriors, we 391 668 YNos SuryOo] MorA ‘SSuTpymq oqope posdej[oo Jo sseur ev st puoseq pure 4YSII oY} 07 odeds OF,L, “SMOTOaS ySaP[O OY} JO 9UO UT SUTOOI JO SoIOS PoPVAVOXT SNINY OFSIA OYGSd NVS AHL NI £6 poxVAVOXO SUING SVM SOT SUIIOMOZ OY} JO do} oY} WO UNI & OTITM UWOMIpedxe uMoesny[ 9} JO Stoqtoul LOJ dured se OS[@ POAIOS OUO SIT, “SUeTIPUT Aq PoJIGeYUT ooUO o1OM Te pue AQITBOOT OY} UT 4STxXo 'so.Avo Yons Jo Sporpuny{ «= “RJN} OTUROTOA OY} UT 9ARD PosreTUO ATRYN ILIHOOO*HVAN ‘OfSIA OHYAYLOd JO 3SVE AHL LV AAVO 394 must think that their safety lay in well- organized defense. What more natural therefore, than that they should have coéperated in the planning and construc- tion of large houses, capable of sheltering every family or household of the group and especially adapted for defense? Large communal houses are frequently found which must have been two to five or more stories high and which contained several hundred rooms. The majority of the ruined villages contain a series of these large houses, arranged on a quad- rangular plan; this arrangement being also, clearly, an element of defense. In other words the typical village finally evolved in the area under in- vestigation by the Museum is suggestive THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL of our modern apartment-house cities but differed from them in this funda- mental respect; that the Indian built his houses where our streets are and left intervening blocks open, not for the sake of light and air perhaps, but as places for industrial and social activities. That type of village is now practically extinct. The Indian need no longer guard himself against marauding neigh- bors and the government stands ready to help him with his irrigation projects. Schooling has also had its effect on the younger generation. The compact com- munal settlements are breaking up and the Pueblo Indian is returning once more to the life in separate and scattered houses like his ancient forefathers. ro ye Excavated room in the San Pedro Viejo ruin, showing two bins and one fireplace — the latter set into the floor; also some of the mealing stones and cooking slabs found in the debris Excavated rooms at San Pedro Viejo, showing a human burial, also two pottery vessels set into the floor for storage purposes EXPLORATIONS IN THE SOUTHWEST BY THE AMERICAN MUSEUM By Clark Wissler HE Museum began in 1909 a systematic investigation of the native inhabitants in the great romantic area known as the Southwest. Of all localities in the United States this is the richest in archeological re- mains and the most conservative and aboriginal tribes are found within its borders. In the past, enough research had been carried on in the Southwest to make it clear that the magnitude and complexity of the problems to be solved were beyond the limits of the regular resources of the Museum, and that it would be unwise to take up work in that part of the country until substantial outside support could be found. In 1909 Mr. Archer M. Huntington offered to give support to the undertaking. Accordingly, the curator of anthro- pology worked out a general plan, in conformity with which the work has pro- ceeded until now. In the main this plan was to take up the historical problem in the Southwest to determine if possible the relations between the prehistoric and_ historic peoples. It was decided to concentrate the Museum’s energies upon the Upper Rio Grande Valley, because that seemed 395 Excavated rooms in Pueblo Tunque, showing connecting doorways, also a corner bin and a human burial accompanied by two broken pottery vessels Cross-section of an artificial dam at Pueblo San Cristobal. The Tano villages that were not by nature supplied with sufficient water, possessed large reservoirs constructed by throwing a dam across a shallow ravine in order to catch the rain and melting snow 396 Corrugated jar found in the corner of a room in the oldest section of the San Pedro Viejo ruin. Note the solid adobe floor on level with the top of the vessel but dug away except at the rear most likely to have been the chief center of Pueblo culture as we now know it, and because there were to be found there numerous ruins which according to Bandelier, belonged to the immediate ancestors of the living people. The studies of the living races were to in- clude not only the sedentary natives of the Rio Grande Valley, but also the less sedentary people of the same area, in particular the various groups of Apache and the Navajo. It was contemplated that when the historical problem in this particular area had been brought to a fair completion, the work would be extended westward into Arizona so as gradually to unravel the historical puzzle of the Southwest. While this was a very ambitious undertaking, the reports of our several field parties! show that 1 Schedule of Field-Work, 1909-1915: 1909 — Dr. P. E. Goddard first began work among the Apache of Arizona and New Mexico and Dr. H. J. Spinden began his investigation of the Rio Grande Pueblo peoples. Dr. Clark Wissler spent a considerable part of this year and 1910 ina general survey of the field to the end that more systematic detailed plans might be developed. 1910 — Dr. Goddard continued work among the Apache tribes and the Navajo and Dr. Spinden continued the investigation of the Rio Grande pueblos. Miss M. L. Kissell made a special investigation of the textile arts among the Papago and Pima tribes. Excavated room at Pueblo Tunque, showing a small enclosure framed with stone slabs and with- in which a meiate is fixed in place for grinding maize ia Te 1911 — Dr. Goddard made a special investiga- tion of the Kiowa-Apache; Dr. Spinden con- tinued his work among the Rio Grande pueblos. 1912 — Dr. Wissler made a second general survey of the field especially in connection with the contemplated archeological work by Mr. N. C. Nelson. Mr. Nelson made a general surface survey of the whole Rio Grande Valley from El Paso north, and later in the season began the systematic investigation of pueblos in the Galisteo Basin. This included the thorough excavation of Pueblo Kotyiti, a site whose history was fully known but which had been in ruins for more than two hundred years. Dr. Spinden continued his work among the Rio Grande pueblos. 1913 — Dr. Spinden completed his work among the Rio Grande pueblos. Mr. Nelson continued his archeological work in the Galisteo Basin. : 1914 — Dr. Goddard was again investigating the Apache and was accompanied by Mr. Howard McCormick to secure sketches and photographic material for exhibition purposes. Mr. Nelson continued excavations in the Galisteo Basin. 1915 — Professor A. L. Kroeber of the Uni- versity of California volunteered to spend the summer at Zuni Pueblo where he secured a large collection for our exhibition halls and made a special study of Zuni social organization, and in addition gathered data on the ruins in the vicinity 397 398 very substantial progress has been made in the solution of the problem, and that in so far as the Rio Grande Basin is concerned, a definite conclusion has been attained. As the work now stands the ethno- logical survey of the Rio Grande vil- lages (by Dr. Herbert J. Spinden) has been nearly completed. In this work especial attention was given to material culture and art, since these are the two phases of culture that survive and leave their indices in archeological collections. Investigation of the less sedentary peoples (by Dr. Pliny E. Goddard) has from which a chronological or historical classifica- tion of them can be made. Dr. Robert L. Lowie visited the Hopi pueblos to study their social organization and_ relationship systems. The specific problem here is to see whether any im- portant Shoshonean traits of culture still survive among the Hopi, since they are a Shoshone- speaking people, Mr. Nelson again worked in the Galisteo Basin and made surface surveys south- westward to the vicinity of Zuni. In co6dperation with the University of Colorado an expedition among the cliff ruins of Southern Colorado was carried on. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL progressed satisfactorily so that we now have fairly complete studies for several divisions of the Apache. It remains for the future to extend the work to the Navajo. The archeological work (by Mr. N. C. Nelson) was begun in 1912 and as far as the northern part of the Rio Grande Valley is concerned is now nearly complete. The net result of this work has been to make clear the chrono- logical relations of the various ruins in the vicinity, which in turn enables us to determine their historic relation to the living peoples. It is planned that the work shall con- tinue more intensively during the next few years than heretofore, since the way is now clear to a chronological classifica- tion of many groups of ruins. Thou- sands of dollars have been contributed to unearth the ancient civilizations of Egypt and the East, while here within our very borders are crumbling ruins of a past that has an intimate relation to our national history. Image of a ‘‘panther,”’ sculptured in volcanic tufa, found lying in the center of a ruined circular shrine on top of Potrero de los Idolos, a short distance west of the Rio Grande and the Tano habitat proper, ‘The shrine is said to be still visited by the Indians of Pueblo Cochiti whose ancestors are supposed to have built the place ANIMALS OF BLOWN GLASS By Herman O. Mueller HE technique of glass-blowing is many sided and allows con- struction of intricate and truth- ful models from life, of animals as well as of plants such as the famed Harvard glass flowers. The invention of the blowpipe at the early date of the first century before Christ, opened up an era for glass-modeling. In the process pre- vious to that time molten glass or “ glass paste” had been molded free-hand over a clay form, which could be easily re- moved after the glass cooled. The blowpipe consists of an iron tube Ba ee wen Naps atte ee - by The blast lamp is an essential part of the equipment, but the trained eye and hand of the worker are his most important tools about one and one-half inches long and one and one-fifth inches in diameter, with the aid of which the glass paste is blown to the desired shape. The mechanical tools which the glass-blower uses have always been very simple and relatively unimportant, but the natural instruments — the eye and the hand of the worker — are of the greatest signifi- cance. The most important instrument in glass-blowing is the blast lamp. This is a very simple affair and consists of a brass tube about three-quarters of an inch in diameter and three to four inches long, into which a smaller tube is inserted. The larger tube supplies the gas and the smaller one the air. The relative quantity of gas and air is regu- lated by means of cocks attached to the tubes. A steady air pressure to increase the heat intensity of the flame is created by means of bellows, or still better by a compressed-air pump. In early times an oil lamp was used in this apparatus, and the name “lampen arbeiter’’ was applied to the users to distinguish them from the workers in the glass factories. In some of the European glass-blowing districts the oil lamp is still used for glass-blowing. The gas lamp however is of course far supe- rior. It naturally produces a consider- ably more powerful flame, and_ this makes possible the modeling of much larger objects. Other tools for glass- modeling are forceps of various shapes, scissors, carbon and iron pencils of differ- ent sizes and forms, and files. The forceps are used for handling the separate pieces of glass while being welded; the scissors are used for cutting away the superfluous glass; the carbon and iron 399 400 pencils for widening the openings in glass tubes or finished parts, and the g I files for cutting glass tubes and rods. No iron molds of any kind are used for preparing glass models in the American Museum, but all parts are shaped free- hand from glass tubes and rods. Colored 5 glass is frequently used for the colored § 1 : parts, but if the desired tints and shades of glass are not available, plain crystal glass is molded into shape and the colors g I applied later with the brush or with an air-brush. The process of using glass as a medium for representing animals will be realized Stages illustrating the modeling in glass of the microscopic animal Gonium. These little, single-celled creatures live in colonies of sixteen together, and there may be very many such colonies in a drop of water THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL in some degree if we follow the construc- tion of a glass model — for example, that of a colony of the protozoan Gonium. From a glass tube of about one-half inch diameter, a piece about two inches long is separated by means of the blast lamp, blown in the flame to a cuplike shape and opened out to its whole width at one The gas flame is brought into action on the opening and the force of the flame will by itself enlarge the opening; but if the carbon pencil is rotated inside the heated area at the top of the cup this will flange it out more quickly. end. To imitate the coloring seen in the living Goniwm individual, which seems to shade from a deep green below to a light, almost transparent tint above, hundreds of little green glass particles are welded to the inner surface of the glass cup before it is wid- ened out, until the desired tints are secured. To do this a green-colored glass rod is broken up into small pieces and these are further ground in a mortar to the desired grain. A_ small quantity of these particles is strewn inside the cup which is then rotated in the gas flame until the green parts begin to fuse and ad- here to the wall of the cup. This process is repeated until the desired intensity of the color is secured. When the green particles are applied thickly the color ismoreintense; when scat- tered, a lighter tint results. After this the other parts of the animal such as nu- ANIMALS OF BLOWN GLASS cleus, vacuoles and chromatophores, are fashioned separately from small tubes or solid rods of colored glass and fast- ened within the cup. The nucleus is blown from a small green glass tube into a hollow ball about one-quarter inch in diameter. One end is cut open for inserting the nucleolus which has been previously shaped from a green rod into a little solid bead. darker color than the tube used for the nucleus. To the solid bead, nucleolus, a short glass stem is attached This is of a or the by which it is to be supported within the hollow ball. When the nucleolus is in- serted into the ball, a little spot of the shell of this ball is heated and the sup- port of the nucleolus is fused to the wall of this shell. Then the opening of the shell is covered with enough hot glass to close it, and the nucleus is completed. The vacuoles are blown in the same manner as the nucleus, only they are of crystal glass and consist of only one shell. Nucleus and vacuoles have little stems attached to them by which they are fastened in the cup. The supports are placed where they will show least. After all the parts are ready to be inserted in the cup, one after the other, they are held in place by the forceps, a small area of the outer wall of the cup is heated and the supports of the parts are fused to the inner cup wall. When this is done, the cup is closed by heating the glass around the rim opening and draw- ing it together until a rough closing is obtained. The superfluous glass which forms in this manipulation, is pulled 1 Radiolaria are tiny, one-celled animals which possess the faculty of extracting silica from sea water and forming with it skeletal structures to protect their soft, jelly-like body. They are found in both fresh and salt water, particularly the latter, and are usually microscopic, but giants among them may attain the size of a pin’s head. There may be very many in a single drop of sea water, especially in the warmer seas, and they exhibit great variety of form 401 Early stage in the modeling of a simple radio- larian ! away little by little, and the resulting unevenness of the surface is smoothed out by reheating the closed portion and blowing several times through the hol- 402 low handle at the base of the cup. The air blown through the handle expands the heated glass and rounds off the cup. Then two short glass stumps (to which later flagelle are to be attached) fused to the top. Finally the point at the lower end where the cup was attached to the original tube, are is melted off and a short glass stem to serve later for the concealed = attach- ment is fastened in its place, but a little laria harrimani. to one side of the THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL Model representing a highly magnified specimen of the hydrozoan? Tubu- Welding the fine, threadlike cilia involves great difficulty; a very little careless manipulation will cause the blast lamp to mow down axis. Following this whole areas of them a somewhat larger cup is made and the finished closed cup is inserted into it, the outer cup is in 2 Hydrozoa are stationary, jelly-like animals which attach themselves to fixed or floating ob- jects and feed on the marine organisms which come within reach of their waving tentacles. Many of these creatures are microscopic and many live at- tached to one another in colonies. Many of these latter may be seen in the wharf-pile group at the American Museum Glass model of a jelly fish forming part of the wharf-pile group in the Darwin Hall of the American Museum. The two squids shown in the picture and the colonial hydrozoa attached to the wharf-pile are also fashioned in glass Usually the glass models are made with constant reference to the actual animal under the micro- scope, but in the case of this rare specimen of radiolarian very carefully made drawings, plates and diagrams only were available. A complicated model sometimes takes two or three months to construct Model of another radiolarian, highly magnified. When these minute organisms die their skeletons collect on the sea bottom forming a siliceous ooze. The island of Barbados, an elevation of the sea bottom, consists very largely of this radiolarian ooze and Barbados earth is used by jewellers for grinding and polishing 403 404 its turn closed and rounded off, and to this finally the two whiplike flagellz are attached. These are first drawn out from a glass rod into straight threads about the thickness of a fine needle, and then are curved by passing the glass threads through the flame sev- eral times in different directions. Now the glass stem retained at the lower end of the outside cup for a handle, is cut off short to serve as a concealed sup- port for attachment to the final mount. Models for the other fifteen individuals composing the colony are now con- structed in the same way and arranged on the mount in their proper places — and the model is complete. The model of the radiolarian further illustrates methods of glass-modeling. From a solid glass rod one-quarter inch in diameter, nine smaller rods are fash- ioned each about one-eighth inch in diameter and about four inches long. These are somewhat bent and attached at equal distances to the rim of a per- forated cup previously blown to repre- sent the skeleton of the central capsule. In this way the principal framework of the skeleton is prepared. In order to give it greater stability during the work, slender glass supports are welded tem- porarily to the lower ends of the rods. Then beginning at the central capsule small glass rods are welded horizontally to connect the larger elements of the skeleton, until finally the whole network is completed as shown in the figure of the finished model. Many protozoa are beset with count- less hairs or cilia, and in representing these the welding of such closely set, fine structures on the models involves great difficulty. Even on models represent- THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL ing great magnification these ciliafare often so fine that a little careless’ smanipu- lation with the blast lamp will cause whole areas of the heated cilia to col- lapse, mowed down like grass before the mower’s scythe. Although molten glass may i brought into hundreds of different shapes, never- theless the methods of blowing are always practically the same. It is the setting together of the separate parts however which requires great care and alertness, for when once the parts are wrongly joined they can be corrected only with difficulty or not at all, and it is usually necessary to reconstruct the entire piece from the beginning. In many cases, where several parts are welded together, the finished struc- ture must be thoroughly annealed. This is best done by greatly diminishing the air pressure in the blast lamp, when the glass parts are rotated steadily for some time in the smoke and flame of the weakened jet. This is necessary because in working the glass for a long time, alternately thinner and _ thicker places will occur. These produce an uneven tension and the glass will break if it is not carefully annealed. As mentioned above the methods of glass blowing are very simple. Only skill in the worker is necessary to pro- duce the most diverse shapes from the molten material. In order to attain this skill, years of training for hand and eye are necessary. The calling of the glass-blower so to speak is an inheri- tance from antiquity. The sons grow up to the father’s trade and devote themselves from early youth to the ac- quisition of the all-important feeling and skill. me vi i | is & , a wW ra THE AMERICAN MUSEUM’S REPTILE GROUPS IN RELATION TO HIGH SCHOOL BIOLOGY By George W. Hunter Chief of Biology, DeWitt Clinton High School, New York City é HE concept of “adaptation to environment” is one of the most difficult to teach pupils of high school age, whereas it is one of the most valuable from the civic stand- point.! Particularly is this true of New 1The DeWitt Clinton High School of New York City has classes in biology each year containing between two and three thousand young men. The American Book Company has recently published a small volume by Mr. Hunter on civic biology for high schools, from which the following is quoted. The quotation gives a glimpse of the aim of the work: ‘‘ Field {and Museum] trips, when properly organized and later used as a basis for discussion in the class room, make a firm foundation on which to build the superstructure of a course in biology. The normal environment, its relation York City boys and girls, because of their lack of previous knowledge of the to the artificial environment of the city, the relations of mutual give and take existing be- tween plants and animals, are better shown by field and museum trips than in any other way.” _...'*Many of us live in the city, where the crowded streets, the closely packed apartments and the city playgrounds form our environment. It is very artificial at best. ... We must remember that in learning something of the natural environ- ment of other living creatures we may better understand our own environment and our rela- tion to it.’’....‘‘The physiological functions of plants and animals, the hygiene of the individual within the community, conservation and the bet- terment of existing plant and animal products, the big underlying biological concepts {such as adaptation] on which society is built, have all been used [in the book] to the end that the pupil will become a better, stronger and more unselfish citizen.’’— Editor. 405 406 factors of the normal outdoor environ- ment of plants and animals. This, it seems, is true to a degree of any city child, but it is especially noticeable in the children of the lower congested portions of our great city, with its com- plex artificial environment and its abso- lute lack of normal relations existing between plants and animals in nature. To an increasing degree therefore, the American Museum has come to play an important part in filling in and round- ing out certain biological concepts as taught in our secondary school courses in this city. Not only is the Museum fulfilling its “big brother” capacity through sending out its loan collections of hygiene charts, its bird and insect collections, but also within its walls it has several valuable collections and groups which are of very great direct service to those of us who are near enough to use them for laboratory exer- cises. The hygiene exhibit, with its striking moral of public and private sanitation and hygiene, applies directly and indeed constantly, in its many- sided relationship, to the biological prob- lems as taught in a city high school. The Darwin hall, with its synoptic col- lections, enables the older pupils in advanced high school courses to obtain the meaning of evolutionary series, vari- ation and the struggle for existence. The bird, reptile and amphibian groups are of especial value to the high school pupil and teacher because of the clear text illustrating adaptations. All the readers of the JOURNAL are doubtless familiar with the habitat bird groups and the no less beautiful bullfrog group. But not all perhaps, are aware of the new toad group, which with its neighbors, the bullfrog, giant salamander and desert lizard groups, lies modestly hidden in the black re- cesses of the alcove on the second floor. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL Those of us who know Miss Dickerson’s Frog Book and its value, recognize at once the authoritative effectiveness of this series of groups. The new toad group breathes the very atmosphere of spring, with its opening buds and apple blooms. A tiny pool, spring-fed, close to the broken-down stone wall, the tangle of shrubs, under- growth and cat brier, the spring flowers — violets, adder’s-tongue, cowslip — and the warblers perched on shrub and tree, mark the time of year. The chief value of the group, from the standpoint of the teacher of biology, lies in the amphibian life that it contains, and the usefulness of these types in demonstrating the idea of adaptation to environment. In the right-hand corner of the group may be found numerous specimens of our common tree frog (Hyla versicolor). I say numerous with intention, because at each successive visit to this group I have found at least one more specimen, tucked away in some inconspicuous place and blending perfectly with its surroundings. What better material could we ask for the study of the adapta- tion illustrated by protective coloration? (And thisin spite of the Neo-Darwinians!) Toward the back and at the left are found examples of Fowler’s toad, one of our two common toads. Its life history is suggested in the egg strings, fresh laid at the first of May, and the adults, which we know in connection with gardens and dry land, also in the water. On the opposite side of the group is seen the larger and browner American toad and its tiny black tadpoles; for this toad lays its eggs about two weeks earlier than the Fowler’s toad. It is unnecessary to tell a teacher that in order to have a successful field or museum trip, he must first visit the locality, pick out the salient points of interest and work out a series of con- REPTILE GROUPS IN AMERICAN MUSEUM nected questions. These questions must be so arranged that the groups of students taking the trip will be scattered with the focus of work at several centers. The reptile and frog alcove is quite an ideal place for a laboratory exercise because the children taken there may be scattered at work on the several groups and at the same time be near enough to come under the direct supervision of the teacher in charge. The outline which follows will serve to indicate the use that one teacher has made of this alcove and will also illus- trate one of the several perhaps equally good methods of working out such a museum trip for the large classes found in the high schools of this city. Museum TRIP TO VISIT THE FROG AND Toap GRouUPS IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM or Naturaut History Purpose of the trip —To study adapta- tions to environment. Directions — Begin work at one of the two groups on which questions follow. Read the labels in front of each group and learn all you can about what the group contains before you begin to answer the questions. Then answer the following, making the answers tell a connected story for your note- book. Ask questions of your teacher only when you cannot find the answer yourself. Questions for Study of the Toad Group 1 — What time of year does it seem to be? How do you know? 2 — What wild flowers are most abundant at this time in this locality? 3 — What animals are found living in the water? On the land or in the trees? Is any kind of animal living both on land and in the water? What are such ani- mals called? (Amphi = both) 4 — Look for specimens of the tree frog (Hyla versicolor) at the right-hand side of the group. Describe three different phases of color in these frogs. How are changes of color in the nature of adapta- tions? 5 — Describe where and tell when toads lay their eggs. (Look in the right-center of the group.) 407 6 — Compare the egg masses of the toad with those of the frogs. (Note left center of the toad group for eggs of the green frog.) How are the eggs protected? 7 — Enumerate all the enemies of a toad seen in this group and tell how the toad is fitted (adapted) to escape from each of these enemies. 8 — Mention three structural adaptations found in a toad or frog which fit it for the life it leads. Explain exactly how each structure you have described is an adap- tation. Questions for Study of the Bullfrog Group 1 — Show three ways not mentioned in the last question in which the bullfrog is fitted or adapted to its environment. 2— How do you account for the large size of the tadpoles in the frog group? How is this long life of the tadpole of interest to the man raising frogs for market? 3 — What are some of the enemies of the bullfrog? How might it escape from its enemies? 4 — Explain exactly how a frog catches an insect. (See left-hand side of group.) 5 — Compare the habitat of the bullfrog with that of other amphibians found in the groups in this alcove. How is it fundamentally like the others and how does it differ? Similar questions might be worked out for the lizard and salamander groups. Doubtless other teachers have worked out questions; a collection and compilation of such questions would be of value to those of us visiting the Mu- seum frequently. All of us who now work in the Museum with our classes agree that the work we do there is yet in its very beginning. Its possibilities are almost limitless and with the splen- did codperation of the Museum authori- ties which we have had in the past, the future scope of Museum use by high school pupils and teachers will only be limited by the proximity of the Museum to the classroom or the willing- ness of the teacher to codperate with the Museum authorities. SOF SoAvO] Jopre pue sped ATI] JU9TNOONS oY} UO Pas PUL UIvAI4S OY} UL ope OF OFT] YOM ‘UOIsed 4B} JO Joop VIUISITA oY} AQ poquonboay Youur SyOepUOIIPY oY} UI Weeds AQuULYY o[suIYS uo 4ods ¥ sjuEseIdor ‘dno1s s,WIMesnA[ 9} JO PuNoIsyoVq oY} WIOJ 04 yjorpuvig AvueyMOoH “ay Aq opeur ‘sutured oy,L * dnoydS Yagaq HO4 AGNLS GNNOYDMOVE ne Leaving camp on the way to the salt-lick. [From motion-picture film] HUNTING DEER IN THE ADIRONDACKS ! By Roy Chapman Andrews OR eight miles through the Brand- reth Preserve in the Adiron- dacks, Shingle Shanty stream follows a winding, twisting course, at last losing itself in Lake Lila. Everywhere the stream is beautiful, its dark water, as a perfect mirror, reflecting the balsams, pines and feathery tamaracks of the virgin forest. Dark green alders form a thick curtain on either bank, some- times giving place to small, grassy meadows but clos- ing In again as the stream narrows, to lock hands across the water. During midsum- mer when the blaz- ing sun has dried the woods and the air is fragrant with the scent of balsam, deer wade into the stream to feed upon the succulent lily in the ground. picture film] pads and grass which choke its course. 1 Through the courtesy of Colonel Franklin Brandreth and Mr. Frederick Potter, the Museum was granted the privilege of securing on their preserve at Brandreth Lake the specimens and accessories for a group of Virginia Deer. The Museum is also indebted to Mr. Courtenay Brandreth for the background study, a photo- graph of which is here reproduced. The ‘‘blind’’ at the salt-lick. bag, kept.open by a spread umbrella supported This is where Mr. Andrews lay in wait with the camera. Our tents were pitched on a curve of the stream in a grove of spruce and balsams, where we had a clear view for two hundred yards up the broad path of water to a ragged'sky line cut by the pointed summits of pines and tamaracks. I shall never forget the first night in camp at the close of a perfect day. When the yellow rays of the lowering sun shot deeply in- to the forest the hermit thrushes be- gan their evening song, every liquid, flutelike note clear- cut and wonder- fully anuisi es) against the back- ground of perfect stillness. As the light dimmed, one A huge, green [From motion- by one the thrushes ceased, leaving only the voices of a few “whitethroats” sleepily calling to one another from the alders across the stream. Then the stars came out, low and brilliant in the clear air, and in the night our tent glowed from the light within like a great golden pumpkin in the forest. The next morning work began. At daylight we were in the canoe, stealing 409 Flashlight picture of two does at the salt-lick in the forest. The salt was placed in an old tree trunk a month before the advent of the hunters, so that the deer had become accustomed to going there Our camp on Shingle Shanty stream in the Adirondacks noiselessly down the stream, hugging the bank on the open stretches and shooting swiftly around the narrow curves, hoping to catch a deer in the water feeding on the lily pads. I sat in front with the motion-picture camera on the very bow and a rifle by my side, but the work was not very evenly divided 410 for my wife in the stern was responsible for all the paddling. We were out seven hours but it was a morning of disappointments for, from a heavy rain two days before, the water everywhere covered the grass and other vegetation growing in the stream. Sev- eral times deer crashed in the bushes HUNTING DEER IN THE ADIRONDACKS beside us but we could not see through the leafy wall of alders. It was evident that, until the water lowered, work on the stream was useless, so we next tried a “salt lick’? above camp. A month before we came, Courtenay Brandreth had filled an old log half full of salt and it was now so torn and pawed that the story was there for all to read. The lick lay in a lovely spot beside the water under two splendid pine trees, This little doe returned again and again, insatiably curious to solve the mystery of the camera. She was always easily frightened how- ever, and it took ten hours of crouching in the blind to obtain the film 411 In the bushes across the stream we concealed veritable castles in the air. one of Dr. Chapman’s bird blinds, which consists of a huge green bag kept open by a spread umbrella supported in the ground. Inside we placed the motion- picture camera and settled ourselves on two camp stools with books and a rifle. All the afternoon we waited, kept in a fever of excitement by a deer which snorted and stamped in the forest behind the alders. Startled by the whir of the hidden motion- picture camera, she stood for only a few sec- among onds. [From motion-picture film] Off to cover. This series of five photographs from the motion-picture film represents only one-sixth of a second in action 412 the lick but was too suspicious to come to the water. The next day there was better luck and for ten hot, breathless hours we sat in the bushes, fighting mosquitoes and “punkies” but thrilled by the picture before us. We had reached the “blind” at six o'clock in the morning and it was eight before anything happened; then sud- denly there came a soft swashing in the water below. A deer was wading slowly up the stream and as its head appeared around a clump of alders, not ten feet away, I started the camera. With a snort of surprise the animal dashed up the bank into the woods. It was a two year old doe out on an early morning ramble, and I was sure she had been so badly frightened that we would not see her again that day. Her curiosity, how- ever, counterbalanced her fear and half an hour later, with a few nervous snorts and much stamping of her pretty feet, she ventured down the hill toward the old log. When the whir of the camera sounded like an angry rattlesnake from the bushes she stood for a few seconds, but suddenly lost heart and whirled away into the forest, her white tail frantically waving in the air. Again and again she returned, drawn by insatiable curiosity, but never to stand longer than twenty or thirty seconds. We sat in the blind for ten hours, cramped and hot and fly-bitten, and at the end had not more than sixty feet of film, but the excitement of the day had been immeasurable; I learned too that it would be pretty hard to kill a deer, for watching the little doe had suddenly made it sickening to think of snuffing out its life with a bullet. Several more days were spent at the blind with success only from the picture standpoint, but every day the stream was becoming more nearly normal and we hoped for results within a week. Then on the night of July 20 the heavens opened and for three hours the rain fell in torrents. The sheer weight of pound- ing water threatened to tear our tent in shreds, but the silk had withstood tropical storms of equal violence and we spent a comfortable night when the roar outside had ceased. The next morning the stream was almost in our camp, which the guides had said was well be- yond the reach of summer freshets. All day the water rose, but we had carried our food and blankets to higher ground and for a week remained in an open camp a few hundred yards away. It was useless to think of work upon the streams or ponds for at least a fort- night, because the woods were so soaked with water that the deer had moved to higher ground. We hunted diligently but the never-ceasing rain was a serious handicap and not until mid-August did I shoot a buck suitable for the group; a doe and fawn were secured a week later. It was a labor of love to select a spot for the background of the group, for almost any curve of the stream was a picture in itself. With Mr. Courtenay Brandreth who had volunteered to make the field painting, we paddled up and down discussing the possibilities of every portion and, as the artist, he finally selected an open stretch, where on one side the alders gave place to a grassy meadow with the blue summit of Albany mountain far in the distance. ,'At this very spot a few days later as the canoe slipped around the curve, we surprised three does feeding in the stream and a fourth upon the bank. For a moment they stared at us but, as the camera began to whir, in great leaps they dashed for the friendly cover of the alders only to stop a few yards within the forest to blow and stamp in protest at the in- terruption of their breakfast. September was ushered in by the dry, hot weather we had hoped for all sum- mer — just when our work had been com- pleted and it was time to start for home. Doe, startled by the sound of the camera, plunging frantically into the forest. [From motion-picture film] 413 414 But the last few days were full of fever- ish excitement, for the stream swarmed with deer driven to the water by the heat and the flies. One morning we “jumped”’ five does The first was at the end of a long lane of water, in almost as many minutes. all but her head submerged, feeding on the tender alder leaves which dipped low toward the surface. We were in full view before it was possible to swing in toward the shore, but my wife sent the canoe forward so noiselessly that the deer continued to feed undisturbed. Suddenly she saw us and dashed in great leaps down the stream and around the bend. A few hundred yards farther on there was a deep pool enclosed by alders, but edged with succulent grass. As we neared the spot, I saw a circle of ripples spreading out beneath the bushes and knew that a deer must be on the ether At a signal my wife dug her side. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL paddle into the mud sending us spinning around the curve. There was the deer sure enough, a big doe with her mouth full of hhes. I started the camera just as she snorted and plunged forward into the pool. In a second she was beyond her depth and swimming frantically, her big ears waving back and forth and a long streamer of grass from her mouth trailing astern. It was only a moment before she struck the soft bank on the other side and with two or three mad plunges threw her dripping body into the alders. The week was full of incidents such as these, and it was with a good deal of regret that we broke camp on a hot Thursday to spend our last three: days at the Lake with Colonel Brandreth. We had been there many times during the summer, often wet and tired and discouraged, but always to find a warm welcome from every inmate of “Camp Good-Enough.” NEWS FROM THE CROCKER LAND EXPEDITION THE EXPEDITION AT ETAH AND THE “CLUETT” AT NORTH STAR BAY BOTH TO WINTER IN THE ARCTIC [With quotations from letters from the Arctic| S announced at the time in the A New York City papers a cable- gram was received at the Mu- seum on November 10, from Mr. Knud Rasmussen, Copenhagen, regarding the Crocker Land expedition. This gave the news of the failure of the “Cluett”’ to reach Etah where she was to have taken on the members of the expedition for return to civilization. The Museum did not give up hope of the return of the “Cluett”’ and the expedition to New York this fall until the very end of November. It is now believed however that both the original expedition under Mr. Donald B. MacMillan and the ship with Dr. E. O. Hovey and Captain George Comer sent to bring this expedi- tion home, have been forced to winter in the Arctic, the expedition staff at Etah, the “Cluett” in North Star Bay. Both parties are well equipped with supplies and with every convenience for scientific work, so there can be no fear as to the safety of the parties, their comparative comfort and proficable sci- entific results from the enforced stay. The cablegram is given below: Mail from Crocker Land _ expedition arrived and delivered your [American] Embassy. ‘“Cluett”’ arrived North Star Bay twelfth September after thirty-five days ice hindrances and motor damage Melville Bay. Dared not go to Etah account autumn ice but kept near our station, while our missionary motor boat left for Etah to fetch expedition members to ‘‘Cluett.’’ All well. [Signed] Knup RasmMuSSEN. A letter supplementing this cable arrived ‘later from Mr. Rasmussen in which he says: Our own ship “Kap-York”’ has not yet arrived [at’ Copenhagen]. When it arrives, probably early in December, I expect to be able to supplement this letter with details obtained from my captain. The ‘ Kap- York” being obliged to proceed southward [from North Star Bay] under sail only, had to be tugged out of the harbor before our motor boat could be sent northward, and so we have no recent news of your expedition. The following is a quotation from a letter written by Mr. Donald B. Mac- Millan at Etah, North Greenland, on April 6, 1915, and received in New York on December 3, forwarded from Copen- hagen by the American Embassy: Mail received a few days ago tells of the European war and the terrible loss of life. It is said communication with Denmark is uncertain so you may not receive this letter for some time. We realize that affairs at home must be very unsettled making it doubly hard to secure a suitable ship at a reasonable price to transport the expedition to America. Naturally the boys are very anxious to get home and would be disap- pointed if a ship failed to arrive, but if such should happen, do not be a bit alarmed over our safety; we can pull through all right. The season is a very hard one here for the Eskimo. Within the memory of the oldest there has never been sucha year. They have eaten their dogs as the only food available and burned their sledges for fuel. It is possible to sledge even to the Cary Islands, something which has never been done before. The expedition will put in caches at six different points on the Greenland coast for the return of Ekblaw! from his trip of the next two months. The last cache will be at. Cape Constitution, two hundred and twenty-five miles north of Etah. This work will lead us over Dr. Kane’s whole trail.and will yield some unusually interesting photo- 1 Mr. W. Elmer Ekblaw, geologist and botanist. 415 416 graphs such as of Humboldt Glacier. I am confident that there are many records at Kane’s winter quarters at Rensselear Harbor. We shall also do bird work one hundred and thirty miles south of Etah on Saunders Island, one of the most interesting spots of the world to the ornithologist. We are mainly O. K. in health. Green and Allen? built a little shack last fall for wireless at one of the islands in the outer harbor. Conditions out there were so favor- able for reading and study that they preferred to remain through the winter, both claiming they had lots of work to do and that was the place to do it. When they came into the house however the first of February, both were in poor health. Later Green started out to cross the channel to go to our big cache in Hayes Sound and broke down com- pletely. He returned, went to bed and was put on a diet under doctor’s orders. He is apparently all right now but not yet fit for a long trip. Allen is wholly recovered. Tan- quary ? had the misfortune to freeze both big toes on his Melville Bay trip during the winter. The doctor hopes that an operation will not be necessary. If a ship reaches us and Ekblaw does not stay with me, I may be landed over in Jones Sound with one Eskimo. Here I shall remain one year for ethnological work, and sledge from here to the northern coast of America. Mr. W. Elmer Ekblaw writes on March 20, 1915, also from Etah, as follows: On the eve of my departure on a trip across Ellesmere Land and back across Grant and Grinnell lands by way of Greely Fjord and Lake Hazen, I am writing you briefly of my hopes and plans. Since last winter I have been arranging to take this trip this spring. I shall leave to-morrow fully and splendidly equipped, not able to think of a single addi- tional article or preparation which would further insure my safety and success. I have the best sledge we have yet made; I have a fine team of dogs; my clothes are all first-class; I have all the food and fuel I can 1 Ensign Fitzhugh Green, engineer and physi- cist; Mr. Jerome Lee Allen, electrician and wire- less operator. 2 Mr. Maurice C. Tanquary, zodlogist. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL carry; I am in the best of health and best condition for Arctic work; I have two of the best men in the tribe, Esayoo and Etukashoo, to accompany me. I can conceive of nothing except a most untoward accident that could prevent the successful execution of my plans and my safe return. I shall proceed leisurely enough to tal.e advantage of every likelihood of scientific investigation; to hunt food for dogs and ourselves in every favorable locality; to explore the unknown reaches of Greely Fjord. JI am depending so largely upon the game of the country over which we travel for the chief food supply, that I am taking across the Ellesmere Land glacier but twelve days’ pemmican. I feel that I am quite justified in doing so, for on a 1100-mile circuitous route, it is impossible to carry food for the entire way. I expect to study the geology of Bay Fjord very carefully. The Eskimo tell me of numerous coal seams of great thickness and rocks rich in fossils. Green saw a coal seam eighteen feet thick on his trip of last year, and from the point from which I was forced to return I saw great ledges and cliffs of lime- stones, shales and sandstones. The physiog- raphy, structural geology, and I hope pale- ontological and stratigraphical geology will merit all the attention I can give them. The early part of my trip will of necessity be confined largely to geology, for the snow covers the vegetation and no birds have yet arrived. From the first of May onward, I expect to get some work in botany and ornithology. I find that I have more than one hundred and ten different species of plants in the collections I made last year. I wish to say of Tanquary, who had an unfortunate trip on Melville Bay, that he is made of the stuff heroes grow from, and that for sheer grit, unfailing good nature, and cheerfulness in pain, he measures up to the highest. The Universities of Illinois and Harvard may well be proud of him. oa) It is possible that I may remain in the North another year after this season, if it seems that the results which I can reasonably expect to achieve would justify my doing so. Two good fields of work in botany tempt me— that about the valley of the Mary Minturn River, and the other at Kaugerdluksuah, at the head of Inglefield Gulf. om eres ale uN SS : Ott neeayg ae f Nas SR iin 3: BEGINNINGS OF AMERICAN NATURAL HISTORY’ By Charles R. Eastman NDER the native appellation of Tlacaxolotl, Hernandez gives an account of the tapir, its characters being fused, however, with those of another mammalian species. Jonston, in his Natural History of the Fourfooted Beasts (1678) has a chapter on “Certaine Outlandish Creatures of a doubtfull kind,” wherein are included an English rendering of Hernandez on the tapir, and also one taken from Nierem- berg and Lery, under the caption of the “Danta”, or “Cappa.” The former version reads in part as follows: “Of the Tlacaxolotl”’ “ Having through Gods grace finished the History of the Fourfooted Beasts, as many sorts as are, as yet knowen, I thought good to adde this appendix about forreigne doubtfull Creatures, which I am yet thinking to what head, or kind to referre. As first: The Tlacazxolotl, it is roundish-faced, bigger then a Bull, great-headed, long muzzle, broad eares, cruell teeth, faced almost like a man, whence it hath the name: the neck thick, the nails like the Bulls, but larger: the but- tocks great, and broad, tayl thick and long; skin thick, hair yellow- ish, and bristly. It is seldome found, living among stones, and in desolate places... . . The flesh is eate- able. It fears not the face of man; Arrows cannot pearce the hide; therefore they catch them in pit- falls, and holes covered with leaves, as the Indians doe Elephants.” “Of the Danta, or Cappa” The Danta, or Capa, or Tapi- roussu, or Doueanar, resembles the Mule, having such ears, a Calves lips; the upper-lips hangs a hand- Peruvian llamas. full over the lower, which he lifts up, when angred, in the rest like other beast, but a Calf most; he hath no harme....He is reddish- haired, and that hanging down, and resembles a Cow in bulk, and shape. But that he is not horned, and hath a short neck, and long dan- gling ears; by his dry, and slender legs, whole hoof, aman may take him to be of the breed of the Cow, or Asse, yet differs much from both, having a very short tail, (though in America many beasts are bred, without tails) and hath much keener teeth, yet none need feare him, he trusting more in flight, then fight. The wilds shoot them, or catch them in pits, or grins, and have handsome devices to hunt them. They value him highly for his skin, which they cut round, and lay a sunning to make targets as big as a reasonable tun, which they use in warre, as being hardly to be pearced. For his descriptions of the opossum the compiler whom we have just quoted draws upon Marcgrav (1648), and this author figures and describes two species. The same animal is also shown, together with the peccary, agouti and rare three- banded armadillo in César de Roche- fort’s work (1658) on the natural history One of the earliest figures of the Ameri- can camel found in printed books, although there are much 1Concluded from the last issue of the JouRNAL. art. older designs of the animal in maps and native works of [From the Antwerp edition of Cieza de Leén, 1558}. 417 418 of the Antilles.1 An animal thought by 1It is charged by J. B. Dutertre that the bulk of this work was taken, errors included, from his own book on the Antilles, which appeared in 1654. Le Pére Labat (Voyage, 1722) also refers to the Sieur de Rochefort as a plagiarist from Dutertre. One of the rare edentates (Dasy- pus novemcinctus hoplites, G. M. Allen) figured THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL Eduard Seler? to be the opossum, by by these writers has been rediscovered, in the island of Grenada within the last few years by Glover M. Allen. See Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. vol. liv, no. 6, 1911. 2 Die Tierbilder der mexicanischen und der Maya-Handschriften. Zeitschr. fiir Ethnologie, Jahrg. xli, 1909. Big game and other animal likenesses from the first encyclopzedia printed in our tongue, that of Bartholomew Anglicus, 1494. Some of the same animals are much better drawn in the Album of Villard de Honnecourt, a thirteenth century artist and architect BEGINNINGS OF AMERICAN NATURAL HISTORY Allen and Tozzer,' however, interpreted as a spotted dog, is depicted in several of the Maya codices that have come down to us from pre-conquistorial times. Interesting in connection with the aboriginal spotted dog of Mexico, and the perro mudo” of the West Indies (first observed by Columbus in Cuba and Jamaica) is the race of hunting dog which we find depicted in the minor arts of pre-Homerie civilization border- ing the Aegean, and continuing until historic times. One of the earliest natu- ralistic paintings of a spotted dog, dating from at least the thirteenth century B. C., is found in a colored frieze from the palace of Tiryns, discovered in 1911. The subject is a boar hunt, and the boar 1 Animal Figures of the Maya Codices. Papers of Peabody Museum, Amer. Arch., vol. iv, 1910. 2A particular description of the native West Indian dumb dog is given by Oviedo (1535), who is also the earliest to describe in detail the hutia (Capromys fourniert Desm.). See W. S. Mac- Leay’s ‘‘Notes on Capromys,” in Zool. Journ. vol. iv, 1829. 419 is shown driven by dogs on to the spears of the hunters. In the background is a marsh with weeds. The original of this painting is preserved in the Museum at Athens, and copies exist in the British and various American Museums. The Letters of Hernando Cortes to the Emperor Charles V. are recognized as “an historical monument of the greatest authenticity and value,” forming, with the True Relation of Bernal Diaz, the original source of our information regard- Egyptian hunting-dog, from an early dynastic (5000 ? B. GC.) Stone palette found by Quibell at Hierakonpolis Brazilian quadrupeds, the jaguar, capybara and tapir, after colored drawings introduced in Blaeus’ map of Brazil, 1605 420 ing Mexico. The five Letters have recently been published by F. A. Mac- Nutt (1908) in English translation, and are not without interest from a purely natural history standpoint. Very valu- able for the student are the bibliographi- cal notes contained in this latest edition of the Letters, and also those given by the same translator in his new (1912) version of The Eight Decades of Peter Martyr D’Anghera. Critical notes on the chief Spanish sources for Central and South American archeology on natural history are interspersed through- out A. F. Bandelier’s work on The Islands of Titicaca and Koati (1910). English translations exist also of the narratives of two early expeditions across the southern part of the North American continent, those led by Panfilo Narvaez and Hernando de Soto. In the relation of the former of these expeditions, by Cabeza de Vaca, is found the earliest account (1537) of the American bison. A few years later, in 1540, herds were next seen by white men accompanying the Coronado expedition.!_ Probably the earliest picture of the animal in question is one given in the Idrography of Rotz (1542), and this was copied in the maps of Hondius, (1630 edition of Mercator) Blaeu (World Atlas, 1664-65) and other geographers. It may be remarked in passing that one of Blaeu’s maps of Brazil (vol. viii) is ornamented by col- 1 Annotated translations of the narrative of the Hernando de Soto expedition, and of the Relation of Alvar Nunez Cabeza de Vaca, were published by Buckingham Smith in 1866 and 1871. A new translation of the journey of Cabeza de Vaca, by F. Bandelier is included in the Trail Makers Series (1905). There are several English versions of the narra- tive of the Coronado expedition; one edited by G. P. Winship is found in the 14th Report of the U. S. Bureau of Ethnology. Thevet’s figure of the bison and Cieza de Leon’s rough woodcut of one of the llama group, are reproduced in Winsor’s Narrative and Critical History of America. A great deal of historical matter relating to the bison has been brought together by Dr. J. A. Allen. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL ored figures of the tapir, jaguar and capybara, and early American cartog- raphy in general abounds in interesting portrayals of physical, animal and vege- tal features of the New World. Among North American fur-bearing animals the beaver holds first place in historical importance, and has given rise to voluminous literature. The first pub- lic seal of the province of New Nether- lands, in use from 1623 to 1664, carries the beaver as an armorial device. It is represented also in Vischer’s “Map of The Old World beaver (Castor fiber) engaged in felling a tree, as shown in one of the earliest printed works on natural history, the 15th century Ortus Sanitatis of J. von Cuba Novi Belgii’”’ (1656), together with the fox, marten, bear, deer, wild turkey, heron, etc. Probably the earliest printed illustration is one occurring in a plate given by Arnold Montanus (1671), in his work already mentioned. A much better figure of the beaver, together with hunting scenes of the bison and other animals, is to be found in Baron La Hontan’s Nouveaux Voyages (1715). Horace T. Martin, in his work on the Canadian Beaver (1892), and also Dr. F. A. Lucas in his interesting recent BEGINNINGS OF AMERICAN NATURAL HISTORY article,! reproduce a “Figure of a Beaver from the earliest known Monograph — 1685.” But the animal there shown is the European beaver, and this species, Castor fiber, was first figured by Johannis von Cube at the end of the fifteenth century in his curious “Hortus Sani- tatis,” whose illustration is reproduced herewith, and next after him by Ron- delet in 1553. Rondelet’s figure is copied by Conrad Gesner in the various editions and translations of his ency- clopedic works.? Prior to the 18th century no single work anywhere appeared on North American plants and animals, corre- sponding in character to the monumental achievement of Marcgrav ‘ands Piso (1648) on Brazil. A search among the writings of early voyagers and travelers, however, both French and English, is rewarded by the discovery of many surprisingly accurate observations. Nu- merous authors might be mentioned in this connection, but it will suffice.:to name but one or two: Captain John Smith’s Description of Virginia (in Purchas his Pilgrimes, vol. iv, 1625-26), 1 Amer. Mus. Journal, March, 1913. The ‘“‘earliest known Monograph’’ therein referred to is one entitled Castorologia, written by Johann Marius, a physician of Ulm, and republished by Johann Francus in 1685. It is reviewed in the Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. for the same year, vol. Xv, p. 1249. 2 Among Old World animals figured by Gesner it may be noted that the one given of the ichenu- mon is taken from an ancient manuscript of Oppian. The earliest printed figure of the giraffe is found in the Opusculum of Bernard de Breyden- bach (Mainz, 1486 and 1502). This and other African mammals are shown in maps of much earlier date, as for instance, the Hereford and Ebstorf maps of 1280. Otto Keller, in his “*Antike Tierwelt’’ (1999), gives an outline figure of the giraffe after a mural painting in the Villa Pamfili, Rome. Far more ancient, dating back to the very dawn of history, is the Egyptian hunting scene showing the giraffe, lop-eared hound and other animals, which is reproduced by Quibell in his memoir on the Exploration of Hierakon- polis (1902). “of those of Muscouin and Tartaris. 421 and John Josselyn’s New England’s Rarities Discovered (1672). The latter has been twice reprinted. From the former we may give in closing a short specimen extract, selected at random: “Of beasts the chiefe are Deare, nothing differing from ours. In the Desarts towards the heads of the Rivers, there are many, but amongst the Rivers few. There is a beast they call Aronghcwm, much like a Badger, but useth to live on trees as Squirrels doe. Their Squirrels, some are neere as great as our smallest sort of wilde Rabbits, some blackish or blacke and white, but the most are gray. A small beast they have, they call Assapanick, but we will call them flying Squirrels, because spreading their legs, and so stretching the largenesse of their skinnes, they that have been seene to flie thirtie or fortie yards. An Opossum hath head like a Swine, and a taile like a Rat, and is of the bignesse of a Cat. Under her belly she hath a bag, wherein she lodgeth, carrieth, and suckleth her young. Mussascus, is a beast of the forme and nature of our water Rats, but many of them smell exceedingly strongly of Muske. Their Hares are no bigger than our Conies, and few of them to be found. Their Beares are verie little in comparison The Beaver is as big as an ordinarie great Dog, but his legs exceeding short. His fore feet like a Dogs, his hinder feet like a Swans. His taile somewhat like the forme of a Racket bare without haire, which to eate the Sauages esteeme a great delicate. They have many Otters, which as the Beauers they take with snares, and esteeme the skins great ornaments and of all those beasts they use to feede when they catch them. Of Fish, we are best acquainted with Sturgeon, Grampus, Porpus, Seales, Sting- raies, whose tailes are very dangerous, Bretts, Mullets, white Salmonds, Trowts, Soles, Plaice, Herrings, Conyfish, Rockfish, Eels, Lampreys, Catfish, Shades, Perch of three sorts, Crabs, Shrimps, Creuises, Oysters, Cocles and Muscles. But the most strange Fish is a small one, so like the picture of Saint George his Dragon, as possible can be, except his legges and wings, and the Todefish, which will swell till it be like to burst, when it cometh into the aire. Soe and Bere OR ME BS a P roe Pee : Pe a Through courtesy of E. P. Dutton and Company THE AUTHOR OF “WILD BIRD GUESTS” ENTERTAINING A FRIENDLY CHICKADEE 422 A VALUABLE NEW BIRD BOOK' By T. Gilbert Pearson HIS is one of those books, too Als rare in our libraries and always noteworthy, in which the author writes from actual experience. It tells us what he has really done, and what he knows because he has tested his knowl- edge — a practical book in the strictest definition of the term. Mr. Baynes for many years has been celebrated among bird lovers for his extraordinary ability in making friends with wild birds, and for the ingenious and highly successful devices by which he has induced them to become his guests at his home in a New Hampshire village. Birds not only visit his garden as they do other places where they have ordinary privileges, but they also stay there, get ac- quainted with the owner and his family, and acquire and exhibit a confidence that seems marvelous to outsiders. Everyone who sees this desires to know how he does it; and the book is in large measure devoted to such explanation, and to a description of the various best ways to invite and to entertain his “ guests.” Hence it abounds in practical descrip- tions, with diagrams and photographs as helpful illustrations of the various forms of nesting-boxes, shelters, feeding- stations, drinking-fountains, bird baths and the like, that he has found most successful. His success however im- plies an intimate acquaintance with the nature and habits of his winged visitors — their several temperaments, foods, breeding habits, enemies and prejudices; and these he communicates freely for the reader’s aid. One feels as he reads the succes- sively interesting pages, that Mr. Baynes is also communicating somewhat of the affection, and the untiring enthusiasm, How To ENTERTAIN 106 1k 1Witp Birp GusEstTs, ‘THEM. By Ernest Harold Baynes. Dutton and Company, New York City. with which he has studied and wooed the This enthusiasm is well known to the thousands of persons who have heard him lecture on birds, and it is birds. not surprising to learn that he has long conducted a model bird club home town, at Meriden, New Hamp- shire, and has been the founder of scores of bird-study and bird-protection clubs in all parts of the country. This matter forms an important part of his book. He tells us why every community should have a bird club and how to set it going and keep it going. The bird club he considers very im- portant because the most serious enemy of the birds is man, and the most serious factor of man’s enmity is ignorance. If in his it were known more widely and generally what this country has already lost and is yearly losing in losing its birds, what the people themselves and their chil- dren are daily losing, there is hardly a man, woman or child in the United States who would not be codperating eagerly in the movement for bird con- servation. How many people know that a conservative estimate of the birds killed by domestic cats each year, in Massachusetts only, is 700,000; that there is much more “sport” to be had in gaining the friendship of the birds than in hunting them, and that the actual need of our wild birds for suitable nesting places and for food in winter, is very imperative and very easily supplied? Mr. Baynes tells of these things in in- teresting detail, and then he says to his readers in big letters, “If there is not already a bird club in your neighbor- hood, organize a bird club!” Altogether Wild Bird Guests is a book that should be in the hands of every orni- thologist and conservationist; as well as on the shelves of every school library. 423 FRAGMENTS OF SPIDER LORE By Frank E. Lutz RACHNIDA, the scientific name of spiders and their relatives is derived from that of a character in Grecian mythology. According to Ovid, Arachne was a mortal who was so skilled in weaving that she ventured to challenge Athena. When Athena saw that Arachne’s work was without blemish she destroyed it. Arachne was driven by grief to hang herself, whereupon Athena changed her into a spider and the rope became a cobweb. Origin of Spiders It is said in the sacred writings of ancient India, that a large spider was the originator of the universe. From her glands she wove the web of which we inhabit a part and even now she sits in its center directing its motion. At her pleasure she will consume it, as many of the spiders about us do their webs, and may then spin a new universe. It is worth noting that the same idea occurred in the folk lore of certain American Indian tribes and is also found in that of Guinea. Spiders did not hold so exalted a station with all people. The idea was current in many parts of the world that they have their origin in putrefaction. Moufet proved this as follows: ‘‘It is manifest that spiders are bred of some aéreal seeds putrefied, from filth and corruption, because that the newest houses the first day they are whited will have both spiders and cobwebs in them.” His daughter was doubtless the heroine of the nursery rhyme: Little Miss Moufet sat on a tuffet Eating her curds and whey There came a great spider And sat down beside her And frightened Miss Moufet away. Spiders in the Bible There are three fairly well-known Biblical passages concerning spiders. Agur (Proverbs XXX, 28) includes the spider that “taketh hold with her hands and is in kings’ palaces”’ among the four things which are little but exceeding wise, and the frail spider’s web is a symbol of the hypocrite’s hope (Job VIII, 14) as well as of the disobedient Jews’ works (Isaiah LIX, 5). 424 Spiders in History If we may believe legends, Mohammed, St. Felix of Nola and other victims of pursuit have been saved by spiders spinning webs over the entrances to their hiding places. The pursuers, seeing the webs, decided that no one had passed that way and neglected to look. The fortunes of Robert Bruce were at low ebb and he lay, discouraged, gazing at the cob- webs on the rafters. A spider, after vainly trying twelve times to swing itself by its thread from one beam to another, succeeded on the thirteenth attempt. ‘The thirteenth time,’’ shouted Bruce, ‘‘I accept it as a lesson not to despond under difficulties, and shall once more venture my life in the struggle for the independence of my country.’”? He won. Perhaps not much more legendary than these is the story that the spiders in the temple of Ceres Thesmophoros wove white webs when the Theban army was to be victorious, but black ones, signifying defeat, when Alexander made his attack. Spiders as Weather Prophets During his imprisonment at Utrecht, Quatremer Disjonval observed the relation between changes in the weather and the habits of spiders. When the French invaded Hol- land in 1794 by crossing the water barriers on ice, Disjonval hoped to be released. An unexpected thaw came in December and the French were about to withdraw but, as Dis- jonval’s spiders predicted a return of cold weather he got word to the French general to wait. This was done; the cold came and the French were able to move even their heaviest artillery and to take Utrecht. Some of the ideas on this subject are as follows: if the weather is to be rough the threads which support the web are unusually short. Before a rain spiders are indolent. If they are active during a rain fair weather will quickly follow. If spiders make changes in their webs before 7 p. Mm. the night will be clear and pleasant. Spiders as Omens of Luck In Maryland it is said that if you kill a spider which gets on your clothing you destroy FRAGMENTS OF SPIDER LORE the presents it is weaving for you. A seven- teenth century writer puts it as follows: ‘When a spider is found upon your clothes, we used to say some money is coming toward us. The moral is this: dustry of that contemptible creature may, by God’s blessing, weave themselves into wealth and procure a plentiful estate.” Instead of killing them you may throw them over your left shoulder if you wish good luck. If you feel that you must kill a spider that has taken up its abode in your house, carry it outside for its execution; otherwise you will be ‘“‘pullmg down your house.” If you kill a spider crossing your path you will have bad luck. If a white spider drops in front of you, you will soon see a dear friend; if a black one does the same, you will meet an enemy. In the Netherlands a spider seen in the morning forebodes good luck; in the afternoon bad luck. Spiders and Music The following is from the Anthologia Borealis et Australis I hailed thee, friendly spider, who hadst wove,. Thy mazy net on yonder mouldering raft; Would that the cleanlie housemaid’s foot had left Thee tarrying here, nor took thy life away; For thou, from out this seare old ceiling’s cleft, Came down each morn to hede my plaintive lay; Joying like me to heare sweete musick play, Werwith I’d fein beguile the dull, dark, linger- ing day. It is said that when the young ladies in a certain English school sang at morning and evening prayers spiders always came out of their hiding places and ran about the floor or suspended themselves from the ceiling. Before the French author, Pellisson, was converted to Catholicism he was imprisoned in the Bastille. There he fed a spider while his cell-mate played a bagpipe. The spider came to associate the music with food and finally could be called to any part of the cell by blowing on the bagpipe. The sequel to the story is that the governor of the Bastille, hearing that his prisoners had found a pleasure in their confinement asked for a demonstration. When the spider came out he crushed it with his foot. There are several similar stories. Another from the time of Louis XIV is that Lanzun, during one of his imprisonments trained a spider to come for food when he called it. The interesting part here is that the spider such who imitate the in-_ 425 not only associated sound with food but dis- tinguished between sounds, for when others tried to imitate Lanzun’s voice the spider refused to come. Poisonous Spiders All spiders are poisonous but there are very few which injure man. ‘This is partly due to lack of inclination and partly to inability to pierce the human skin. However, fear of spiders is almost universal. Sometimes this fear amounts to a mania, the victim going into hysterics at the mere sight of one of them. The fumes from burning spiders are alleged to cause faintness, cold sweats, vomiting and finally death. Some monks in Florence are reported to have died from drinking wine in which a spider had fallen. Of course the tragedy was attributed to the spider. On the other hand, Conradus, Bishop of Constance, swallowed a spider which had fallen into sacramental wine and suffered no ill effects. The bite of a large spider —any large spider is commonly called a tarantula — is said to cause the victim to ‘‘make a thousand different gestures in a moment; for they weep, dance, tremble, laugh, grow pale, ery, swoon away and after a few days of torment expire, if they be not assisted in time.’’ Music is considered to be an anti- dote. From the Treasvrie of Avncient and Mod- erne Times (1619) we learn that ‘‘ Alexander Alexandrinus proceedeth farther, affirming that he beheld one wounded by this Spider, to dance and leape about incessantly, and the Musitians (finding themselves wearied) gave over playing; whereupon, the poore offended dancer, hauing vtterly lost all his forces, fell downe on the ground, as if he had bene dead. The Musitians no sooner began to play againe, but hee returned to himselfe, and mounting vp vpon his feet, danced againe as lustily as formerly hee had done, and so continued dancing still, til hee found the harme asswaged, and _ himselfe entirely recovered.”’ It has also been said that if a wasp has been bitten by a spider and lively music be played, both the wasp and the spider will begin to dance. The same has been said of a bitten chicken. On the other hand if the spider concerned be killed, dancing will stop even in the case of human beings. On account of these ideas a certain kind of hysterical dance is called the Tarantula. 426 Italian beggars sometimes claim to have been bitten and solicit alms while in a danc- ing fit. Spiders as Medicine Cobwebs are still used to stop bleeding, a thing which Bottom had in mind when he said to the fairy Cobweb ‘‘I shall desire of you more acquaintance, good master Cobweb. If I cut my finger, I shall make bold with you.” Ben Jonson said that a certain penuri- ous individual ‘“‘sweeps down no cobwebs here but sells ’em for cut fingers.’ Spiders’ webs have been taken internally forague. Chapman’s Materia Medica (1824) recommends doses of five grains of spiders’ web, repeated every fourth or fifth hour for “ obstinate intermittents, paroxysms of hectic, morbid vigilance from excessive nervous mobility, irritations of the system from many causes especially when connected with pro- tracted coughs and other chronic pectoral affections.” If cobwebs be burned on a wart it will be rooted out and never grow again. Pliny states that cobwebs, especially the part which forms the spider’s retreat is useful when applied to the forehead as a cure for watery eyes. The web must be taken and put on by a boy who has not reached puberty, who must not show himself to the patient for three days, and, furthermore, neither he nor the patient may touch the ground with bare feet during this time. He also recommends cobwebs moistened with oil and vinegar for cranial fractures. The spiders themselves seem to have been very efficacious. One sewed up in a rag or enclosed between two nutshells and worn around the neck will charm away ague. It should also be applied to the wrist or temples in the case of bad fevers. If a spider be taken when neither sun nor moon is shining and the hind legs be pulled off and wrapped in deer’s skin, the combination will, accord- ing to some, relieve gout. Moufet remarked that ‘we finde those people to be free from the gowt of hands or feet (which few medica- ments can doe) in whose houses the Spiders breed much, and doth beautifie them with her tapestry and hangings.” Pliny gives uses for spiders as well as for their webs. The thick pulp of a spider’s body, mixed with oil of roses, makes an ear lotion. Among the best remedies for spider bites are spiders left to putrify in oil. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAI. Homeopathic treatment seems to have been much favored in cases of spider bites. Col- lections of dead spiders have been made because if a person bitten by a spider look at another specimen of the same species he will be cured. Dried spiders have been taken internally for the same purpose. Spiders as Food It seems that not every one is afraid of spiders. Lande, the French astronomer, proved by eating spiders as delicacies that he could raise himself above dislikes and prejudices. Spiders were eaten by the abo- rigines of America and Australia. A quo- tation from Molien’s Travels in Africa says that the people of Maniana ‘eat spiders, beetles and old men.” Doubtless quite a list could be made of uncivilized tribes that eat spiders and there is a number of recorded instances of more advanced persons who, like Lande have acquired the habit. One is given in verse: How early Genius shows itself at times, Thus Pope, the prince of poets, lisped in rhymes, And our Sir Joshua Banks, most strange to utter, To whom each cockroach-eater is a fool, Did, when a very little boy at school, Eat Spiders, spread upon his bread and butter. Economic Value of Spiders It is undoubtedly true that spiders catch and kill many injurious insects. In the fields good insects suffer with the bad, but as few good insects find their way into our houses the house spiders are almost en- tirely beneficial. However, since spiders are not encouraged to live in our houses it is doubtful whether the group as a whole helps us greatly in our fight against injurious insects. The strong supporting threads of cobwebs have been much used in telescopes for the purpose of making fine lines appear in the field of vision. Silk spun by spiders to cover their eggs has been woven into cloth. It is said that the fabric is so transparent that a young lady was once reproved by her father for the immodesty of her costume although she wore seven thick- nesses of it. Since it requires more than half a million egg-masses to yield a pound of silk the industry does not promise to become commercially profitable. CORYTHOSAURUS, THE NEW DUCK-BILLED DINOSAUR By W. D. Matthew and Barnum Brown HE American Museum of Natural History has recently added a remark- able specimen to the series of skele- tons in the Dinosaur hall. It is a crested, duck-billed dinosaur, unusually com- plete and in many ways unique; for not only is the bony skeleton and the skin impression surrounding the body preserved, but under- neath the skin may be traced at least four distinct sets of muscles, showing definite origin and insertion of each series. Evidently the body had floated along some prehistoric beach where, caught in quiet water, it was stranded lying on its left side on a bed of plants the carbonaceous remains of which may still be seen, accounting for the indefinite impression of a large part of the skin on the left side. Unio shells were scattered all about; other trachodont bones and a water turtle lay on the top of the tail, and over the body were deposited three large folds of sandstone, the cross-bedded layers showing deposits by water currents from different directions. On this upper right side the fine sandy silt preserved a better impression of the skin, where it was not torn away, and the outline of the underlying bony skeleton is distinct. _ This skeleton is complete except for the fore limbs, most of which are missing, but the bones are mostly concealed under the skin. The texture of the skin is not as well preserved as in the “dinosaur mummy” also exhibited in this hall, but shows a similar pattern of small, tesselated scales, not overlapping like those of a lizard or snake, but grouped in pat- terns and of various sizes and arrangement in different parts of the body. The double series of slender, rodlike, calcified tendons along the back are very clearly shown; these are tendons of part of the great muscles that moved the backbone in a vertical plane. It is very rarely that any portion of an extinct animal other than the skeleton is pre- served. The softer parts almost always decay and disappear without leaving a trace behind, long before petrefaction sets in. Usually all that we know of an extinct animal is derived from the study of its skeleton and of its bony armor, if it had any. Any trace of skin or other soft parts is naturally a great help in attempting to reconstruct its external form and in determining its habits. Such evidence is especially welcome in connection with dino- saurs, animals millions of years old and very different from any now living. Delicate and often obscure as are the skin impressions, they have been noticed and recorded on vari- ous fossil skeletons; but it is only within the last few years that the development of the technique of excavating and preparing such specimens has made it possible to save them entire. The two dinosaur skeletons in this hall are believed to be the only ones with the skin extensively preserved shown in any museum. A third specimen has been secured by the Senckenberg Museum, Frankfurt-am- Main, but is not yet completely prepared for exhibition. The new acquisition in the American Mu- seum was found in 1912 by a Museum expedi- tion in charge of Mr. Barnum Brown, in the Belly River cretaceous rocks exposed at Steveville, on the fossil-famous Red Deer River of Alberta, Canada. It was taken up in large blocks, united in the laboratory just as found, and raised to a vertical position so that both sides may be seen, thus assuming a pose the animal may well have taken while swimming. The missing parts of the front limbs have been painted on the matrix from a second skeleton of the same size found last year, as also the tip of the tail, which was weathered out and partly missing. The preparation of the skeleton was a slow and difficult process, requiring great skill and patience on the part both of collector and preparator. It was so fragile and heavy in some parts that it was necessary to support it by a perfect network of steel rods perforat- ing the blocks in every direction, and in other parts so extremely thin and delicate that the least pressure would have shattered or damaged it beyond repair. Add to this the difficulty of removing the rock matrix, often quite hard, from the delicate film which repre- sents the skin, and cleaning it so as to show the structure; of cleaning and mending the innumerable breaks and joints caused by the earth-jars and movements in the rocks during the millions of years since it was buried; and it will not appear surprising that two years 427 428 time was taken by the preparators before the work was completed. The preparation work was done chiefly by Mr. Otto Falkenbach. The animal is a new kind of duck-billed dinosaur, related to the Tvrachodon and Saurolophus of which skeletons are shown elsewhere in the hall, but the distinguishing and striking feature of this new animal is the skull, on account of which it is given the name Corythosaurus (meaning Corinthian-helmeted saurian). The remarkable crest on the top of the skull probably supported a flexible, ornamental membrane as seen in some modern lizards. The rest of the skeleton is in a general way like that of Trachodon and other members of the family of dinosaurs, the distinctive feature being the development of the pelvis and the proportion of the limbs. The trachodonts were a great family of herbivorous dinosaurs numerous in genera and species and represented by great numbers of individuals in late Upper Cretaceous times. The body was covered by tuberculated skin of distinct pattern in the different genera and all of these duck-billed dinosaurs seem to have been good swimmers, if we may judge THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL by the vertically flattened tail characteristic of swimming reptiles. Probably they escaped from their enemies in that way, for they were without means of offense or defense, bearing neither horns nor armor plates like their contemporaries the ceratopsians and anky- losaurs. The limbs and feet were adapted for walk- ing or running, and in swimming would prob- ably be trailed behind or pressed closely against the sides. The modern iguanas of the Galapagos Islands swim in this way, and the position in which the Corythosaurus skeleton lies in the rock is strikingly suggestive of a swimming pose; although it must be remem- bered that when discovered the specimen lay flat on its side, the carcass crushed to a thin plate by the overwhelming weight of thou- sands of feet of mud and sand sediment which, during the millions of years since it was deposited, had turned into rock. The length of the specimen is eighteen feet, and startling indeed must have been the appearance of Corythosaurus as it rose from the water to its full height with helmet raised cap-a-pie like a knight of old. MUSEUM NOTES Since the last issue of the JournaL the following persons have become members of the Museum: Life Members, Mrs. E. C. Converse, PRro- FESSOR RaymMonpd C. OspurN and Messrs. B. Preston Crark, fAtrrep Harner ‘and Henry C. Ketsry; Annual Members, Mrs. Louris ANSBACHER, Mrs. Leo ARNSTEIN, Mrs. F. O. Ayrgs, Mrs. A. Battin, Mrs. JANET BURCHELL, Mrs. F. 8. Coonipcr, Mrs. JonatHan H. Crane, Mrs. J. C. DeSousa, Mrs. Roser FisHer, Mrs. SAMUEL FLOERSHEIMER, Mrs. Tuomas B. M. Gates, Mrs. James Gros- vENOR, Mrs. BENJAMIN GUINNESS, Mrs. Victor GuInzBuRG, Mrs. FREDERICK C. Hicks, Mrs. Aucustus Jay, Mrs. Harry T. Jounson, Mrs. W. N. Kernan, Mrs. Joun B. Mort, Mrs. Jonn W. Notes, Mrs. WHEELER H. PreckHamM, Mrs. CLARENCE Porter, Mrs. Samuret Srieret, Mrs. SamuEL Swirt, Misses Auice H. ANNAN, Mary T. BrapiEy, Guapys CROMWELL, MADELEINE GELSHENEN, AucGusTA Bor- LAND GREENE, EuizaABeETH Hanna, H. Maup Henry and Nina Ruoapss, Dr. T. PassMoRE Brrens, Dr. FENTON B. Turck, Dr. Atvin M. PAPpPpENHEIMER and Messrs. Grorce D. Artaur, WiLiraAM B. Bristow, W. H. CxeseproucH, Wrii1aAmM DetT#, Harris Fannestock, Ropert Epison Fut- TON, ABRAHAM L. GoLDSTONE, OapEN H. Hammonp, FrepERIcK W. Herz, Max Herzoa, M. B. Hitiecas, H. M. KAvFMANN, Maurice Marks, HorrmMan NICKERSON, J. PARMLY PARET, FREDERICK SNARE, J. E. STeRRETT, Ferrx A. Voqcrent, Grorce A. VONDERMUHLL, Louis T. Watson and Master Eucene DuBots. AT a meeting of the Executive Committee of the American Museum on November 17, Mr. B. Preston Clark was elected a life member in consideration of his generosity in bearing the expense of Mr. F. A. Watson’s entomological field trip to Santo Domingo last spring. Mr. Clark is himself an ento- mologist and has presented to the Museum numerous rare species of Sphingide. Dr. Raymond C. Osburn, formerly of the New [fo ft a fy~ PCELIA ese wi y a sf Ancient gold work from Panama recently purchased for the Museum York Aquarium, and now professor of biology at the Connecticut College for Women, New London, has also been made a life member in appreciation of his gratuitous services to the Museum in connection with the collections of the Townsend “‘Albatross’’ expedition. FIvE pieces of ancient gold work from the district of Alange, province of Chiriqui, western Panama, have been recently pur- chased for the Museum. The objects are similar to those in Mr. Keith’s collection described in the October number of the JOURNAL, and are all amulets, used as breast ornaments. The finest specimen, illustrated above, is in almost complete relief, and represents a human skeleton, from the arms and head of which project profile heads of the deified crocodile, indicating that the figure is probably that of a god. Another of the specimens represents a deer, and is a characteristic example of the skill in animal modeling attained by the ancient peoples of Panama. The specimens will be found on exhibition in the Mexican hall. Tue Hitchcock Lectures on ‘Men of the Old Stone Age, Their Environment, Life and Art,’ delivered by Prof. Henry Fair- field Osborn at the University of California in February, 1914, have just been published in book form by Charles Scribner’s Sons, and constitute a notable addition to the literature of palzolithic times. The book is lavishly illustrated with numerous reproductions of paleolithic engravings, carvings, and paint- ings from caves and rock shelters; original drawings by Messrs. Charles R. Knight and Erwin S. Christman, and charts and cross sections by Dr. Chester A. Reeds. Of spe- cial interest are the restorations of the Pithe- canthropus, Piltdown, La Chapelle, and Cré-Magnon men, modeled by Professor J. H. McGregor upon casts of the original fossils. The book will be reviewed in a forthcoming issue of the JOURNAL. Mr. Amos F. Eno who died on October 21, bequeathed to the American Museum the sum of $250,000. Mr. Eno was an annual member of the Museum since 1881, and a life member since June, 1905. With the exception of the Jesup bequest this is the largest ever received by the Museum. 429 O&F Wa0doQ WoqIV “JI Aq pajured sea punoisyoeq oy} ‘josuq PUe Suey] ‘sussePy Aq pojuNoW aJoM dnois 94} JOJ Sp1lq 94,L “ZI-TI6T Ul purvjs] eis109045) yynog 0} UOMIpedxe oy) uo AYdmMy “Oo JeqQoy “APA AQ UMesnNJL 94} JO 10}d01Tp oY} OJ PoueU ‘1oloV[H Svon'T ST punoaisyorq 049 UL ‘“puUeIs]y eIsu09y YANO UO suINSUOd Surly WNASNW NVOIYAWV SHL NI dNOYS GHId MAN V = EN "e i Fo Sg ae at te < a = ¢ MUSEUM NOTES A croup of king penguins recently in- stalled in the Museum (central pavilion, second floor) is the first of a series of habitat bird groups of the world, planned by Dr. Chapman to round out the systematic series of birds shown in the adjoining hall. The plan contemplates flooring over the central section to insure the necessary darkness and permit these habitat groups, like those of the birds of North America, to be illuminated entirely by controlled artificial light. This construction at the same time makes pro- vision for groups of monkeys and lemurs on the floor above. The heterogeneous as- semblage of animals now in this central sec- tion of the second floor is to be variously provided for: the groups of reptiles in a hall in the projected east wing; the seals and sea elephants with other marine mammals in the attached court building, and the Asiatic mammals in a hall of their own. Unfortu- nately these improvements and changes, long contemplated and planned for, require extensive funds, and the resources of the city for the past three years have not been sufficient to permit the erection of the much needed new wing. Meanwhile, the unsat- isfactory condition of the central pavilion is keenly felt by the Museum and it has been necessary to announce by means of labels that various groups are “placed here awaiting the construction of a new wing.” Durine the last six months an entirely new process in taxidermy has been invented and tried out by Mr. Carl E. Akeley of the American Museum. Mr. Akeley’s -previ- ously worked out processes have hitherto represented the high water mark of attain- ment in this direction, and although they did not reach his own ideal they came as near it as he thought practice would ever permit. The new idea which came to him last summer however, and which has now been thoroughly tested, produces results which for softness of modeling, accuracy in reproducing the individual animal and degree of permanence, are far ahead of anything heretofore possible, and which are achieved at infinitely less cost of labor, money and time. It is a conservative statement to say that this invention will reduce the cost of the projected new African hall of the Museum by at least one hundred thousand dollars, while the value of the exhibits will be in- creased to an inestimable degree. Not only 431 so, but the infinite trouble, worry, and neces- sity for some compromise involved in the mounting of specimens hitherto is reduced by this method quite eighty-five per cent. Two buffalo heads have already been mounted by the new process and a lion’s head is now in hand. In addition to the splendid collection of 20,000 vertebrate and 140,000 invertebrate specimens brought from Africa by the Lang- Chapin expedition, the evidence in the shape of photographs by Mr. Lang and accurate colored drawings by Mr. Chapin is unusually varied and complete. No less than 7000 photographs help to set forth the animal life of the Congo, as well as the industries, customs, art, ceremonies, amusements and mode of life of the natives; while the ethno- logical value of the work is further supple- mented by some seventy casts of heads which Mr. Lang was able to make through the consent of a tribe of Pygmies. On Friday evening, December 17, Mr. Ernest Harold Baynes will lecture at the American Museum to the adult blind of New York City and Brooklyn on “Wild Animal Friends of Mine.’ Mr. Baynes is widely known as a friend of the birds; this lecture will tell how he has improved ac- quaintance also with the fox, skunk, bear, wolf and other creatures. Doors will be open at 7.30, to permit of inspection by the blind of specimens of the animals, the lecture following at 8.15, P.M. The lecture to the blind on November 19, attracted over three hundred blind persons and their attendants and acknowledgment is due to the excellent work of the boy scouts in this connection, who for some time past have convoyed to and from the lectures such of the blind as were in need of an attendant. One of the interesting papers read at the recent meeting of the National Academy of Sciences at the Museum was by Professor Herbert S. Jennings on ‘“‘Can we Observe Organic Evolution in Progress?” In most breeding experiments the original stock is usually not a “pure line,’ but a mixture containing various strains due to the fact that each individual is the offspring of two parents, each with more or less differ- ent hereditary tendencies. Breeding experi- ments on such ‘‘biparental’’ organisms 432 having failed to yield a rigid theoretical proof of evolution by selection, many similar experiments had been made with the same object on certain organisms which have only one parent; but in most cases these “uni- parental”’ strains are just as resistant to the process of selection with reference to given characters as are biparental races. Professor Jennings had succeeded however, in getting positive results from selective processes in the case of certain kinds of Difflugia, uni- parental amoeba-like animals. Starting with a single individual, he had by selecting for large size, been able in the course of many generations to increase materially the size of the individuals; and similarly by segre- gating in each generation the individuals having the largest number of spines, he had succeeded in materially increasmg the num- ber of spines. Even after selection ceased the progeny of the modified races retained the effects of the selective process. A LARGE and representative collection of invertebrate fossils from Porto Rico was secured by Messrs. Chester A. Reeds and Prentice B. Hill in the work carried on by them the past summer in connection with the Porto Rico survey. In addition Dr. Reeds brought back a fairly well-preserved jaw and several parts of ribs representative of fossil mammals of the Tertiary formations. Ter- tiary mammals are almost unknown in the West Indies. The only described specimen is the skull of a very interesting primitive Sirenian, related to the manatee and dugong found in Jamaica and named Prorastomus by Professor Owen many years ago. Dr. Reed’s specimens are probably Sirenian — the jaw certainly is —but differ from Pro- rastomus. It may help to clear up some of the puzzling problems in the evolution of the original group, an offshoot, as now appears, of the same primitive stock that gave rise to the elephants and mastodons. It is of inter- est also to note that certain bones from the Porto Rico Tertiary in the collection of Signor Narcisso Rabell Cabrero, San Sebas- tian, appear also to be Sirenian. No land mammals have been found in any Tertiary formation in the West Indies; this however is to be expected since these formations are all marine or littoral, and the discovery of land animals in them would not be expected unless as a rare accident. THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL Tue large collection of prehistoric pot- tery collected by Mr. Algot Lange on the island of Marajo has been acquired by the American Museum. Marajo Island in the mouth of the Amazon River is 165 miles long by 120 wide, or considerably larger than the island of Jamaica, and belongs to Brazil. A collection of some two thousand pieces comes from Pacoval Island in Lake Arary, the source of the Arary River. Mr. Lange described the little island of Pacoval as a veritable archzological mine. Fragments of pottery coyer the ground and everywhere the earth is mixed with pottery ranging in size from minute pieces to vessels weighing as much as twenty-five pounds. Nothing is known of the makers of this ware. Who they were or where they came from is at present a mystery, but it is hoped that a study of the unique and beautiful decora- tions on the pottery will afford some infor- mation on the point. Dr. Ciark WissLeR and Dr. Robert H. Lowie, of the American Museum of Natural History, have been appointed delegates from the New York Academy of Sciences to the Nineteenth International Congress of Ameri- canists which meets in Washington at the end of December. Dr. Henry E. Crampton, curator of invertebrate zodlogy at the American Mu- seum, delivered the oration before the Phi Beta Kappa Association of Pennsylvania on December 4. Dr. Crampton took for his subject ‘Science, Culture and Human Duty.” Tue annual meeting and dinner of the New York Academy of Sciences will be held December 20. The retiring president, Dr. George F. Kunz, will deliver the address of the occasion. Mr. M. P. SKINNER, a member of the American Museum, has presented to the institution some valuable motion-picture films and photographs of animals of the Yellowstone Park, obtained during his twenty years experience in that region. The American Museum of Natural History Seventy-seventh Street and Central Park West, New York City Open free to the public on every day in the year. The American Museum of Natural History was established in 1869 to promote the Natural Sciences and to diffuse a general knowledge of them among the people. It is dependent upon private subscriptions and the fees from members for procuring needed additions to the collections and for carrying on explorations in America and other parts of the world. The membership fees are, ATMEL IVECIMDEGLS — eae erercrala econ $ 10 Sustaining Members (annually).. . 25 ITE IVICTHIDETS ance tee eies Menai ters st 100 GHOWS sac ee ees ee me es 500 IP ADEONST et eee Ae see ot ee ee $1,000 Associate Benefactors.............. 10,000 Associate Founders................ 25,000 BONGtAChONsitss ts tee eee 50,000 Guides for Study of Exhibits are provided on request to members and teachers by the department of public education. Teachers wishing to bring classes should write or telephone the department for an appointment, specifying the collection to be studied. Lectures to classes may also be arranged for. of children. In all cases the best results are obtained with small groups The Museum Library contains more than 60,000 volumes with a good working collection of publications issued by scientific institutions and societies in this country and abroad. The library is open to the public for reference daily — Sundays and holidays excepted — from 9 a.M. to 5 P.M. The Technical Publications of the Museum comprise the Memoirs, Bulletin and Anthropological Papers, the Memoirs and Bulletin edited by J. A. Allen, the Anthropological Papers by Clark Wissler. the institution. These publications cover the field and laboratory researches of The Popular Publications of the Museum comprise the JourNaL, edited by Mary Cynthia Dickerson, the Handbooks, Leaflets and General Guide. The following list gives some of the popular publications; complete lists, of both technical and popular publications, may be obtained from the Librarian. POPULAR PUBLICATIONS HANDBOOKS Nortu AMERICAN INDIANS OF THE PLains. By Clark Wissler, Ph.D. Paper, 25 cents; cloth, 50 cents. INDIANS OF THE SouTHWEST. By Pliny Earle Goddard, Ph.D. Paper, 25 cents; cloth, 50 cents. ANIMALS OF THE Past. By Frederic A. Lucas, Sc.D. Paper, 35 cents. ILLUSTRATED GUIDE LEAFLETS GENERAL GUIDE TO THE CoLLEctiIons. New edition issued December, 1914. P ice, 25 cents. THE COLLECTION OF Minerats. By Louis P. Grata- cap, A.M. Price, 5 cents. Norru AMERICAN RUMINANTS. Price, 10 cents. Tue Ancrent Basket Makers oF SouTHEASTERN Uran. By George H. Pepper. Price, 10 cents. Primitive Art. Price, 15 cents. Tue Brrps oF THE Vicinity oF NEw York City. By Frank M. Chapman, Se.D. Price, 15 cents. PeruviAN Mummies. By Charles W. Mead. Price, 10 cents. Tue METEORITES IN THE FOYER OF THE AMERICAN Museum or Naturat History. By Edmund Otis Hovey, Ph.D. Price, 10 cents. Tue Hasirat Groups or NortaH AMERICAN Birps. By Frank M. Chapman, Sc.D. Price, 15 cents. By J. A. Allen, Ph.D. Tue Indians or MANHATTAN ISLAND AND VICINITY. By Alanson Skinner. THe Stokes ParinTINGS REPRESENTING GREENLAND Esko. Price, 5 cents. Brier History or ANTARCTIC EXPLORATIONS. 10 cents. TREES AND Forestry. By Mary Cynthia Dickerson, B.S. A new edition in course of preparation. Tue PrRoTEcTION oF River AND HARBOR WATERS FROM Mounicrpat Wastes. By Charles-Edward Amory Winslow, M.S. Price, 10 cents. PLant Forms 1n Wax. By E. C. B. Fassett. 10 cents. Tue EyoLuTion oF THE Horse. Ph.D. Price, 20 cents. Mammortus AND Masropons. By W.D. Matthew, Ph.D. Price, 10 cents. Price, Price, By W.D Matthew, REPRINTS ' THe Grounp Stora Group. By W. D. Matthew, Ph.D. Price, 5 cents. MetnHops anp REsuLts IN HERPETOLOGY. Cynthia Dickerson, B.S. P ice, 5 cents. Tue Warr Pitre Group. By Roy W. Miner, A.B. Price, 5 cents. THe Sea Worm Group! Price, 10 cents. THe ANCESTRY OF THE EDENTATES. thew, Ph.D. Price, 5 cents. By Mary By Roy W. Miner, A.B. By W. D. Mat- RAIN ae aS y FZ ——_— —. JW aa eZ VION li, el The white-tailed deer of the Adirondacks janet By) WS Ay An fi cn in ry hi 7 . ag ve \ ‘ 1 ni i" hy ii! in : i e bi hy " ‘ a i 4 i i f 1 j a | Cane Fi ; te be es f mee ; i j “a f i i i i j i bi Y] i af i A ‘ y i } Byer, r ” i f i P } i ‘ 4 ! i hg r : i ie i p , % ret Ve ¥ ms) ‘ : A, ‘, s ; f ‘ i VA u I ; : eae, eo ea i by q Ik ith! th r ' vf { ne © i ty - i iv r if y me i} a i ui i 1 BN Rte as Ore vi Mit i - - # % Ma hes Eto 8 Nvfas-e 4-H 4 Dl 100019 Y Ge rs